Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Chapter No.
03
i
Motion in Plane
Hints
1 2
21. s = ut + at
Classical Thinking 2
ns
1 2
9. The straight line normal to time axis will s= at ( u = 0)
indicate multiple positions of a particle at one 2
2s 2 800
time, which is not possible. a= 2 = = 6.25 m/s2
16
2
t
io
10. Up to time t0, slope of the graph is constant and
after t0 slope is zero i.e., the particle travel with 22. v2 = u2 + 2as
constant speed up to time t0 and then stops. v2 u 2 (400) 2 (1000) 2
a= =
at
13. On reaching the greatest height the body has 2s 2 0.05
zero velocity and non-zero acceleration. a = 8.4 106 m/s2
(Refer Mindbender 3)
72 5
15. t1 =
x/2
v1
, t2 =
x/2
v2
lic 23. u = 72 km/hr =
v = u + at
18
= 20 m/s
x x 2 v1v 2 0 = 20 + a 10
Average speed = = = a = 2 m/s2
t1 + t 2 x/2 x/2 v1 + v2
ub
+ (negative sign indicates deceleration)
v1 v 2
1 2
s = ut + at
v v 30 60 2
16. Average speed = 1 2 = = 45 km/hr
2 2 1
= 20 10 + (2) (10)2
P
2
s 80 100
17. v= = = 44.44 m s1 = 200 100
s/2 s / 2 180
+ s = 100 m
40 50
et
2
240s
= = 48 km h1 = 66 m
5s
26. Line BC indicates deceleration. At C, velocity is
x = a + bt2
Ta
ns
= 100 s dt
dx
34. Relative velocity of 1st car w.r.t 2nd car vx =
dt
=6
v12 = v1 v2 = 58 40 = 18 km/hr
At t = 0, v = v 2x +v 2y = 36 64 = 10 m/s
io
36. An aeroplane in flight is propelled by
combustion of fuel and does not move under the 30 sin 2 30 = 11.48 m
2
u 2 sin 2
effect of gravity alone. 63. H = =
2g 2 9.8
at
2usin 2 196 sin 30 u 2 sin 2 30 sin 2 30
2
46. T= = = 20 s R = = = 79.53 m
g 9.8 g 9.8
u sin 49 sin 30
47. tA =
g
=
9.8
lic 64. When particle is projected vertically upward
= 90
tA = 2.5 s u 2 sin 2 u 2
H= =
1 g 2g
tan =
ub
48. tan
2 u 2 sin 2
R= =0
(Refer Shortcut 6) g
52. R = = 60
g 9.8
R = 980 m 72. n = 3.5 r.p.s.
Decrease in range = 980 900 = 80 m = 2n = 2 3.5 = 7
Ta
= 7 3.14 22 rad/s
53. Out of given options, only option (D) is
dimensionally correct. 73. For earth, T = 24 hr = 24 3600 = 86400 s
2 2 2
u2 = rad/hr = rad/s
54. Rmax = T 24 86400
g
u2 = Rmax g = 10 103 9.8 74. Using, = 2n
u = 98,000 m/s 125 = 2n
125
n =
u 2 sin 2 u 2 sin 2 2
57. H = = 6H
2g ' 2g n 20 Hz
6
75. For a seconds hand of a watch, T = 60 s
58. Rmax = 100 m = 4 Hmax 2 2
= rad/s
Hmax = 25 m T 60 30
22
ns
= (2 600)/60 rad/s 88. r = 10 cm = 0.1 m, a = 1000 10 m/s2
= 20 rad/s a = 2r
79. For an hour hand, T = 12 hr = 12 3600 s a
2 =
2 2
io
r
= = = rad/s
T 12 3600 21600 a 1000 10
= = 316 rad/s
80. T1 = T2 1 = 2 r 10 102
at
v v n = 316/2 = 50.3 r.p.s. 50 r.p.s.
= = constant
r r n = 3000 r.p.m.
v1 v 2 v r R
= 1= 1= mv2
r1 r2 v 2 r2 r
lic 89. Using, Fs =
r
210 Fr 10 10
5
81. n1 = 0, n2 = 210 r.p.m. = r.p.s. v2 = s = = 104
60 m 102
210
ub
d = 2(n2 n1) = 2 0 = 7 rad/s v = 100 m/s
60
mv2
d 2 210 90. F=
= = 4.4 rad/s2 r
dt 60 5
1
If m and v are constants, then F
P
82. C = 2r r
C r
r
F1
= 2
2 F2 r1
et
C
v = r(2n) = 2 f = fC
2 mv2
91. Using, F =
….[ = 2n] r
mv2 10 5
rg
2
Using, v = r = 0.2 10 m/s = 2 m/s 250
83. r= =2m
F 125 125
84. Using, v = r
= r (2n) = 0.4 2 5 Using, v2 =
Tr
Ta
92.
= 0.4 2 3.14 5 = 12.56 12.6 m/s m
85. Angular velocity of particle P mv2
Breaking tension T =
about point A, r
v v (r = length of the string)
A 50 1
rAB 2r v2 =
Angular velocity of particle P about point C, 1
v v v = 5 2 m/s
C
rBC r
93. Using, F = mr2 = m 42n2r
A v r m 42n2r = 6 1014
=
C 2r v 6 1014
A 1 n2 =
= 4 1.6 1027 3.142 0.12
C 2 n 5 106 cycles/s
3
ns
1. x
A B C O D E
distance travelled in (n 2) seconds,
+x
76 5432 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(m) 9 8 1
(m) Sn 2 = a(n 2)2
2
i. The displacement of the man from A to E Distance travelled in last two seconds,
is x = x2 x1 = 7 m (8m) = + 15 m
io
1 2 1
directed in the positive x-direction. = Sn Sn 2 = an a(n 2)
2
2 2
ii. The displacement of the man from E to C
a 2
is x = 3m – (7m) = 10m directed in = [n (n 2)2]
at
2
the negative x-direction.
a
iii. The displacement of the man from B to D = [n + (n 2)][n (n 2)]
is x = 3m (7m) = +10m directed in 2
2v(n 1)
2.
the positive x-axis.
Equation of motion can be applied if the
lic v
= a (2n 2) = (2n 2) =
n n
Average speed = 2
Total time interval
s1 = 100 m
2
= = 20 m/s For 2nd part,
0.1 s2 = ut
et
t s3 = 50 m
By using the data from the table s = s1 + s2 + s3 = 100 + 600 + 50
0 (2) 60
v1 = = 2m/s, v2 = = 6 m/s s = 750 m
1 1
16 6 10. Let initial velocity of particle = u
v3 = = 10 m/s For first 5 seconds of motion, s5 = 10 metre
1
1 2
So, motion is non-uniform but accelerated. s = ut + at
2
dv 1
7. Acceleration of the particle, a =
dt 10 = 5u + a(5)2
2
Now, v = 108x 9x
2 2
2u + 5a = 4 .…(i)
Differentiating w.r.t t, For first 8 seconds of motion, s8 = 20 metre
dv dx dx 1
2v = 108 9 2x 20 = 8u + a(8)2
dt dt dt 2
44
ns
v= t m/s
1 2 (a b)
at = vt
2
2v
17. At a particular instant, the particle will not have
t= different positions.
io
a
19. Graph (D) indicates 2 values of velocity for a
dx
12. v= = v0 + gt + ft2 given instant. This is not possible.
dt
at
dx = (v0 + gt + ft2) dt 21. The velocity of body is given by the slope of
x 1 displacement – time graph. So it is clear that
dx = (v0 gt ft 2 )dt initially slope of the graph is positive and after
0 0 some time it becomes zero (corresponding to the
x = v0 +
g f
lic peak of graph) and then it will become negative.
2 3
1 2 1
22. x1 = at and x2 = ut x2 – x2 = at2 – ut
13. According to given relation, 2 2
acceleration, a = t +
ub
1 2
dv dv y = at – ut. This equation is of parabola.
As a = t 2
dt dt dy d2 y
Since particle starts from rest, its initial velocity = at – u and 2 = a
dt dt
is zero i.e., At time t = 0, velocity = 0.
P
2
v t dy
As 2 > 0, graph shown possesses minima at
dv (t )dt dt
0 0
u
t 2
t= .
et
v t a
2
23. The height is given by area under the v t
1 graph.
14. 3s = 9t + 5t s = (9t + 5t2)
2
rg
3 1
Height = Area of trapezium = 3.6 (12 + 8)
ds 1 2
Velocity = = (9 + 10t)
dt 3 = 36.0 m
Ta
d ds d s 10
2
Acceleration = = = m/s2 24. Speed of stone in a vertically upward direction
dt dt dt 2 3 is 20 m/s. So for vertically downward motion let
u = 20 m/s
dt 1
15. 2x v v2 = u2 + 2gh =(20)2 + 2 10 200 = 3600
dx 2x
v = 60 m/s
dv dv dx
a .
dt dx dt 25. Let the two balls meet after t at distance x from
dv v 2 the platform.
av 2 v v2 2v3 1 2
dx (2x ) 2 Using h = ut + gt
2
Retardation = 2v 3
For the first ball
16. Total time of motion = t u = 0, t = 18 s, g = 10 m/s2
Duration of acceleration = t 1
x= 10 (18)2 ....(i)
Duration of deceleration = t – t 2
5
1 dr d
x = v 12 + 10 (12)2 ....(ii) v 3t ˆi 2t 2 ˆj 5kˆ 3iˆ 4t ˆj
2 dt dt
From equations (i) and (ii),
1 1 1 2
10 (18)2 = 12v + 10 (12)2 35. s = ut + at
2 2 2
1 1
12v = 10 [(18) (12)2] = 10 180
2 ˆ + 1 (2)2 (3iˆ 5j)
= 2 (2iˆ 4j) ˆ
2 2 2
1 10 30 6 = 10iˆ 2jˆ
v = = 75 m/s
2 12
| s | = 102 22 = 104 = 10.2 m
26. The initial velocity of stone = 29 m s1
ns
1
Using h = ut gt2 36. The relative velocity of boat w.r.t. water
2 = vboat vwater
1
h = 29 10 9.8 10 10 = (3 î + 4 ĵ ) – (– 3 î – 4 ĵ )
2
io
= 200 m (Neglecting negative sign) = 6 î + 8 ĵ
28 Assertion is based on visual experience. Reason is
formula of relative velocity. But it does not
at
explain assertion. The correct explanation of 37. Car N
assertion is due to visual perception of motion (due v ct
angular velocity). The object appears to be faster
lic vc W E
when its angular velocity is greater w.r.t. observer.
29. If v1 is the speed of swimmer in still water and Train S
vt
v2 is the speed of flow of river then relative
velocity of swimmer in the direction of flow is
ub
v1 + v2 = 16 km/h ....(i)
Relative speed in opposite direction v ct = vc + ( vt )
v1 v2 = 8 km/h ....(ii) Velocity of car w.r.t. train (vct) is towards
On solving (i) and (ii) West-North.
P
v1 = 12 km/h, v2 = 4 km/h
38. Now,
30. Effective speed of the bullet
15 min = 0.25 hr
= speed of bullet + speed of police jeep
= 180 m/s + 45 km/h Let the velocity of the river be x km/h.
et
2
Velocity of train B, vB = 30 m/s
The trains are moving in opposite direction, [Refer short cut 7]
1
Relative speed of A w.r.t. B = vB + vA = 50 m/s =25
Total path length to be covered by 2
B = 130 + 120 = 250 m = 5 2 m/s
250
Time taken by train B = =5s Acceleration =
5 2
=
1
50 10 2
32. Relative velocity of bird w.r.t to train is v BT Acceleration acts in N E direction
= vB vT = (5 m/s) – (20 m/s) = 25 m/s
Length of the train, L = 150 m N
Time taken by the bird to cross the train is
L 150
t= = =6s
vBT 25
66
ns
Direction is south-west as shown in figure. dt
41. From the addition of two vectors, we know that y = 48 t – 4.9 t2 vy = 48 – 9.8 t
C2 = A2 + B2 + 2AB cos at t = 0 vx = 36 and vy = 48 m/s
From this expression it is clear that, So, angle of projection
io
C2 A2 + B2 when 90 v 4
tan 1 y tan 1
i.e., when 90, the man can cross the river vx 3
with shortest time.
sin 1 (4/5)
at
North
B C
2u 2 96
49. Time of flight = = =6s
g 32
vB vR
lic 50. tA =
u sin
g
W E 1
O A 1000
ub
vA 2 = 500
=
From diagram it is clear that man should swim 9.8 9.8
in north-west direction. tA = 51.02 51s
42. For shortest possible 51. For same range, angle of projection should be
P
g2
= 30°
2 (u 2 sin 2) 2R
So angle with downstream = 90 + 30 = 120 t1t2 =
g g g
45. At the highest point of the path, potential energy
Ta
v2 sin 2 u 2 sin 2
54. R= 66. H=
g 2g
1 gR Differentiating partially,
= sin1 2
2 v u 2 (2sin .cos )
H =
2g
u 2 sin 2
55. R= H 2cos
g = = 0.1 (given)
H sin
10 10 sin 60 3 T cos
R= = 10 = 8.66 m Similarly, = = 0.05
10 2 T sin
u 2 sin 2 Therefore, T increases by 5%.
56. R = R u2. So if the speed of
g 67. Given, y = ax bx2.
ns
projection is doubled, the range will becomes Comparing this equation with
four times, gx 2
y = (tan)x
4 50 = 200 m 2u 2 cos2
u2 g
a = tan and b =
io
57. Hmax =
2g 2u 2 cos 2
1 u 2 sin 2
Hmax Horizontal range R =
g g
at
1 2u 2 sin cos
On planet B value of g is times to that of A. =
9 g
So value of Hmax will become 9 times 2u 2 cos 2 a
= (tan) =
2 9 = 18 metre
lic g b
2sin
59. =2s u 2 sin 2
g 69. R=
g
u sin = 10
ub
g
u 2 sin 2 100 On moon gm = . Hence Rm = 6R
H= = =5m 6
2g 2 10
u 2 sin 2
60. The pilot will see the ball falling in straight line 70. R=
g
P
x sin 2 =
61. x = 2t t = . Substituting for t in y = 5t2 140
2
2
5x
2 sin 2 = 0.5
gives y = , i.e., y x2 which represents a = 15
rg
4
parabola. Hence the correct choice is (D). u 2 sin 2
71. R=
63. Comparing with equation of projectile g
gx
2
For = 15, R = 1.5 km
Ta
ns
=21
74. v = u 2gy
2 2
T 2
2
1 4 2 cm
u = u 2gy
2
= =
3 60 2 30 s
io
u2 (Note: Refer Shortcut 2)
= u2 2gy
9 88. Using,
1 = 2n = 2 1 = 2 rad/s
u2 1 = 2gy
at
9 a = r2 = 0.4 (2)2 = 0.4 4 2
8 u2 9 2y 9y a = 1.6 2 m/s2
u2 = 2gy = =
9 g 8 4
89. Using,
Hmax =
u2 1 9y 9y
= =
lic a = 2r = 42n2r = 4(3.14)2 12 20 103
4g 4 4 16 a 8 105 m/s2
75. Horizontal range of projectile is same for any T
Using, T = mr2 2 =
ub
90.
two angles, and , when projected with mr
2 6.4
same velocity. = 3 rad/s
0.1 6
For = 35,
P
caused due to change in direction and is directed 92. Using, F = mr2 = m 42n2r
radially towards centre. m 42n2r = 4 1013
80. Work done by centripetal force in uniform 4 1013
n=
rg
27
circular motion is always equal to zero. 1.6 10 4 3.142 0.1
82. The instantaneous velocity of a body in U.C.M. n = 0.08 108 cycles/second
is always perpendicular to the radius or along mv2
93. The centripetal force, F =
Ta
ns
Angular speed of minute hand m = = 106. v = r = 3 4 1 = 18iˆ 13jˆ 2kˆ
Tm 3600
5 6 6
s 2 3600
= = 60 : 1
m 60 2 107. = 2t3 + 0.5
io
d
97. For minute hand, T = 60 min = 60 60 s = (2t3 + 0.5) = 6t2
dt
2 2
Angular speed, = = rad/s At t = 2 s, = 6 22 = 24 rad/s
60 60
at
T
180 108. Radius of horizontal loop, r = 1 km = 1000 m
= = 0.1
1800 900 103
o
v = 900 km/h = = 250 m/s
180 3600
lic
….[ 1 rad =
]
a=
v2 250 250
= 62.5 m/s2
angle described 2 r 1000
98. = = rad/s a 62.5
time taken 2 = = 6.25
ub
g 10
99. v = r.
where r is distance from axis of rotation. 109. Velocity, v = r
At the north-pole, r = 0 v = 0 r v
v = r = = 10 cm/s
2 2
P
n
100. Frequency = r.p.s., t = 1 min = 60 s a = 2r
60 r a
n a = 2r = 2 = = 10 cm/s2
Angular velocity, = 2 2 2
60
et
101. Using, r r
2 2 3.14
v = r = r = 60 = 6.28 mm/s Hence, change in centripetal acceleration
T 60
v2 v 2 2v2
v = 6.28 2 mm/s 8.88 mm/s = =
Ta
r r r
2
102. Speed of C1 = R1 = R1 2
2
T 111. Using, Fcp = m2r = m r
2 T
Speed of C2 = R2 = R2 2
T 22 1
= 500 10–3 2 0.49
Speed of C1 2R1 / T R 7 11
= = 1
Speed of C2 2R 2 / T R2 500 103 16 0.49
= = 0.08 N
15 49
103. r = 0.25 m, n = 15 r.p.m. = r.p.s.
60 112. m = 2 kg, r = 1 m, F = 32 N
2 15 Force, F = m2r
= 2n = rad/s
60 2 32
2 = = 16
v = r = 0.25 = m/s 2 1
2 8 = 4 rad/s
10
ns
= 2
= 200
mr 200 103 1
h L2 r 2
14 rad/s cos = = h
L
L L
115. Since car turns through 90 after travelling mg L
io
T=
471 m on the circular road, the distance 471 m is L2 r 2 r
quarter of the circumference of the circular path. If
R is the radius of the circular path, then 120. Distance s v2
at
1 s1 u2 1
(2R) = 471 = 2
=
4 s2 (2u) 4
471 2 471 2 s2 = 4s1
R= = = 300 m
If s1 = 20 m then s2 = 4 20 = 80 m
v = 12 m/s, m = 1000 kg
3.14
lic 122. Taking the motion from 0 to 2 s
Centripetal force,
u = 0, a = 3 m s2, t = 2 s
1000 (12)
2 2
Fcp =
mv
= = 480 N v = u + at = 0 + 3 2
ub
R 300 v = 6 m/s
116. T = ma = mr2 Taking the motion from 2 s to 4 s
T 2 v = 6 + (3) (2) = 0 m s1
Hence, graph (A) represents the correct option.
2 T 4T
P
=4
2 T T 123. From acceleration time graph, acceleration is
2 = 42 = 2 constant for first part of motion so, for this part
velocity of body increases uniformly with time
n = 2n = 2 5 = 10 r.p.m.
et
ns
velocities, when they reach the earth's surface
Net velocity, are equal.
v = v 2x v 2y = (20)2 (50) 2 54 m/s.
134. At the highest point, angle between a and v is
io
131. Horizontal component of velocity zero. Hence, total acceleration is only normal or
u radial acceleration.
uH = u cos 60 =
2 v2
a=
at
ut u
AC = (uH) t = R
2 but a = g
ut 2 ut (u cos )
AB = AC sec 300 =
2
= g=
2 3 3
lic
2usin 2 × 50 ×1
2
R
u cos 2
vx
2
133. When particle is thrown in vertically downward v
vy
direction with velocity u, then final velocity at
et
h
2
v u 2gh Here x0 = 0, ux = u = 4 m/s, ax = 0, t = 0.4 s
Hence horizontal distance covered by the ball,
v2 = u2 + 2gh x = ut = 4 0.4 = 1.6 m
Ta
ns
r
p 22 p no.
v = r = r 2n = 2 = 4
t t F1 n 24 3 81
F2 n14 2 16
mv2
io
138. F =
r 145. As is constant, acceleration is due to the
F v2. If v becomes double, then F (tendency to change in direction of velocity = 2r
overturn) will become four times. As rA > rB aA > aB
at
139. r1 = 9 cm mv 2
In the given condition, friction provides the 146. p = mv; F
r
required centripetal force and that is constant. i.e.
m2r = constant.
2
lic
F
p
=
mv 2
r mv r
1
=
v
2
1 1
r r2 = r1 1 = 9 = 1 cm
2
2 3
Competitive Thinking
ub
140. Using,
smg mr2 1. Average velocity =
Displacement
sg = r2 (For minimum angular speed) Timeinterval
s g 0.25 9.8 25 A particle moving in a given direction with non-
2 = = 9.8
P
13
ns
distance dt
time =
Speed
10. Given:
t=
l x = At3 + Bt2 + Ct + D
v1 v 2 dx
= 3At2 + 2Bt + C
io
v=
l tt dt
t= = 12
l
l t 2 t1 At t = 0, initial velocity vi = C
t1 t 2 dv
Also, a = = 6tA + 2B
at
dt
7. Displacement x = t(t 1)(t 2) ….(i) At t = 0, initial acceleration ai = 2B
x = t3 2t2 t2 + 2t a i 2B
dx
Velocity v =
dt
lic vi C
v = 3t2 6t + 2
0 t
dv
For v = 0, we have
11.
6.25 v
2.5 dt
0
3t2 6t + 2 = 0 ….(ii)
ub
0
2 v = 2.5 t
Equation (ii) is quadratic in t 6.25
Now;
vi v f
12. v avg
x = t(t – 1) (t 2) ….from (i) 2
substituting equation (iii) in equation (i) u u at1
et
v1 =
1 1 1 2
x = 1 1 1 1 2
2v1 = 2u + at1 ….(i)
3 3 3
Solving we get, Similarly,
rg
x = 6t 3t 2 dt
0
dv
14. = – 2.5 v 2
dt 6t 2 3t 3
1 x =
dv = –2.5dt 2 3 0
v
0 t
x=4
dv
Now, integrating, 2.5 dt Average speed =
total distance travelled
6.25 v 0 total time
0
1
4
ns
2 v 2 = –(2.5)t Average speed = = 2 m/s
2
6.25
1
18. Case A:
2 6.25 2
t= In accelerated motion,
2.5 a = 5 m/s2, u = 0
io
t = 2s 1 2
s1 = ut1 + at1
15. time taken (t) = 8s 2
at
Let t1 be time for acceleration and t2 for declaration 1
s1 = 0 + 5 t12
t1 + t2 = 8 2
t2 = 8 – t1 …..(1) 5t12
For acceleration motion, s1 = ….(1)
2
v0 = u + at
v1 = 0 + at1
lic Case B:
In uniform motion,
v1 = at1 …..(2) a = 5 m/s2, u = 0
For retardation, v = u + at
ub
v = u + at
v = 0 + 5t1
v2 = v1 + at2 ( u = v1) distance covered by the car, s2 = v.t
Substituting equation (1), (2) and a = – 3a, s2 = 5t1 t2 ….(2)
we get, Case (C):
P
4t1 = 24 2
t1 = 6s 5t 2
s3 = 5t1 t3 – 3 …..(3)
16. Let the car accelerate with acceleration for 2
time t1 and decelerate for time (t – t1) with Using v = u + at
rg
1 2 Given, t1 + t2 + t3 = 25 ….(5)
s t Substituting (4) in (5)
2
2t1 + t2 = 25
Given: = 2 m/s2, t = 20 s, s = 100 m
t2 = 25 – 2t1 ….(6)
2
20
2
100 = We have,
2 2
Totaldistance
2 + = 4 Average velocity =
Total time
2
= 5 s s s
3 72 = 1 2 3 ….(vii)
18 t1 t 2 t 3
Substituting this in equation (i),
2 Substituting (i), (ii), (iii) in equation (vii),
2 20 5t12
3 80 5t 32
v= =
8
= 10 m/s 2 5t1t 2 5t1t 3 2
2
2 3 20 =
3 3 25
15
5t12 5t 2 B
500 = 5t1t 2 5t1t 3 3
2 2 Speed (m/s)
From equation (iv), we have, A D
5t 2 5t 2
500 = 1 5t1t 2 5t12 1
2 2
500 = 5t1t2 + 5t12 O t (s)
C
500 = 5t1(25 – 2t1) + 5t 2
1 1
The area of the ABD represents the term ‘ at 2 ’
100 = 25t1 – 2t t 2
1
2
1 2
t12 – 25 t1 + 100 = 0 The total area OABC is best described using
1 2
Solving, we get, s = ut + at
2
ns
t1 = 20 s, t1 = 5 s
t1 ≠ 20 s as it does not satisfy t1 + t2 + t3 = 25 25. Car at rest attains velocity of 6 m/s in t1= 1 s.
and t1 = t3 Now as direction of field is reversed, velocity of
car will reduce to 0 m/s in next 1 s. i.e., at
t1 = 5 s
t2 = 2 s. But, it continues to move for next one
io
time for uniform motion = 25 – 2t1 second. This will give velocity of –6 m/s to
= 25 – 2 5 car at t3 = 3 s.
= 15 s Using this data, plot of velocity versus time will
at
be
19.
Velocity (m/s)
6
B
Velocity
A
lic
3
50 time (s)
1 2
25
ub
Time
a = slope of v t graph = tan –6
a A tan 25
P
speed time
O
3 3 3
= = 3 m/s
3
Ta
ns
v = 50 m/s
At point B, final velocity from A to B = initial t= 2h / g
velocity at B 2a 2b
ta = and tb =
1 1 g g
h2 = ut + gt2 = 50 5 + 10 25
io
2 2
ta a
Now, h2 = 375 m =
tb b
v = u + gt = 50 + 10(5)
at
v = 100 m/s 31. Given
Similarly, At point C, h3 = 625 m t = 10 s
h1 : h2 : h3 = 125 : 375 : 625 = 1 : 3 : 5 a = g = 10 m/s2
h2 h v = u + at
i.e., h1 =
3
= 3
5
lic v = gt ….( u = 0)
1 2 v = 10 10 = 100 m/s
28. AB = s = gt1 ….(i) ( u = 0) i. If an object is moving with a uniform
2
ub
1 acceleration and velocity of the object changes
2s = g(t1 t 2 )2 ….(ii) from u to v in a time t, then average velocity is,
2
u v 100
Substituting equation (i) in equation (ii), vavg = = = 50 m/s
2 2
1 2 1
2 gt1 = g(t1 t 2 )2
P
2 2 Alternate method:
2t1 = t1 + t2 1 2
s = ut + gt
2
t1
2 1 = t2
et
1
s= 10 102 …( u = 0)
t2 2
= 2 1 s = 500 m
t1
dis tan ce
vavg =
rg
t=
3 | v | = 7 2 units
2
ns
Substituting in equation (i), 40. R = 4sin(2t) i + 4 cos 2t j
1 9 90
h1 = 10 =
2 4 8 dR
v= = 8cos2t i – 8sin2t j
45 dt
h1 =
io
4
P v = v2x v2y
2
34. 2gH = nu (n – 2)
n=3 x = (8 cos 2 t) 2 ( 8 sin 2 t) 2
at
2gH = 3u2 (3 – 2) = 8 m/s
2gh Q
2
u =
3
(x 2 x1 )iˆ (y 2 y1 )ˆj (13 2)iˆ (14 3)ˆj
x 41. vav = =
t 2 t1
u=
2gh
3 R
lic 11i 11j 11 ˆ ˆ
ˆ ˆ
50
= = (i j)
5 5
35. Let t1 be the time taken from P to Q and t2 be
the time taken from Q to R.
ub
42. v BA = v 2A v B2 2v A v B cos 60
Motion of ball from P to Q,
1 2
x= gt1 ….(i) = 102 202 2 10 20 cos 60
2
Motion of ball from P to R, = 10 3 m/s
P
1
2x = g t1 t 2
2
….(ii)
2 43.
From (i) and (ii), we have, vA A
et
2t12 t1 t 2
2
W E
2 t1 = t1 + t2 100 2 45
C vB
t1 2 1 = t2
rg
100 100 km
t1 1
t2 2 1 2
B
Ta
36. In both the cases, the coin is in free fall and the S
only force acting on it is gravity.
Velocity of ship A and ship B are:
2h
t1 = t2 =
vA
g vA = 10 km/h
37. A geostationary satellite has same sense of vB = 10 km/h v AB vB
rotation as that of the earth and has same period Velocity of A w.r.t B is
of rotation. Hence when observed from the
surface of the earth, it appears stationary. v AB = vA vB
38. r = cos t x + sin t y v AB (10)2 (10)2 = 200
dr
v= = sin t x + cos t y vAB 10 2 km/h directed along AC
dt
18
ns
gt
West A East v=
2
2v
t=
io
vM sin = vR g
vR 2v 4v2
sin = x = 2vt = 2 v =
vM g g
at
10 1
sin = = gx 2
20 2 50. Comparing with y = x tan –
2u cos 2
2
= 30 with normal (i.e., west)
tan = 1
46. H=
u 2 sin 2
lic = 45
2g g 2
According to given problem 2u cos 5
22
=3+6
g
2h = 2 gh cos 60 t
2u 90
=9 …. h 1
g sin 90 1 t
rg
g 2
9 10
u= h
2 t= 2
g
u = 45 m/s
Ta
Let ‘h’ be the vertical distance of point ‘X’ from 52. Total time of flight = 3 + 6
ground, 2u sin
1 1 1 =3+6
h = ut + at2 = ut gt2 = 45(3) (10)(3)2 g
2 2 2 2u 90
h = 90 m =9 ….
g sin90 1
3 u2 0.866 u 2 9 10
48. RA = = u=
2g g 2
u2 u = 45 m/s
RB = Let ‘h’ be the vertical distance of point ‘X’ from
g
ground,
3 u2 u2 1 2 1 1
RC = = 0.866 h = ut + at = ut gt2 = 45(3) (10)(3)2
2g g 2 2 2
RA = RC < RB h = 90 m
19
ns
H u2
Now
δH 2δu
=
u = u x i+ u y j H u
But 1 2δu δu 1
= = ….(i)
io
ux = u cos …(ii) 10 u u 20
uy = u sin ….(iii) Time of flight is given by
comparing (i) and (ii) we get, 2usinθ
T=
at
u cos = 1 .…(iv) g
comparing (i) and (iii) we get, Tu
u sin = 2 ….(v) δT δu
dividing equation(v) by equation (iv), =
tan = 2 ....(vi)
lic T
δT
u
1
Equation of projectile is given by, = ….from (i)
T 20
gx 2
y = x tan 2 2 % increase in time of flight is;
2u cos θ
ub
δT 1
….(Using equation (iv) and (vi) and 100 = 100
g = 10 m/s2) T 20
(10)x 2 δT
y = (2)x 100 = 5%
2(1) 2 T
P
Given : R = 2H
v 2 sin 2 v 2 sin 2
u1 =2
g 2g
y1 = 5 m 2 sin cos = sin2
rg
30 tan = 2
x
but tan2 + 1 = sec2
x = (u2cos)t
1
Ta
60. hour =
2π ∴ T A = TB
Thour 2 2 2
= t
=
2π
×
180 c
...{ 1 =
180°
} A B
12 × 60 × 60 π π A
1 =1:1
hour = degree / s B
120
69. The centripetal force acting on the particle is
61. Angular speed of second hand,
provided by the central force,
2
1 = (T = 60 seconds) mv 2 1
60 =K n
R R
Angular speed of hour hand,
2 R 1
2 = (T = 12 hr) v =K
2
=K
12 60 60 mR n
mR n 1
ns
1 720
= 12 60 = v = K 1
n 1
.... K K
2 1 2 m
R
2 The time period of rotation is,
Angular speed of minute hand m =
io
62. n 1
60 60 2 R 2 R R 2
2 n 1
2 T= R 2
Angular speed of second hand s = v K K
60 n 1
at
2 2 59 TR 2
s m = = rad / s
60 3600 1800
70.
63. v
ax
a
P(R,)
lic T
l
m
R ay Here, tension provides required centripetal force.
ub
mv 2
=T
l
v2 v2 71.
a = cos ˆi sin ˆj
R R Tcos
P
a1 r
= 21 = 1
a2 r2 r2
mg
2 m
2 2 r O
a = 2R = (5 10 ) = 5 m/s
2
rg
65.
0.2
21
ns
AB2 =
73. F = m2r 2
2 C2 C2
Substituting for r = 2l, = AB = = C
1
1
T 4 2 2 4
io
2
2
at
2
Upon speeding, F1 = m12r1 240 = 10 t
1
(10) t 2
2 2
Substituting for r1 = 3l, 1 = 5t2 10t 240 = 0
2
2
T1
lic t2 2t 48 = 0
k(2l) = m(3l) ….(ii) t = 8 or t = – 6
T1 The first particle strikes the ground at 8th
….( x = 2l here) second. Till 8 s, relative velocity
ub
240
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii), = = 30 m/s
8
kl m(2l )(2 / T) 2 As relative velocity is constant, the relative
=
k(2l ) m(3l )(2 / T1 ) 2 acceleration is zero.
P
2
T1 3 After 8 second the magnitude of relative
= velocity increases upto 12 second when the
T 4
second particle strikes the ground.
3
T1 = T
et
s 1 1
Now = g sin (t)2 s=0+ a (2)2
4 2 2
t = 2 s s = 2a ….(2)
Case 2: After body reverses direction
75. B (Final velocity before direction reverse
= Initial velocity after direction reverse.)
r v=u
1 2
r s = ut2 – at 2
2
A C D
Substituting equation (1) and (2), we get
2
1 2
– 2a = 2a t2 – at 2
Let A be initial position of point of contact and 2
B be its position after the wheel completes half 1 2
– 2 = 2t2 – t
revolution. 2
22
ns
82. Two balls are thrown from a height h.
79. Let the position vector be r1 and r2 Vertical velocities of the balls will be (gt)
1 2 Horizontal velocities given are,
r1 = vt i – gt j
(v1)z = 4 m/s, (v2)z = 3 m/s
io
2
1 2 total velocity can be,
r2 = vt (– i ) – gt j
2 v 1 = 4 î gt ĵ
at
Since, the position vectors should be perpendicular,
v 2 = –3 î gt ĵ
r1 r2 = 0
1 When the velocities v1 and v2 are
– v t + g2t4 = 0
2 2
perpendicular,
2
v = gt
4
1 22
lic
v1 v 2 = 0
4
gt (4 î gt ĵ ) (–3 î gt ĵ ) = 0
v=
12 + g2t2 = 0
ub
2
2v g2t2 = 12
t= 12
g t2 =
Now, 100
2 3
P
2v
x = 2vt = 2 v t=
g 10
As, s = vt where,
4v 2
x = v = relative velocity of balls = 7 m/s
et
g
7 2 3
s= = 2.425 2.45 m
1 1 10
80. s1 = u1t1 + at12 ; s2 = u2t2 + at 22
2 2 83. The horizontal range is same for two angles of
rg
ns
2g
9.8 6.25
v 2 2sin 2 g = = 1.25 m/s2
h2 = ….(iii) 49
2g
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (iii), 89. Time taken to reach highest
io
h1 v 2g 2 u
= 1 2 2 point is t1 =
v 2 sin g
h2 2g u
Speed on reaching ground
v2
at
= 21 2 = u 2 2gH
v 2 sin
As, v = u + at
(2 v 2sinθ) 2 H
=
v 2 2sin 2θ
….from (i) u 2 2gH = u + gt
4 v 2sin 2θ
= 22 2
lic t=
u u 2 2gH nu
v 2 sin θ g g u 2 2gH
g
1 2 1 2
s = ut + at = at ( u = 0)
86 For H = 5 m, maximum angle of projection a ball 2 2
can have without hitting the ceiling is given by Substituting for a
2Hg 2 5 10 1
rg
sin = 2 =
2
= 1 P 2
202 s= t
u 4 2 mt
1
sin = s t3/2
2
Ta
24
1. The ant is moving on the paper to the west. The u2 = 3u1 ….(v)
paper has to be moved in such a way that, in the Also, from (iii)
given frame the ant is moving to the north. First, T= ….(vi)
the motion of the ant to the west (X direction) Substituting (v) and (vi) in (iv),
should be nullified. If the paper is having a L
velocity component in the +X direction which is D = 3u1 . .= 3L
u1
equal to the velocity of the ant in the X
From the cannon, second half will fall at
direction, it will appear stationary to the
L + D = 4L
observer.
2L L L 2LV
ns
v 4. T0 = and T = =
V V v V v V2 v2
T V2 1
v1 = 2 2 =
T0 V v 1 (v 2 / V 2 )
io
If v1 is the velocity of the ant, v1 should be equal 5. Velocity is constant when x-t part is straight
and opposite to vcos. The vsin component line. Constant velocity means no acceleration
will be in the +Y-axis or the north. which implies zero force.
at
The resultant velocity of v1 and v will be
6. On earth,
vresultant = . (v1 vcos )2 (vsin )2 . 1 x2
y = x tan g ….(i)
= v sin ….( v1 = v cos ) 2 u cos 2
2
shell to fall back into the cannon, vertical If we want minimum three (more than two) balls
velocity should not change during the explosion, to remain in air then time of flight of first ball
i.e., both halves initially should have zero must be greater than 6 s.
et
both halves) be T and the distance between the If we want minimum three (more than two) balls
explosion point and the point of landing of the to remain in air then time of flight of first ball
second half be D. must be greater than 6 s.
From the law of conservation of momentum, 2u
Ta
ns
u u cos
220
= = 11s u sin H
20
1 2 X
11. Using s = ut + at O u cos
io
2
Here, u = 0 c
Here, angle of projection, = = 45
1 25 4
x1 = 0 + a 52 = a ….(i)
at
2 2 Let u be the velocity of projection of the particle.
1 Kinetic energy of a particle at a point of
x1 + x2 = 0 + a 102 = 50a 1
2 projection O, K = mu2
2
x2 = 50a x1 = 50a
25
2
a (Using (i))
lic where, m is the mass of particle.
75 Velocity of a particle at the highest point (i.e., at
x2 = a ….(ii) maximum height) is ucos.
2
Kinetic energy of a particle at the highest point is
ub
1 225
x1 + x2 + x3 = 0 + a 152 = a 1
2 2 K = m(u cos )2
2
225
x3 = a x1 x2 1
2 = mu2cos2
2
P
225 25 75
= a a a 1
2 2 2 = mu2 cos2 45
2
….[Using (i) and (ii)] 2
125 1 1 K
et
x3 = a = mu2
2 2 2 2
Hence,
16. Since the initial position coincide with the final
25 75 125
rg
26
ns
18. Let the time taken by two cars to complete the H
of projectile at height . Then,
journey be t1 and t2 and their velocities at the 2
finish be v1 and v2 respectively. vx = u cos
Given that, t1 = t2 t and v1 = v2 + v ….(i) H
and v 2y = u2 sin2 2g = u2 sin2 gH
io
At start, u1 = u2 = 0 2
1 2 u 2 sin 2
v 2y = u sin
s1 = s = a1 t 1 2 2
2
….[Using (i)]
2
at
1 u 2 sin 2
and s2 = s = a 2 t 22 ….(ii) =
2 2
Hence a1t12 = a 2t 22 = 2s H
1/ 2
Net velocity at height = v2x v2y
Also, v1 = a1t1 and v2 = a2t2
lic
v1t1 = a1t12 = 2s and v2t2 = a 2t 22 = 2s ….(iii) As per question;
2
1 1
2s =t sin = 3 cos
v2 v1
tan = 3 = tan 60
v v
2s 1 2 = t = 60
et
v1v2
v 21. Here = = 60
2s =t 3
v1v2
rg
=
v1v 2 u cos
v= t= (a1a 2 ) t 60
t 1t 2 = = 4 s.
30 cos60
19. Total time of motion = t Vertical displacement of particle,
Duration of acceleration = t 1 2
sy = uy t gt
Duration of deceleration = t t 2
Given u = 0, a = constant acceleration and 1 2
= (u sin ) t
gt
b = constant deceleration 2
v = 0 + at ….(i) 3 1
v = at = 30 4 (10) (4) 2
2 2
Also 0 = v b(t t) ….(ii) = 23.92 m
v = bt + bt i.e., particle will hit the rod between O and A,
at = bt + bt but not at its mid point.
27
23. Distance covered, s = 2r
360o
90
660 = 2r
360
r = 420 m
mv 2 840 10 10
F= = = 200 N
r 420
ns
io
at
lic
P ub
et
rg
Ta
28
Textbook
Chapter No.
04 Laws of Motion
Hints
ns
acceleration both are doubled, then force will Change in momentum = 0.3 0.3
become four times. = 0.6 kg m s1
11. p = pi pf = mv ( mv) = 2 mv For ball ‘B’,
initial momentum = 0.05 (6)
io
12. |F| = (6)2 (8)2 (10)2 = 200 = 10 2 = 0.3 kg m s1
Also F = ma Final momentum = (0.05) (6)
F 10 2 = +0.3 kg m s1
at
m= = = 10 2 kg
a 1 Change in momentum = 0.3 (0.3)
= 0.3 + (0.3)
G m1 m 2
28. F= = 0.6 kg m s1
r2
=
6.67 1011 6 1024 4.8 1024
lic 52. As m2 < m1, v2 > v1
2.5 10
10 2
54. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
= 3.1 10 N 18 mu + 2m 0 = m 0 + 2m v2
ub
u
32. W = F s = Fs cos 180° v2 =
2
= Fs = 200 10 = 2000 J
u
0
37. Work done by the net force v 2 v1
e= = 2
= change in kinetic energy of the particle u1 u 2 u0
P
ns
the axis of rotation. Hence, = 90
Net forward force on 20 kg mass = 200 – 120
= rF = 0.2 10 9.8 = 19.6 N m = 80 N
71. 80
20 kg 30 kg Acceleration = = 4 m/s2
A B 20
io
x 6x 3. Force, F = (M kg s1) (v m s1)
= Mv kg m s2 = Mv N
at
20 x = 30(6 x) dp d
4. F= = (a + bt2) = 2bt F t
20x = 180 30x dt dt
50x = 180
5. Given that p = p x ˆi p yˆj = 2cos t ˆi 2sin t ˆj
x = 3.6 m from 20 kg
lic
3 dp
m x F= = 2 sin t î 2 cos t ĵ
i i
0 50 50 5 0 50 dt
75. XC.M = i 1
=
3
50 50 50
m Here, F p = 0 hence angle between F and p is
ub
i
i 1
90°.
250 5
= = cm 7. (A) is correct as 6th coin has
150 3
3 four coins on its top 10
9
m y
P
th 1
250 5 it. Thus 7 coin exerts a
= = cm th
150 3 force 4 mg on 6 coin (downwards)
(C) is correct, as the reaction of 6th coin on
2 0 3 0 5 1 7 1 = 12
the 7th coin is 4 mg (upwards)
rg
76. x= m
235 7 17 (D) is wrong as 10th coin, which is the topmost
y=
2 0 3 1 5 1 7 0 = 8 m coin, experiences a reaction force of mg
235 7 17 (upwards) from all the coins below it.
Ta
bus. A S1
30
ns
= 0.5 + 12 x xx == 40 5M M 5
2 x 0 = v or v = = 2.5 m/s
4 2 2
42 0
= 0.5 + 12[4 0] 23. Let two pieces have equal mass m and third
2 piece has a mass of 3 m.
io
W = 4 + 48 = 52 J Y
15. From work - energy theorem,
K.E. = W 18 m/s m
at
But W = Fs 18 m/s
K.E. = Fs m X
3m 135°
16. From work-energy theorem, kinetic energy of
block at x = 0 to x is;
lic v
x According to law of conservation of linear
K (4 x 2 ).dx momentum, since the initial momentum of the
0
system was zero, therefore final momentum of
ub
x3 the system must be zero. i.e., the resultant of
K = 4x
3 momentum of two pieces must be equal to the
dK momentum of third piece.
For K to be maximum, =0
dx If two particle possess same momentum and
P
1 1
F cos = = = 2.5 N 25. Mass of each piece (m) = 1 kg.
s 0.4 Initial momentum = 0.
dx Final momentum = p1 + p2 + p3.
18. x = (t 3)2 or v = = 2(t – 3) From the principle of conservation of
dt
at t = 0; v1 = 6 m/s and at t = 6 s, v2 = 6 m/s momentum, we have
p1 + p2 + p3 = 0
Work done = change in kinetic energy
p3 = (p1 + p2)
1 2 1 2
= mv 2 mv1 = 0 = (mv1 + mv2) = m(v1 + v2)
2 2
ˆ m s1 = (2iˆ 3j)
= 1 kg (2iˆ 3j) ˆ kg m s1
21. Law of conservation of linear momentum is p3 (2i 3j)
correct when no external force acts. When bullet Force F = =
t 105
is fired from a rifle then both should possess
equal momentum but different kinetic energy. = (2iˆ 3j)
ˆ 105 newton
31
v1 cos1 =
0.1 m2 u1 2 m2 0
m1 m2 X 0.1 m 2
v2 cos2
u1 0.1 m2 u1
=
3 0.1 m 2
m1
v2 =
1 0.1 m 2
v2 sin2
3 0.1 m 2
Y 0.1 + m2 = 0.3 + 3m2
ns
According to law of conservation of momentum, 2m2 = 0.4
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 cos 1 + m2v2 cos 2 m2 = 0.2 kg
In this case, m1 = m2 = m, u2 = 0 and
32. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
1 = 2 = 45
1 5 2 1.5 = 1 v1 + 2v2
io
mu1 = mv1 cos + mv2 cos
m 10 = mv1 cos 45 + mv2 cos 45 v1 + 2v2 = 2 ....(i)
v 2 v1
m e=
10 m = (v1 + v2) u1 u 2
at
2
0.8 (5 + 1.5) = v2 v1
v1 + v2 = 10 2
By conservation of momentum along the v2 v1 = 5.2 ....(ii)
Solving equation (i) and (ii) simultaneously
m 0 + m 0 = mv1 sin 45 – mv2 sin 45
lic
direction perpendicular to the original line.
v1 = 2.8 m/s , v2 = +2.4 m/s
m(v1 v 2 ) 33. During collision of ball with the wall, horizontal
0 =
2 momentum changes (vertical momentum
remains constant)
ub
v1 = v2 2 v1 = 10 2
Change in horizontal momentum
v1 = 5 2 m/s v2 = 5 2 m/s F=
Time of contact
27. This is a case of a perfectly inelastic collision in 2pcos
which linear momentum is conserved but kinetic =
0.1
P
=
m1 m 2 u1 0.1
0= ( u2 = 0) = 10 N
m1 m 2
m1 m2 = 0 34. Impulse = change in momentum = 2 mv
rg
32
39.
= r F
50 10 + 100 40 + 100 60
= (50 + 100 + 100) x
Vector is perpendicular to both r and F . 500 4000 6000
x = = 42 cm
r = 0 and F 0 250
ns
48. The position of centre of mass remains
41. r r 1 r 2 ˆi 2ˆj 3kˆ 3iˆ 2ˆj 3kˆ unaffected because breaking of mass into two
parts is due to internal forces.
= 2iˆ 4ˆj 6kˆ
io
49. Centre of mass lies always on the line that joins
Now r F the two particles.
= 2iˆ 4ˆj 6kˆ 4iˆ 5jˆ 3kˆ For the combination cd and ab this line does not
at
pass through the origin.
ˆi ˆj kˆ
For combination bd, initially it passes through
2 4 6 = ˆi(12 30) ˆj(6 24) k(10
ˆ 16) the origin but later on its moves towards
negative X-axis.
4 5 3
lic But for combination ac it will always pass
= (42iˆ 30ˆj 6k)
ˆ Nm
through origin. So we can say that centre of
mass of this combination will remain at origin.
42. Couple consists of two equal and opposite
ub
forces which causes pure rotational motion.
m r m2 r 2
50. r cm = 1 1
43. RA m1 m 2
RB
1(i 2ˆj k)
ˆ 3( 3iˆ 2ˆj k)
ˆ
0.5 m G =
A B 1 3
P
C 1m
W1 W r cm = 2iˆ ˆj kˆ
50 kg wt 50 kg wt
m1x1 m 2 x 2 m 3 x 3 m 4 x 4
et
300
2RB = 75 x4 = = 7.5
40
RB = 37.5 kg wt
Similarly y4 = 7.5 and z4 = 7.5.
RA = 100 37.5 = 62.5 kg wt
Ta
33
ns
m(1 2 3 ....) n(n 1)
= Momentum of system (man + trolley) in
2
backward direction
l (2n 1)
= 80 1 = (80 + 320) v
3
v = 0.2 m/s
io
m1v1 m 2 v 2 10 14 4 0 So the velocity of man w.r.t. ground
56. vCM = = = 10 m s1
m1 m 2 4 10 1.0 0.2 = 0.8 m/s
Displacement of man w.r.t. ground,
at
m r m1 r 2 y = 0.8 4 = 3.2 m
57. r1 = 1 1
m1 m 2 63. Gravitational field is a conservative field.
35.5 1.27 H Cl Therefore work done in moving a particle from
r =
1 35.5
î
m1
lic m2
x A to B is independent of path chosen.
35.5
r = 1.27 ˆi 64.
36.5 1.27 Å Y
= 1.24 î
ub
m1 v 1 m 2 v 2 2 3 3 2
v m/s v cos
58. v cm = = v sin Hmax
m1 m 2 23
12
P
= = 2.4 m/s
5 X
v cos
59. According to problem
Let the mass of shell be m. At the highest point it
m1 = 6 m, m2 = m3 = m4 = m5 = m
et
has only horizontal component of velocity.
r 1 0 ˆi 0ˆj , r 2 a ˆi a ˆj , r 3 a ˆi a ˆj ; Hence its momentum at that point = mv cos
It breaks into two equal mass. One piece traces
r 4 0 ˆi 0 ˆj , r 5 0 ˆi a ˆj
its path with speed v cos.
rg
x 2 2
m4 By the principle of conservation of momentum,
m5 m m
mv cos = v cos + v
Position vector of centre of mass 2 2
1 m
m r + m 2 r 2 + m3 r 3 + m 4 r 4 m5 r 5 1 mv cos = v
r cm 1 1 2 2
m1 m 2 m3 m 4 m5
v = 3 v cos
0 m(aiˆ aj)
ˆ m(aiˆ aj)
ˆ 0 m(aj)
ˆ
r cm = 65. From the principle of momentum conservation,
10m
mgvg = mbvb (considering magnitudes)
a ˆ
= 0iˆ j 0.05 400
10 vg = = 4 m/s ( mb = 50 g = 0.05 kg)
5
a The gun fires 30 bullets in 1 minute i.e., in
So, the coordinate of centre of mass = 0, .
10 60 s. This means 1 bullet is fired every 2 s.
34
ns
dt Hence, its momentum = 0.2 140
m = 5040 kg = 28 kg m/s ….(iv)
At this time instant thrust on the rocket is, Comparing the values, momentum of a 200 g
dm weight after falling through 1 km has maximum
io
F=u value.
dt
where u is constant relative speed. 71. If man slides down with some acceleration, then
dm its apparent weight decreases. For critical
at
ma = u
dt condition, rope can bear only 2/3 of his weight.
(u dm / dt) If a is the minimum acceleration then,
a=
m Tension in the rope = m (g a) = Breaking strength
=
11103 16
= 34.92 m/s2
lic
2
m (g a) =
3
mg
5040
35 m/s2 a=g
2g g
=
67. To hold the gun stable, rate of change of 3 3
ub
momentum of the gun should not exceed 72. Gas will come out with sufficient speed in
maximum exerted force. forward direction, so reaction of this forward force
p will change the reading of the spring balance.
Hence F =
t
P
y
= 48 kg m/s.
So, number of bullets that can be fired per second,
p 144 1 4 ĵ
= =3
rg
p 48 F
68. As v = 5t ˆi 2t ˆj 1 (3 î + 4 ĵ ) 1 3 î
Ta
35
ns
1m
For translational equilibrium Acceleration of system of blocks is
RA + RB W W1 W2 = 0 F 14
a= = 2 m/s2
RA + RB = W + W1 + W2 mA mB mC 4 2 1
io
= (10 + 4 + 6) kg wt Let contact force between A and B be f then,
RA + RB = 20 kg wt
For rotational equilibrium, considering moments a = 2 m/s2
at
about A, F = 14 N A f
RA 0 W1 AC W AG W2 AD
+ RB AB = 0
14 – f = mA a
4 0.3 10 0.5 6 0.8 + RB 1 = 0
RB = 11 kg wt
lic
14 f = 4 8
f = 14 – 8 = 6 N
RA = 9 kg wt
= 9 9.8 N = 88.2 N 9. anet =
F
m1 + m 2 + m3
ub
Competitive Thinking anet =
24
= 4 m/s2
6
1. Since all three blocks are moving up with a Fnet = m anet
constant speed v, acceleration a is zero.
Fnet = 2 4
P
F=0 Fnet = 8 N
Net force is zero.
10. From the figure, tension
2. Given three forces are acting along the three between masses T3
et
2 m1m3 T1
T2 = g m1 m
m1 m 2 m3 m2
a = 0, 2m
Velocity will remain constant F1
T2 =
2m (3m) g = mg
Ta
T2
3. Initial thrust must be m[g + a] 6m
= 3.5 104 (10 + 10) = 7 105 N 11. First case: 3m m3
4. For a freely falling lift, (a = g) T1
Apparent weight = m(g a)
= m (g – g) a = 4.9 m/s2
=0
5. F = m g = 0.05 9.8 = 0.49 N. As the weight mg
of ball acts downwards, the net force will act T1 – mg = ma
vertically downward. mg g
T1 – mg = …. a 4.9 ms 2
6. F = m(g – a) 2 2
= 60(9.8 – 1.8) 3mg
= 480 N T1 = ....(i)
2
36
a = 4.9 m/s2 T1
T1
a m1
mg
A m2 a
mg – T2 = ma B
mg g m m1
mg – T2 = …. a 4.9 ms 2 a= 2 g
2 2 m1 m2
mg m1 = 2 kg, m2 = 3 kg
T2 = ....(ii)
ns
2
asystem =
m2 m1 g = 3 2 10 = 2 m/s
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), m1 m 2 3 2
T1 3mg 2 3
m1 a 1 + m 2 a 2 2 a 3 a
T2 2 mg 1 acm = =
m1 + m 2 3 2
io
12. Tension in spring before cutting the strip 2 2 3 2
=
4 mg 5
T acm = 0.4 m/s2
at
Velocity of the centre of mass of the system
A B
after 1.5s,
mg
v = at
3 mg T
lic
v = 0.4 1.5
v = 0.6 m/s in downward direction
T = mg 15. If on a wedge of rough surface inclined at angle
, time of descent of a block is t, then the time
ub
After cutting the strip
of descent of the block on the same wedge of
4 mg t
smooth surface becomes , and the coefficient
n
B
A of friction is given as,
P
= tan 1
1
3 mg mg
n2
Here, = 45
et
Acceleration in brick A 1
=1–
4mg 3mg g p2
aA = =
3m 3 N
16.
rg
Acceleration in block B
mg F W F1 = 2N
aB = =g
m
F2 = 20 N F
Ta
F
13. For mass m1, a1 = 6 =
m1 Fmax = mg = 0.5 2 10
F Fmax = 10 N
m1 = ....(i)
6 20 2
acceleration of the system a = = 3 m/s
F 42
For mass m2, a2 = 3 =
m2 Force of friction opposing motion of 2 kg block
F = ma + force acting in direction of friction.
m2 = ....(ii) = (2 3) + 2 N = 8N
3
a=
F 17. We know that, v2 = u2 + 2as ….(i)
m1 m 2 Now, initial velocity at midpoint
From equations (i) and (ii), L
u= 2g sinθ
F 2
a= = 2 m/s2
F/6F/3 and final velocity for the lower half = v = 0
37
L
22. (
F = 3iˆ + ˆj )
and s =
2
s = r2 r1 = éê 2iˆ + 3 ˆj- 2kˆ ùú
L/2
ë û
We know,
L/2
W = F s = (3iˆ + ˆj) éê 2iˆ + 3jˆ - 2kˆ ùú = 6 + 3 + 0
ë û
From equation (i), W=9J
2 L L
0 2g sin = 2[g sin g cos ]
2 2 23. The net force acting on particle,
L
2g sin = gL sin gL cos F F1 F2 = 5iˆ 3jˆ kˆ
ns
2
2gL sin = gL cos Displacement,
= 2 tan
s r2 r1 = 20iˆ 15jˆ 7kˆ cm
Alternate Method
io
According to work energy theorem, W = F s = (–100 + 45 + 7) 10–2 = –0.48 J
W = K = 0
Initial and final speeds are zero 24. Work done = Area under F-x graph
at
work done by friction + work done by gravity = 0 1
L W= × (3 + 2) × (3 – 2) + 2 × 2
–mg cos + mg sin L = 0 2
2
cos = sin
lic W = 2.5 + 4
2 W = 6.5 J
2 sin From work energy theorem,
= = 2 tan
cos
ub
W = Δ K.E.
18. F = ma = 0 N Δ K. E. = 6.5 J
μmg
ma =
2 25. From work-energy theorem
P
2
Gm1m 2 F Gm
F= a1 = = 22 v2 = 520
r2 m1 r
a1 m2 v= 520 = 22.8 23 m/s
Ta
Similarly, from x = 0 to x = 12 m
20. Given: F 4iˆ 3jˆ
1
mv2 = 100 + 30 47.5 + 20
s r2 r1 = 4jˆ 3kˆ 2iˆ 5jˆ = 2iˆ ˆj 3kˆ 2
38
ns
2
3 t2 3
= = (2) (0) = 3 J
2 2
From work energy theorem,
2 2 0 4
1 2
mv = W = 120
2
io
32. dW = F dx
1
2.4 v2 = 120
2 x y
=K ˆi ˆj dx ˆi dy ˆj
x 2 y2 x 2 y2
3/ 2 3/ 2
v2 = 100
at
v = 10 m/s
xdx ydy
= K ….(i)
28. F = 6t = ma x 2 y 2 3/ 2
m = 1 kg
lic
Let x2 + y2 = r2
a = 6t
2xdx + 2ydy = 2rdr
dv
= 6t
ub
xdx + ydy = rdr
dt
Substituting in equation (i),
Integrating we get,
rdr K
v 1
dw = K 3 = 2 dr
dv 6t dt r r
P
0 0
r2 r
K
2
K
v = 3t
2 1
0
= 3 m/s Integrating, W = r r 2 dr r r
1 1
r1 = x12 y12 = a, r2 = x 22 y 22 = a
1 1
W = m (v2 – u2) = (1) (9 – 0) = 4.5 J W=0
2 2
rg
K
33. Work done by gravitation force is given by (Wg)
29. F= Wg = mgh = 103 10 103 = 10 J
v
W = Fs cos According to work energy theorem
Ta
K Wg + Wres = KE
W= s ( = 0)
v 1
10 + Wres = 103 50 50
s 2
v=
t 5
10 + Wres =
t 4
W=K s
s Wres = 8.75 J
W = Kt 34. From law of conservation of momentum,
30. Displacement is in x direction and force is in p1 p 2 p 3 0
y –direction,
Force is perpendicular to displacement, hence Let p 1 and p 2 go off at right angles to each
work done will be zero. other.
39
ns
P C 3Piˆ 2Pjˆ (0.01) 400 + 0 = 0.01 v1 + 2 2 9.8 0.1
|PC| = 9P 4P 13 P
2 2
4 = 0.01v1 + 2 1.96
4 2 1.4
36. As the bullet explodes at highest point of v1 = = 120 m/s
io
0.01
trajectory, it only has horizontal velocity.
1 p2 36
vH = vcos 60° = 30 =15 m/s 40. K.E. = = = 4.5 J
2 2m 2 4
at
According to law of conservation of
momentum, momentum before and after 1
41. (K.E.)1 = m1v12
explosion must be same. 2
(m1 + m2 ) vH = m1v1 + m2v2
But, m1 = m and m2 = 3m (given)
lic =
1 m12 v12
2 m1
4m 15 = m 0 + 3m v2
1 p12
15 4 =
v2 = = 20 m/s 2 m1
ub
3
1 p 22
37. By law of conservation of momentum, (K.E.)2 =
2 m2
| p1 p 2 | | p 3 | (K.E.)1 = (K.E.)2 ….(given)
P
p p 2p1p 2 cos = | p 3 |
2 2 p12 p2
1 2 2
2m1 2m 2
as p1 = p2 = p and p1 p2, θ = 90°.
p1 m1
2p2 = | p 3 |
et
p2 m2
p1
2 p = | p3 |
p1 p 2 42. From principle of conservation of momentum,
as v1 = v2 = v = 30 m/s
Final momentum = Initial momentum
rg
30 2 m = m3v3
m2v2
also, m + m + 3m = M p2 m1v1 m2v2 = 0 v1 =
m1
M
m= 1
5 2
K.E.1 E1 2 m1v1 m1v12
Ta
3M
m3 = 3m =
5
p3 K.E.2 E 2 1 m 2 v 22 m2 v22
2
M 3M
30 2 = v3 Substituting for v1
5 5
m 22 v 22
v3 = 10 2 m/s m1
E1 m12 m
= 2
38. By conservation of linear momentum, E2 m 2 v 22 m1
initial momentum final momentum of
= 43. From conservation of linear momentum,
of bullet system
MV = m1v1 + m2v2
mvb = (M + m) vsys
As bomb is at rest initially, its initial momentum
here, m = mass of bullet = 0.016 kg
will be zero.
M = mass of block = 4 kg
m1v1 + m2v2 = 0
vsys = velocity of system = 2gh
20 + 8v2 = 0
40
v2 =
20 5 By principle of linear momentum,
= m/s
8 2 Pinitial = Pfinal
Kinetic energy of the 8 kg piece is,
m
m v i v1
5m
v2
1 1 25 6 6
K.E. = m 2 v 22 = 8 = 25 J
2 2 4
v 5
vi 1 v 2
44. Let the point B represents the position of bat. 6 6
The ball strikes the bat with velocity v along the
path AB and gets deflected with same velocity 20iˆ 25jˆ 12kˆ
100iˆ 35jˆ 8kˆ v
5
v2
i
along BC, such that ABC = 6 6
A 120iˆ 150ˆj 72kˆ 100iˆ 35ˆj 8kˆ 5 v 2
20iˆ 115ˆj 80kˆ 5 v 2
ns
B
N
20iˆ 115jˆ 80kˆ
v2
5
C v 2 4iˆ 23jˆ 16kˆ
io
Initial momentum of the ball = mv cos 49. When two bodies with same mass collide
2 elastically, their velocities get interchanged.
(along NB)
at
50. For collision, the relative velocity of one
Final momentum of the ball = mv cos particle should be directed towards the relative
2 position of other particle.
(along BN)
18
m= = 1 kg r1 r2 v 2 v1
20 2
I = pf pi 1 1
(K.E.)1 = m1u12 m 2 u 22
Resultant of two vectors having same magnitude 2 2
and separated by angle , After collision:
rg
1 1
R = 2A cos (K.E.)2 = m1v12 m 2 v 22
2 2 2
here, = 60 + 60 = 120 Total energy being conserved in collision,
1 1 1 1
Ta
I = 2p cos
120 m1u12 m 2 u 22 m1v12 m 2 v 22
= 2mV cos (60) = mV
2 2 2 2 2
47. Let ‘m’ be the mass of the object 52. Coefficient of restitution is a ratio of same
After breaking, physical quantity viz., velocity. Hence, it has no
Ratio of masses = 1:5 dimensions.
m1 = k, m2 = 5k ….(i) 53. Coefficient of restitution:
m1 + m2 = m v 2 v1
e=
6k = m u1 u 2
m Given: u1 = v, u2 = 0
k= ….(ii)
6 v 2 v1 v v
Substituting (ii) in (i) e= = 2 1 .…(i)
v v v
m 5m By law of conservation of momentum,
m1 = and m2 =
6 6 mu1 + mu2 = mv1 + mv2
41
ns
v Applying the law of conservation of linear
2v 2 momentum,
=e+1 m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
v
v2 e 1 m 2 + 2m 0 = m v1 + 2m v2
=
io
v 2 2m = mv1 + 2mv2
2 = (v1 + 2v2) …(i)
54. Given: m1 = m, m2 = 4m, u1 = v, u2 = 0, v1 = 0 By definition of coefficient of restitution,
According to law of conservation of v 2 v1
at
momentum, e=
u1 u 2
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
e(u1 u2) = v2 v1
mv + 4m 0 = m 0 + 4mv2
0.5(2 0) = v2 v1 …(ii)
v2 =
v
4
lic 1 = v2 v1
Solving equations (i) and (ii),
v
0 v1 = 0 m/s, v2 = 1 m/s
v 2 v1 1
e= = 4 = = 0.25
u1 u 2 v0 58. Total mechanical energy of ball,
ub
4
1
55. T= mv2 + mgh
2
h Total energy after the collision,
e2h e4h 2 1 2
P
mv mgh
3 2
Total distance = h + 2e2h + 2e4h …. The ball rebounds back to the same height after
= h + 2e2h (1 + e2 +….) collision,
et
v gh gh ,
1
2 3 2
Total distance = h + 2e h 2
1 e 1 2 2
v gh gh ,
2e 2 h 3 3
Ta
= h+
1 e2 v2 2gh
gh
h e 2 h 2e 2 h 3 3
=
1 e2 v 2 gh
3 3
h(1 e2 )
= v= gh = 40 10 = 20 m/s
(1 e2 )
59. Velocity v after rebound can be given as,
h1
56. As e = v = 2gh = 2 10 20 = 20 m/s
h0
kinetic energy just after collision is,
h1 = e2h0
1 1 400m
For n number of bouncing, hn = e2nh K= mv2 = m (20)2 = = 200m
2 2 2
2h 2he 2 2he 4 As the ball loses 50% of energy in collision,
t = 2 2 ......
g g g its initial energy would be 400m
42
ns
mv 0 m m(v 2 ) 2
2 2 3 2 2 2 mv 2 2
= v v = v
v2 8v 3m 3
v2 = v 22 = v 22
9 9 Loss in K.E. = total initial K.E. total final K.E.
io
2
2 2 1 1 1 2v 2
v2 = v = m(2v) 2 (2m)v 2 (3m)
3 2
2 2 3
61. According to law of conservation of momentum, 3 8 5
at
mv0 = mv1 + mv2 = 2mv2 + mv2 m v 2 = mv 2
2 9 3
v0 = v1 + v2 ....(i)
1 2 5 2
mv
Initial KE, (K.E.)i = mv 0 3
1
2
1
lic Percentage loss in K.E. =
2mv 2 mv 2
100
3 5 1
2
v + v = v 02
1
2
2 ....(ii) e=
2 15 3
On squaring equation (i) and subtracting v 2 v1 1
equation (ii) from it, we get,
et
15 0 3
3
v v 22 2v1 v 2 v12 v 22 v02 v 02
2
1
2
15 = 3v2 3v1 ….(ii)
Solving equations (i) and (ii),
1 2
– 2v1v2 = v0 v1 = 7 , v2 = 12
rg
2
Loss of kinetic energy
– 4v1v2 = v02 ....(iii) 1 1 1
= 3 152 3 72 2 122
Now, (v1 v2)2 = (v1 + v2)2 4v1v2 2 2 2
Ta
18 1
= 4
225 Ki Kf 2 = 2 = 8
69 =
8 225 Ki 1
2
9 9
= = 33.33 J 1
54 2
4
43
ns
d m1x1 = m2x2 ....(i)
A CM B m1(x1 – d) = m2(x2 – d) ....(ii)
x d-x m1x1 – m1d = m2x2 – m2d
m1d = m2d ....[From (i)]
io
W m
For equilibrium, d = 1 d
m2
N1d = W(d x)
at
W(d x) 74. The (x, y, z) co-ordinates of masses 1 g, 2 g,
N1 =
d 3 g and 4 g are
(x1 = 0, y1 = 0, z1= 0), (x2 = 0, y2 = 0, z2 = 0)
69. The rule hanging from a peg is at equilibrium,
(x3 = 0, y3 = 0, z3 = 0),
hence, the principle of moments applies here.
lic (x4 = , y4 = 2, z4 = 3)
L/2 m1x1 m 2 x 2 m3 x 3 m 4 x 4
XCM =
(90– ) L m1 m 2 m 3 m 4
x1
ub
1 0 2 0 3 0 4
x2 XCM =
1 2 3 4
W1 = (L)g 4 5
1= =
W2 = (2L)g 10 2
P
2 8 20 5
2= = =
L 10 8 2
(L)g sin(90 – ) = 2(L)g Lsin 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 3
2 ZCM =
cos() = 4sin ....[ sin(90 – ) = cos] 1 2 3 4
rg
12 30 5
1 3= = =
tan = 10 12 2
4
75.
Ta
1
= tan1 Y
4
m3
(3, 3)
71. xCM m2
(2, 2)
(0,0) (R,0) m1
(1, 1)
m1 R m2
X
(0, 0)
m 0 m2R m2R
xCM = 1
m1 m 2 m1 m 2 The co-ordinates of the centre of mass are
72. Considering A as origin m1x1 m 2 x 2 m3 x 3
XC.M =
m1 m 2 m3
m 1 m 2 m 3
B
= =2
A C mmm
44
direction. v
3
ns
where dM = mass element of entire cone
2
3 R2 3
h h
3 R
2 2
zCM = z z dz = 2
z dz
R h 0 h hR h 0
h
In Y-direction, external force is exerted by 3 z4
io
3h
horizontal surface on gun and hence gun is at = =
h3 4 0 4
rest and only bullet moves with velocity
distance of centre of mass from base is
mv sin in Y-direction.
at
3h h
velocity of C.M. is h =
4 4
m1v1 m 2 v 2
v= h
m1 m 2 centre of mass has co-ordinates 0,0,
4
vy =
mvsin m 0
mM
lic
m a 1 m 2 a 2 m3 a 3 m 4 a 4
mvsin 80. a CM = 1
vy = m1 m 2 m3 m 4
Mm
ub
m a( i) 2m a(j) 3m a(i)
4m a( j)
77. As particles are placed around a CM =
A B m 2m 3m 4m
origin they form arc. R
2a i 2 a j
If arc length 0, centre of mass =
is at a distance R from the 10
P
origin. a
i j
O a cm =
But as the arc length AB increases, 5
centre of mass starts moving down.
81. (a) Centre of mass of a body not always
et
78. Mass = density volume coincides with the centre of gravity of the
dm = r2dz body.
z
From the figure, (c) A couple on a body produces purely
r
r R h rotational motion.
rg
tan = =
z h Hence, (b) and (d) are correct.
R 82. Total initial momentum of balls = mnu
r= z
h Total final momentum of balls = mnu
Ta
45
3 2iˆ 3jˆ 3kˆ 4 3iˆ 2ˆj 3kˆ Adding equations (i) and (ii),
34 mg mg + m0g = ma + ma m0a
2ma
18iˆ 17ˆj 3kˆ m0 =
ga
ns
7
dv
88. F = ma = m
85. p = Acos kt i Asin kt j dt
mdv = Fdt
dp
io
F= = Ak sin kt i Ak cos kt j integrating on both side,
dt v2 t
at
F p = (Ak sin kt) (A cos kt) + (Ak cos kt) 3t 3
5
dv / dt 1
3/ 2
dx / dt 2x
dv 1 dx
H
dt 2x 3/ 2 dt
et
u0 dx 1
But v = k 1/ 2
m m dt x
dv 1 1
st
Speed of 1 particle at highest point = u0cos 32 12
rg
dt 2x x
Speed of 2nd particle at highest point =
....[Considering constant of
u 02 2gH ….(i) proportionality as (–1)]
By formula, maximum height dv 1
Ta
2
u 2 sin 2 dt x
H= 0 substituting in (i) and solving,
2g 1 dv
nd
F 2 …. F ma m
Speed of 2 particle = u0cos x dt
Collision being inelastic, final momentum of
90. Let v1 and v2 be initial and final velocity of body
composite system = mu0cos î + mu0cos ĵ 1
Final K.E. = m v12 ….(given)
Hence angle made w.r.t. horizontal = 8
4 1 1
87. B m v 22 = m v12
2 8
v1 10
v2 = = = 5 m/s
a 2 2
mg B = ma ….(i) frictional force is given as, F = kv2
(B is buoyant force) ma = kv2
46
(M + m) =f
1 1 2 Mm
= 100k (10)
5 10 400M 2 102
=f
k = 104 kgm–1 2(M m)
91. According to conservation of linear momentum, 2M 2
f= 104
pf = pi Mm
here, uranium at rest decays,
ns
95. Initially both the particles are at rest, so velocity
pf = pi = 0 of centre of mass is equal to zero and no
i.e., pHe pTh = 0 external force acts on the system, therefore its
pHe = pTh velocity of centre of mass remains constant i.e.,
p2 zero.
io
As, K =
2m
96. Initial velocity of C.M in X-direction
1
K m1 u X1 m 2 u X2 m(2 0)
m ux = = =1
at
m1 m 2 2m
KHe > KTh ( mHe < mTh)
acceleration of C.M in X-direction
92. As the spherical bodies have their own size m1 a X1 m 2a X2 m(3 0) 3
ax = =
so the distance covered by both the body
12R – 3R = 9R, but individual distance covered
lic m1 m 2 2m
From v = u + at, final velocity of C.M in
2
a
93. For free fall, sn = u + 2n 1 direction, it must be travelling in straight line.
2
Where, sn = distance covered during nth second. 97. According to law of inertia (Newton’s first law),
hn (2n 1) when cloth is pulled from a table, the cloth comes
Ta
When the ball is released from the top of tower, in state of motion but dishes remain stationary due
then ratio of distances covered by the ball in to inertia. Thus we can pull the cloth from table
first, second and third second is without dislodging the dishes.
h I : h II : h III = 1: 3: 5 98. ma cos
Ratio of work done, ma
mghI : mghII : mghIII = 1:3:5 mg sin
94. According to law of conservation of momentum, mg a
M 20 = (M + m)V
M 20 Let the mass of block be m. It will remain
V= ….(i)
Mm stationary if forces acting on it are in
Work done in penetration, equilibrium i.e., ma cos = mg sin
1 Here, ma = Pseudo force on block.
W= (M + m) V2
2 a = g tan
47
ns
2mgsin 2 gsin 3.32
= = P= 103 = 2.35 103 N/m2
mm 2 1.41
10 sin 45 5 2
= = 103. P = F v ….(i)
io
2 2
2 F = mg = 250 9.8 = 2450 N
a = 5 m/s vertically downward
v = 0.2 m/s
100. Initial momentum = pi = 0 From equation (i),
at
Final momentum pf = 0 = mviˆ mvjˆ p 3
P = 2450 0.2 = 490 W
As, 1 hp = 746 W
p3 = mv 2 and m3 = 4m 2(m) = 2m 490
P= hp = 0.65 hp
rd p2
K.E. of 3 piece = 3 =
2m3
p32
2 2m
lic 746
104. Mass of deuterium is twice that of a neutron.
p32 1 1 Now, according to law of conservation of
Total KE = mv 2 mv 2
2 2m 2 2 momentum,
ub
2m 2 v 2 3mv 2 mu = mv1 + 2m v2
= mv 2 = u = v1 + 2v2 ….(i)
4m 2
Coefficient of restitution for perfectly elastic
W F s ma s dv s collision,
101. P = = = =m
P
t t t dt t v 2 v1
e= =1
Here P = k u
dv v2 v1 = u ….(ii)
k = mv ....(i)
On solving equations (i) and (ii),
et
dt
v2 k 2u u
t v2 = and v1 =
2 m 3 3
1
2kt Initial K.E. of neutron is, (K.E.)i = mu2
rg
v= 2
m
Final K.E. of neutron,
dv
F=m 2
1 2 u 1 1 2
dt (K.E.)f = mv1 m mu
Ta
Using (i) 2 2 3 9 2
k k mk 21 Loss in K.E. = (K.E.)f (K.E.)i
F= = t 8 1 2
v 2kt 2 = E = mu
m 9 2
E 8
102. Fractional loss = pd = = 0.89
K.E.i 9
Mass of carbon nucleus
v = 12 (mass of a neutron)
45 In case of collision of neutron with carbon
v cos
nucleus,
v mv1 + 12 mv2 = mu
m v1 + 12v2 = u ….(iii)
v sin On Solving equations (ii) and (iii)
48
169
105. Mass of rope = 4 0.5 = 2 kg p pf2 pi2 + 2pf picos
Total mass = 48 + 2 = 50 kg
ns
F p = p2 p2
Acceleration of system =
m
25 = p f2 + pi2 ( = 90)
=
50 =p 2
io
1 =5 2
=
2
1
= 0.5 m/s2 p = 7.07 kg ms
at
Force used for pulling rope = 2 0.5 = 1N
Force applied on block = 25 – 1 = 24 N 1 m1m 2 2 2
108. KEloss = (1 e ) (u1 – u2)
106. 20% of fat burned is converted into mechanical 2 m1 m 2
energy
Here, mechanical energy is potential energy
lic =
1 m1m 2
2
(1 0 ) (v – 0)
2
2 m1 m 2
P.E. = mgh
When person lifts the mass 1000 times, 1 4.2 102 9 4.2 102 2
= (300)
42 102
ub
Total P.E. = U = 10 9.8 1 1000 = 9.8 104 J 2
Let total fat burned be x kg, = 1701 J
Hence the energy supplied by x kg fat is 1701
=
E = x 3.8 107 4.2
20 % of which is converted to U = 405 cal
P
20
x 3.8 107 = 9.8 104
100
76 x = 9.8 101
et
x = 12.89 103 kg
49
ns
m1 m 2 m3
Change in momentum
= Final momentum initial momentum =
4 2 10 = 1.11 m/s2
= mvsin ( mvsin) = 2 mvsin ….(i) 2 12 4
1 m mv mv
2 2
(After (Before
io
1
8. K mv 2
collision) collision) 2 2 m 2m
Also, change in momentum = F t ….(ii) p2
From (i) and (ii) K
at
2m
2mvsin 2 1 20 sin 30
F= = = 40 N K1 p 2 2m 5 p 10
2
t 0.5 1 22 1
K 2 2m1 p 2 2 p2 4
4. Originally, centre of mass is at the centre O.
lic
After square 1 is removed, C.M. lies in quadrant p1 : p2 = 1 : 1
3. After squares 1 and 2 are removed, C.M. lies 9. Torque is given by, = r F . Hence option
on Y-axis below below O. When squares 1 and (A) is incorrect.
3 are removed, C.M. will remain at O. When Though torque and work have same dimensions
ub
squares 1, 2, 3 are removed, C.M. will shift to and unit, they are different physical quantities.
fourth quadrant. When all the four squares are Hence option (B) is incorrect.
removed, C.M. will shift back to O. The direction of moment of force is
perpendicular to the plane of figure. Hence
5. p t A ˆi cos kt ˆjsin kt
P
T sin
Fx px T T sin
T
rg
Fy p T cos T cos
F py
mg
F p A 2 k (cos kt sin kt + sin kt cost) = 0 From figure, 2Tsin = mg
Ta
d C d m m1g
m1 2 T
x1 x2 a
N N
m1 x1 = m2x2 .…(i)
and m1 (x1 d) = m2 (x2 d) .…(ii) m2g
50
ns
mg does not hold good for the earth. Thus, Reason
is correct.
F sin = mg kt sin = mg But for the object moving on the earth, the earth
mg can be taken at rest and the frame of reference
t
io
k sin attached to motion on the earth is taken as
dv inertial.
Since F cos = ma kt cos = m
dt 17. When an explosion breaks a rock, its initial
at
v t
k cos k cos 2 momentum is zero. Hence, according to the law
0 dv m 0 t dt v = 2m t of conservation of momentum, final momentum
mg will be zero.
At the time of breaking off t
k sin
2
lic mv
k cos mg mg cos 2
v 1.5 kg 12 m/s = m1v1
2m k sin 2k sin 2
ub
13. Initial momentum = 0
Final momentum = 2mv 2mv 0 m2v2 = 2 kg 8 m/s
Relative velocity of one with respect to the other Total momentum of the two pieces of 1.5 kg and
= 2v 2 kg
P
1 E
Final K.E. = 2 2mv 2 E v = 182 162 24 kg m s1.
2 2m
The third piece will have the same momentum
E but in direction opposite to the resultant of these
Relative velocity = 2v 2
et
2m two momenta.
4E 2E Momentum of the third piece = 24 kg m s1
velocity = 6 m s1.
2m m
rg
mv 24
14. Assertion is true, but the Reason is not true. Mass of the 3rd piece = 4 kg
v 6
Infact, the centre of mass is related to the
distribution of mass of the body. 18.
Y
Ta
u1
m P m Q v1 A(x1, y1) = (0, 0); B(x2, y2) = (2 r, 0) and
m P mQ
C(x3, y3) = r, r 3
51
ns
2
3mv
Force on the ball = .
2t
F
io
20. Common acceleration, a
m1 m 2 m3
5
a 2.5m / s 2
10 8 2
at
Equation of motion of m3 is T3 T2 = m3a
50 T2 = 2 2.5 T2 = 45 N
21. Amongst the given balls, glass balls have
maximum coefficient of restitution i.e.,
lic
e = 0.94.
22. For the completely filled bob, C.G. coincides
ub
with its centre. As the liquid flows out, C.G.
shifts downward. When more than half of liquid
flows out, it starts shifting upwards and when
the bob gets emptied completely, C.G. is at
centre again.
P
et
rg
Ta
52
Textbook
Chapter No.
05 Gravitation
Hints
ns
the velocity of a planet is maximum when its
m1 m 2
distance from sun is the least. 22. F=G
r2
6. Kinetic and potential energies vary with position m2
of earth w.r.t sun. Angular momentum remains = 6.67 1011
io
r2
constant everywhere. 2
1
7. Kepler’s third law is a consequence of law of = 6.67 1011
1
at
conservation of angular momentum. 11
= 6.67 10 N
T2
8. = constant GM
r3 26. g= . If the earth shrinks, its mass remains
R2
T2r3 = constant
lic unchanged and its radius decreases. So, the
9. r2 = 2r1 value of acceleration due to gravity increases.
3/ 2
T2 r GM GM 0 4GM 0
= 2 = (2)3/2 = 2 2 27. g= = =
ub
T1 r1 D0 / 2
2
R2 D0 2
T2 = 2 2 years ….(As, T1= 1 year)
28. MP = 2M, RP = 2R
10.
1
r2 = r1 Using Shortcut 1,
4 M MP R2
P
g = g g
R M R P 2
3 3 2
T2 r2 2
1 2
T2 = T1 2
T1 r1 4 2M R g 2
g g = 4.9 m/s
et
1 M 2R 2
T2 = 24 = 3 hr
8
Re M
29. Rm = , Mm = e
Gm1m 2 rˆ Gm1m 2 r Gm1m 2 4 80
13. F = = r̂ =
rg
2 3
r
r r r3 Using Shortcut 1,
2
14. From Newton’s law of gravitation, gm Mm R e 1 2
(4)
Gm1m 2 g e M e R m 80
F=
Ta
r2 g
If m1 = m2 = 1 unit of mass gm =
5
r = 1 unit of distance
F = G = universal gravitational constant 4
32. g= GR for R constant; g
3
m1m 2 Fr 2
18. F =G G=
r2 m1m 2 1 d
33. = 1 : 2, 1 = 4 : 1
Nm 2 2 d2
Units of G is
kg 2 4
Since, g = GR
3
20. The value of universal gravitational constant g R g1 1R1 and g2 2R2
is always same. As r varies, the force between
g1 R 1 4 2
the two bodies changes, but G remains = 1 1 = =
g2 2 R 2 2 1 1
constant.
53
ns
55. ve =
g n + 1 16 R R
If mass and radius of the planet are three times
36. Using Shortcut 3, than that of earth then escape velocity will
Here, n = 1 remain same.
io
2
gh n 1
56. Mp = 2Me, Rp = 3Re
g n + 1 4
vp Mp Re 1 2
g 2
at
gh ve Me Rp 3 3
4
2
37. Using Shortcut 5, vp ve
3
Here, n = 16,
h=
n 1 R =
lic
16 1 R = (4 – 1) R
57. MA = 2MB, DA= 2DB RA = 2RB
2GM
ve =
h = 3R R
ub
d R d gr (v e ) A 2M B / 2R B
= =1
38. gd = g 1 = g gd = (ve ) B MB / R B
R R R
(ve)A = (ve)B
R / 2 g 10 ms 2
39. gd = g 1 or gd = = 5 ms2 58. ve v1 1 and v2 2
P
R 2 2
v1 1
40. At the centre of earth g = 0;
v2 2
Weight = mg = 100 0 = 0
et
ve 1 2GM 2GM
42. When the earth stops rotating, the centripetal 59. =
force of mR2 vanishes. As a result of this, the R R R R3
acceleration due to gravity increases. 2GM 2G 4 3
rg
2 2
60. ve = = R
43. g = g R cos θ. Hence value of g changes R R 3
with θ. 8GR 2 2G
ve = = 2R
3 3
Ta
54
Chapter 05: Gravitation
ns
9 R
2
= 11.2 3 2
9 1 1
90. T r 2 i.e., r T 3 ; K.E. 2
= 2.5 km/s r
T3
io
67. Geostationary satellite remains stationary with 2
at
3
therefore time period of a geostationary satellite T2 r2 2 6400 2
91. T2 = 24 ≈ 2 hour.
is also 24 hours. T1 r1 36000
74. If it is not so, then the centrifugal force would
92. T = 83 min, R = 4R
gravitational force won’t be able to keep the
lic
exceed the force of attraction or we can say that
T' R
3/ 2
4R
3/ 2
= =
satellite in circular motion. T R R
1 K mv 2 T is increased by a factor of [4]3/2 i.e., 8 times.
ub
76. F F= v = constant T = 8 83 minutes = 664 minutes
r r r
77. As, v is independent of mass of the satellite. GmM GM mR 2 mgR 2
93. B.E. = 2
v1 r 2r R 2r 2r
= 2 r1 > r2 v2 > v1
P
v2 r1 GmM
94. B.E. = = mgR
Orbital speed of satellite does not depend upon R
the mass of the satellite. = 100 10 6.4 106
et
v1 r2 r 1 1
= = = = 1 GM
v2 r1 4r 4 2 v=
2 R
79. RA = 9R, RB = R
Ta
ns
3. TA = 8 T B = 6.67 10–8 dyne cm2/g2
TA2 rA3
Using Kepler’s third law, = GMm
TB2 rB3 10. Fe = = 50 N ….(i)
3 R2
r
io
(8TB ) 2 GMm '
2
= A ….[ TA = 8TB] Fs F ….(ii)
TB rB 4R 2
rA
3
rA Dividing equation (ii) by (i) we get
at
3
= (4) = 4 or rA = 4rB F
m ' 200
rB rB 50 4m 4 5
4. rM = 1.525 rE
lic F = 10 50 = 500 N
rM Gm1m 2
= 1.525 11. F=
rE r2
Gm1m 2 F
TM
2
rM
3
F = =
3r
2
3 9
= = (1.525)
ub
T
E r
E F F
% decrease in F = 100
TM = TE (1.525)3 = (1)2 (1.525)3
2 2
F
TM = (1.525)3/2 = 1.883 years 8
100 89%
=
9
P
(2) 2 3
5. T2 = R
12. F = mg = 81 =
GM m
GM
R2
3 4 2
GM m
log10T = log10R + log10
et
F = mg =
2 GM R
2
R
2 1 42 2
log10 R = log10T log10
3 3 GM
4 GM m 4
= 81 = 36 N
rg
F=
4 2 9 R2 9
= 1018 M = 6 1029 kg
GM Gm1m 2
13. F=
6. Let be the density of the material of each r2
Ta
56
Chapter 05: Gravitation
15. At point P, GM
22. g=
G(81M) G M R2
= gR 2 9.8 (6 106 ) 2
60R x
2 2
x M M= =
2
G 6.67 1011
x x 60 R
(60R x)2 = 9.8 36
81 81M M= 1023 = 52.89 1023 kg
ns
6.67
x
60R x = M 5.3 1024 kg
9
x = 54R and (60R x) = 6 R 23. d
b
io
Kr 2
16. G= ag
mML
As r has highest power in the formula, error in a
at
measurement of r, when all quantities measured
have same percentage error, will cause
maximum error in measurement of G. lic c
17. Gravitational pull depends upon the acceleration Ri
due to gravity on that planet. As the star collapses,
1 1 its mass remains the same and radius decreases.
Mm = M e, g m = g e GM 1
81 6 ag = 2
R2
ub
Ri
Using Shortcut 1,
1/ 2 1/ 2 ag increases as radius decreases. This is depicted
R e Me gm 1 correctly by plot b.
= 81
R m Mm ge 6
24. Weight is least at the equator.
9
P
g g h 16
=
g g g 100
× 100 = 1%
g g
gh = 100
20. Mp = 2Me
16
4 3 4 Using Shortcut 5,
R P = 2 R 3e
3 3 100
R 3P = 2R 3e Rp = 2 Re
1/3 Here, n =
16
GM p G 2M e 1
2
GM e 100 5
gp = = 2
2 3
h = 1 R = 1 R
R 2p 21/3 R e R e2 16 4
gp = 21/3ge R 6400
= = 1600 km
mgP = 21/3 mge = 21/3W 4 4
57
2h gd
28. g = g 1 = R2 cos2 ϕ
R R
w2 w1 = error in weighing gd
cos2ϕ = 2 2
h h GM h R
= 2mg 1 2 = 2m 2 gd
R R R R cosϕ =
2mG 4 3 h 8 R
w2 w1 = R = Gmh gd
R2 3 R 3 ϕ = cos 1
R
d
29. mgd = mg 1
R 34. g = g R2 cos2 θ;
d When θ = 45,
31.5 = 63 1
R 1
g = g R2
ns
d 31.5 1 2
1 = = When earth stops rotating, g = 0,
R 63 2
d 1 1 R2
=1 = so, g =
io
R 2 2 2
R Hence the weight of the body increases by
2d = R or d = = 0.5R R2
2 .
at
2
d 80
30. g = g 1 = 10 1 35. g = gp R2 cos2 θ = gp 2R cos2 60
R 6400
1
1 10 79 = gp R2
= 10 1 =
80 80
lic 4
R Re 2
38. Rm = , m = e
So, it is clear that value of g measured by each 4 3
will decrease at different rates. Energy spent = mgehe = mgm hm
et
hm= gehe/ gm
2h
32. gh = g 1 4
R R eeG h e
hm =
3
R
rg
4
2 20 1 R mm G
9 = g 1 = g 1 3
R 10 R 3 4
hm = e e h e 0.5 = 3 m
R m m 2 1
Ta
9g
9 = g = 10 ms2 39. Using Shortcut 16 (i) and equating work done
10
to change in potential energy,
R
mgh
d 20 = 10 19 U =
gd = g 1 = 10 1 1 h/R
R R 20
Substituting R = 5h
mgh 5
gd = 9.5 ms2 we get, U = = mgh
1 1/5 6
33. Given: gd = g Alternate Method:
d 2 2 Increase in the P.E. is given by,
g 1 = g – R cos ϕ
R U = UB UA
=
gd GMm GMm 5GMm
g– = g – R2 cos2 ϕ UB = =–
R Rh R R /5 6R
58
Chapter 05: Gravitation
GMm dv e 1 dR 1
UA = =– = – 4 % = 2%
R ve 2 R 2
U =
5GMm
+
GMm GMm 5
= As radius decreases, escape velocity increases.
1
6R R R 6
GMS
GMm 47. vc =
U = r
6R
Orbital speed of all planets depends upon the
mgR 2
U = …..( GM = gR2) mass of Sun and the separation. So,
6R
1
mgR vc
U = r
6
5 Since Jupiter is having more orbital radius in
U = mgh ….(R = 5h) comparison to earth, so orbital speed of Jupiter
6
ns
is less than that of earth.
40. Gravitational potential energy from centre of the
48. Critical velocity of a satellite is independent of
G 81M m m
earth U1 = GM e m = mass of a satellite.
R R
io
Gravitational potential energy from centre of the GM gR 2
49. vc = and vc r
moon U2 = GM m m r r
r
R 2g
This gives r3 =
at
Total gravitational potential energy,
2
U = U1 + U2
G 81M m m GM m m 81 1 GM GM
= = GMmm 50. v1 = , v2 =
R r R r Rh R
lic v1 R R 1
2GM = = =
41. ve = v2 Rh R 7R 2 2
R
v
8 4 v1 =
ub
ve = R G ….( M = R3) 2 2
3 3
Now, ve R and vp 2R 51. In the problem, orbital radius is increased by 1%.
vp vp Time period of satellite T r3/2
= 2 or ve = Percentage change in time period
P
ve 2
3
= (% change in orbital radius)
2GM 2
42. ve = 3
Rh = (1%) = 1.5%.
et
2
2GM
(ve)1 = = v and
2R 52. Time period of satellite which is very near to
2GM planet
rg
(ve)2 =
8R R3 R3
T = 2 = 2
GM 4
(ve ) 2 2GM 2R 1 1 G R 3
= = = (ve)1 = v/2 3
(ve )1 8R 2GM 4 2
Ta
1
43. Using Shortcut 8, T
1 1
ve = – R% = – 4 % = – 2% i.e., Time period of nearest satellite does not
2 2 depend upon the radius of planet, it only
As radius decreases, escape velocity increases. depends upon the density of the planet.
Alternate Method: In the problem, density is same so time period
2GM will remain the same.
ve =
R
3 3 3.14
ve
1 53. T= = s 4200 s
R G 6.67 10 11 8 103
ve R–1/2 1
1 42 r 3 2
dve – dR R–3/2 54. Ts = = 6831 s and Te = 86400 s
2 GM earth
59
Relative angular velocity = satellite earth 60. If G starts to decrease, the force between sun
2 2 and earth will also start to decrease. Earth will
T= = try to follow a path of larger radius. Hence, its
s e 2 2
period of revolution round the sun will increase.
Ts Te But rotation of earth around its own axis will
TT remain unchanged. The radius of the circular
T = s e = 7417 s
Te Ts path of the earth will increase or the earth will
follow a path of increasing radius. Thus, P.E.
55. Orbital radius of satellites: r1 = R + R = 2R will increase so K.E. decreases.
r2 = R + 7R = 8R
GMm GMm 61. Apparent weight = actual weight – upthrust force
P.E1 = and P.E2 = Vdg = Vdg Vg
r1 r2
d
GMm GMm g = g
ns
K.E.1 = and K.E2 = d
2r1 2r2
GMm GMm 62. In pendulum clock, the time period depends on
T.E1 = and T.E2 = the value of g while in spring watch, the time
2r1 2r2
period is independent of the value of g.
io
P.E1 K.E1 T.E1
= = =4
P.E 2 K.E 2 T.E 2 2GM E
63. (ve)Earth = = 11.2 km /s
RE
at
GMm
56. U= and As radius and mass of the planet are one third to
r
those of earth, escape velocity at planet (ve)p is
GMm
Kinetic energy = same as the escape velocity at the earth.
2r
U = (2)
GMm
lic (ve)p = 11.2 km/s
Now, average thermal velocity of oxygen (v)
2r molecules at temperature T is,
= 2 × Kinetic energy 1 3
mv2 = kT
1
ub
= 2 × mv2 2 2
2 3kT 3 1.38 1023 1000
= mv 2 v= =
m 5.3 1026
GMm 1 = 883.82 m/s 0.88 km/s
57. B.E1 = = mgR and
P
2R 2 Using Mindbender 7,
GMm
Thus, thermal velocity of oxygen molecules is
B.E2 = = mgR much less than the escape velocity. Hence, it is
R
possible to find oxygen molecules in the
et
2r 1
dE GMm 1 dr % increase in speed = (% decrease in radius)
= 2
dt 2 r 2 dt 1
= (1%)
Ta
t R
GMm dr dE 2
dt
0
2C r r 2
….
dt
C J/s
= 0.5%
i.e., speed will increase by 0.5%
GMm 1 1
t=
2C R r 65.
N
GMm r R
59. P.E. = 2
r
1 GM
Fg m 3 r
P.E. R
r
Similarly,
1 1 Pressing force = N
T.E. and K.E. GMm
2r 2r = 3 r cos
This is depicted correctly by option (C). R
60
Chapter 05: Gravitation
2
GMm R /2
= gE 2
1
= 3
r
R r 2
GMm gE gE
= = constant. = 2
2R 2 2 gP
1
66. Let vapp = velocity of approach Now, for a pendulum, T
vsep = velocity of separation O g
vsep 2 gE
e= R TP = TE TE 2 2 2 s
v app 3 gP
ns
vapp = vsep = L2 1
R 3R Now, K.E. = K.E. 2 and hence K.E.
GMm 1 GMm 2I R
Also, mvsep
2
increases by 4%.
Rh 2 R
io
1 2 1 1 Alternate Method:
vsep = GM
2 R Rh GM 1
g= g
R2 R2
GM GM R
= 1
at
2dR dg 2dR
3R R Rh dg
R3 g R
1 R
=1 dg dR
3 Rh 100 = 2 ( 100) = 2 2% = 4%
g R
R
Rh
=
2
3
lic i.e., g increases by 4%
L2 1
R Now, K.E. = K.E.
h= 2I I
2
ub
2
I= MR2 I R2
ve 5
67. Given: v =
2 1
K.E. 2
Using Shortcut 14, R
R R R 2dR
P
h= dK – 3
ve
2
4 1 3 R
1
100 = – 2 100
dK.E. dR
v e /2
K.E. R
et
Fg = – 2 2% = 4%
68. a1 = Fg Fg
m1 m1 m2 K.E. increased by 4%
Fg 72. Applying law of conservation of energy for
rg
a2 =
m2 asteroid at a distance 10 Re and at earth’s
Since there is no external force, centre of mass surface,
remains at rest and energy remains same. Ki + Ui = Kf + Uf ….(i)
Ta
1 2 vi
Now, Ki = mvi 10 Re
69. ve = 2 vc = 1.414 vc 2 vf
= vc + 0.414 vc GM e m
and Ui =
ve vc 10R e
= 0.414 Re
vc 1
Kf = mvf2 and
% increase in speed = 0.414 100 = 41.4% 2 Me
GM e m
70. Mp = 2ME, DP = 2DE RP = 2RE Uf = Earth
Re
TE = 2 s
Substituting these values in eq.(i), we get
GM E GM P
gE = , gP = 1 2 GM e m 1 2 GM e m
RE R 2P mvi = mvf
2 10R e 2 Re
2
M R 2GM e 1
gP = gE P E vf2 vi2 1
ME R P R e 10
61
ns
T R 2
= vc (1.414 1)
75. Both the stars rotate with same angular velocity = 1 0.414
around the centre of mass (CM) in their = 0.414 km/s
io
respective orbits as shown in figure.
2GM
80. ve =
R
1
at
r1 r2 K.E1 = mve2
2
m1 m2
C.M. 1 2GM
= 2 m
R R
lic 1
= 2 m (2gR) = mgR
R
The magnitude of gravitational force m1 exerts GM
Gm1m 2 vc = at h ≈R
R
ub
on m2 is F
r1 r2
2
1 1
K.E2 = mv c2 = mgR
2 2
Gm A m B m A rA 4 2
m r 4 2
76. B B2 K.E1 2mgR 2
rA rB
2
TA2 TB = =
P
K.E 2 mgR 1
mArA = mBrB Alternate Method:
TA = T B 1
K.E1 = mve2
et
GMm 2
77. If r < R then F = .r 1
R3 = m × 2gR = mgR ….(ve = 2gR )
mv 2
GMm 2
r vr
When orbit is close to Earth, vc = gR
rg
r R3
mA rA rB
GMm mB 1 1
If r > R then F = C K.E2 = mv2 = mgR
r2 2 2
K.E1 mgR
2
mv GMm 1
Ta
2 v =2
r r r K.E 2 1 mgR
2
78. Suppose the velocity of vA
projection at A is vA and 81. Weight of the body at equator
at B is vB. h 3
mv 2A GM e m = of initial weight
= and 5
A (R h) 2 R
3
Earth g = g (because mass remains constant)
mv 2B GM e m 5
= vB
B R2 g = g 2R cos2θ
A = B = are the radii of curvatures at A, B. 3
g = g 2R cos2 (0)
Energy conservation gives, 5
GM e m 1 GM e m 1 2 2g
mv 2A = mv B 2 =
Rh 2 R 2 5R
62
Chapter 05: Gravitation
ns
2/3
Ts r
3/ 2
r/2
3/ 2
1
3/ 2 rE P
= s = =
rP E
Tm rm r 2
Ts R
Let Ts = n Tm =n = (2)2/3
io
Tm rP
1 rP = (2)2/3 R
n= = 2–3/2
23/ 2 5. Using Kepler’s law,
at
86. Gravitational potential at a point on the surface T2 r3
GM T2 = kr3
of Earth = Take ln on both side
R
lnT2 = lnkr3
If Earth is assumed to be a solid sphere, then the
gravitational potential at the centre of Earth
lic 2lnT2 = lnk + 3lnr
Differentiating both side w.r.t. x
3 GM
= 1 dT 1 dk 1 dr
2 R 2 3
T dx k dx r dx
ub
Decrease in gravitation potential 2T k r
1 GM Rg 3
= T k r
2 R 2 2 T r
Rg 3
Loss in potential energy = ×m T r
P
2 3 r
Now, gain in kinetic energy = loss in potential T = T
2 r
energy
1 1 6. According to Kepler’s law,
et
mv2 = mgR v = gR T2 r3
2 2
r1 r2
Where, r =
2
Competitive Thinking
rg
R
As r1 = R and r2 =
dA 1 d 1 3
1. = r2 = r 2 …(i) R
dt 2 dt 2 R
Angular momentum L = mr ω …(ii) 2 3 = 4R = 2R
Ta
Here, r =
dA L 2 6 3
Using (i) and (ii), = .
dt 2m r3
Now, T = 2
Gm
2. According to Kepler’s second law,
Angular momentum is conserved during the 4 2 3
T2 = r
motion of the planet around the Sun. Gm
3
42 2R 8 42 3
LA = LB = = R
Gm 3 27Gm
m vA rA sin A = mvB rB sin B
vA r sin B 60 106 sin 60o T2 =
322
R3
= B = 27Gm
vB rA sin A 90 106 sin 30o
Comparing with T2 = R3,
2 3/2 2 322
= = =
3 1/ 2 3 27Gm
63
GM P m GM 2 1
Fg = = 2
ns
2
DP a2 2
2 Resultant force acting towards the centre
Acceleration of particle due to gravity Mv 2 Mv 2
Fg 4GM P =
a = r a
io
m D 2P
2
L
10. For a mass m placed at distance, x = from the Mv 2 GM 2 1
2 = 2 2
at
a a 2
rod, force of attraction between the two is,
GmM GmM GMm 2
F=
x x L L L 3L2 v2 =
GM
1
1
L
2 2
GMm
4
lic a 2 2
Comparing with F = 2 GM 1
v= 1
L a 2 2
4
=
ub
GM
3 = 1.16
a
11. We know that, F m1m2
F xm (1 x) m xm 2 (1 x) 14. 2 = 21, R1 = R2
dF g R g1 1R1 and g2 2R2
P
1
x=
2 15. Using Shortcut 1,
F F Mv 2 1 1
12. F1 Here, M = , R =
7 2
rg
2 2 R M F M
2 GM 2 GM 2 Mv 2 F M 4
v R 1 =
R
2
7
F
2
2 R 2 4R 2 R
O 4
Ta
GM 2 1 1 gplanet = g
= Mv2 M 7
R 4 2
M
4
Wp = 700 g = 400g
GM 2 4 1 GM 7
v=
R 4 2 2 R
1 2 2
16. At the surface,
13. GM
A B g=
R2
At the height, h = nR
r
GM GM
O a gh =
R h R 2 1 n
2 2
45 g GM / R 2
45 = (n + 1)2
D C g h GM / R 2 1 n 2
a
64
Chapter 05: Gravitation
ns
19. Using Shortcut 3, d=21 ….( h = 1 km)
2
gh n 1 n 1 d = 2 km
g n + 1 16 n 1 4
25. Acceleration due to gravity at h = 5 km above
1
io
n= 2h 25 2
3 gh = g 1 = 9.8 1 9.78 m/s
R R 6400
h = = 3R OR
n
at
GM GM GM R2
20. Refer Shortcut 6. gh = 2
(R h) 2
(R 5) 2
R (R 5) 2
Alternate Method:
d gR 2 9.8 (6400) 2
= 9.78 m/s2
gd = g 1
R
lic =
(R 5) 2
=
(6400 5) 2
g d g Acceleration due to gravity at depth = 5 km,
= g 1 ….(Given: gd = )
n R n d
gd = g 1
ub
d 1 R
= 1
R n 5 2
= 9.8 1 = 9.79 m/s
n 1 6400
d = R
n
26. Acceleration due to gravity at a depth x below
P
d 1600 surface of earth is
21. gd = g 1 = 9.8 1
R 6400 GM x x
g = 1 = g 1
3 R2 R R
et
R gx R x
gx d
= g 1 …. d
1 R
At height h distance from centre of the earth is
2 2
Ta
(R + h) i.e., d = R + h Y
g
gd = R
2 gx d
2 In this case, gh = g
Weight of the body at depth d = R/2, Rh 1
g
2
gh d
2
1 gR
Wd = mgd = m g/2 = × 200 =
2 d2
Wd = 100 N 1 d
X
gh d=R
d2
23. Gravity at height h,
gh = g 1
2h 28. g = g 2R cos2θ
R Rotation of the earth results in the decreased
Gravity at depth d, weight apparently. This decrease in weight is
d not felt at the poles as the angle of latitude is
gd = g 1 90.
R
65
ns
owing to bulge at equator and flattening at
GM
poles. Thus, g increases in moving As, gR =
R
towards poles.
iv. Changing rotational velocity – 10 GMm
U =
11R
io
g = g – R2 cos2
As increases, g decreases. 34. Using Shortcut 7,
30. g = g 2 R cos2 θ n=2
at
1 2 2
0 = 1 2 6400 103 ….(As, θ = 60) U = mgR = mgR
4 2 1 3
104
2 =
16
102
lic 35. Work done = change in P.E.
Using Shortcut 7,
= here, n = 1
4
= 2.5 103 rad/s 1 1
W = U = mgR = mgR
ub
11 2
31. Refer Shortcut 7.
Alternate Method: 36. Potential energy of object of mass m on the
GMm GMm
U= surface of earth, U =
R nR R
P
Rh
GMm GMm
=
R R n 1 Change in potential energy
= U U
GMm 1
rg
= 1 GMm GMm
R n 1 = +
Rh R
GMm n 1 1
= GMmh
R n 1 =
R R h
Ta
GMm n
=
R n 1 37. Gravitational potential is given as,
GMm R n GM
= V=
R
R2 n 1
1 1 1 1
= mgR
n V = GM ....
1 2 4 8
n 1
1 1 1
32. Using Shortcut 7, = G 2 1 2
3 ....
2 2 2
n
U = mgR 1
n 1 = 2G
1
1 n 1
mgR = mgR 2
3 n 1 V = 4G
66
Chapter 05: Gravitation
ns
v R
e 47. T = 6 hr = 6 60 60s
v p R p p
Time period of satellite is,
Given: Rp = 2R and p = 2 r3
ve 1 T = 2
io
= GM
vp 2 2
4 2 r 3
T2 =
2GM GM
at
40. ve = =c ….(Refer Mindbender 6) 3 GM
R r = T2
2GM 2 6.67 10 11 5.98 1024 4 2
R= 2 = 8 1012 (6 60 60)2
c (3 108 ) 2
=
2 6.67 5.98
103 m
lic = 8 1012 (63)2 104
Taking cube roots on both the sides,
9
r = 2 104 62 (10) 101/3
= 8.86 103 m 102 m
= 72 105 2.1
ub
41. K.E. = P.E. R + h = 151.2 105
1 2 GMm
mvs = h = (15.12 106) – (6.4 106)
2 2R
= 8.72 106 m
GM
vs2 h = 8720 km
P
R
vs = gR ….(GM = gR2) 48. ve = 2v
1 2 1
2
But ve = 2gR K.E. = mve m 2v mv 2
2 2
et
ve = 2vs
ve 1 2
vs = 49. When satellite is in orbit, K.E. = K = 2 m vc
2
rg
67
ns
R The object with remain stuck to the star and not
Min. energy required = E0 E fly off if
GMm GMm Fg > Fc
=
6R R GmM R 32
io
2
i.e., > mR M >
5 GMm R2 G
=
6R
57. Orbital velocity of satellite vc = gR
at
53. Total energy of a satellite is,
Escape velocity of satellite ve = 2gR
GMm
T.E. = ....(i) Minimum increase required,
2(R h)
Multiplying and dividing the equation (i) by R2. v = ve vc = 2gR gR = gR 2 1
T.E. =
GMmR 2
lic
GM
2(R h)R 2 58. vc =
R h
g 0 mR 2 GM
T.E. = .... ( g0 = )
ub
2(R h) R2
2GM
ve =
R
54. Binding energy of a satellite on the surface of But, 4vc = ve ….(given)
the earth is,
GM 2GM
GMm 4
B.E. =
P
R h R
R
Binding energy of satellite revolving around the 16GM 2GM
earth at height h is, R h R
et
GMm 8R = R + h
(B.E.)h =
R h = 7R
B.E. 2(R h)
2
= R 2
2R
rg
(B.E.) h R
59. gh = g = g
GM RR 3R
55. Gravitational acceleration of earth, g = 2
R2
4g
Where, M is mass of the earth. gh = ….(i)
Ta
9
As g is independent of mass of the Sun, increase
in G will increase value of g. Hence, statement (vc)h = ghR h
(D) is incorrect. 4g R
Also, terminal velocity of raindrop depends on g =
9 2
therefore increase in g will cause raindrops to 1
fall faster. = 2gR ….( ve = 2gR )
3
Hence, statement (A) is correct.
1
Increased value of g will make walking on (vc)h = ve
ground more difficult. Hence, statement (B) is 3
correct. 60. dm = dV
Time period of simple pendulum will decrease K
1 dm = (4r2dr)
as T . Hence, statement (C) is correct. r
g
dm = 4Krdr
68
Chapter 05: Gravitation
R R
GM
M = dm 4Krdr vx = 9 ….( vx = orbital velocity)
0 0
2R
R Similarly,
r2
M = 4K m
2 0 vy = m v
10
M = 2K(R2 – 0) GM
M = 2KR2 vy = 10 u 2
R
For circular motion, gravitational force will
provide required the necessary centripetal force. The kinetic energy of the rocket is,
1 m
vy vx
2 2
GMm mv2 K.E. =
2 10
R2 R
m GM
2
GM
2
ns
2GKR
R2 R
2R m GM GM
Time period, T = = 100u 2 100 81
v 20 R 2R
2R
io
T= R m GM 81 2
2GKR = 100 100u
20 R 2
T2 R
m 119 GM
100u 2
at
61. At equator, =
20 2 R
g = g – R2
119 GM
v g = 5m u 2
but = and g = …(Given) 200 R
r 3
g v
2
lic63. FCP = FG
= g – R 2
3 R mv 2 GMm
2
2g v2 r r
=
ub
3 R GM
2
v=
3v = 2gR …(i) r
We know, ve = 2gR 2r
T=
From equation (i), v
P
4 2 r 3
ve = 3 v T2 = ….(i)
GM
62. Let the satellite attains final velocity v. T2 = Kr3 ….(ii)
Therefore, by conservation of energy, 4 2
et
GMm 1 2 GMm 1 2 K=
mu = mv GM
R 2 2R 2 GMK = 42
2 2 GM
v =u – v1
rg
R 64.
GM
v= u2 ….(i) r2 m
R
r1
vy
Ta
v
m vx 9m v2
10 vx 10 From law of conservation of angular momentum,
vy mv1r1 = mv2r2
2R
v1r1
v2 = .…(i)
r2
From law of conservation of energy,
M GMm 1 GMm 1
mv12 = mv 2 2 … (ii)
r1 2 r2 2
When the rocket is ejected, consider
From equations (i) and (ii),
conservation of momentum along X-axis,
m 9m 2GMr2
vx = vx v1 =
10 10 r1 r2 r1
69
ns
=
R 2 2 1 2 2 4 Taking ratio of both,
v1 g1R1 5 5 |V|
= = =R+h
v2 g 2R 2 2 4 g
5.4 107
io
v1 5 =R+h
= 6.0
v2 2 2
9 106 = R + h
66. (T.E.) on surface = (T.E.) at height ‘h’ h = (9 – 6.4) 106 = 2.6 106 = 2600 km
at
(K.E.)1 + (P.E.)1 = (K.E.)2 + (P.E.)2
70. Refer Mindbender 5.
1 GMm GMm
mu 2 0 P
2 R R h 71.
1 GMm GMm
mu 2
lic 2r S
2 Rh R r
GMm GMm
= d
ub
R Rh
Here, work has to be done to displace a body
1 1
= GMm d
R R h from distance to . Let mass of the body be
2
1 1 m and mass of planet and satellite be MP and MS
u2 = 2GM
P
R R h respectively.
R hR Total work W = WP + WS
u2 = 2gR2 ….( GM = gR2) 1 1 1 1
R R h
et
= GMPm GMSm
h (d / 2) (d / 2)
u2 = 2gR GM P m GM Sm 2Gm
Rh = = (MP + MS)
d/2 d/2 d
rg
h u 2 d
R 2gR 4 4
1 2 But, MP = (2r)3 and MS = r3(2)
h u 3 3
R 2gR 4G 4 4
1 ve2 = (2r)3 r 3 (2)
h u2 d 3 3
R 2gR u 2 4G 4
= 10 r3
h u2 d 3
u 2R 10Gr 3
h= ve = 4
2gR u 2 3d
M
67. VP = Vsphere + Vpartical a
GM GM 3GM P
= = M a/2
a a/2 a
70
Chapter 05: Gravitation
ve
1. Me = 20 Mm 6. Given: v = 0.33 ve =
3
Using Shortcut 1,
2 2
Using Shortcut 14,
R
gm M Mm 6400 R R R
= m e = h=
ge Me R
m 20M 3200 2
9 1 8
m ve
mg m 4 1
= v e /3
mg e 20
4 7. Here, the escape velocity of parcel is to be
Weight on Mars = 500 = 100 N calculated but, with the launching done from
20
beneath the surface
ns
r3 GM(m) 1 2
2. T = 2 mve = 0
GM R 2
R
2
P
4 2
T2 = (R + h)3 2
io
GM 4GM
ve = = 2 (11.2 km/s) R
C
1/3 R M
GMT 2
R+h= 2
= 15.84 km/s.
4
at
1 8. Weight of the body at equator
GMT 2 3 2
h= 2
R = of initial weight
4 5
Gm1m 2
lic
2
g = g (because mass remains constant)
5
3. F=
r2 g = g 2R cos2θ
6.67 1011 1.9 1027 1.99 1030 2
= g = g 2R cos2 (0)
ub
(7.8 1011 ) 2 5
= 4.14 1023 N 3g
2 =
5R
Gm1m 2
4. Fg = 3g 3 10
r2 = =
P
d
Fg = 10. g = g 1 g = g 1 ,
r2 R g
….[Using product rule of derivation] (gravity at a depth d) (gravity at the equator)
dF G gd g2 R 2 R 2
rg
= 2 [m1(1) + (M m1)(1)] d=
dm1 r R g g
dF
For F to be maximum, =0 1 2 R1 1
dm 11. ,
Ta
m1 + (M m1) = 0 2 3 R 2 2
M g R g1 1R1 and g2 2R2
M = 2m1 m1 =
2 g1 1 R1 2 1 1
M g 2 2 R 2 3 2 3
m2 = M m1 = m1 = m2
2
12. According to Kepler’s third law, T2 r3
2 3/ 2
GMm1 m1v T1 r
5. Fg = = 1
r n 1 r T2 r2
GM
v= 2
r n 1 gh R
13.
2r 2r 2 r g Rh
T= r n 1 r (n 1) / 2
v GM GM g 1
Given: h
r n 1 g 100
71
ns
Energy conservation implies, Using Shortcut 1,
K1 + U1 = K2 + U2
M M R2
1 k 1 k k g = g g M
R M R M 2
2
mv12 = mv22 where v1 =
2 a 2 b 2ma
io
2
and, mv1a = mv2b M R 4g
g g
a a k 10M R / 2 10
v2 = v1 = g= 0.4 × 9.8 m s2 = 3.92 ms2
at
b b 2ma
2
1 k k 1 a k k 1 2 GMm 1 2 GMm
m = m 22. mv1 mv 2
2 2ma a 2 b 2ma b 2 (R h1 ) 2 R h2
1 5 GM GMm 1 3 GM GMm
a
b
a
= 3 or = 1
b
lic 2
m.
7 R2
R
R h1 2
m.
5 R2
R
R h2
2 2
16. During total eclipse, total attraction due to sun h1 = R h2 = R
and Moon, 5 3
ub
GM s M e GM m M e h1 : h2 = 3 : 5
F1 =
r12 r2 2 GMm Gm 2
2
23. m R
When moon goes on opposite side, effective R2 4R 2 T
force of attraction is V
2
Gm m 2
P
G MsMe G M m Me 2
M m R
F2 = R 4 T M
r12 r22 m M
m 4 R 2 3
F = F1 F2 =
2GM m M e M+ = 2
v
et
4 T G
r2 2
m 4 10 8 1033
2GM m M+ =
a = 4 30 10 14 20
r2 2 1011
3
rg
GM s 4 3
aav =
r12 40
m= 1030 kg
Percentage change in acceleration is 3
a 2GM m r2 2
100 1 100 4
a avg r2 2
GM s G R 3
Gmm 3
24. F= =
2
r M (2R) 2 4R 2
= 2 1 m 100
r2 M s 4
2 2 R 4
9
17. Change in energy =
GMm 1
= mv2 F R4
2R 2
25. T1 = T, T2 = 8T
Escape velocity is independent of the angle of 2/3 2/3
projection as gravitational field is a conservative T2 8 T
R2 = R1 R = 4R
one. T1 T
72
Textbook
Chapter No.
Hints
67
T1 = 273 = 385.07 K
Classical Thinking
ns
47.5
T2 = 385.07 273 = 112.07 C
14. 27 C = 27 + 273 = 300 K
29. At constant pressure,
15. tk = 6400 + 273 = 6673 K
V1 V
io
= 2
t c - 0 t f -32 T1 T2
16. =
100 180 Here T1 = 27 C = 300 K
20 - 0 t - 32 T2 = 297 C = 570 K
at
= f
100 180 1 V
= 2
tf = 36 + 32 = 68 F 300 570
V2 = 1.9 litre
P1 T1
24. =
P2 T2
lic 30. PV = nRT
T2 (273 + 198) 50 100 = 1RT and 100 V = 3RT
P2 = P1 = ´1 100V 3RT
T1 (273 + 41) =
50 ´100 1RT
ub
P2 = 1.5 atmosphere V = 150 ml
PV
25. Since = constant 39. L2 = L1(1 + t)
T 50 = L1 (1 + 16 106 65)
P1V1 PV 50 = L1 (1 + 1040 106) = L1 (1.001)
P
= 2 2
T1 T2 L1 = 49.95 cm
Here T1 = 27 C = 300 K
P1V1 3P ´ 3V1
40. L2 L1 = L1 (t2 t1)
et
= 0.7128 = A2 110
273.15 T2
A2 = 110.71 cm2
T2 = 191.21 K
change in volume
P1 T1 46. =
27. = original volume × change in temperature
P2 T2
0.84
P2 90 ´ 300 =
T2 = .T1 = = 375 K = 102 C 100 ´ 200
P1 72 = 42 106/ C
28. At constant pressure, Q
V1 V 53. c=
= 2 mDT
T1 T2 1200
=
V2 500 ´ (90 -10)
T2 = T1
V1 = 0.03 cal/g C
73
84. R1 (1 0) and R2 (2 0) 10tf – 320 = 18tf – 4916.7
R1 k (θ1 - θ 0 ) 8tf = 4596.7
=
R2 k (θ 2 - θ 0 ) tf = 574.58 F
1.5 30 1
= 9. PV = constant, V
1 (θ 2 - θ 0 ) P
(2 0) = 20 C. V2 P1
=
V1 P2
64 - 55 9
85. R1 = = P1
10 10 V2 = V1
P2
55 - 42 13
R2 = = 1
10 10 V2 = 60 = 15 cm3
R1 9 / 10 9 4
= =
ns
R 2 13 / 10 13 10. Comparing with
PV = nRT
86. L1 = L1(1 + 1t1), L2 = L2(1 + 2t2) Here, n = 3
DL1 L (1 + α1t1 ) Hence V represents volume of 3 moles of gas.
= 1
io
DL 2 L 2 (1 + α 2 t 2 )
11. On mixing, n1 + n2 = n
t α P1V1 PV P(V1 + V2 )
For 1 = 2 , 1t1 = 2t2 + 2 2 =
t 2 α1 RT1 RT2 RT
at
DL1 L1 P(V1 + V2 )(T1T2 )
= i.e., independent of temperature of T=
DL 2 L 2 P1V1T2 + P2 V2T1
rods. P1V1 + P2V2 = P(V1+ V2) (From Boyle’s law)
æ100 + 70
çç -15÷÷÷
ö
lic T=
(P1V1 + P2 V2 )T1T2
R1 è ç 2 ø (85 -15) 7 (P1V1T2 + P2 V2T1 )
87. = = =
R2 æ 70 + 40 ö÷ ( 55 -15) 4
çç - 15 ÷ 13. In summer alcohol expands, density decreases,
çè ø÷
ub
2 so 1 litre of alcohol will weigh less in summer
R1t1 = R2t2 than in winter.
R1 7
t2 = t1 = 4 = 7 minute 14. Boiling occurs when the vapour pressure of
R2 4
liquid becomes equal to the atmospheric
P
10 18
18t = 10t 320
t = 40 C
B
A B
A
Ta
ns
æγö
2π DR = 2π R çç ÷÷÷Dθ
21. (OR)2 (PR) 2 (PO) 2 çè 3 ø
æl ö
2
él ù
2
3 DR 3´ 3
l 2 - çç ÷÷÷ = [l (1 + α 2 t)]2 - ê (1 + α1t)ú Dθ = = = 503 C
çè 2 ø êë 2 úû γ R 3.6 ´10-5 ´ 497
io
l2 l2 Nearest answer is (C).
l2 - = l 2 (1 + α 22 t 2 + 2α 2 t) - (1 + α12 t 2 + 2α1t)
4 4 34. Change in volume of flask
at
Neglecting α t and α t
2 2
2
2 2
1
= Change in volume of mercury.
V(3) r = Vt
l2 2α
0 = l 2 (2α 2 t) - (2α1t) 2α 2 = 1 α1 = 4α 2 V (3α)
4 4 V =
23. = 2
lic γ
2000 ´ 3´ 9 ´10-6
= 4 106 / C = = 300 c.c
1.8´10-4
A2 = A1 (1+ t) = 0.32 (1 + 4 106 80)
Let the original temperature be 0 C;
ub
A2 = 0.3201 m2 35.
Volume of A = V1 = l (2r)2 ;
27. Since the expansion of isotropic solids is in all After heating volume of A will become,
directions, on heating the system, x, r, d all V1 = V1(1 + T)
increase.
(V1¢- V1 )
P
28. When a copper ball is heated, its size increases. = T V1 V1 V1
V1
As volume (radius)3 and area (radius)2, so Similarly for rod B,
percentage increase will be largest in its volume.
(V2¢ - V2 )
et
V = 1000 [1.82 × 10–4 – 0.3 × 10–4] × 100 37. The value of specific heat will depend upon
= 15.2 cc nature of substance and will vary for different
substances. Also, it depends on the state of the
30. Water will overflow, both when heated or substance. For example, specific heat of ice,
cooled because water has maximum density or water and steam is 0.5 cal/g C, 1 cal/g C and
minimum volume at 4 C. 0.47 cal/g C respectively.
31. Since, the coefficient of linear expansion of
40. Using Q = mc D T = mc(T1 T2)
brass is greater than that of steel. On cooling,
Q
the brass contracts more, so it get loosened. c=
m(T1 - T2 )
32. Given l1 = l2 l1α a t = l2αs t In this case, T1 = T2 = 100 C
l1 αs l1 αs Q
= = . c= =
l2 α a l1 + l2 α a + α s m(0)
75
ns
640 = m 80 m = 8 g
coming down to 0 C
Short trick: You can remember that amount of
= m1c1T1 + m2c2T2 + m3c3T3 ....(i)
steam (m) at 100°C required to melt m g ice at
Total heat used by three liquids in raising m
0°C is m .
io
temperature from 0 C to T C 8
= m1c1T + m2c2T + m3c3T ....(ii) Here, m = 8 m = 8 1 = 8 g
By equating (i) and (ii), æ DQ ö÷
at
58. çç
(m1c1 + m2c2 + m3c3) T çè t ÷ø÷
= m1c1T1 + m2c2T2 + m3c3T3 æ DQ ö÷
çç
m c T + m 2c2T2 + m3c3T3 çè t ÷ø÷ Δθ1
T= 1 1 1 .
m1cl + m 2c2 + m3c3
lic æ DQ ö÷
çç
1
=
Δθ 2
çè t ÷÷ø
2
49. For same mass and material, latent heat is
60 80 - 20
independent of configuration. =
æ DQ ÷ö 40 - 20
ub
çç
50. The latent heat of vaporization is always greater çè t ÷÷ø
2
than latent heat of fusion because in liquid to æ DQ ö÷
çç = 20 cal/s
vapour phase change there is a large increase in çè t ÷÷ø
volume. Hence more heat is required as compared 2
P
Δx Δx K
If mi = Initial mass of ice, mi = Mass of ice that
Hence If Xc = Xm = Xg, then
melts and mW = Initial mass of water æ Δθ ö÷ æ Δθ ÷ö æ Δθ ö÷
Heat gained by ice = Heat lost by water çç ÷ < çç ÷ < çç ÷
çè Δx ø÷ çè Δx ÷ø çè Δx ø÷
rg
ns
dQ 1 80 - 70 é 80 + 70 ù
same µ = kê - 40ú
dt l 5 ê
ë 2 úû
(dQ / dt)semi circular l 2r 2 2 = 35 k …(i)
So = straight = = .
(dQ / dt)straight lsemicircular π r π 80 - 60 é 80 + 60 ù
io
= kê - 40ú
t êë 2 úû
68. Let the heat transferred be Q.
20
= 30 k …(ii)
t
at
l l Dividing equation (i) by (ii),
l
t 35
=
When rods are joined end to end. Heat 10 30
transferred by each rod
KAΔθ
lic t=
35
10 = 12 minute
=Q= 12 ....(i) 30
2l
When rods are joined lengthwise, 82. According to Newton’s law of cooling
Rate of cooling Mean temperature difference
ub
K2ADθ
Q= t ....(ii) Fall in temperature æç θ1 + θ 2 ö
l µç - θ 0 ÷÷÷
From equation (i) and (ii), t = 3 s Time çè 2 ø
æθ + θ ö æθ + θ ö æθ + θ ö
69.
DQ
=
KAΔθ ççç 1 2 ÷÷÷ > ççç 1 2 ÷÷÷ > ççç 1 2 ÷÷÷
P
t Δx è 2 ø1 è 2 ø2 è 2 ø3
Thermal gradient T1 < T2 < T3
Δθ (DQ / At)
= 83. According to Newton’s law of cooling
et
Δx K
Rate of cooling mean temperature difference.
20
= = 25 C/cm Initially, mean temperature difference
0.8 æ 70 + 60 ö
= ççç - θ 0 ÷÷÷ = (65 0)
rg
77
50 - 49.9 é 50 + 49.9 ù æ m ö÷ æ ö
85. = kê - 30ú ….(i) çç ÷ = çç m ÷÷ 2
5 ê
ë 2 úû çè t ø÷ èç t ø÷1
2
40 - 39.9 é 40 + 39.9 ù æ m ö÷
= kê - 30ú ….(ii) çç ÷ = 0.1 2 = 0.2 g/s
t ëê 2 ûú çè t ø÷
2
from equations (i) and (ii) t 10 s 91. The plate is made up of anisotropic material with
dθ different coefficients of thermal expansion. Hence,
86. = k( 0) upon heating, plate will not remain circular. Also,
dt
0.2 as coefficients of thermal expansion are in
k= = 0.01/min mutually perpendicular direction, it will become
20
elliptical in shape.
87. According to Newton’s law of cooling,
θ1 - θ 2 éθ + θ ù
ns
= k ê 1 2 - θ0 ú XA
heating
t ëê 2 ûú XB
Case 1:
60 - 50 é 60 + 50 ù
= kê - θ0 ú 92. Let L be the length of each rod.
io
10 êë 2 úû
Temperature of A = 120 C,
1 = k(55 ) ….(i) Temperature of E = 20 C
Case 2:
at
50 - 42 é 50 + 42 ù C (2)
= kê - θ0 ú Q6
10 êë 2 úû x
Q2 x x
0.8 = k(46 0) ….(ii) A Q1
E (20 C)
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii),
1 55 - θ
lic (120 C) y B
(1)
y
Q4
y
Q5
= Q3
0.8 46 - θ
46 0 = 44 – 0.8 0 D (3)
Let 1, 2, 3 be respective temperatures of B, C,
ub
0 = 10 C
D. If Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6 are the amounts of
89. Since the relation between tc and tf is given by heat flowing per second respectively from A to
9 B; B to C; B to D; C to D; D to E and C to E
tf = tc + 32
5 then
P
9 L
1st graph satisfies the above condition. 0.46 A 1 3
Q3 = ,
Q KADθ L
90. = 0.92A 2 3
rg
t Dx Q4 =
mL K(πr 2 )Dθ L
= 0.46 A 3 20
t Dx Q5 = ,
For 1st rod L
Ta
æ m ÷ö 2 0.92 A 2 20
çç ÷ = K1r1 ….(i) Q6 =
÷
çè t ø x1 L
1
ns
4.2 103 (100 20) Now Q = mL m = =
L 334 ´103
= 1 hr 8 min. = 1.552 kg = 1552 g
96. For cooking utensils, low specific heat is 105. As the coefficient of cubical expansion of
preferred for its material as it should need less
io
metal is less as compared to the coefficient of
heat to raise its temperature and it should have cubical expansion of liquid, we may neglect
high conductivity, because, it should transfer the expansion of metal ball. So when the ball is
heat quickly. immersed in alcohol at 0 ºC, it displaces some
at
volume V of alcohol at 0 C and has weight
97. According to Newton’s law of cooling, the body
W1.
whose rate of cooling is more, its specific heat
will be less. W1 = W0 – V0g
98.
lic
Substances are classified into two categories
where W0 = weight of ball in air
Similarly, W2 = W0 – V50g
i. water like substances which expand on where 0 = density of alcohol at 0 ºC
solidification. and 50 = density of alcohol at 50 ºC
ub
ii. CO2 like (Wax, Ghee etc.) which contract As 50 < 0, W2 > W1 or W1 < W2
on solidification.
Their behaviour regarding solidification is
opposite. Competitive Thinking
Melting point of ice decreases with rise of
P
temperature but that of wax etc increases with 1. Relation between any two scales can be found
increase in temperature. Similarly ice starts as follows –
forming from top downwards whereas wax ¢ - (Freezing point)¢ Tscale
Tscale ¢¢ - (Freezing point)¢¢
et
t =
80 160
This must be the heat supplied for keeping the 50- 40 T + 30
substance in molten state per second. = y
1 2
mL Pt
Ta
=P L= Ty = 10
t m
2. Assuming the graph for a gas of given mass, we
100. Freezing point of water decreases when pressure have,
increases, because water expands on solidification PV = nRT
while “except water” for other liquid freezing point V 1
increases with increase in pressure.
T P
Since the liquid in question is water. Hence, it V
expands on freezing. From the graph, = tan
T
nRT 1
103. From ideal gas equation PV = nRT P = tan
V P
nRT 2 as angle increases, tan increases and
Given PT2 = K 3
⋅ T = K = nRT = KV pressure decreases.
V
….(i) P1 > P2
79
74.8 75.4
1.04343
ns
30 C 10 C
Case I Case II
In first case:
io
When atmospheric pressure is Pa and barometric
pressure is Pb, pressure difference P1 = Pa Pb = 1.00013
76 – 74.8 = 1.2 cm 1.00000
at
In second case, let atmospheric pressure be Pa 0 5 10 100 T
and corresponding barometric pressure Pb. Temperature (C)
Pressure difference P2 = Pa Pb = Pa 75.4 Graph of Volume v/s Temperature
length of air column in the barometer.
lic
Volumes in both cases will be equivalent to the
11. l2 – l1 = l1 α (T2 – T1)
V1 = 90 – 74.8 = 15.2 units 6 10 5
and V2 = 90 – 75.4 = 14.6 units. T2 – T1 = = 5.45 C 6 C
1 11 10 6
As number of moles of gas in the barometer
ub
tube is constant, Hence, range of temperature is (25 – 6)C to
P1V1 P2 V2 (25 + 6)C
= i.e., 19 C to 31 C
T1 T2
1.2 ´15.2 P ´14.6 12. When two rods of different materials (1 and
P
= 2 P2 = 1.166 cm
303 283 2) have same difference between their lengths
Pa = 75.4 + 1.166 = 76.566 cm L1 T1 2
at all temperatures then, .
7. L = L (1 + t) L2 T2 1
et
A 1 l b 1
13. = =
l2 2t = l1 1t A
0 t l b t
i.e., l22 = l11 l b
= + = 1 + 2
8. 1 = 13600 kg/m3, t1 = 0 C, t2 = 50 C l t b t
= 1.82 104/C
m m 14. Q = mcT
= V= Q
V ρ T =
mc
V2 = V1 (1 + T)
1
1 1 i.e., Rise in temperature
= (1 + γDT) c
ρ 2 ρ1
….(assuming Q and m to be constant)
ρ1 13600 Amongst the given curves, rise in temperature is
2 = =
(1 + γDt) 1 + (1.82 ´ 10-4 ´ 50) least for curve C.
= 13477.35 kg/m3 Hence, substance C has highest specific heat.
80
ns
45
Heat lost by bodies = Heat gained by bodies
m1c1T1 m 2c 2T2 m3c3T3 Heat lost by Heat gained by calorimeter
=T 21.
m1c1 m 2c 2 m3c3 copper ball and water
mb cc 1 = mc cc 2 + mw cw 2
io
As bodies are made of same material,
c1 = c2 = c3 = c(say) (100)(0.1)(T – 75) = (100)(0.1)(75 – 30)
(m 40 m 50 3m 60) c + (170)(1)(75 – 30)
T= 10(T – 75) = 450 + 7650 = 8100
mc mc 3mc
at
T – 75 = 810
270
= =54 C T = 885 C
5
22. mw = 150 g = 0.15 kg
18.
m c t m c t
t = 1 1 1 2 2 2 and c1 = c2
m1c1 m 2c 2
lic The heat required to evaporate ‘m’ grams of water,
Qrequired = mLv ....(i)
250 90 20 5 (0.15 – m) is the amount of mass that converts
t= = 83.7 C
250 20 into ice
ub
19. Mixing A and B: Qreleased = (0.15 – m) Lf ....(ii)
Heat gained by A = Heat lost by B Amount of heat Amount of heat
mA cA TA = mB cB TB required = released
m cA(16 – 12) = m cB (19 – 16)
P
Mixing A and C:
mass converted to steam = (M m)
mAcATA = mC cC TC
Heat lost during Heat gained during
m cA(x – 12) = m cC (28 – x) conversion of water to ice = vapourisation
where, x is final temperature of mixture
i.e., mcwi + mLi
15
cC (x 12) = cC (28 – x) = (M m) cw s + (M m) Ls
16
m 1 (t 0) + m (80)
x = 20.26 C
= (M m) 1 (100 t) + (M m) 540
20. 15 C ice m(t + 80) = (M m) (100 – t) + 540M 540m
0 C
m mt + 80m = 100M 100m Mt + mt +
water water ice 540M 540m
60 g 10 C 720m = 640M Mt
m m m 640 t
60 g + (water) + (ice)
2 2 M 720
81
24. Heat required to melt the ice = 1 80 = 80 cal Where, Rs = Thermal resistivity
Heat required to change the temperature of Q l1 l
i.e. ts = 2
water to 100 C = 11 (100 0) = 100 cal K1A1 K 2 A 2
Total heat required Q1 = 180 cal
Q 2l
Now, heat to be given out for 1 g of steam to 8= ….(i)
condense into liquid Q2 = 540 cal KA
As Q2 > Q1, the whole system is not condensed. Case II :
Temperature remains 100 C. When rods are connected in parallel,
QR p Q 1
25. Heat required to melt ice = mi Li tp = ….(ii)
2KA
= 60 80 = 4800 cal l
Heat required to change the temperature of
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii),
water at 100 C (steam)
ns
8 QR s
= ms cw
tp QR p
= 60 1 (100 0) = 6000 cal
Total heat Q1= 6000 + 4800 = 10800 cal l KA
Now, heat required to condense 60 g of steam
= 2 2 l =4
KA
io
Q2 = 60 540 = 32400 cal tp = 2 s
As Q2 > Q1, whole 60 g of steam does not get
condensed. 28. The amount of heat flow in time t through a
at
Hence, temperature of mixture remains cylindrical metallic rod of length x and uniform
100 C. area of cross-section A with its ends maintained
But Q1 amount of heat will condense M g of at temperatures 1 and 2 is given by
steam, KA(θ1 θ 2 )t
M=
Q1 10800
= = 20 g
lic Q=
x
Ls 540 where K is the thermal conductivity of the
material of the rod.
Hence, out of 60 g , 20 g of steam is converted
Area of cross-section of new rod
into water.
ub
2
R R
2
mixture contains 40 g of steam and A = =
120 40 = 80 g of water. 2 4
A
Q KA A =
26. 4
P
t l
As the volume of the rod remains unchanged
All the four rods are kept at same temperature
Ax = Ax
difference.
where x is the length of the new rod
et
Q A
A
t l x = x = 4x
A'
Q r2
Now, the amount of heat flows in same time t in
t l
rg
l
r 2
29. Rate of flow of heat temperature difference
Ratio is maximum in option (D).
l ....( K, A and x being unchanged)
27. The rods are identical and are of same material, 4 10
ie. l1 = l2 = l Q 10
And K1=K2=K ….K = thermal conductivity Q = 4 J/s
also, A1 = A2 = A
Case I : Q T
30. Using formula, =
When rods are connected end to end (series), t x / KA
Q For first configuration, blocks are arranged in
ts R s series combination.
Q Rs x l l
ts = = +
KA KA 2KA
82
ns
2 2 5 cm
t = t 9 = 2 s
9 9
The window can be considered to be a series
dT combination of three layers, such that,
31. KA t = mL,
io
dx K1 = K3 = 0.8 Wm–1 K–1, K2 = 0.08 Wm–1 K–1
1 K t A1 = A2 = A3 = 2.6 m2,
K So, 1 = 2
t K2 t1 l1 = l3 = 1 cm and l2 = 5 cm
at
Equivalent thermal resistance,
32. 100 C Req = R1 + R2 + R3
l1 l2 l3
Cu = + +
K1 A1 K 2 A2 K 3 A3
T
lic 1 102 5 102 1 102
= + +
B Brass 0.8 2.6 0.08 2.6 0.8 2.6
Steel
2 102 5 101
0 C =
ub
0 C 0.8 2.6
Q = Q1 + Q2 … Q KA t 0.52 1
x = =
0.8 2.6 4
0.92 4(100 T) 0.26 4 (T 0) 0.12 4 T
Q 18 2
=
P
46 13 12 = = 20 4 = 80 W.
t R 1
200 – 2T = 2T + T
T = 40 °C 4
0.92 4 60
et
d d d
K1 K 2
KP =
2
80
6 38. The temperature of the metal will decrease
K = 0.0005 cal/cm s C exponentially with time to 0.
Q
KA 39. According to Newton’s law of cooling
t x d
Here, A = area of cross-section of refrigerator K( 0 )
dt
= 150 80 cm2
where K is constant of proportionality.
x = length of (conductor) refrigerator Integrating
door through which heat is lost 0 t
= 6 cm d
0 0
Kdt
= 30 C
83
loge(0)
d
be expressed as, k 2 0
dt 2
loge ( 0) = kt + c
ns
50 42 1
which represents a straight (50 26)
line graph. 0 t dt 30
8 30
dt = = 10 min
41. According to Newton’s law of cooling, 24
io
70 60 70 60 45. From Newton’s law of cooling,
In first case, =K 30
5 2 dQ
= K ( – 0)
at
2 dt
K= C/min
35 When the liquid is maintained at = 57 C by
60 50 60 50 heater of power 30 W,
In 2nd case, K 30
30 = K (57 – 27)
t 2
10 2
[55 – 30]
lic K=1 ….(i)
t 35 Also, Q = mc
10 35 dQ mc d
t= = 7 min = = K ( – 0)
2 25 dt dt
ub
As temperature difference is too small, can be
94 86 94 86 considered as 47 C.
42. = K 20
2 2 250 103 c 47 46.9
= K (47 – 27)
4 = K [90 – 20] 10
P
4 0.0025 c = 20 K
K=
70 0.0025 c = 20 ….[From (i)]
74 66 4 74 66 20
Also, = 20 c= = 8000 J kg–1 K–1
et
t 70 2 0.0025
8 4
= (70 – 20) 46. By Newton’s law of cooling,
t 70 1 2 2
K 1 0
rg
8 4 50 t
= 2
t 70
70 8 72
80 70 = K(75 25)
t= = 12
4 50 5
Ta
10 = K 600
t = 2.8 minutes 1
K= ….(i)
43. According to Newton’s law of cooling, 60
1 2 2
k 1 0
70 60 = K(65 25)
t 2 t
70 60 1
First k 65 0 K= ….(ii)
5 t 4
2 = k[65 0] From (i) and (ii)
60 54 1 1
Next k 57 0
5 4t 60
Dividing (i) and (ii) 60
t =
5 65 0 4
3 57 0 t = 15 minutes
84
ns
T (1 + t)1/2 mgh
Calculating fractional change in time period of mL
pendulum, 4
T 1 10 h
= 3.4 105
io
= (t) 4
T 2
For the given pendulum, h = 13.6 104 m = 136 km
T = 24 60 60 = 86400 s 52. F = AYT
at
When t1 = 40 C, T = 12 s, = 1.2 105 2.5 106 2 1011 40
T 1 = 240 N
(40 t0)
T 2
53. When external pressure is applied on the cube,
show correct time.
lic
Where, t0 is temperature at which the clock will
the compression produced in volume is
12 1 V P
= (40 t0) ….(i) ....(i)
86400 2 V K
Similarly , when t2 = 20 C, T = 4 s When heated, the cube will expand through,
ub
4 1 V = V ( T)
= (t0 20) ….(ii) V
86400 2 = 3T ....(ii) ( = 3)
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), V
12 (40 t 0 ) Hence, equating equations (i) and (ii),
P
=
4 (t 0 20) P
3T =
3t0 60 = 40 t0 K
t0 = 25 C P
et
T =
Substituting it in equation (i), 3K
12 1
= (40 – 25)
86400 2 54. Q = KA dt
x
rg
12 2
= Now, Q = mL
15 86400
= 18.5 106 = 1.85 105 /C mL = KA dt
x
Ta
1 dQ
K.E. = v 2rel 56. = 50% of input P
2 dt
1 m dQ 15 103
= (2u)2 Pout = = W
2 2 dt 2
2
= mu dQ d
Also this K.E. is used to completely melt both Also, = mc
dt dt
the blocks.
15 10 3
d
mu2 = Q = (mL + mc ) 2 = 10 0.91 103
2 2 60
u2 = 2 (L + c)
= (2 3.36 105) + {(2 2100 [0 – (–8)]} 15 103 2 60
d = = 98.9 C
= 2 (336000 + 16800) 2 10 0.91 103
= 705600
ns
u = 840 m/s
io
1. In steady state the quantity of heat absorbed and 4. Coefficient of linear expansion for brass
quantity of heat radiated is same. (1.8 105 C) > coefficient of linear expansion
at
for steel (1.1 105 C). On cooling the disc
2. According to Newton’s law of cooling, shrinks to a greater extent than the hole and
1 2 hence it will get loose.
= K 1 2 0
t 2
where, 0 = tempeature of surrounding
lic 5. Let the temperature of junction be
Q Q
=
60 50 60 50 t copper t steel
= K 30
8 2
100 = K 2 A 2.5
ub
10 K1A
= K × 25 ….(i) 20 5
8
9 K2
= K ( – 2.5)
100
( K1 = 9K2)
After another 20 min, let the temperature be . 4
2
50 50 900 – 9 = 4 – 10
P
= K 30 ….(ii)
20 2 13 = 910
50 10 50 = 70 C.
= 30 using (i)
20 8 25 2
et
2(50 – ) = 50 + – 60 and B.
100 – 2 = –10 +
3 = 110 7. If l is the original length of wire, then change in
length of first wire, lA = (lA – l)
Ta
110
= = 36.67 C. Change in length of second wire, lB = (lB – l)
3
Now Young’s Modulus,
3. Let ‘m’ grams be the mass of the steam. TA l T l
Y= = B
Heat lost by the steam = m L A lA A lB
+ m 1 (100 – 0) TA T TA T
B B
= m × 540 + 100m lA lB lB l lB l
= 640m TAlB – TAl = TBlA – TBl
Heat gained by ice = mi c T + miL TBlA TAlB
l=
= 1600 0.5 [0 – (–8)] + 1600 80 TB TA
= 134400 cal. 8. Increase in volume of flask
According to principle of calorimetry, = 40 ×10–6 × 4000 × 80
640m = 134400 m = 210 g. = 12.8 cc
86
ns
10. Colour is an indication of temperature of the m1 c1 (t2 t0) = m2 c2 (t0 t1)
body. If two pieces of same substance appear of 200 0.08 (t 22.8) = 500 1 (22.8 10)
different colours, then their temperatures must t = 422. 8 C
be different. In this case, TA < TB
io
11. Number of moles of gas in two flasks are
P1V1 PV
n1 = and n2 = 2 2
at
RT RT
n = n1 + n2
P =
n1 n 2 RT = P1V1 P2 V2
V1 V2 V1 V2
13.
lic
Fahrenheit scale and Absolute scale are related
as
TF 32 TK 273 15
= ….(i)
ub
180 100
For another set of temperature TF and TK,
TF 32 TK 273 15
= ….(ii)
180 100
P
180
TF-TF = TK
100
180 9
If TK – TK = 1 K then, TF TF = 1 =
100 5
rg
5
14. At absolute zero temperature, pressure P of gas
would reduce to zero. The volume V of the gas
would also become zero. If we were to imagine
going below this temperature, volume of gas
would be negative, which is impossible. That
suggests that the lowest attainable temperature
is absoulate zero.
At absolute zero, the translatory motion of
molecules ceases but other forms of molecular
energy (like inter molecular potential energy) do
not become zero. Therefore absolute zero
temperature is not the temperature of zero-
energy.
87
Textbook
Chapter No.
08 Sound
Hints
E
Classical Thinking 55. v=
E = v2 = (4 103)2 2200 = 3.52 1010 N/m2
ns
Distance travelled by wave (λ)
14. Velocity of wave =
Time period (T)
P 0.76 13600 9.8
Wavelength is also defined as the distance 56. v= = = 279.9 m/s
1.293
between two nearest points in phase.
io
v 3 108 P 1.36 0.76 13000 9.8
15. n= = = 1.5 106 Hz 57. v= =
200 1.29
v 340 v = 319.5 m/s
at
16. 1 = = = 17 m,
n1 20
58. At constant temperature, change in pressure has
340 no effect on velocity of sound.
2 = = 17 103 m
20 103
va 340
lic 60. T = 27 °C = 27 + 273 = 300 K
17. a = = = 3.40 103 m v T 300
n 100 103 = = v0
v0 T0 273
v 1486
w = w = = 1.486102 m v 1.05v0
ub
n 100 10 3
88
ns
450 360
n= = 500 Hz v = n n = 180 /s.
0.9 2 1
v T 17. Time lost in covering the distance of 2 km by
89. =
io
v0 T0 d 2000
the sound waves t = 6.06 s 6 s
v 330
v T
= 1.5 = v 352
v0 273 18. ; during 1 vibration of fork sound
at
T = 273 (1.5) 2 n 384
= 614.2 K 352
will travel m
= 614.2 273 = 341.2 °C 384
during 36 vibration of fork sound will travel
Critical Thinking
lic 352
36 33 m
384
5. If the temperature changes then velocity of
wave and its wavelength changes. Frequency, 19. Surface waves are transverse.
ub
amplitude and time period remains constant. 21. Distance between two successive crests
==2m
6. Velocity of sound is independent of frequency.
Therefore it is same (v) for frequency n and 4n. Distance between a crest and trough
= =1m
P
= = 1.79 Hz we get,
56 Time 2 2
k= == = 25
(0,0) 0.08
0.14 s
2 2
rg
and = == =
48 8 T 2
8. n= = waves/s.
60 10 24. A comparing with y = (x, t) = sin (t kx)
8 2
v = n = 10 = 8 m/s = 0.01 = 200 m.
Ta
10 K=
9. From the figure, wavelength = 0.4 cm. 25. y = A sin(t + bx + c) represents equation of
n = 250 Hz (given) simple harmonic progressive wave as it
v = n = 250 0.4 = 100 cm s–1 = 1 m s–1. describes displacement of any particle (x) at any
10. Distance between crest and nearest trough time (t) or it represents a wave because it
2y 2 y
2
ns
m
P v T K(1.5)x
= constant as M is a constant = = = 1.5 = 1.22
v T Kx
From equation (i), v = 1.22 v
io
v = constant vH H M He 7 / 5 . 4 42
Thus, change in air pressure does not effect the 36. = . = =
v He M H He 2 5 / 3 5
at
speed of sound.
N
37. Since v T
v He 214
30. 2
= = 7 :1 v1 T1 and v2 T2
vN He 4
5
2
1
lic Also
v2
v1
=2
31. m= kg/m = kg/m
20 4 v2 T2 T2 T2
Tension in the middle of wire = = =
v1 T1 273 27 300
ub
T = weight of half the wire
5 5 T2
= kg = 10 N = 25 N 2 =
2 2 300
T2
v=
T
=
25
= 10 m/s 4=
P
m 1/ 4 300
T2 = 4 300 = 1200 K
T T2 = 1200 273
32. v=
m T2 = 927 °C
et
M γP
where, m = mass per unit length = 38. Speed of sound, v =
L
TL 77 × 5.5
rg
v= = = 110 m/s v1 ρ2
M 0.035 = ( P constant)
v2 ρ1
T 1
33. v= 39. vsound
Ta
m
M V AL
m= = = = A v1 2 4
L L L 2
v2 1 1
T
v= v1 vs
A v2 =
2 2
103
= = 106 40. At given temperature and pressure
10 106 100
1 v 4
v = 1000 m/s v 1 2 2 :1
v2 1 1
T
34. v= T2 v 2 v
2
m 41. v T T2 T1 2
AL T1 v1 v1
Let m = = A
L T2 = 273 4 = 1092 K
90
RT IC
42. v= n = 10 log10 = 10 log10 4 = 10 log10 4
M IA
v T = 10 0.6 = 6
v2 T2
= I1 4 a2
v1 T1 52. = = 2
I2 1 b
T 600
=
T
= 3
I max
=
a b = 2 1 = 9
2 2
T = 300 K = 27 C
I min a b 2 2 12
43. Speed of sound in gases is given by Imax I
Now, L1 – L2 = 10 log 10 log min
I0 I0
RT
v= Im ax
M = 10 log = 10 log 9
ns
1 Imin
v , L1 – L2 = 10 log 32 = 20 log 3
M
v1 M2 53. v = 340 m/s,
=
io
v2 M1 km 72 103
vs = 72 = m/s = 20 m/s
hr 3600
γRT
44. v= vn 340 640
M Using, n = =
at
v vs 340 20
TN M
= N 340 640
T0 M0 = = 680 Hz
320
TN 14 7
273 + 55
=
16
=
8
lic 54. v0 = 720 km/hr = 200 m/s
TN = 287 K = 14 C v vo
Using, n = n
1 v M O2 v 4 v vo
32
45. v H2 H2 340 200
ub
v O2 1 140
M v O2 M H2 2 n = n= 1080 = 280 Hz
340 200 540
RT
46. Velocity of sound in gas v v vo 340 60
M 55. n = n= 133
v vs 340 60
P
T n = 190 Hz
v
M
56. There is no relative motion between source and
7
4 listener.
et
v N2 N2 M He 5 3
v He He M N2 5 5 57. Let n = actual frequency of sound produced by
28
3 source.
v vl
rg
Ratio = 0 : a = 0
48. The loudness is higher if area of the vibrating v
58. n = n
body is more. The hollow boxes are set into v vs
forced vibrations along with the strings. Thus v vn vn vs n
providing higher area of vibrating body and n – n = n–n=
increase in the loudness of sound. v vs v vs
n n vs 25 1
49. Loudness depends upon intensity while pitch = = =
n v vs 100 4
depends upon frequency.
4vs = v – vs 5vs = 332 vs = 66.4 m/s
51. If a is amplitude of sound from A and B each,
then 5
59. v = 108 km/hr = 108 = 30 m/s
IA = IB = ka2, where k is constant. 18
Loudness due to C (i.e., A + B) If observer moves towards stationary source,
= IC = k (2a)2 = 4IA then the apparent frequency
91
ns
v 330
T = = 8.9 s
360
vs v 0 n
61. Since there is no relative motion between the 69. n = n=
source and listener, the apparent frequency v s 2
io
equals original frequency. 2vs 2v0 = vs or 2v0 = vs
62. Frequency of the note reflected by the wall is n1 vsound = 2v (If v = velocity of observer)
v 70. 20 m/s
=n
at
v vo
S L
Frequency of the note heard by the engine driver 15 m/s
will be
n = 500 Hz, vS = 20 m/s
n =
(v v o )
v
n1 =
v vo
v
nv
v vo
lic vL = 15 m/s, v = 335 m/s
v vL 335 15 350
v vo n = n = n = n
= n v v S 335 20 315
v vo
ub
315 315 500
340 60 n= n = = 450 Hz.
350 350
= 1400 ….[ n = 1400 Hz]
340 60
71. If the motion of a source is along a direction
400
= 1400 = 2000 Hz other than when they are in a straight line, the
P
280
component of velocity of source vscos is along
63. When source is moving towards listener, the line joining the source and listener. In this
v n 300 600 situation, apparent frequency na is not constant
n1 = = = 1800 Hz
and it depends on . It is given by
et
v vs 300 200
When source is moving away from listener, v
na = n
vn 300 600 v v cos
n2 = = = 360 Hz S
64. n = n=
3v / 2 v v A cos 45
n= n
v us vv/2 v/2
n
n = 3n = 3
n vA
A
n n 45°
=2
n vA cos 45° vB
n n
Percentage change = 100
n B
= 2 100 = 200 %
45°
65. The apparent frequency, when observer is
vB cos 45°
approaching source is
300 v 340 10 / 2
n1 = n n = 280 = 298 Hz
300 340 20 / 2
92
ns
v vS 6 9
v Velocity = n = 10 = 9 m/s
v 10
In second case, n = n = n
v vS v v/6
82. The time taken by the stone to reach the lake
io
6n
n = 2h 2 500
7
t1 = 10 s
6n g 10
n
at
n 7 100 1
100 = 100 = 14.3% (Using h ut gt 2 )
n n 7 2
v n' v v Now time taken by sound from lake to the man
74. n n h 500
v v S
2v
n v v S v vS
lic t2 =
v 340
1.5 s
= 240 = 237 Hz v
320 4 tS S t S = 240
Hence, number of beats heard by man per second vP
= na nr = 243 237 = 6 4.5
rg
t S 1 = 240
Alternate method : 8
2nvvs
Number of beats heard per second = 240 8
v 2 vs2 tS = = 548.57 s
3.5
Ta
93
=
V O2 H 2 O2 H2
[since VO2 VH2 V ]
difference of
62.5
2
cm = 31.25 cm
ns
2V 2
H2 16H2 1 98. Waves on the surface of water are transverse.
= 8.5H2 v These waves spread out till the ocean waves
2
reach the beach shore. The radius of curvature
H2 H2
io
Vmix 2 of these waves becomes so large that they can
be assumed plane waves.
VH2 mix 8.5H2 17
99. The smallest change in sound intensity that can
90. Mass per unit length
at
be detected by human ear is 1 dB.
M 2.5
m= = kg / m 100. The figure (A) does not represent periodic
l 20
motion, as the motion neither repeats itself nor
T 00
v=
m
=
2.5 / 20
lic comes to its mean position.
The figure (B) represents the periodic motion
200 200 200 with period equal to 2 s.
v= = = 40 m/s
25 5 The figure (C) does not represent periodic
motion, because it is not identically repeated.
ub
l 20
Time taken, t = = = 0.5 s The figure (D) does not represent periodic
v 40
motion, because it does not have constant
91. A motor boat sailing in water produces ripples. period.
Distance
P
1
340 2100 106
x= = 170 m =
2 103
= 1449.14 m/s
Ta
94
Alternate method:
ns
Number of beats heard per second
107. A tuning fork is made of a material for which 2nvv 2nvvS
elasticity does not change. Since the alloy of = 2 S2 =
v vS (v vS )(v vS )
nickel, steel and chromium (elinvar) has
io
constant elasticity, therefore it is used for the 2 240 320 4
=
preparation of tuning fork. (320 4)(320 4)
=6
at
1 2
108. s = gt
2
Competitive Thinking
1
78.4 = 9.8 t2
2 2. As frequency is same in both the medium,
t=4s
lic speed
Sound of splash is heard (4.23 4) s = 0.23 s
3. Distance between a compression and the nearest
later at the ground level after travelling 78.4 m.
The velocity of sound v is rarefaction is 1m.
ub
Distance 78.4 2
v= = = 340.9 m/s v 360
time 0.23 Hence n 180Hz .
2
nv
109. no = ....(n = 1, 2, 3,……) 4. Given equation of the wave can also be written as,
2L
P
nv t x
nc = ....(n = 1, 3, 5,……) Y = 3 sin 2
4L 6 10 4
For the first overtone, n = 2, for open pipe and
Comparing with y = A sin 2
t x
et
Lo 4 v 1
= o A = 3 m, n= = 0.17 Hz, = 10 m and
Lc 3 vc T
vo v = n = 1.7 m/s
c
Also, = Hence, option (D) is correct.
Ta
vc o
5. y = A sin (kx t) ….(i)
4L 1
Lo = 2 2
3 2 Now, k = =1
2
110. 1
Stationary observer = 2n= 2 2
S A=1m
S Substituting these in equation (i),
vS
y = sin (x 2t)
vS
Receding train Approaching train 6. In case of a sound wave, the reflection at a rigid
boundary will take place with a phase reversal
Frequency of sound heard by the man from of but the reflection at an open boundary takes
approaching train, place without any phase change.
95
ω 600 313
8. v= = 300 m/sec v2 = 344.2 × = 355.75 356 m/s
k 2 293
ns
Here 2v = = 2b v = b Tension T = Mg = mxg
2π 1
k= = 2c = c v=
mxg
λ λ
m
1
io
(Here c is the symbol given for and not the dx
λ xg
dt
velocity)
For string of length L, integrating over,
1 b
at
Velocity of the wave = v = b = L
dx
t
c c
xg 0
dt
dy 0
= a2b cos 2(bt cx) = acos(t kx) t L
dt 1
dt = x
1/ 2
dx
b
lic
Maximum particle velocity = a = a2b = 2ab 0 g 0
20
given this is 2 1 x1/2
c t= 1 / 2 ( L = 20 m)
g 0
2 1
i.e., 2a = or c =
ub
c πa 2
= 20 = 2 2 s
10
P
10. v= 16. Apparent frequency for source moving towards
He
the stationary observer is given by,
P
hg v
= n = n
He
v vs
0.76 13600 9.8 As the source moves towards the observer,
et
=
0.179 frequency increases, hence wavelength decreases.
752 m/s
17. Apparent frequency is given by,
RT V ± V0
rg
Also v is constant, V + V1
TM F1 = F
V
TH2 M H2
= V V1
TO2 M O2 F2 = F
V
TH2 2
= F1 V + V1
(273 100) 32 =
F2 V V1
TH2 = 23.3 K = 249.7 C V + V1
2=
1 V V1
12. Velocity of sound wave v where, M is 2V – 2V1 = V + V1
M
weight of gas. V = 3V1
Hence, smaller the molecular weight of the gas, V
=3
greater is velocity of sound in that gas. V1
96
ns
n receding v vs this frequency is reflected as an echo towards car.
1000 350 50 Hence, frequency of echo heard by the driver is
n r 750 Hz
nr 350 50 330 20
ndriver = 660 = 700 Hz
330 0
io
v 320 320
20. n1 = n
v v n 320 20 n 300 Hz 27. fincident = freflected =
v
n=
320
8 kHz
s
v vs 320 10
v 320
at
n2 = n n 340 Hz 320 10 330
v v s
fobserved = freflected = 8
320 310
Percentage change in frequency = 8.51 kHz 8.5 kHz.
n 2 n1 n
n1
100 = 2 1 100
n1
lic 28. As source crosses stationary listener then, ratio
of apparent frequencies before crossing (n1) and
after crossing (n2) is,
= 100
300
1 12 %
340 n1 v v s
ub
n 2 v vs
v
21. n = n n1 v vs 500 350 50
v vs n2 = =
v vs 350 50
n v n2 = 375 Hz
P
n v vs
29. As observer is at rest, frequency heard by observer
5 350 v
Case I: n = n
6 350 vs
v vs
et
vs = 70 m/s
Case II: n = n
v
22. The frequency of reflected sound heard by the v vs
driver, As speed vs is constant, n = constant n.
rg
97
m g2 a 2
v =
Observer Building
v g2 a 2
ns
In this case observer and building are stationary v g
with respect to each other hence no doppler shift 2
g2 a 2
of reflected sound. 60.5
v 60 g
Hence na = n
io
g
v vs a
5
340
= 780 = 816 Hz 38. As string is clamped resulting wave is a
340 15
at
standing wave of equation y = 2A sin kx cost
32. Case I: Comparing with given equation,
When passenger is sitting in train ‘A’ 2
= 60 and k =
3
n1 n v = v ….(i)
n1 =
v vA
v
n
n
A
lic
Now velocity v = =
60
= 90 m/s
k 2
Case II: 3
When passenger is sitting in train B, Also, velocity of transverse wave,
ub
v vB n 2 n v = v ….(ii) T T
n2 = n B v= =
v n m M/L
Dividing (ii) by (i), M 902 3 102
vB n n T = v2 = = 162 N
= 2 L 1.5
P
vA n1 n
39. Let the sound reach the other boy through metal
vB 6000 5000 in t seconds and let distance between them be x.
= =2
vA 5500 5000 Distance = speed time
et
x = 3630 t
v v0 Now, the sound through air reaches in
33. n = n
v vs (t + 1) seconds.
rg
340 v A
4.5 = 4 1
340 T= second
10
v vB
vA = 42.5 m/s and nB = n
1
x = 330 1 = 363 m
v 10
340 v B 40.
5= 4
340
vB = 85 m/s m1
34. Since there is no relative motion between the
source and observer, no change in real
frequency is observed. m2
v v0 340 20 Let velocity of pulse at lower end be v1 and at
35. napproach = n 850 ,
v 340 top be v2
98
ns
41. = 106 m
A A 2
N As Mean free path = wavelength of sound wave
1.38 1380
106 =
io
2
1 1380 2
L= 60 cm = = 1000 2 MHz
2 106 1.38
at
v
Fundamental frequency, n0 = 43. Speed of wave v T
1
But, tension (T) extension (x)
here, 1 = 2L
v x
Also, v =
Y
lic When extension is increased, let speed becomes
v
v 1 Y v x
n0 = =
1 2L v 1.5 x
ub
1 9.27 1010 v = 1.5 v = 1.22v
n0 = 2
2 60 10 2.7 103
= 4.88 103 Hz 5 kHz
P
v0 v 33296 cm/s
273 30
3. Given: Molecular mass of neon (MNe) = 20MH.
v = 33296 – 33200 = 96 cm/s (where MH is the molecular mass of hydrogen)
96 Volume of neon (VNe) = volume of hydrogen
% error = 100 = 0.29%
Ta
33200 (VH)
2. O 1500 m
Molecular mass of mixture,
A C Mmix = MNe + MH = 20MH + MH = 21MH
Volume of the mixture,
(Vmix) = VNe + VH = VH + VH = 2VH.
1800 m Density of a gas,
M
V
mix M mix VH 21M H VH 21
B Therefore,
H M H Vmix MH 2VH 2
Time for the echo = 12 s (i.e., for sound to travel
ABC). Velocity of the plane = 250 m/s. Velocity of sound in a gas is given by,
OC = 250 6 = 1500 m P 1
v , i.e., v
BC = velocity of sound 6
99
ns
1.66 1.30
outer space, we have a vacuum and hence sound and v He , vCO2
wave propagation is not possible. 4 1.44
Comparing values, velocity of sound will be
RT largest in hydrogen.
6. v ; is the same as both hydrogen and
io
M
chlorine are diatomic.
vH2 M Cl 70 35.5
at
2
6
vCl2 M H2 2 1
RT
et
M
7
v N2 N2 R4
M 5 3
He
v He He M N2 5 5
Ta
R 28
3
100
Textbook
Chapter No.
09 Optics
Hints
ns
m=–3=–
11. According to laws of reflection, i = r u
When i = 2i, v = 3u
r = 2i = 2(15) = 30 1 1 1
Also + =
v u f
io
c 100 100
13. n= = = = 1.43 1 1 1
v 100 30 70 + =
u 3u 15
sin i sin 45 u = – 20 cm
at
14. n= = = 2
sin r sin30 When m = + 3 (virtual image)
c 3 108 v
v= = = 2.12 108 m/s m = +3 = –
n 2 u
3 108
lic v = – 3u
15. vg = = 2 108 m/s 1 1 1
3/ 2 + =
u 3u 15
Distance = vg t
u = – 10 cm
ub
= 2 108 10–12 = 2 10–4 m
= 200 m 1 1 1
39. + =
v u f
360
17. n= –1=5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
60 = = = +
P
v f u 15 12 15 12
18. As, the object is placed symmetrically, v = + 6.7 cm
360 360
n= 1 3 = 1 = 90 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4
et
40. = + = + = =
f v u 5 25 5 25 25
24. Focal length of convex/concave mirror depends f = + 6.25 cm
only on radius of curvature (R) of the mirror. It f is positive therefore the mirror is convex.
rg
1 1 1 1 1 1
= + = + = 1 1 1 1 1
f v u 24 40 15 = = 11.25 cm
v f u 45 15
f = 15 cm
v 11.25
1 1 1 m=– =– = 0.75
30. + = u 15
v u f
Using mirror equation with Cartesian sign 42. Using Shortcut 2,
conventions, v = (m 1) f
1 1 1 1 1 1
= + = = 1 60
f 30 10 30 10 2
15 v = + 30 cm behind mirror.
f= cm
2
a
15 w ng 1.5
and R = 2f = 2 = 15 cm 48. ng = a
2 nw 1.3
101
ns
h h f R R R R
53. n h
h n f = R = 30 cm
Realdepth
54. n= 1 1 1
Apparent depth 85. = a
n g 1
io
f R1 R 2
Realdepth 46
Apparent depth = = = 34.5 cm For a plano-convex lenx,
n 4/3
R2 = and R1 = R
at
1 1 1
62. sin iC = therefore iC will be maximum when = (1.5 1)
n 20 R
n is minimum which is for red light. 1 0.5
=
63. n=
1
=
1
=
2
= 1.15
lic
20 R
R = 10 cm
sin i C sin 60 3
v 1
1 1 1 88. m= =
64. n= = = = 2.41 u 4
ub
sin i C sin (24.5) 0.414
u
v=
n2 n n n 4
75. 1 = 2 1
v u R 1 1 1
Also =
1.5 1 1.5 1 v u f
P
=
v 20 5 4 1 1
=
v = 30 cm u u f
3 1
et
1 1 1 =
81. = u f
v u f
u = 3f
1 1 1 1 1 5
= + = + =
v f u 0.15 0.2 3 1 1 1
rg
3
89.
f
= a
n g 1
R
R
v = = 0.6 m 1 2
5
1 1
= (1.6 1)
20 30
Ta
v
82. m= =3
u 1 1 1
= (0.6) =
v = 3u f 12
20
1 1 1 1 1 4 f = 20 cm
= = =
f v u 3u u 3u
4f 1 1 1
u= 90. = (ng 1)
3 f R1 R 2
v
| R1 | = | R2 | = R
83. (u) + v = 54 cm and m = =2 1 1 1
u = (1.5 1)
f R R
v = 2u
(u) + (2u) = 54 1 2
= (0.5)
u = 18 cm f R
v = 2 (18) = 36 cm f = R = 30 cm
102
102
ns
= +
13 10 f 2 129. depends only on nature of material.
1 1 1 3
= = nv nr 1.7 1.65
f2 13 10 130 131. = =
nv nr 1.675 1
io
130 1
f2 = = 43.33 cm 2
3
0.05
= = 0.074
97. Power of the combination P = P1 + P2 0.675
at
= 12 – 2 = 10 D
144. Chromatic aberration is caused due to inability
Focal length of the combination
of lens to bring all wavelengths of colour to
100 100
f= = 10 cm same focal plane.
P 10
lic 146. An achromatic combination of lenses provide
112. In minimum deviation position, deviation without dispersion. As a result, images
i = e are unaffected by variation of refractive index
with wavelength.
ub
113. In minimum deviation condition
A 60o D
r= = = 30 159. M = 1
2 2 f
A m 25
P
4 4
In the position of minimum deviation M 35 35
2i = A + m or m = 2i – A = 90 – 60 = 30 167. mo = = =
Me D 25
1 1
fe 8
rg
103
fo 1 2 3 1
182. M = = 10 6. 2 1 3 2 43
fe 2 3 4 4
fo = 10 fe 41
1
Also, L = fo + fe = 44 cm
1 4
10fe + fe = 44
a ca x t
ns
11 fe = 44 7. ng = = a
cg xgt
fe = 4 cm and fo = 44 4 = 40 cm
xa = xg × ang
183. Referring to Mindbender 4, a completely 3
transparent material will be invisible in vacuum =6 = 9 cm
io
2
when its refractive index will equal refractive
index of vacuum. x x nx
8. t= = =
v c / n c
at
1 1
184. n = = =2 1.33 500
sin i C sin 30 =
3 108
c 3 108
v= = = 2.22 10–6 s
n 2
= 1.5 108 m/s
lic = 2.22 s
9.
185. Object should be placed at focus of a concave
mirror.
ub
i r
x
90 – x
Point image 90 – r1
r1
P
et
D sin i sin x
186. M = 1 n= =
f sin r1 sin (90 x)
25 [ (90 x) + (90 – r1) = 90]
6= +1
rg
f
sin x
f = 5 cm = 5 102 m = = tan x
cos x
1
P= x = i = tan1 (n)
Ta
5 102
100 sini
= = 20 D 10. Refraction at air-oil interface, n oil
5 sin r1
sin 40
1 sin r1 = = 0.443
187. n 1.45
Refraction at oil-water interface,
R > Y > G > V
sin r1
nR < nY < nG < nV oil
nwater
sin r
1 1.33 0.443
188. n
1.45 sin r
As R > B, nR < nB 0.443 1.45
sin r =
nR 1.33
<1
nB r = 28.9
104
104
ns
360 1 1 1 1 1 3
n= = 20. = – = – =–
0 v f u 10 25 50
13. If plane mirror is rotated through ‘’, reflected 50
v=– = – 16.67 cm
ray would rotate through double the angle i.e., 3
io
2. h v
m= 2 =–
A h1 u
14.
50
at
h2 2
= 3 =–
3 25 3
h2 = – 2 cm
c =+
f
17.
23. No parallax between two images.
40 m 20 m
C F
20 m
O O
When the boy moves by 40 m towards the
mirror, he reaches at centre of curvature (2F) of
mirror. Hence his image formed is inverted and 30 cm 20 cm
of same size. The lamp lies between infinity and
centre of curvature hence image formed is
inverted and diminished. 50 cm 10 cm
105
ns
vm = 6.25 107 + 18.75 107 CE
sin( r) = CE = BC sin( r)
= 25 107 = 2.5 108 m/s BC
d = BC sin( r) ….(i)
26. In BMC
io
R.I. = 1 BM BM t
y cos r = BC = = ….(ii)
BC cos r cos r
R.I. = n From equations (i) and (ii),
at
x t
d= sin ( r)
cos r
t
d= (sin cos r cos sin r)
The distance of the surface of water for the fish cos r
=x
lic = t (sin cos tan r)
For reference frame of fish, as light rays will If n is the refractive index of material of slab
travel from denser to lighter (air) medium, they (glass) w.r.t.air, then
will bend away from normal and bird will sin
ub
appear farther. n=
sin r
Thus, apparent height = n real height = ny.
Distance estimated = x + ny For small angle,
27. As both the diver as well as the fish are in water, n r= and d = t( 1.r)
r n
P
28. n= n n
d apparent
t n
12.5 d=
nw = = 1.33 n
9.4
rg
When water is replaced by liquid, 32. To see the container half-filled from the top, the
d real 12.5 apparent depth of the bottom must be equal to
dapparent = = 7.7 cm the height of the container above the surface of
nl 1.63
the water.
Ta
The distance by which microscope should be Let water be filled up to height x so that bottom
moved, of the container appears to be raised upto height
d = dreal dapparent = 9.4 – 7.7 = 1.7 cm (21 – x).
d d 1 1 As shown in figure apparent depth
29. h = d h = (21 – x)
n1 n 2 n1 n 2 Real depth h = x
d1 d
30. Apparent depth = + 2 (21 – x)
n1 n2
36 5 3 h = (21 – x)
= +
7 5 n2 21 cm x=h
3
7
n2 = = 1.4 Bottom
5 Raised bottom
106
106
ns
36. When incident angle is greater than critical = sin1
3
angle, then total internal reflection takes place
and will come back in same medium. To signal 43. I = I0ex is an equation of decreasing
light out he has to direct the beam at an angle exponential curve with I0 as intercept on I-axis.
io
lesser than the critical angle.
44.
37. For glass, n = 2
at
1 1 1 1
iC = sin = sin = 45
2
This means the ray is incident at critical angle
hence will come out just grazing the surface,
i.e., angle of refraction equal to 90.
lic The principle of the periscope is that the image
of an object (a ship for example) is formed at a
38. For total internal reflection i iC lower level (in a submarine). Light is incident
normal on a right angled prism which makes
sin i sin iC
total internal reflection of the ray coming from
ub
1
sin i the right at the hypotenuse of the prism. This is
n
again reflected by another prism to give an
1 image to a person in the lower level (say, in a
n
sin i submarine). This can be combined with
P
1 1 telescopes.
39. iC = sin1 and n
n n 2 n1 n 2 n1
45. – =
Yellow, orange and red have higher wavelength v u R
et
107
ns
1 1 1 fa 1 R
50. – =
v f / 2 f 1 1
=
v=–f fa R
v f n 1 1
io
m= = =2 1
u f / 2
= g 1
fw nw R ( R)
The image is virtual, double the size.
3
at
51. v 2
A C = 2 1
4 R
3
P 2
2f
lic =
8R
45 B fw = 4R
O 2f u
1 1 1
The experimental plot of v vs u is represented = (n 1)
ub
56.
by curve AB. The line OC meets the curve at f R
1 R 2
v u f
u is always negative, 1 1
v is positive. = 0.5
20 20
et
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 0.5
53. = = = 0.5 =
f v u 10 10 10 20 10
f = 5 cm f = 20 cm.
uv Parallel rays converge at focus. Hence,
rg
f=
uv L = f.
f u v u v
= 1 n 1 1
f u v uv 57 = g 1
Ta
fw nw R1 R 2
Least count of u and v being 1 mm,
f 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1
=
3 = (ng 1)
f 10 10 10 10 100 fa R
1 R 2
ns
Using lens maker’s equation, 1 1 1
f=
1 1 f 20 ( 20)
l n g 1
f R Hence, it behaves as a plane slab of glass.
a
ng 1.5
io
Here l n g 70. Effectively there is no deviation or dispersion.
a a
nl nl
1.5
1 = a 1 5 ….[From (i)]
at
nl
1.5 1.5 5
a
nl = 1.875
1 4
1
5
lic 71. A glass slab is equivalent to two prisms
59. Virtual Real mounted such that the second prism is placed
object Image inverted upon the first. As a result, while light
dispersed by first prism enters the second prism,
ub
P recombines and emerges out as white light
O again.
u = 12 cm 73. Net deviation caused by prisms Q and R is zero
hence the ray suffers same deviation.
P
v
74. The angle of deviation depends on the refractive
By using lens formula index of prism. As n decreases, decreases.
1 1 1 1 1 1 43 Refractive index of prism relative to water is
= – = – =
et
16 v 12 v 12 16 48 less than that relative to air. Hence, when a glass
v = 48 cm prism is immersed in water, the deviation
caused by prism decreases.
1 1 1 2 2
= (gna – 1) = 1
rg
64. As seen from a rarer medium (L2 or L3), the Angle of prism, A = r1 + r2
interface L1L2 is concave and L2L3 is convex. For minimum deviation
The divergence produced by concave surface is r1 = r2 = r
much smaller than the convergence produced by A = 60
convex surface. Hence the arrangement A 60o
r= = = 30
corresponds to concavo-convex. 2 2
109
ns
A A
sin sin
78. Since, i + e = A + 2 2
e = (A + ) i
A
= (30 + 30) 60 n = cot
2
io
=0
This means if angle of emergence (measured A m
sin
with respect to normal to the second face) is 84. n = 1.5 = 2
A
at
zero, therefore angle made by emergent ray with sin
the second face of prism is 90. 2
Since A = m
79. i e = 10 ....(i)
2A A A
i+e=A+
i + e = 60 + 30 = 90
lic 1.5 =
sin
2
=
2sin cos
2 2
A A
sin sin
i + e = 90 ….(ii) 2 2
Solving equation (i) and (ii) A
cos = 0.75
ub
i = 50, r = 50 10 = 40 2
A
80. A = cos1 (0.75) = 41
2
30° A = 2 41 = 82
P
90° 90° A m
sin
85. n= 2
30° A
e sin
et
2
Here A = m
B C AA
sin
rg
n= 2
1 sin 30 A
For surface AC, sin
n sin e 2
1 sin A
sin e = n sin 30 = 1.5
Ta
= 0.75 3 =
2 A
sin
e = sin–1(0.75) = 48 36 2
A A
From figure, = e – 30 2sin cos
3 = 2 2 = 2 cos A
= 4836 – 30 = 1836 A 2
sin
81. e=0 2
r2 = 0 A 3
cos =
sin i 2 2
Also, r1 = 30 and n = 3
sin r A
= cos1
sin i 2 2
1.5 =
sin 30 A
= 30
sin i = 1.5 sin 30 = 1.5 0.5 2
i = sin1 (0.75) A = 60
110
110
ns
(1.6499 1)
A A
2sin cos
= 2 2 Anb nr 6 1.531 1.520
A 93. A = – =–
sin b r
n n 1.684 1.662
2
io
A = – 3.
A
= 2cos Negative sign for opposite manner of flint glass
2 prism.
at
60o Hence refracting angle = 3
n = 2cos ….(As A = 60°)
2 Net deviation = A (n – 1) + A (n – 1)
n = 2cos(30°) = 3 1.531 1.520
= 6 1
87. By formula = (n – 1)A 34 = (n –1)A
lic 2
A 1.684 1.662
and in the second position = (n – 1) + (– 3) 1
2 2
34 (n 1)A = 1.134
ub
34
or = = 17
(n 1) A 2
2 94.
nv nr =
(n 1)
9 (nv – nr) = (n – 1)
1
P
w ( w n g 1) 1
=
8
88. = a = A (nv – nr) = A (n – 1)
a ( n g 1) 3 4
1 Achromatic combination
2
(n – 1) A = (n – 1) A
et
ns
99. Unit of longitudinal chromatic aberration of a = 0.11
thin lens is metre as it involves measurement fR = 9.09 cm
of length or distance. Similarly, for violet colour,
100. According to condition for achromatism of a 1 1 1
io
n V 1
combination of lenses, fV R1 R 2
f1 2 11
= (1.66 – 1) = 0.121
f2 1
at
60
12 3 fV = 8.26 cm
f2 2 Longitudinal chromatic aberration
f2 = 8 cm = fV – fR = 9.09 – 8.26 = 0.83 cm
lic
101. For a concavo-convex lens, with convex shape 103. A single point focus in case of lenses is possible
facing the object, both the radii of curvature are only for small aperture spherical lenses and for
positive as shown in the figure. paraxial rays.
ub
The rays coming from a distant object farther
from principal axis no longer remain parallel to
the axis.
Thus, the focus gradually shifts towards pole
giving rise to spherical aberration.
P
C2
P C1 104. The image distance from the eye lens remains
constant because for healthy eye, image is
always formed on retina.
et
M= 1
R1 = 8 cm and R2 = 40 cm fo f e
1 1 1 1 –1 15 25
K = = = 0.1 cm 375 =
R
1 R 2 8 40 1
0.5 fe
Ta
ns
The eyepiece should have small aperture and B 60° 120°
small focal length. Therefore, lens D is selected D
as eye lens. r
C
112. L = fo + fe = 1.53 m ….(i)
io
fo
M= = 50 sin 30 1
fe At point A,
sin r 1.44
50 fe + fe = 1.53
at
51 fe = 1.53 r = sin1(0.72) also BAD = 180 r
In quadrilateral ABCD,
fe = 0.03 m
From equation (i) fo = 1.5 m A + B + C + D = 360°
(180 r) + 60 + (180 r) + = 360
fo = 1.5 m and fe = 0.03 m
lic = 2[sin1(0.72) 30]
1
113. Refractive index sin r 1
(Temperature) 119. From graph, tan 30 = 1
sin i n2
ub
114. All colours are reflected. n 2 v1
1n2 3 1.73 v1 1.73v 2
115. Yellow Blue = Green n1 v 2
(Primary) (Primary) (Secondary)
Thus, option (B) is correct.
116. From the following figure 1
Also, from n =
P
sin i C
1
i sin iC = Rarer
n Denser
r
et
1 1
n sin iC = 1
.
n2 3
r + i = 900 i = 900 – r Hence, options (C) and (D) are incorrect.
rg
1 121. tan iC =
1 sin 2 r ….(i) sin iC n h
r
n
From Snell’s law, r = h tan iC
sin 1 n2 1 iC
n= sin iC = cos iC
sin r n n
1 h
sin 2 tan iC =
sin2 r = iC
n2 n 12
ns
behaves like a concave mirror. Similarly
for the lens
whenever any surface of a concave or plano-
1 1 1
concave or convexo-concave lens is silvered, it
fa
= a
n g 1
behaves like a convex mirror. R1 R 2
io
1 1 1
fw
= w
n g 1
R R
n1 1 2
x
As w n g a n g , hence focal length of lens in water
at
n2
increases.
4
The refractive index of water is and that of
When ray travels from n1 to n2, 3
n 2 n1
n n
= 2 1
lic air is 1.
Hence, nw > na.
v u R
The ray refracts from R1 and falls normally of 131. e = 90, r2 = iC = 45
R2. Let the pin be placed at distance x from lens. A = r1 + r2
ub
i.e., u = x. A
r1 = A r2
1.5 1 1.5 1 r1 = A iC
= i r1 r2 e
10 x 30 = 75 45 = 30
1 0.5 1.5 sin e sin e
= n= =
P
x 30 10 sin r2 sin i C
x = 7.5 cm 1
Image of object coincides with the object itself 2 =
sin i C
as the ray after refraction from first surface falls
et
sin i
For ray B, angle of incidence in the prism is 45. n=
Hence, for ray B angle of incidence is greater sin r1
than critical angle. sin i
2 =
Ta
sin 30
125. From the figure,
1 1
+ 2 = 180 sin i = 2 sin 30 = 2 =
and = 2 2 2
= 36 1
i = sin1 = 45
2
126.
132. i = 2r
60 60
o o sin i
90o n=
60 o sin r
sin 2r 2sin r cos r
2= = = 2 cos r
sin r sin r
127. When angle of refraction exceeds value of
critical angle, no emergent ray is observed. 2 1
cos r = =
Thus, r > C 2 2
114
114
ns
v < 2.1 108
only (B) is not possible.
h
Competitive Thinking
io
i
2. All the rays will be incident normally on the
surface of the sphere. Hence, the rays will not
at
O be refracted but will pass through the sphere
Let the bulb be placed at point O. The light rays undeviated.
originating from it will spread at the surface of 3. The emergent ray will be parallel to incident ray
water as shown in the figure, forming a circle.
Angle of semi vertex ( i) here equals critical
lic only if the mediums have same refractive indices.
4. i = 2r
angle of water i.e., i = iC
sin i
From the figure, PQ = PR = r, say, =
sin r
then, r = h tan iC
ub
1 sin 2r
1 =
h h sin r
h sin i C nw nw
r= = = 2sin r cos r
cos i C 1 sin 2 i C 1
2
=
1 sin r
P
nw
cos r = r = cos1
1 2 2
sin i C
nw
et
1
2
but ang = Air
1 na i r (na=1)
1.33
na sin i = ng sin r
Area of circle = r2 = 3.142 (0.912)2 = 2.61 m2. Glass
1 sin i = 2 sin r
Ta
r (ng= 2 )
135. When glass surface is made rough then the light 1
sin r = sin i
falling on it is scattered in different direction 2
due to which its transparency decreases. 1 1
= sin 45 = Refracted
2 2 ray
1
r = sin1 = 30
2
Smooth surface Rough surface
From figure, r + + r = 180
i + + 30 = 180 ….( i = r)
136. By focussing a lens, energy can be concentrated
into a small beam. This does not violate 45 + + 30 = 180
principle of conservation of energy, as lens does = 180 75 = 105
not generate energy but merely concentrates the Hence, the angle between reflected and
available energy. refracted rays is 105.
115
ns
y =
15 40
2 1
Source x =
24
(L)
v = –24 cm
io
From figure, Negative sign indicates image is formed in front
y of the mirror.
tan 2 2 = ….(Since angle θ is small)
x Given: u = –20 cm
at
y Now, according to mirror formula,
=
2x 1 1 1 1 1 1
= =
v f u 15 20 60
10.
lic v = – 60 cm
Negative sign indicates that image is formed in
Object C f=4 front of the mirror.
Displacement of image
= v v = 36 cm away from mirror
ub
20 16 12 8 4
u = 10 cm 16. Given: R = –15 cm, h1 = 10 cm, u = –10 cm
From mirror formula,
1 1 1
P
f v u
For a concave mirror formed, object is placed
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
beyond centre of curvature. = = =
Hence, the nature of image is inverted, real and v f u R u 15 10 30
v = –30
et
unmagnified.
v 30
12. In case of mirrors, convex mirror always Magnification, m = =–3
u 10
produces diminished (i.e., m < 1) and virtual
The image formed is magnified and inverted.
images (i.e., m is positive).
rg
Hence, (a) can map to (iv) only. 17. For concave mirror,
Also, in mirrors, virtual image always forms on R 30
m = –3, f = = = –15 cm
right hand side. Hence magnification produced 2 2
Ta
is always positive. (i.e., m for virtual image, m = Also, for spherical mirrors,
1
+ or m = +2). This means (d) can map to only m 1 3 1
u= f= ( 15) = (+ 4)(–5)
2 m 3
(iii) and (iv). u = 20 cm
These conditions are satisfied by option (C).
1 1 1
18. By mirror formula:
13. As the medium has no role in focal length of u v f
mirror, it doesn’t change. As u > f, image formed is real,
1 1 1 1 1 1
14. By mirror formula, + =
v u f u v f
Considering sign convention, 1 1 1
1 1 1 3 v f u
= ….(Given: u = – 1.5 f = – f) uf
v 3f f 2 v=
2 u f
116
116
ns
be 25 cm. 27. Due to large refractive index of diamond
i.e., object distance at t = 0.25 s is, (n = 2.42), critical angle of diamond is very
u0.25 = 25 cm, small. This causes total internal reflection in
i.e., object is at focus of the mirror. diamond which makes it sparkle.
io
v0.25 = 1 1
As image is formed at infinity, average velocity 28. sin iC = and n
n
of image formed between t = 0 s to t = 0.25 s For greater wavelength (i.e., lesser frequency) n
at
will be infinity. is less. Hence, iC would be more. Thus, these
1 1 1 wavelengths will not suffer internal reflection
20. From mirror formula,
v u f lic and come out at angles less than 90.
R 1
We know, f = 29. As the beam just suffers total internal reflection
2 2
at interface of region III and IV, it almost grazes
1 1 region IV
=2
v 1.5 i 90
ub
v = s = 0.375 m Hence,
As the image distance is positive, image is virtual. n0 n n
Magnification of a mirror, n0 sin = sin 1 = 0 sin 2 = 0 sin 90
2 6 8
v 0.375 3 / 8 1
m= = 0.25 1 1 1
u 1.5 3/ 2 4 sin = = sin
P
n denser nd
nw n n
= x, g = y, a = z
na nw ng 1
1 n
iC = sin = sin1 r
n w ng na nd
rg
xyz = =1 nd
na nw ng n
r
22. Of all the colours in spectrum, red shows least 1.5 1 15
iC = sin1 = sin
deviation. 1.6 16
Ta
Real depth n n n
24. n= n2
Apparent depth 31. + 1 = 1 2
u v R
Let t be the real thickness of the slab, Assuming medium on the right hand side of the
Given apparent thickness = 3 + 5 = 8 cm convex surface to be air,
t
n= 1.6 1 1 1.6
8 – =
u 5 3
i.e., t = 8 1.5 = 12 cm 1.6 1
Real depth = 0.2 +
25. n= u 5
Apparent depth 1.6
u= = 4 mm
In case of water filled beaker, 0.4
h Negative sign indicates that the object is placed
nw = ….(i)
hw on the left side of the convex surface.
117
ns
f=4m
f 75 25
As focal length is negative, the lens used is
1 100
concave.
f 75 25
1
= 0.25 D
io
75 P=
f= = 18.75 cm f
4
As the focal length is positive, the lens is 40. From lens formula,
at
convex. 1 1 1
v u f
1 1 1
36. Using lens equation, fu
v u f v= ….(i)
uf
Here, u = 25 cm
lic
Also, since image formed is virtual, v = 75 cm Now, magnification of lens is,
1 1 1 v
= m=
75 25 f
u
ub
fu
f = 37.5 cm m= ….[from (i)]
f u
u
37.
f
u–f=
m
P
u=
1 f
m
S S m
O
u is kept same for both lenses,
5cm
et
u=
m1 1 f1 m 2 1 f 2
m1 m2
15cm f1 m1 1 m 2
rg
10cm f 2 m 2 1 m1
1 1 1
Using lens equation, – = 41. For bifocal convex lens:
v u f
1 1
Ta
ns
1 3/ 2 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 = 1 =
= (n 1) f1 4 / 3 R1 R 2 8 R1 R 2
f R
1 R 2
1 3 / 2 1 1 1 1 1
Given that, R1 = 2R2, n = 1.5 and f = 25 cm = 1 =
io
f 2 5 / 3 R 1 R 2 10 R 1 R 2
1 1 1
= (1.5 1)
25 2R
2 R 2
1 3 1 1 1 1 1
= 1 =
3
f 2 R 1 R 2 2 R 1 R 2
1
at
= f1 = 4f and f2 = 5f
25 0.5 2R 2
25 3 49. When two convex lenses kept in contact, the
R2 = = 18.75 cm
4 focal length of combination,
R1 = 2R2 = 37.5 cm
lic 1
=
2
=
2
1 F1 f convex f
1 1
45. = (n – 1) When the space between the lenses is filled with
f R
1 R 2
glycerin,
ub
1
As P = = 10 dioptre 1 2 1
f in m = +
F2 f convex f concave
1 1 Now, in this case,
10 = (n –1)
0.1 0.1 R
P
fconvex = =R
1 2 1
(n – 1) =
2 R
3 F1 =
n= 2
et
2 Similarly,
46. According to lens maker’s formula, R
fconcave = =R
1 1 1 2 1
= ( 1)
rg
2 1 1
f R
1 R 2
1
= – =
1 1.5 1 1 F2 R R R
= 1 F1 R 1 1
fa 1 R1 R 2 = =
Ta
F2 2 R 2
1 1 1
= (0.5) ….(i)
fa R
1 R 2 50. Focal length of combination,
1 1 1
1.5 = 2
1 1 1 f f concave f convex
= 1
fw 4 R
1 R 2 2(n oil 1) n 1
3 = 2 lens
R R
1 1 1 2(1.7 1) 1.5 1
= (0.125) ….(ii) = 2
fw R1 R 2 R R
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii) 1.4 1 0.4
=
fw 0.5 R R R
=
fa 0.125 R 20
f= = 50 cm
fw = 4 fa = 4 8 = 32 cm 0.4 0.4
119
ns
f= f concave R
1 R 2
1 2
1 1 2
52. According to lens maker’s formula, f concave 3 R
the focal length of plano-convex lens is 2
io
= ...(ii)
1 1 1 3R
= (n 1)
f R 1 2 2
= ...[from (i) and (ii)]
1 1 1 0.6 f com R 3R
at
= (1.6 1) =
f1 R R But R = f ...[from (i)]
Similarly focal length of concavo plane lens is 3R 3f
fcom =
1 1 1 4 4
= (n 1)
f R
lic 55.
1 1 1 0.5 R
= (1.5 1) = R
f2 R R
For the combination of lenses, nw
ub
1 1 1 0.6 0.5 0.1 R 1 1 1
= + = = f= n w 1
f f1 f 2 R R R 0.1 fw R R
1 2
53. n w 1
P
fw R
1 1 1
But, n l 1
f1 f2
fl R R
et
P 4 2
Given: 1 = (nl – 1)
P2 3 R
1 2 1
As P =
rg
f R n l 1 f l
1 4
f2 1 n 1 1
f1 3 w
fw n l 1 f l
Ta
f2 4
1 1 2 1 n w 1
f1 3
f eq F fl f l n l 1
4
f2 = 12 ….(Given: f1 = 12 cm)
3 1 n w 1
= 2
f2 = 16 cm fl n l 1
As the lens is concave, Given: nl > nw
f2 = –16 cm nl – 1 > nw – 1
then, focal length of combination is given by n w 1
1
1 1 1 n l 1
f eff f1 f 2 1 1 2
1 1 1 43 fl F fl
f eff 12 16 48 f
F f
feff = 48 cm 2
120
120
ns
= (1.5 1) =
f1 14 14 For minimum deviation, angle of refraction,
For n = 1.2 and R2 = 14 cm A 60o
r = =
1 1 1 0.2 2 2
= (1.2 1) = = 30° for both the colours
io
f2 14 14
1 1 1 0.5 0.2 0.7 62. Given: e = 0
= = =
f f1 f 2 14 14 14 r2 = 0, A = r1
at
1 1 1 Since ‘i’ is small, Snell’s law of refraction can
Using lens equation, be modified to,
v u f
i
1
=
7
1 =
r1
v 140
1 1
40
lic i = r1 = A
=
20 40 63. Given: i = 60, A = 60
1 2 1 At minimum deviation position,
=
ub
v 40 A m
v = 40 cm i=
2
57. For lens separated by distance d, m = 2 i – A = 60
1 1 1 d Using prism formula,
P
f f1 f 2 f1f 2 A m
sin
1 f1 f 2 d n 2
= A
f f1f 2 f1f 2 sin
et
2
1 f1 f 2 d
= sin 60
f f1 f 2 =
sin 30
1
But, P = (if focal length is measured in
rg
f = 3 = 1.732
metres)
64. From the given data,
f1 f 2 d
P= i+e=A+
f1f 2
Ta
45 1 60o m
45 = sin
2 2
60o m
sin (45°) = sin
2
90° = 60° + m or m = 30°
As ray suffers minimum deviation,
A m 60o 30o
i=e i= =
2 2
m = (i + e) A = (45 + 45) 60 = 30
i = 45°
A m
sin
ns
n = 2 68. At the minimum deviation m the refracted ray
A inside the prism becomes parallel to its base.
sin
2 A m
sin
30
60 2
sin n=
io
2 = 1 2= A
= 2 sin
60 2 2
sin
2 60o m
at
sin
66. m = A, n = 1.5 2
3 =
A m 60o
sin sin
2
n= 2
A
sin
lic o 60o m
3 sin 30 = sin
2 2
2A
sin 3 60o m
2 = sin
=
ub
2 2
A
sin
2 60o m
60 =
A A 2
2sin cos
sin A 2 2 m = 60°
= =
P
A A As m = 2i A,
sin sin
2 2 where i is the angle of incidence
A i=
n = 2 cos
et
m A
2 =
2
A
1.5 = 2 cos 60 60o
o
2 = = 60°
rg
2
3 A
= cos
4 2 A m
sin
A 2
cos 1 0.75 69. n=
Ta
2 A
sin
= 90° – sin1 (0.75) 2
= 90 4836 = 4124 A m A
sin = n sin
A = 8248 2 2
A m 60o m 60o
sin sin = 1.6 sin
2 2 2
67. n=
A 60o m
sin sin
2 = 0.8
2
Substituting the values,
60o m
60o 60o m 45° < < 60°
2 sin = sin 2
2 2 90° < 60° + m < 120°
….( Prism is equilateral) 30° < m < 60°
122
122
ns
2 sin A
sin = 375 = 1
2 sin A 2 5 fe
2
....( D = 25 cm = 250 mm)
A m A
sin = sin fe = 21.74 ≈ 22 mm
2 2 2
io
A m A
= 77.
2 2 2 fe= 5 cm
c
A + m = A
at
m = 180 – 2A f0 = 1 cm
71. A
x vo ue
lic
Image
Object
12.2 cm
r1
r2
ub
sin 1 1 1 1 1 6
r1 = sin1 = = =
ue ve f e 25 5 25
sin 25
r2 = A sin1
rg
....(i) ue = cm
6
1 As ue is on left side of eyepiece, from sign
r2 < sin1 conventions, ue is negative. Hence, neglecting
Ta
negative sign,
Substituting for r2 in equation (i), 25
sin 1 1
ue = cm
A sin1 < sin 6
As, L = v0 + ue = 12.2 cm
1 sin 25
A sin1 < sin1 v0 = 12.2 = 8.03 cm
6
1 sin For objective,
sin A sin 1 1 1 1
v0 f 0 u 0
1
sin A sin 1 sin 1 1 1 1 1 7.03
= =
u 0 v 0 f 0 8.03 1 8.03
1 8.03
sin 1 sin A sin 1 < u0 = = –1.14 cm
7.03
123
ns
image formed by objective is at a distance vo.
1 1 1
B C
fo vo uo
io
1 1 1 AOP = 60 and angle of refraction = 30
v o 30 180 Using Snell’s law of refraction,
1 1 1 sin i
n=
at
v o 30 180 sin r
vo = 36 cm sin i = n sin r = 2 sin 30
Now if this image is made to fall at focus of 1
eyepiece so that final image is at infinity, the =
lic
total length of telescope would now be
1
2
L = vo + fe = 36 + 3 = 39 cm i = sin–1 = 45
2
82.
85. By Snell’s law of refraction,
ub
L sin i
n=
sin r
I sin 40 = 1.31 sin θ2
f0 + fe 0.64
sin θ2 = = 0.49 ≈ 0.5
P
1.31
Magnification of telescope: θ2 = 30
f
M= o
et
fe 2m
For a convex lens: x
fe I
|M|=
fe u O 20 m n = 1.31
rg
f e (f 0 f e ) L
fe I Let reflection take place at every x m length of
fibre.
fo L
x
L Now, cot θ2 =
M= 20 106
I
x = cot θ2× 20 × 10–6
83. Normal incidence at silvered surface Number of reflections
2 2
=
A x 20 10 6 cot 2
(90 A)
=
2
20 106 3
…. cot 30 3
2A A
= 57735
Nearest option is option (D).
124
124
ns
that of object but inverted. 1 / 5
2
2
5
= A 102
20 cm 15
io
A
= 102 m
F 9
2F F1 2F1 F
89. Initially image is formed at distance
at
20 cm
vi = 2f = 10 cm f = 5 cm
40 cm
Due to glass plate,
60 cm
1 2
Shift = t 1 = 1.5 1
mirror.
lic
Now, this image acts as an object for convergent n 3
= 0.5 cm
From figure, u = OP = 9.5 cm
u = – 20 cm, f = – 10 cm 1 1 1
ub
Using mirror formula, v u f
1 1 1 1 1 1
….( Using sign convention)
f v u v 9.5 5
1 1 1
=
1
–
1
=–
1 v = 10.55 cm
P
nl A = 60
As, v = u,
v i e
m=– =–1 r
u
rg
At minimum deviation,
1 1
87. n= = = 2 A m
sinic sin 45 sin
l
ng = 2
Velocity of light in medium, A
c sin
v= 2
n
60 30
3108 sin
v= m/s ng 2
2 =
nl 60
sin
88. Given that, u = 0.2 m and f = 0.05 m 2
1 1 1 sin 45 1
....(i) = 2
v f u sin 30 2
1 1 n 1
= = 15 i.e., l ….(i)
0.05 0.2 ng 2
125
ns
1
n= = 2 = 1.414 d
sin 45 D
nr = 1.39
f
ng = 1.44
x
io
nv = 1.47
nr < n = 1.414 From geometry of given figure,
while, nv > n and ng > n D d
=
at
Hence, only red colour part will not undergo x f
total internal reflection and emerge out D
separately, while blue and green parts will suffer d= f
x
total internal reflection. D R
92. A
lic =
x 2
where, R is radius of curvature.
D
d = 0.009 0.2 …. Given: 0.009
x
= 1.8 103 m
ub
i
i
95. The rays incident from object on the lens travel
parallel after refraction. These parallel rays are
B C incident on plane mirror and trace back their
P
96. A
i = 45
sin i > sin iC ….from(i)
1 1 1 R
but , ang=
rg
a
2 < ng
Minimum value of ang= 2
93. Y
(0, 3) D (3,3) B
E
c 3108
(0, 1) A R. I. of lens, n = = = 1.5
v 2108
As D1 = 6 cm, R1 = 3 cm.
(0, 0) X From ΔACO, radius of curvature of lens is,
B
P1 R2 = R12 + (R 0.3)2
(0, –1) C
R2 = 32 + (R 0.3)2
R2 = 9 + R2 + 0.09 0.6 R
0.6 R = 9.09
126
126
ns
1 1 1 1 1 2(n l 1)
Using formula, = = 1
= [using (i)]
f v u 8 24 fl f
1 4
= Effective focal length of the combination is
f 24
io
f = 6 m. 1 1 1
= +
Using lens maker’s equation, 2f f fl
1 1 1 1 1 2(n 1)
= 1
at
n 1
f R R 2f f f
1 2
1 1
For plano-convex lens, R1 = , R2 = R. 2(n1 1) = 1 =
2 2
1 1
n 1
f R
lic 1 5
n1 1 = n1 = = 1.25
4 4
R = f (n 1)
= 6 (1.5 1) 101. By lens maker’s formula,
=3m 1 1
ub
1
= (ang 1)
98. When a convex lens is introduced, object forms fa R 1 R 2
two images. 2
2 = (1.5 – 1)
One is diminished, I1 = cm 20
P
3 0.5
and another is magnified, I2 = 6 cm Pair =
10
Magnification for magnified image (m2) and
Similarly, when the lens is immersed in a liquid,
that for diminished image (m1) are related as
et
1 1 ng 1 1
m2 = 1
m1 f liquid n l R1 R 2
m1m2 = 1
1 1.5
1
1
rg
127
1. The field of view is maximum for convex mirror When lens is in water
because the image of an object formed by a 1 n 1 1
convex mirror is always diminished. Each = g 1
fw n
w R
1 R 2
image is thus confined to small area and many
objects can be viewed in the mirror. 1.5 1.33 1 1
=
1
….(ii)
fw 1.33 R
1 R 2
2.
Dividing equation (i) by (ii),
2 cm fw 1.33
= (1.51)
ns
C 30 1.5 1.33
2m u 1.33
fw = 30 0.5
wall 0.17
= 117.35 cm
io
Let the candle C be placed u metre away from The change in focal length
pole of the mirror. = 117.35 – 30
According to question, image distance = 87.35
at
v=u+2 87.4 cm
Also, magnification of a concave mirror
v 7. Magnifying power of a telescope in normal
m= fa
u
u 2 image height
lic adjustment =
fe
= =
u object height Tube length = Distance between objective and
Here, negative sign indicates, image is inverted. eyepiece
ub
u2 6 = fo + fe
|m|= = u=1m fo
u 2 = 9 fo = 9fe
Distance of the wall from the mirror is fe
u + 2 = (1 + 2) m = 3 m = 300 cm. Tube length = fo + fe
P
1 1 1 60 = 9fe + fe = 10fe
3. For near end the bar, = fe = 6 cm and
f u v
Here, u and f are negative fo = 9fe = 9 6 = 54 cm
et
uf
|v| = 8. As shown in the figure, the system is equivalent
u f to combination of three thin lenses in contact
Far end of the bar is at infinity. Therefore,
1 1 1 1
image will be formed at focus.
rg
f f1 f 2 f 3
Length of the image = | v | f
By lens maker’s formula
uf f2
= f = 1 3 1 1 1
u f uf 1
Ta
f1 2 20 40
5. We cannot interchange the objective and eye A B
1 4 1 1 1
lens of a microscope to make a telescope. The 1
focal lengths of lenses in microscope are very f 2 3 20 10 20
small, of the order of mm or a few cm and the 1 3 1 1 1
1
difference (fo fe) is also very small. While in f 3 2 10 20
the telescope, objective has a very large focal
1 1 1 1 1
length.
f 40 20 20 40
6. When the lens is in air, f = 40 cm
1 1 1
= n g 1 Hence system behaves as concave lens of focal
fa R
1 R 2 length 40 cm.
1 1 1 10. A dentist uses concave mirror to converge light
= 1.5 1 ….(i)
30 R1 R 2 and obtain enlarged image.
128
128
ns
iC refractive index of the rod
Reflected 1
ray
r O
60 3 Here incident angle is .
io
n2 =
The light ray will graze along the rod, if it gets
n1 = 1
incident on rod at ciritical angle and will get
reflected internally as shown in the figure
at
At B:
above.
n2sin r = n1sin i
1
3 sin r = 1 sin 60 If iC is the critical angle, iC sin 1
n
r = 30
lic But iC = 90 1.
Angle between reflected ray and refracted ray at
B is 90. From Snell’s law,
sin sin
=n= 3 = n.
ub
13. As, m = fo/fe, fo = m fe = 20 2 = 40 cm sin 1 cosi C
For an object at 200 cm from objective, the But
image formed by objective is at a distance vo.
1 1 1 n2 1 1
cosiC sin iC
n n
P
fo vo uo
1 1 1 n2 1
sin = n n2 1
vo 40 200 n
et
vo = 50 cm 2
= sin 1 3 1 sin 1
Now if this image is made to fall at focus of
eyepiece so that final image is at infinity, the Thus, for = sin1 2 , light ray grazes along
rg
n cladding sin i C
Hence, red ray will be transmitted.
If the angle of incidence of ray(y) in the core to For blue ray, n = 1.47
cladding interface is greater than the critical 1 1
angle iC, the ray is totally internally reflected sin iC = = = 0.68 iC = 42.8
B n 1.47 B
i.e., y > iC. Also, for this condition, x < critical
angle. Hence, blue ray will be reflected at face AC.
129
ns
= 90 –
2
sin (90 – ) >
3
2
cos >
io
3
2
< cos–1
3
at
2
Largest value of is cos–1
3
As ng > nw
1 < 2
If is the critical angle between glass and water
et
then,
nw 4 / 3 8
sin 0.8888
ng 3 / 2 9
> 2.
rg
n
iC y i C g i C b i C V
130
130
10 Electrostatics
Hints
31. F = qE ma = qE
Classical Thinking qE 0.5 200
a= = = 200 m/s2
m 5 101
ns
1
10. F ; so when distance is halved, the force 1 q
r2 32. E=
becomes four times. 4πε 0 r 2
11. The same force will be acting on both bodies 9 109 1.6 1019
= = 1.44 1011 N/C
io
1010
2
although their directions will be different.
q 1q 2 q1q 2 12 109
17. Fa = , Fb = 33. E1 = 9 109 = 12 N/C
4 0 r 2 4 0 kr 2 3 2
at
Fa : Fb = k : 1 6 109
E2 = 9 109 = 13.5 N/C
Fa (2)2
18. k=
Resultant intensity E = E2 E1 = 1.5 N/C
Fm
Fa
lic 34. Using Shortcut 2
Fm = =2N
k x x x
x1 = = =
Q2 4e 3
1 q q 1 1
ub
19. F= 12 2 Q1 e
4 0 r
9 109 1.6 1.6 1038 43. S.I. unit of electric flux is
=
5.3 10
11 2 N m2 J m
= volt m
C C
P
= 8.2 108 N
51. Two equal and opposite charges form an electric
20. q = ne dipole.
1 = n 1.6 1019
52. Dipole moment,
et
1
n= = 6.25 1018 p = q (2l)
1.6 1019 = 3.2 1019 (2.4 1010)
21. q = ne = 7.68 1029 C m
rg
= 4 1016 1.6 1019 54. In non-uniform electric field, the dipole experiences
= 6.4 103 = 6.4 mC two unequal and opposite forces. Hence a net force
since electrons are removed, the conductor acts on it. Also, the two forces act on different
acquires positive charge.
Ta
131
ns
Repulsion between ball 1 and 2 indicates ball 1 Two charges are 15 C, 5 C.
will have charge similar to ball 2 and thus
opposite to ball 4. Hence ball 1 and 4 will show 11. New charges will be –2 C and +3 C.
attraction. As ball 1 repels ball 3, ball 3 also has 1 3×8
In first case, 40 = 2
io
charge similar to ball 1. Hence ball 3 and 4 will 4πε 0 r
show attraction. 1 (2×3)
In second case, F =
5. When a positively charged body is connected to 4πε 0 r2
at
the earth, electrons flows from earth to body and F 2× 3
body becomes neutral. =
40 3×8
7. F = –10 N
q
r
Qq
lic 12. Initially,
Q Q
q(Q q) A B
F = 9 109 r
ub
r2
F will be maximum if product q(Q q) is q2
F=K ....(i)
Maximum. r2
q(Q q) will be maximum if q = Q q Finally,
Q = 2q
P
Q/2 Q/2 Q
1 q1q 2 FB FA
8. Fnet = (110/100) (90/100) times
4 0 r 2 A C B
r/2 r/2
et
99
i.e., times
100
Force on C due to A,
99
Net force = 100 = 99 N K(Q / 2) 2 KQ 2
100 FA = = 2
rg
(r / 2) 2 r
9. x
Force on C due to B,
+4q q0 +q KQ(Q / 2) 2KQ 2
FB = = 2
Ta
a (xa) (r / 2) 2 r
q1 q 2
16. F FB = Force on C due to charge placed at B
r2
106 2 106
= 9 109 = 1.8 N
FAB 82 …(i) 0.1
2
x
FAD 82 …(ii) FA
y +2 C
ns
FBD 216 2 …(iii) C 120°
x y
FB
FAC 24 2 …(iv)
x y
io
+1 C 1 C
From all equations given above we can say that A 10 cm B
the electric force will be least between charges Net force on C is given by
A and C. Fnet = (FA ) 2 (FB ) 2 2FA FB cos120
at
17. The force between 4q and q = 1.8 N
1 4qq
F1 = . 21.
4 0 l 2 QA = Q q QB = Q
The force between Q and q
lic A FC B
FA
1 Qq x C x
F2 =
l / 2
2
4 0 2x
For, F1 + F2 = 0
ub
For equilibrium, net force on Q = 0
F1 = F2
1 Q2 1 Qq
4q 2 4Qq + =0
= 4 0 4x 2
4 0 x 2
l2 l2
Q =q Q
P
q=
4
18. The position of the sphere will become as 22.
shown below, FC
180° FD
et
L L +q +q FAC
+Q +Q A FA
B
1 Q2
rg
FA
2kq 2 kq 2
In e.s.u. system,
1 Fnet = +
1 a2 2a 2
4 0
15 12 1 kq 2
FA = = 20 dyne and = 2 2
2 a
3
2
12 20 q2 1 2 2
FC = = 15 dyne =
4 40a 2
2
2
133
ns
the direction normal to BC is zero.
q q
24. The schematic diagram of distribution of A a B
charges on x-axis is shown in figure below: 3 Kq
So, Enet = E 2A + E B2 + 2E A E Bcos60o =
a2
io
1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 3q
Enet =
4πε 0a 2
O x =1 x =2 x =4 x=8
at
30. In curve (A), field lines are not drawn normal to
the conductor. Hence, curve (A) cannot
Total force acting on 1 C charge is given by,
represent field lines.
1 1 1 106 1 1 106
F =
4 0 (1) 2
(2) 2
lic In curve (B), electrostatic field lines are shown
forming closed loops. Hence, curve (B) cannot
1 1 106 1 1 106 represent field lines.
2
2
.... In curve (D), field lines are shown intersecting
(4) (8) each other. Hence, curve (D) cannot represent
ub
106 1 1 1 1 field lines.
...
40 1 4 16 64 Amongst the given curves, only (C) can
represent field lines.
Using Binomial theorem, 31. Electric lines of force never intersect the
P
4
4 4 33. C
F = 9 109 106 9 103 = 12000 N
3 3
EB EA
rg
134
134
ns
40 r
2
r2 48. Electric dipole moment of a water molecule
p = 6.4 1030 C m
q = E r 9 = 3 10 (2.5)
2 6 2
p = qd
9 10 9
9 10
where, d is the distance between the centre of
= 2.0833 103 C
positive and negative charge of the molecule
io
q should be less than 2.0833 103 C. In the
p 6.4 1030
given set of options 2 103 C is the maximum d= = = 4 1011 m
q 1.6 1019
charge which is smaller than 2.0833 103 C.
at
1 ne 49. max = pE = 2 10–6 3 10–2 2 105
36. E = 12 103 N m
40 r 2
Er 2 50. max = pE = q(2l)E = 2 106 0.01 5 105
n=
e
40
lic = 10 103 N m
0.1 0.1
n = 0.036
360
105 51.
9 109 1.6 1019 144
ub
n = 2.5 105
P
2p kp 0(xy)
37. Eaxial = Eequatorial k 3 3
x y (0, 0) O
P
1/3
x 2
3 2 :1
y 1
38. Electric field lines do not form closed loop. This Since the centre of the square lies at origin,
et
follows from the conservative nature of electric hence each quadrant will have the charge that
field. cancels the charge of diagonally opposite
quadrant. This results in the zero net charge on
Q square.
rg
ns
10 10 1
are Q1 10 C 10
10 20 3
20 20 63. e–
and Q2 10 C
10 20 3
io
+ –
Ratio of charge densities,
1 Q1 r2 2 Q A B
….
2 Q2 r12 4r 2 10 cm
at
2
10 / 3 20 2 Number of atoms in given mass
20 / 3 10 1 10
= × 6.02×1023
55.
A
lic
p
63.5
= 9.48 1022
+q
p net Transfer of electron between balls
l 9.48×1022
l = = 9.48 1016
ub
106
Hence magnitude of charge gained by each ball,
B C 60° q = 9.48 1016 1.6 10–19 = 0.015 C
+q l 2q
p Force of attraction between the balls
P
(0.015) 2
pnet = p 2 p 2 2p 2 cos60 F = 9×109 × = 2×108 N.
(0.1) 2
pnet = 3 ql
64. They will not experience any force if | FG |=| Fe |
et
q 1 1 1
56. E + + + ......
4πε 0 12 22 42 G
m2
=
1
.
q2
(16×102 )2 4πε 0 (16×102 ) 2
Using Binomial theorem,
rg
q
= 4πε 0G
q 1 m
E=
4πε 0 1 1
4
Ta
Competitive Thinking
= 12 109 q N/C
57. If the charge is moved against the electric field, 1. Let us consider ball 1 has any type of charge. 1
work done by the external force is positive. and 2 must have different charges, 2 and 4 must
have different charges i.e., 1 and 4 must have
58. After contact, charge on each sphere = same charges but electrostatic attraction is also
(q1 + q2)/2. Force on given charges q1 and q2 is present in (1, 4) which is impossible. Hence,
maximum when they have same charge equal to ball 1 must be neutral.
(q1 + q2)/2.
2. F Q1Q2 ( r is same in both cases)
59. Only in the case (D), the electrostatic force is F QQ 69
directed opposite to the weight. = 1 2 = =3
F
Q1Q 2 (6 3) (9 3)
60. Negative charge means excess of electron F
F =
which increases the mass of sphere B. 3
136
136
2 Kq 2
Fnet = 2 F cos = cos
2 a 2 y2 2 (FA) = FR
1 2Qq 1 Q2
Kq 2 y = ….(opposite direction)
= 2 2 4πε 0 a2 4πε 0 2a 2
a y a y2
ns
2
Q = 2 2q
For y << a
Kq 2 y 9. Here, q1 = q2 = q3 = 2 C,
F
AB = 3 cm, BC = 4 cm
io
a3
Fy 2 2 4K
F1 = K =
(3) 2 9
4. The force between two charges is maximum if
at
their magnitude is equal. 2 2 4K
F2 = K 2
=
(4) 16
5. Electric force acting between the two charges is,
1 q q F A
F= 1 2 2 F = q1
4πε 0 K r K
lic 3 cm
16
Net force on each charge = =2N
8
q2
q3 F2
D
ub
6. Force acting between given charges + Q and C B
Q 2
4 cm
Q is, F =
40r 2 R
When 25% of charges are transferred, charge on
P
point A becomes, F1
3
q1 = + Q 0.25Q = + 0.75Q = + Q
4
F E
Charge on point B becomes,
et
3 DE F
q2 = Q + 0.25Q = – 0.75Q = Q In BDE, tan = = 1
4 BD F2
The new force between points A and B will be, 4K 16 16 16
tan = = = tan–1
rg
3 3 9 2
9 4K 9 9
Q Q Q
F = 4 4 = 16
10.
40r 2 4 0 r 2 Y axis
F sin
Ta
9
= F +10 C
16
F
7. Force between charges will be, a
1 q1q2 Fnet
F = O X axis
20 C
40 r t t K 2
a
x
r r
2 2 F
r 4 3r 9 2 F sin
r +10 C
F 2 2
= 22 = 42
F r2 r r
F 9 Resultant force acting on 20 C charge is,
F 4 Fnet = 2Fcos
4 1 Qq
F = F =2 2 cos
9 4 0 r
137
20 106 10 106 x 17. From dimension we can check the answer, only
= 2 9 109 0 (1 + 2) having the same dimension qy to the
a x a 2 x 2
2 2
charge
3.6 x q net
Fnet = =
a x2
3/ 2
2
0
Given x << a qnet = 0
3.6 x all other options don’t having the dimension
Fnet N equal to charge
a3
So answer is
11. q2 a q1 0 (1 + 2)
q Inc
2a 18. Electric flux () =
ns
a 0
10 C
q3 =
0
If more 10 C charge is placed.
io
1 q2 1 q2
F12 = 2 and F13 = 20 C
4πε0 a 4πε 0 (a 2) 2 Electric flux = = 2
0
F13 1
at
=
F12 2 20. On equatorial line, dipole moment and electric
field are opposite to each other.
1 q
13. E=
4 0 r2
lic 21. The relation between the electric fields at same
distances on axis as well as equator from a
9 109 4 1010 1.6 1019 dipole is, Eaxial = 2 Eequator
=
20 10 2 2
i.e., E axial = –2 Eequator
ub
= 1440 N/C
22. For small dipole,
kq At 2r:
14. E= 2
r 1 p
Eequator =
Er 2 2 0.3
P
2
2 9 102 109 40 2r 3
q= =
k 9 109 9
1 p
= E2
q = 2 10–11 C 40 8r 3
et
qenc At r:
15. Electric flux () = 1 2p
0 Eaxis = E1
10 40 r3
rg
=
0 E 2 1 / 40 p / 8r 1
3
If more 10 C charge is placed, E1 1 / 40 2p / r 3 16
20
Ta
= = 2 23. A
p
0 +2q
pnet
q x x
16. Total flux, =
0
60°
B C
1 q x
Flux passing through the cube, = +2q – 4q p
8 0
the electric flux passing through the 3 adjacent p net p 2 p 2 2pp cos 60
faces to the charge is zero,
= 3p 2 3 qx ….( p =2qx)
flux passing through each of the remaining 3
faces of the cube is,
24. By using Q = ne
1 11 q 1 q Q = 1019 1.6 1019
0 = =
3 3 8 0 24 0 Q = +1.6 C
138
138
ns
mg q
F
q1 = (4R2) and x
q2 = [4 (2R)2] = (16R2) x 2
mg
q1 + q2 = 20 R2
Kq 2
2
…. tan
x/2
io
After redistribution of charges, final charges on x 2 mg x2 x2
l2 l 2
the spheres will be, 4 4
Q1 R x2
= x << l, is negligible.
at
Q2 2R 4
Q2 = 2Q1 Kq 2 x
As charges are conserved, total number of
x 2mg 2l
charges on both the spheres will remain constant.
i.e., q1 + q2 = Q1 + Q2
lic q2 x3
Q1 + 2Q1 = 20 R2 q x 3/ 2
20 5 dq d x 3/ 2
Q1 = R2 = (4R2)
ub
3 3 dt dt
27. Force acting on electron in electric field, dq d(x 3/ 2 ) dx
F=eE dt dx dt
ma = e E ….(i) dq dx
x1/ 2 v …. v
P
1 eE 2 1
h=0+ t ….( s = h; u = 0) v
2 m x1/ 2
rg
1.
Net electric field at O = | E B | | E A |
Q EB O EA 8Q
4Q 8
A x/2 3x/2
= 1
B 40 x 2 9
Q
=
From figure, 0 x 2
Electric field at O due to charge Q, Here, negative sign indicates net electric field is
1 Q directed along E A , i.e., towards 8Q.
EA =
40 (x / 2) 2
2. If two charges are of the same sign, they repel
Electric field at O due to charge 8Q, each other. Thus if two protons are brought
1 8Q closer, some work is done against the force of
EB = repulsion. Therefore the electric potential energy
40 (3x / 2) 2
of the system increases.
139
3. The electric potential V (x, y, z) = 3y2 2z 8. Metal plate acts as an equipotential surface,
dV therefore the field lines should enter normally to
E =
dr the surface of the metal plate.
V ˆ V ˆ V
E = ˆi j k 9. Point T lies at equatorial positions of dipole 1
x y z
and 2 and axial position of dipole 3.
= 6y ˆj 2kˆ +Q +Q
E2
= 6y ˆj 2kˆ
r E1 r
At point (1, 2, 4) 1 2
T
E = 6(2)ˆj 2kˆ E3
= 12ˆj 2kˆ Q Q
ns
Q
|E|= 122 22 148 2 37 units
3
4. A
+3/2 q p +Q
io
pnet
l l Hence potential at T
due to dipole 1, V1 = 0
at
60°
B C p due to dipole 2 near Q,
l
+3/2 q –3q 1 p Kp
V2 2 = 2
40 r r
p net = p 2 p 2 2ppcos60
lic due to dipole 3, V3 = 0
= 3p Kp
net potential at T =
3 3 r2
= 3 ql ( p = ql )
ub
2 2 V 400
1 1 10. E= 2
= 104 V/m
5. For a charge V and for a dipole V 2 d 4 10
r r
Y 10 cm
6. Charge density is inversely proportional to
P
cos 2 u cos
2 2
2 y=
F qE 2m u
Here u = 0 and a = = (As sign indicates direction, neglecting it)
m m
qEx 2
s=
1 qE 2 2cm 2 102 m
t 2mu 2
2 m
1.6 1019 104 101
2
The time required to fall through distance s is, 2 qEx 2
u = =
2dm 2m(2 102 ) 2 18 1024 2 102
t
qE = 22.22 106 m2/s2
Since t2 m, a proton will take longer time. u = 22.22 103 4.7 103 m/s = 4.7 km/s.
140
140
ns
work done is zero.
13. q +Q q
x 2x
io
Total potential energy of the system is
1 (q)( Q) ( Q)(q) (q)(q)
U=
40 x 2x 3x
at
U = 0 (given)
1 qQ qQ q 2
0=
40 x 2x 3x
3 qQ q 2
lic
0=
2 x 3x
Q 1 2 2
ub
q 3 3 9
17.
= 2 10–6 0.01 5 105
= 10 10–3 Nm
rg
F = F
2p kp
20. Eaxial = Eequatorial k
x3 y3
x 21/3 3
2 :1
y 1
141
Textbook
Chapter No.
14 Semiconductors
Hints
ns
insulator.
34. Diodes D1 and D3 are forward biased and D2 is
reverse biased. So the circuit can be redrawn as
Critical Thinking follows. R
io
4. With temperature rise, the conductivity of
semiconductors increases. R
6. Resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with
at
temperature. The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate
with larger amplitudes of higher temperatures I R
thereby increasing its conductivity. E
I= E
7. The conduction and valence bands in the R
conductors merge into each other.
lic 35. This is because n-side is more positive as
10. The energy gap between valence band and compared to p-side.
conduction band in germanium is 0.76 eV and
the energy gap between valence band and 37. In forward bias, the diffusion current increases
ub
conduction band in silicon is 1.1 eV. Also, it is and drift current remains constant. Hence no
true that thermal energy produces fewer current flows due to diffusion.
minority carriers in silicon than in germanium. In reverse bias, diffusion becomes more difficult.
11. In semiconductor, the forbidden energy gap Hence net current (very small) is due to drift.
P
between valence band and conduction band is 42. When a light (wavelength sufficient to break the
very small (almost equal to kT). Further, the covalent bond) falls on the junction, new hole-
valence band is completely filled and the electron pairs are created. Number of electron-
et
9 1032
i
4.5 1022 4.5 1022
Effective resistance of the circuit,
R = 5 + 3 = 8 . = 2 1010 m–3
Current in the circuit, I = E/R = 10/8 = 1.25 A. 7. nenh = ni2
47. Applying Kirchhoff’s second law, we have 4 1010 nh = 4 1016
I R + 0.7 = 4 nh = 106 m–3
4 0.7 3.3 8. In n-type semiconductors, minority carriers are
R 1650
I 2 103 holes, majority carriers are electrons and
Power dissipated across R = I2R pentavalent atoms are dopants.
= (2 103)2 1650 = 6.6 103 W 12.
R
ns
48. 0.4 V
p-side n-side
io
13. For diode to be in forward bias, p-side of
diode needs to be connected at potential
3V
higher than potential to which n-side of diode
at
The value of R should be such that the current in is connected.
the circuit does not exceed 5 mA. By Ohm’s This condition is satisfied in option (A) only.
law, we have
I R + 0.4 V = 3 V 14. As in both the figures the p-type material of
5 103 R = 2.6
lic diode is connected to positive terminal of
battery and n-type to negative terminal, both are
R = 520
forward biased.
49. The energy of emission, 15. In case of p-n junction diode, width of the
ub
hc 6.62 1034 3 108 depletion region decreases as the forward bias
E = h = = voltage decreases.
5780 1010
= 3.43 1019 J 16. When p-side of junction diode is connected to
3.43 1019 positive of battery and n-side to the negative,
= = 2.14 eV
P
h > Eg.
But here, h < Eg [Eg = 2.8 eV]
For emission of electrons, < 5780 Å is a must.
rg
Competitive Thinking
+
4. Band gap of insulator is highest, while that of
Ta
i.e., Eg Eg ,
In this mode, more number of electrons enter in
1 2 n-side from battery thereby increasing the
Eg Eg number of donors on n-side.
3 2
Eg Eg Eg V 0.6
1 2 3 17. Rd = = 500
I 1.2 103
5. The electronic configuration of C and Si are:
6
C = 1S2, 2S2 2P2 and 14Si = 1S2, 2S2 2P6, 3S2 3P2 18. Potential difference, V = 4 (6) = 10 V
Thus, the electrons in the outer most shell of V 10
I= = 3 = 102 A
carbon atoms are more tightly bound to the R 10
nucleus unlike for silicon and are not available
19. VAB = 0.2 10–3 (5 10–3 + 5 10–3) + 0.2
for conduction. Hence it acts as an insulator.
= 2.2 V
143
ns
50 50 V=0
resistance R1 = = 25
50 50 30. With decrease in temperature, resistance of metal
For VB > VA : decreases and semiconductor increases.
Both diodes are reverse biased so equivalent
31. Majority charge carriers in n-type semiconductor
io
resistance is infinity.
are electrons.
22. In given circuit, the diode D1 is connected in
reverse biased. Hence, no current flows through 32. The voltage-current curve for GaAs material is
at
resistance R2. As diode D2 is ideal, the as shown in figure below.
equivalent circuit can be given as, Thus, there exists a region where increase in
2 voltage leads to decrease in current which is a
non-ohmic behaviour and is attributed to
R1
lic negative resistance.
10 V hc
R3 2 33. Eg =
ub
hc
=
Eg
V 10 6.63 1034 3 108
I= 2.5 A =
R1 R 3 2 2 1.9 1.6 1019
P
R 200
pairs is given by, ni2 = nenh when both A and B are at V(1), then D1 and D2
n 2 (1019 )2 do not conduct current. So potential at Y is
ne = i = = 1017/m3
nh 1021 V(1). Y is 1 only when A and B are both 1.
Thus, this represents an AND gate.
7. When a p-n junction diode is formed, n-side Option (B) is correct.
attains positive potential and p-side attains
negative potential. When ends of p and n of a hc
14. E
p-n junction are joined by a wire, there will be a
steady conventional current from n-side to hc 6.63 1034 3 108
p-side through the wire and p-side to n-side =
E 0.74 1.6 1019
through the junction. = 16.798 107
n i2 2 10 2 10 = 1679.8 109 m
16 16
144
144
01
a
Rotational Dynamics
Hints
ns
4. For a seconds hand of a watch, T = 60 s 16. While moving along a circle, the body has a
2π 2π π constant tendency to regain its natural straight
= = = rad/s line path.
T 60 30
This tendency gives rise to a force called
io
5. For earth, T = 24 hr = 24 3600 = 86400 s centrifugal force. The centrifugal force does not
2 2 2 act on the body in motion, the only force acting
= rad/hr = rad/s on the body in motion is centripetal force. The
T 24 86400
at
centrifugal force acts on the source of
6. For minute hand, TM = 60 60 s; for hour hand, centripetal force to displace it radially outward
TH = 12 3600 s lic from centre of the path.
M TH 12 3600 1 17. In circular motion,
= = =12 : 1 ….[ ]
H TM 60 60 T Centripetal force Displacement
work done is zero.
100
7. n = 100 r.p.m. = r.p.s.
60
ub
18. L = I. In U.C.M.,
2100
= 2n = = 10.47 rad/s = constant
60 L = constant
8. n = 3.5 r.p.s. 20. In uniform circular motion, acceleration is
P
n 20 Hz 2
34. p = mv; F mv
d r
10. = 0 ….( = constant)
dt F mv 2 1 v
Ta
= =
p r mv r
11. Using,
ω-ω0 2(n n 0 ) mv 2
= = 35. F=
t t r
2 3.14 (350 0) 1
= 10 rad/s2 If m and v are constants, then F
220 r
12. C = 2r F1 r
= 2
C F2 r1
r
2 2
C 36. Using, F = mv
v = r(2n) = 2 f = fC ….[ = 2n] r
2 2 2
250
r = mv = 10×(5) = =2m
13. Using, v = r = 0.2 10 m/s = 2 m/s F 125 125
145
ns
60 2
2E 29
47. Centripetal acceleration, = = 3 rad/s
I 2
acp = 2r = g l sin = g tan
l cos
io
1
80. E= I2
= 10 tan 60 = 17.3 m/s2 2
2E 2 360
48. Using, I= 2 = = 9= 0.8 kg m2
at
(30) 2
mr2 = T and = 2n
n= 1 T 81. MK2 = I
2Hz
2 mr MK2 = MR2 K2 = R2
2
lic i.e. K is independent of M.
49. Using, Fs = mv
r 5MR 2 2 5R2 5R
86. Idisc = MK2 K = K
4 4 2
= 10 210 = 104
5
Fs r
v2 =
ub
m 10 90. Ix = Iy = I
v = 100 m/s According to principle of perpendicular axes,
Ix + Iy = Iz
50. v = 36 km/h = 10 m/s
Iz = 2I z
Using,
P
y
mv 2 500 100
F= = = 1000 N
r 50
o x
et
mv 2 MR 2
= mg + 91. IC =
r 2
2
MR 2 R
mv 2 I0 = + M
Ta
146
ns
s s 60
2
= kg m s = J-s Angle described by wheel in one rotation
s2 = 2 rad.
2 Therefore, angle described by wheel in 1 sec
101. Angular momentum L = I = Ml .
io
3 = 2 5 radians = 10 rad
at
Distance covered in ‘n’ revolutions = n(2r)
108. = I = MK2 = nD
109. = I = 2.5 18 = 45 Nm 2000D = 9500
9500
110. = I
lic D=
2000
= 1.5 m
113. = dL = 4L 0 = L ωs = 2π 3600 = 60 : 1
dt 4 ωm 60 2
K2
et
= = 0.1
= 0.0175 J = 175 104 J 1800
o
2 180
117. For solid sphere, K = 2 ….[ 1 rad =
]
Ta
R2 5
2gh 2gh 6. TE = 24 hr, TH = 12 hr
v= = E 2 / TE TH 12 1
K2 2
1 2 1
R 5 H 2 / TH TE 24 2
9. n=
540
= 9 r.p.s., = 2n = 18 rad/s 18. Speed of C1 = R1 = 2 R1
60 T
Angular acceleration Speed of C2 = R2 = 2 R2
Gain in angular velocity 18 T
= = = 3 rad s–2
time 6 Speed of C1 = 2R1 / T = R1
dω Speed of C2 2R 2 / T R2
10. Using, =
dt
15π-10π 5π 19. r = 0.25 m, n = 15 r.p.m. = 15 r.p.s.
= = = 2.5 rad/s2 60
4-2 2 π
= 2n = 2×π×15 = rad/s
210 60 2
11. n1 = 0, n2 = 210 r.p.m. = r.p.s. π π
60 v = r = 0.25 = m/s
ns
210 2 8
d = 2(n2 n1) = 2 0 = 7 rad/s
60
20. T = 20 = 1 = 0.5 s
dω 2π×210 40 2
= = = 4.4 rad/s2
dt 60×5 2π = 2π = 4 rad/s
io
=
T 0.5
12. Using,
Let r = 50 cm = 0.5 m
= 2t + 3t2
v = r = 0.5 4 = 2 m/s
at
= dθ = 2 + 6t
dt 21. v = r
= dω = 6 rad/s2 =
v
= constant [As v and r are constant]
dt r
13. v = r.
lic
22. T1 = T2 1 = 2
where r is distance from axis of rotation. v v
At the north-pole, r = 0 v = 0 = = constant
r r
ub
14. A particle will describe a circular path if the angle v1 v2 v r R
= 1= 1=
r1 r2 v2 r2 r
between velocity, v and acceleration a is 90.
23. For seconds hand, T = 60 s,
n
r = 3 cm = 3 102 m
P
2 23.14 v = r = r 2n
v = r = r = 60 = 6.28 mm/s = 10 2 3.142 10
T 60
= 628.4 cm/s.
v = 6.28 2 mm/s 8.88 mm/s
Ta
25. Using,
17. Angular velocity of particle P
v = r = 0.5 70 = 35 m/s
about point A,
v v 26. T = 24 hr, r = 6400 km
A
rAB 2r 2π 2π 2 3.14 6400
v = r = r= 6400 =
Angular velocity of particle P T 24 24
about point C, v 1675 km/hr
v v
C ˆi ˆj kˆ
rBC r
27. v = r = 3 4 1 = 18iˆ 13jˆ 2kˆ
A v r
= 5 6 6
C 2r v
A 1 d 2
= 28. Angular acceleration = = 22
C 2 dt 2
148
ns
2 1 θ 150π
=21 90° Number of revolutions = = = 75
T 2 2π 2π
4 2 cm
= =
60 2 30 s 37. = and =
io
t t
31. Let velocity at A = v1
Velocity at B = v2 = 2
t
Velocity is constant,
at
But = constant t2
v1 = v2 = v (say) 1 (2)2
AOB = 60 So, =
1 2 (2 3)2
Change in velocity,
|v1 v2 |= v12 v 2 2 2v1v 2 cos
lic or
1
1 2
=
4
25
= v 2 v 2 2v 2 cos 1 2 25
or =
1 4
= 2v 2 1 cos = v 2 2sin 2
ub
2 2 25
or 1 + =
1 4
= 2 v sin = 2 v sin 30
2 2 21
=
32. = 2t3 + 0.5 1 4
P
d
= (2t3 + 0.5) = 6t2
dt 38. By using equation 2 = 02 2
At t = 2 s, = 6 22 = 24 rad/s 0
2
et
= 0 2(2n)
2
33. Using, 2
0 36 0 3 02
= = = 6 rad/s2 = ....(i)
t 6 4 4 36
rg
34. = 0t + t 2 = 2 2 +
2 2 02
n =
5 4
35. v = 72 km/hr = 72× = 20 m/s, Substituting the value of from equation (i),
18
0.5 ω02 4×4π×36
d = 0.5 m r = m n = = 48 revolutions
2 4π 3ω02
0 = =
v 20
= 80 rad/s Number of rotations = 48 – 36 = 12
r 0.5/2
2
40. Tangential force acting on the car increases with
2 = 0 + 2 the magnitude of its speed.
0 = (80)2 + 2(2 20) at = time rate of change of its speed
6400 = 80 = change in the speed of the car per unit time
80 which is 3 m/s
= = 25.48 rad/s2
Tangential acceleration = 3 m /s2
149
ns
F v2. If v becomes double, then F (tendency to a = 2r = 42n2r = 4(3.14)2 12 20 103
overturn) will become four times. a 8 105 m/s2
47. Angular momentum is an axial vector. It is 57. Net acceleration in non-uniform circular motion
directed always in a fixed direction (perpendicular
io
to the plane of rotation either outward or inward), a = a 2t a c2
if the sense of rotation remains same. 900
2
= (2) 2
48. The instantaneous velocity of a body in U.C.M. 500
at
is always perpendicular to the radius or along 2.7 m/s2
the tangent to the circle at the point.
58. Using,
p
49. r = , n = r.p.s.
t
lic 2
ar = v = 20×20 = 40 m/s2, at = 30 m/s2
r 10
v = r = r 2n 2
a= a +a 2
r
2
t = 40 2 +30 2 = 50 m/s
p
= 2
ub
t 59. As is constant, acceleration is due to the
22p change in direction of velocity = 2r
=
t As rA > rB aA > aB
50. The radius vector points outwards while the 60. In half a circle, the direction of acceleration is
P
1200 r r
et
4740 cm/s2 r r
rg
2
52. r = 10 cm = 0.1 m, a = 1000 10 m/s = 2v
2
a = 2r r
2 a
= 61. If ar = 0, there is no radial acceleration and
Ta
r
circular motion is not possible
a 1000 10 316 rad/s So ar 0
= =
r 10 10 2 If at 0 the motion is not uniform as angular
n = 316/2 = 50.3 r.p.s. 50 r.p.s. velocity will change
n = 3000 r.p.m. So ar 0 and at = 0 for uniform circular motion
53. Radius of horizontal loop, r = 1 km = 1000 m mv2
3 62. Centripetal force = and is directed always
v = 900 km/h = 900×10 = 250 m/s r
3600 towards the centre of circle. Sense of rotation
v2 250×250 does not affect magnitude and direction of this
a= = = 62.5 m/s2 centripetal force.
r 1000
a 62.5 63. The surface will rise from the sides, due to
= = 6.25
g 10 centrifugal force.
150
ns
66. Using, T = m2r 14 rad/s
10 = 0.25 2 0.1 75. Using,
= 20 rad/s 2πr
v=
2 T
io
67. F = m R
2πr 2π 20 1
R 12 (m and F are constant) T= = × = s
ω v 80 π 2
If is doubled, then radius will become 1/4
at
T = Time taken for one revolution
times i.e., R/4
There are 2 revolutions total time taken = 1 s
68. Using, F = mr2 = m 42n2r 2π
= =4 ....( T = 1)
m 42n2r = 6 1014
n2 = 6 1014
lic T
dω 4
4 1.6 1027 3.142 0.12 = = = 2
dt 2
n 5 106 cycles/s 20
at = . r i.e. = 2 = 40 m/s2
ub
mv 2 π
69. The centripetal force, F =
r 2
mv 2 76. n= r.p.s.
r=
F T sin = M2R .…(i)
P
2
r v or v r T sin = M2L sin .…(ii)
v1 r 1 From (i) and (ii),
(If m and F are constant), 1
v2 r2 2 T = M2L = M 42n2L
et
2
æ 2ö
2
= M 42 ççç ÷÷÷ L = 16 ML
70. Using, Fcp = m r = m 2 r
2
èπø
T
2
77. Linear velocity, v = r = 2nr
rg
151
83. Since car turns through 90 after travelling R (10)2 1 = 12.5 m
471 m on the circular road, the distance 471 m is 0.8 10
quarter of the circumference of the circular path. If R 12.5 m
R is the radius of the circular path, then R = 12 m
1
(2R) = 471
4 92. v 12m / s, v = 4 2 m / s
471 2 471 2
R= = = 300 m v= rg
π 3.14
v = 12 m/s, m = 1000 kg 12 = μrg , 4 2 = rg
Centripetal force,
12 = 3 =
1000 12
2 2
Fcp = mv = 480 N 4 2 2
R 300
2
ns
=
84.
2
tan = v tan v2 9
rg
93. For the crate not to slide, the centripetal force
tan 1 = v12 = v2 = 1 2
should be mv = mg
io
tan 2 v22 4v 2 4 r
tan 2 = 4 tan 1 v2 = rg = 0.6 35 9.8 = 205.8
v = 14.3 m/s
at
2
h
85. sin = and tan = v
l rg 94. Using,
2
tan sin 1 h = v
2
mg = mv
l rg
lic 2
r
0.5 mg = mv
1 v2h r
86. Reaction on inner wheel, R1 = M g 2
2 ra v = 0.5 r g = 0.5 10 9.8 = 49
ub
1 v h
2 v = 7 m/s
Reaction on outer wheel, R2 = M g
2 ra 95. Using,
where, r = radius of circular path, h
tan =
2a = distance between two wheels and l
P
5
r = 400 m, v = 72 km/hr = 72 = 20 m/s,
μg 0.4×10 18
= = = 4 = 2 rad/s
r 1 v2 = h
rg l
rg
152
ns
h v2 = tan 30 o 17.32 10
=
l rg 1
= 17.32 10 = 10 m/s
v2l 3
h=
io
rg
108. Using,
2
101. The inclination of person from vertical is given 20×20 20
tan = v = = = 2.04
by, rg 20×9.8 9.8
at
v2 (10) 2 1 –1
= tan (2.04) = 63.90
tan =
rg 50 10 5
5 50
= tan1(1/5) 109. v = 60 km/h = 60 = m/s,
102. = sin1(0.2), N = 2000 N,
lic r = 0.1 km = 0.1 1000= 100 m
18 3
2
1 v2 50 1
sin = 0.2 = tan = =
5 rg 3 0.1 103 9.8
ub
5 = tan–1 (50 / 3)
2
1
100 9.8
24 5
110. v = 180 km/hr = 180 = 50 m/s
P
mg = N cos 18
24 Using,
Weight = N cos = 2000 = 1959.6 N 2
50×50 5
5 tan = v = = = 1
rg 500×10 10
et
2
24
2
…. cos 1
1
= tan1 = tan1 (0.5)
5 1
5
2
103. Using,
rg
2 2
= 45 r rg
2
104. Using, h = l sin But v = tan
h 1.2 rg
sin tan = = 0.15
l 8 mg = mg tan = 80 10 0.5 = 400 N
tan = 0.15
112. Let initial velocity = v1
Now, v = rg tan 40 9.8 0.15 8 m/s
New velocity v2 = v 1
20 6v
=
105. r = 50 m, l = 10 m, h = 1.5 m 100 5
v2 h 2 2
= r1 = 30 m, tan 1 = v1 , tan 2 = v2
rg l r1g r2g
rgh 50 9.8 1.5 As there is no change in angle of banking,
v= = = 8.6 m/s
l 10 1 = 2
153
r1 = v1 = v1 = 5 = 25
6 1N
r2 v2 v1 6 36
5 mg
117. T =
36 36 216 cos
r2 = r1 = 30 = = 43.2 m
25 25 5
h L2 r 2
cos = = L
113. Using, L L h
2 v2 mg L
Fs = mv But, tan = T=
ns
r rg L2 r 2 r
v2
= g tan 118. The particle is moving in circular path.
r
From the figure, mg = R sin …(i)
io
Fs = mg tan = 90 10 tan 30 520 N mv 2
= R cos …(ii)
r Rsin
114. For banking of road, = tan–1 v
2
at
–1
we get Rcos
= tan (0.24) rg r
tan = 0.24 tan = but tan =
v2 h mg
v2
Also, tan =
rg
= = 0.24
lic h
115. Using,
T sin = m2r = m2 l sin ….(i) v2 3gr
119. v = 3gr and a = = = 3g
ub
T cos = mg ….(ii) r r
mg v = 5gr = 5×9.8×6.4
g
From (i) and (ii), 2 = = 313.6 = 17.7 m/s
l cos
rg
g 123. Using,
=
l cos mv2
F= = m2r = mg
2π l cos r
Time period, T = = 2
Ta
=
ω g g 9.8
=
r T 4
= 2 3.14 1 cos60 2 2
10 T= 4s
9.8
= 1.4 s
h=
v2
=
(0.5) 2
= 0.025 m 124. TL TH = 6 mg
g 10
125. Using,
= 2.5 cm
mv 2 2 (4) 2
= = 32 N
116. Using, r 1
r = l sin It is clear that tension will be 52 N at the bottom
r = 10 sin 30 r = 5 m, T = 3 s of the circle because we know that,
2π 2π mv 2
= = TBottom = mg +
T 3 r
154
ns
m
1 1
(K.E.)L(K.E.)H = m v2L v2H = m[5 rg rg] = mg + [2gl(1 cos60)]
l
2 2
= 2 mrg = 2 1 1 10 = 20 J = mg+ mg = 2mg
mv 2
io
129. Even though particle is moving in a vertical 134. Tension, T = + mg cos
loop, its speed remain constant. r
mv 2 mv 2
Tension at lowest point, Tmax = + mg For, = 30, T1 = + mg cos 30
r
at
r
mv 2 mv 2
Tension at highest point, Tmin = mg = 60, T2 = + mg cos 60
r r
mv 2 T 1 > T2
Tmax
= r2
+ mg
=
5
lic 135. T = mg + m2r = m {g 42 n 2 r} ….[ = 2n]
Tmin mv 3
- mg
r 2
2n 2r
= m g 42
n
r m g
By solving we get, v = 4gr = 4´9.8´ 2.5 60
900
ub
= 98 m/s
136. Minimum angular velocity,
130. Using, g
2 min =
mg – N1 = mv1 R
P
r
2 R 2
mv12 = 667 – 556 = 111 Tmax = = 2 = 2 =2 2 3 s
min g 10
r
et
mg – N2 = mv 2
r 4
r T = 2 = 2 3.14 4s
g 9.8
N2 = 667 – 444 = 223 N
Ta
155
ns
mv12 As moment of inertia is more, raw egg will take
Maximum tension, Tmax = +mg
r more time to stop as compared to boiled egg
mv22 (Law of Inertia).
Minimum tension, Tmin = mg
io
r I 0.25
Using the law of conservation of energy, 147. R2 = =
M 1
1 2 1 R = 0.5 m d = 1 m
mv1 = mv 22 + 2mgr
at
2 2
v12 v22 4rg
150. As the mass of disc is negligible, only the
moment of inertia of five particles will be
v12 considered.
g v 2 rg
Hence Tmax r
Tmin v 2 2
12
v 2 rg
lic I = mr2 = 5 mr2 = 5 2 (0.1)2 = 0.1 kg-m2
g 151. Let the mass of loop P having radius r be m
r
v 22 5rg 4
So the mass of Q having radius = nr will be nm
….[ v12 = v22 + 4rg]
ub
v 2 rg 1
2
v22 = 9 10 10
3 3
Moment of inertia of loop P, Ip = mr2
v22 100
et
dI 2RdR 2dR
= = 152. Moment of inertia of system about YY,
I R2 R
= 2 1% = 2% I = I1 + I2 + I3 Y
Ta
2 1 3 3
144. Earth is solid sphere, so M.I. = MR2 = MR 2 MR 2 MR 2
5 2 2 2 1
4
where M = R3 7
3 = MR 2 2 3
2
2 4 8
M.I. = ( R3)R2 = R5
5 3 15
145. Moment of inertia of the system about the given
axis I = IA + IB + IC
MR 2
As rod is thin, 153. M.I. of ring about diameter I = ….(i)
2
IA = m 02 = 0
Rod B is rotating about one end L = R R = L /
2
IB = ML From equation (i), I =
ML2
3 2 2
156
ns
= M(2R)
2
1
1 3
12 MR 2
A D a/2 B
4M 2R 2 2
= =
io
2 2
12MR 3 a
CD2 = BC2 BD2 = a2
2
156. Let mass of the ring = mass of the disc = M
MR12 3a 2
x2 =
at
M.I. of the ring about the diameter = ….(i)
2 4
2 Moment of inertia of system along the side AB,
M.I. of disc about the diameter = MR 2 Isystem = I1 + I2 + I3
4
Since M.I.s are equal,
lic = m (0)2 + m (x)2 + m (0)2
MR 12 MR 22 3ma 2
= mx2 = ….[From (i)]
2 4 4
R1 2 R1 1
2
ub
1 2
R2 4 R2 2 165. E = I = 1500
2 2
1
157. I = 2 MR2 = 2 4 R 3 R 2 I(t)2 = 1500
2
5 5 3
P
2 E1
2
1
2
E=
1 2 1
I = I (2n)2 = 22 In2 I R R = d
2 2
….(i)
2 2 Id d R
= 2 (0.1) 16 = 3.2 J
As same torque is applied,
169. K.E.rot
1
= I2 =
1 ML2
2
IRR = Idd
2 2 12 I R R = Idd
1 L2 tR td
= A L D 2
2 12 I R R = t R
….(ii)
1 Id d td
K.E.rot = DAL32
24
ns
From equations (i) and (ii),
170. Additional rotational K.E. = 800 J d = t R
1 2 1 R td
I I 02 = 800
2 2 dtd = RtR d = R = n
io
1
As 0 = 0 I2 = 800 174. Initial moment of Inertia I1 = 1 kg-m2
2
Moment of Inertia of lump of wax = MR2
1600 1600 = 50 103 (20 102)2
= 21 rads1
at
I 3.6 = 2 103 kg m2
From = 0 + t Final moment of inertia,
21 = 0 + 15 t, t =
21
= 1.4 s I2 = 1 + 2 103 = 1.002 kg m2
15
lic % Increase in M.I. = 1.002 1 100 %
1
20 1
171. n1 = 20 r.p.m. = r.p.s.,
60 3 = 0.002 100 % = 0.2 %
60
1r.p.s., 175. M.I. of disc of central zone,
ub
n2 = 60 r.p.m. =
60 4 (0.2) 2
Work done by torque is the change in its I1 = = 0.08 kgm2
2
rotational K.E.
M.I. of wooden annular disc,
W = (K.E.)f (K.E.)i
I2 = 3 [(0.2)2 + (0.5)2] = 3 [0.04 + 0.25]
P
=
1
2
1
2
1
I f2 I i2 = I f2 i2
2
2 2
= 1.5 0.29 = 0.435 kg m2
1
= MK2 2n f 2n i
2 2
M.I. of whole disc = I1 + I2 = 0.08 + 0.435
et
2
= 0.515 kgm2
1 9 1
2
1 9 2 4
= 1 2 4
2 9 4
mR2 = I
= 16 J 5
Ta
300 3
172. n1 = 300 r.p.m. = = 5 r.p.s., M.I. of disc about tangent to plane I = mR2
60 2
600 Substituting the value of MR2 from equation (i),
n2 = 600 r.p.m. = = 10 r.p.s. we get
60
Work done = Change in K.E.rot 3 4 6
I = I = I
1 2 5 5
= I 22 21
2 179. 2 = 1.1 1, E 2
1 MR 2 E1 K12 , E 2 K22
= × × 4π 2 n 22 n12
2 2
E2 E1 = K 22 12 K12 (1.12 12)
= MR2 2 n 22 n12
= K12 (0.21)
= 2 (1)2 (3.14)2 (102 52)
= 2 (3.14)2 75 E 2 E1 K12 0.21
100 100 21%
1479 J E1 K12
158
ns
ML2
Using, I = MK2 = = (3 M + 16 m) R
2
12
2
L L 1
K= = = m
12 2 3 2 3 189. By the principle of parallel axes, IP = IG + Mh2
io
IP = MK 2P , IG = MK G2
183. I = m ri
i i
2
= 4 Mb2 ….(i)
MK 2P = MK G2 + Mh2
at
If K = radius of gyration of the system then, K 2P = K G2 + h2
I = mi K2 = 4 MK2 ….(ii) 100 = KG2 + 36
K G2 = 64 K G = 8 cm
i
Comparing equations (i) and (ii),
K=b
lic 190. I0 = 1 ML2
12
R
184. Radius of gyration of circular disc k disc = By applying theorem of parallel axes,
2
ub
2
L
Radius of gyration of circular ring k ring = R I = I0 + M
2
k disc 1
Ratio = .
k ring 2 = 1 ML2 + 1 ML2
12 4
P
R 1
185. For disc, K = = 4 ML2
2 12
…. [ axis passes through centre of disc and I = 4 I0
et
2 5
= 0.5 kgm2
2
187. According to theorem of parallel axes, moment 192. M.I. at end of rod = ML = 0.33ML2
of inertia of a rod about one of its ends, 3
2
2 2
M.I. at its centre = ML = 0.083ML2
I = ML + M L
12 4 12
2 M.I. at a point midway between end and centre
= ML = Ix = Iy 2
3 = 7ML = 0.145ML2
48
Moment of inertia of two rods about Z-axis
= Iz = Ix + Iy 1
M.I. at a point length from centre
= Moment of inertia of 2 rods placed along 8
X and Y-axis = 2ML
2
67ML2
= = 0.087ML2
3 768
159
ns
2
ML 5 5 5
194. IA = , IB = 0
12
2 200. I1 = 1 MR2 + 1 ML2
ML2 L L ML2 ML2 2 12
IC = +M = +
io
12 2 4 12 16
2
I1 = MR + 1 M(4R2)
1 2
ML2 L L 2 12
ID = +M
12 2 3 = MR + 1 MR2 = 5 MR2
1 2
at
2 2 3 6
ML2 L
= +M 1 2 1
I2 = MR + M (4R ) 2
12 6
2 3
=
ML2
12
+
ML2
36
lic = MR + 4 MR2 = 11 MR2
1
2
2
3 6
I1 = 5 and I > I
195. Consider two perpendicular diameters, one 2 1
along the X-axis and the other along the I 2 11
ub
Y-axis. Then, Ix = Iy =
1
MR2 I2 – I1 = 11 MR2 – 5 MR2 = MR2
4 6 6
According to the perpendicular axes theorem, 201. M.I. of the solid sphere about a diameter
the moment of inertia of the disc about an axis 2
P
Mr 2
196. M = V = R2t I= + Mr2
2
MX = RX2tX and MY = RY2tY
2 Mr 2 3
2
MR2 = + Mr2 = Mr 2
Let I = MR
rg
5 2 2
2
2
R y 4 t y r= R
IX = R x t x and IY =
4
15
2 2
Ta
Ry ty 4 4 ML2
IY (4R) (t / 4) (4) 4 202. I =
= = = = 64 12
IX R x 4t x R 4t 4
Applying the theorem of parallel axes,
IY = 64 IX L
2
ML2 ML2 7ML2
I1 = I + M = =
197. The moment of inertia of ring about a tangent in 4 l2 l6 48
2 2
its plane = MR + MR2 = 3MR MR 2
2 2 203. Ic = M.I. of disc about any diameter,
2
The moment of inertia of disc about its diameter 1 MR 2 MR 2
2 Id =
= MR 2 2 4
4
Applying theorem of parallel axes,
Ratio = 3MR / 2 = 6
2
MR 2 5
MR / 4 2 1 It = Id + MR2 = MR 2 MR 2
4 4
160
ns
211. I = MR2 = 1 (0.5)2 = 0.25 kg m2
O a
= 2n = 2 100 = 200 rad/s
a/ 2
L = I = 0.25 200 = 50 kg m2/s
io
A
212. L = I = I 2 (n2 n1)
Applying parallel axes theorem, = 0.06 2 (5 0) = 0.6
at
2
a ma 2 ma 2 2
IA = I0 + m = = ma 2 1 L2
2 6 2 3 213. K.E. = L2 = 2 K.E. I
2 I
206. Moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc L = 2 4 2 = 4 kg m2/s
about an axis through its centre and
lic 2
1
perpendicular to its plane is IC = MR 2 214. E = 1 I2 = L E L2
2 2 2I
2 2
Applying theorem of parallel axes, E f = Lf = 150 = 9
ub
moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc
Ei Li 100 4
about an axis touching the disc at its diameter
E f E i 100 = E f 1 100
and normal to the disc,
Ei Ei
1 3
I = IC + Mh2 = 2
MR 2 + MR = MR 2
P
12 L I M R / 2
2
1
= = = L = L
A l B L I MR 2 4 4
216. E = 1 I2
rg
P
2
L = I L2 = I22
O 2
E = 1 L
Ta
2 I
But I = MR2
By applying parallel axes theorem, 2
L2
E= 1 L =
M.I. of rod AB about point ‘O’ 2 MR 2
2MR 2
2
Ml 2 l Ml
2
= M L2 1
12 2 3 217. E = E when L is constant
But the system consists of four rods of similar 2I I
type. Hence by the symmetry, As I1 > I2 E1 < E2
Ml
2
Isystem = 4 218. = I = I d
3 dt
where = constant
1 2 (I) 2 L2 d = 0 = 0
208. E = I = =
2 2I 2I dt
161
ns
= çæçI + 50I ÷ö÷ = 1.5I = 1.5 1 ma2 = 3 ma2
çè ÷ 100 ø
2 2
221. = f i = 3 or =
3
io
t
i = 2n = 2 20 = 40 rad/s .2 1
233. L = I = L
= 0 40 = 4 rad/s2 (retardation) T T
at
10 1
= I = 5 103 (4) = 2 102 Nm Hence, by doubling T, L becomes times.
2
Negative sign shows that it is a retarding torque.
|| = 2 102 Nm 234. =
dL 4J 1J 3J
60 1 2
235. E1 = I
Using, = I, 2
ub
= = – 0.81 = –5.06 In second case, I = 3I
I 0.16 According to conservation of angular momentum,
= 0 + t = 25.12 – (5.06 2) = 15 rad/s I = I
223. n = 1800 rev/min = 30 rev/s I I
= = =
P
1 2 1 1 1
2000 = 3I = I2 = E
224. = I I = = 1000 kg-m2 2 9 3 2 3
2
1
E E
225. Torque producing acceleration 1, E1 E 2 3 = 2
rg
=
= I11 = 2mD21 E1 E 3
Same torque produces 2
236. L1 = I11, L2 = I2 2
= I22 = 2m(2D)22
Let I1 = MR2
Ta
4(2mD2)2 = 2mD21
1 = 500 r.p.m.
2 = 1 1 I2 = MR2 + MR2 = 2MR2
4
From conservation of angular momentum,
227. According to conservation of angular L1 = L2 I11 = I22
momentum, L = L MR2 (500) = 2MR2 (2)
I = I 2 = 500 = 250 r.p.m.
I = I = n 2
n
237. By principle of conservation of angular
1 2 1 2 momentum, I = I11 …..(i)
228. MR M b R = MR
2
162
4 4 1
2 R2 4g
238. The angular frequency of the composite system 2 2
ns
MR 2
Total initial angular momentum of the two discs MK2 = The body is a disc.
I11 + I22 2
Since the two discs are brought into contact face 245. Acceleration of an object rolling down an
to face (one on top of the other) and their axes inclined plane,
io
of rotation coincide, the moment of inertia Ic of gsin
the composite system will be equal to the sum a=
K2
of their individual moments of inertia, 1 2
R
at
i.e. Ic = I1 + I2
If c is the angular frequency of the composite K2
For a ring, 1
system, the final angular momentum of the R2
system is gsin
Icc = (I1 + I2)c
lic aring =
11
0.5gsin
1 2 1 2
241. I mv gsin
2 2 asph = 0.71gsin
2
I 3 22
2
1
v2 = 1 v 1m/s 5
et
m 12
As acceleration of the solid sphere is maximum,
1 1 hence the sphere will reach the ground with
242. K.E.trans. = mv2 0.4 22 0.8 J
2 2 maximum velocity.
rg
2
1 11 v 246. The disc rolls about the point of contact with the
K.E.rot = I2 MR 2 2
2 2 2 R horizontal surface, therefore speed of centre of
1 1 mass is v = r and that of topmost point is
= Mv 2 0.4 22 0.4 J
Ta
4 4 2 r = 2 v.
K.E.tot = 0.8 + 0.4 = 1.2 J 247. In the case of rolling, as K.E.,
1 2 1 1 I
243. Total K.E. of the loop = I + Mv2 E= Mv2 1 2
….(i)
2 2 2 MR
1 1 For ring, I = MR2
= MR22 + Mv2
2 2 2
Ering = M ring v ring
2
= Mv = 8 J
E ring
….(i) [ R2 2 = v2] vring = .…(ii)
0.3
1 1
Total K.E. of the disc = Mv2 + I2 For cylinder, I = 1 MR2
2 2 2
2
1 1 1 v 3
= Mv2 + MR2 2 2
Ecylinder = M cylinder v cylinder .…[from (i)]
2 2 2 R 4
163
4E cylinder 1
vcylinder = 252. ET = mv2 and
3 0.4 2
1 1 v2 1 K2
E cylinder ER = I2 = (MK2) = Mv2 2
= .…(iii) 2 2 R 2
2 R
0.3
1
According to problem, Mv 2
ET 2 R2 5
Ering = Ecylinder R= = = =
ER 1 K2 K 2
2
vring = vcylinder .…[From (ii) and (iii)] Mv 2 2
2 R
As the motion is uniform, both will reach the
wall simultaneously. 253. For slipping or sliding without rolling,
1 a = g sin and v = 2gh
248. ET = 1 K Mv2
2
ns
a = gsin
K2 1
ER = 2 Mv2 (1 K 2 / R 2 )
R 2
v = 2gh
The fraction of total energy associated with
(1 K 2 / R 2 )
io
ER K 2 /R 2
rotation is = As a < a and v < v, slipping cylinder reaches
ET 1+ K 2 /R 2
the bottom first with greater speed.
For solid sphere, K2/R2 = 2/5
at
ER 2 gsin
= 254. a = = gsin 30
E total 7 K2 2
1 2 1
R 5
2
MR2
249. For solid sphere, I =
5
lic a = 5g 1 = 5g
7 2 14
1
ET = Mv2
2 256. The acceleration is given by,
1 1 2 1 1
ER = I2 = MR 2 2 = MR2 2 = Mv2 a = gsin
ub
2 2 5 5 5 K2
1 1 7 1 2
2
E = Mv + Mv = 2
Mv2 R
2 5 10
a = gsin ….( I = MK2)
I
P
1 1 2
250. E1 = Mv2, MR
2
1 1
258. ET = 1 K 2 Mv2
E2 = Mv 2 I2
2
1
et
2 2
R 2
1 1
= Mv2 + (MR2)2 ER = K 1 Mv2
2
2 2
1 1 R2 2
= Mv + Mv2 = Mv2
2
rg
Mv K2
For a ring, =1
251. Total energy = K.E. of translation + K.E. of R2
rotation ER 1 1
= =
1 1 1 1 2 ET 11 2
= Mv2 + I2 = Mv2 + MR22
2 2 2 2 5
1 1 7 259. As the body rolls the inclined plane, it loses
2 2 2
= Mv + Mv = Mv potential energy. However, in rolling, it acquires
2 5 10
both linear and angular speeds and hence gains
1 2 1 the kinetic energy of translation and that of
I
2
K.E.of rotation Mv 2
= 2 = 5 = rotation. So, by conservation of mechanical
Total energy 7 2 7 2 7 energy,
Mv Mv
10 10
2 Mgh = 1 Mv2 + 1 I2
Percentage of (K.E.)R = 100% = 28.57% 2 2
7 But for rolling, v = R
164
ns
For solid sphere, v = 10 gh
7 vertical then v = 2gl (1 cos ) .…(ii)
10 10 3.5 sin 30 = Comparing (i) and (ii), cos = 0
v = 10 g l sin = 25
7 = 90
7
io
v = 5 m/s 267. Let the bead starts slipping
after time t
261. Centripetal force on electrons is provided by For critical condition,
at
electrostatic force of attraction.
frictional force provides the
F 1 and r n2 where n is principal quantum centripetal force
r2 L
m2L = R = m a1 = Lm
number. m(t)2L = mL
F1 n 42 3
4
81
4
lic
F2 n1 2 16 t= ... [ = t]
m
O T 2
l M
Mass of the cut - out part is m = .
4
T
rg
2 2 4 2 32
mv 2
force T ….(i) because r = R/2.
l From the parallel axes theorem, the moment of
Also, tension T is provided by the hanging ball inertia of the cut out portion about O is
of mass m, 2
1 M R 3
T = mg ….(ii) Ic = I0 + mr2 = MR2 + = MR2
32 4
2 32
mv 2 v2
mg = g= Moment of inertia of the shaded portion about O
l l
is
264. Using, Is = I Ic
v = rg = 0.4 50 9.8 = 196 1 3
= MR2 MR2
v = 14 m/s 2 32
v 14 13
= = = 0.28 rad/s = MR2
r 50 32
165
ns
1 1 2 4gh
Rotational kinetic energy = mr 2
2 2 3r
mgH Again, at = 0
=
3
io
mv 2
Friction = mgsin = mg cos
mv 2 k R
271. = 2
r r As decreases, cos increases friction
at
k increases.
mv2 =
r
275. m2r cos = mg sin
1 k
K.E.= mv2 = g tan N
2 2r 2 =
k
P.E. = Fdr = 2 dr =
k
lic r
m2r
v2
r r tan = h
k k k rg
Total energy = K.E + P.E = = 2 l
1000 m
ub
2r r 2r
72
1 h 3600 s mg
272. Ic = MR 2
2 l (400m)(10m/s)
MR2 = 6 2 = 12 h
1
P
Using theorem of C 1m 10
parallel axes, h = 10 cm
IR = Ic + MR2
= 6 + 12 = 18 kgm2 276. At the highest point,
et
Ic IR g
= = 2n
R
273. Let particle A be situated B 1 g g
n=
rg
166
ns
Angular speed of hour hand, tangential acceleration, aT = 0.
2
The acceleration of the particle,
2 = (T = 12 hr) a = a c2 a T2 = 52 02 = 5 m/s2
12 60 60
1 720
io
= 12 60 = 12. In given figure,
2 1
Total acceleration a a t a r
2 ar = a. cos a.sin
3. Angular speed of minute hand, m =
at
60 60 v 2
a.cos
also, ar =
2 r a
Angular speed of second hand, s =
60 v2 O
a. cos =
s m =
2
2
=
60 3600 1800
59
rad / s
lic r
v2
15cos (30) =
4. Degree moved by hour hand, 2.5
for 1 revolution = 360 v2 = 32.5
ub
360 v = 5.7 m/s
for 1 hour = = 30
12 14. v
30
for 1 min = = 0.5 T m
60
P
l
for 20 mins = 20 0.5 = 10
Hence, at 12.20 pm
Here, tension provides required centripetal force.
Angular seperation = 120 – 10 = 110
et
mv 2
i.e., =T
6. l
ar v
2
mv 2 m p p2
7. 15. Radial force = =
rg
ax P(R,) r r m mr
a
….[ p = mv]
2
R ay 16. F = m r
Ta
2
Substituting for r = 2l, =
T
2
v2 v2 2
a = cos ˆi sin ˆj kl = m(2l) ….(i)
R R T
….( F = kx and x = l here)
8. They have same angular speed .
Centripetal acceleration = 2r Upon speeding, F1 = m12 r1
a1 2 r r 2
= 21 = 1 Substituting for r1 = 3l, 1 =
a2 r2 r2 T1
2
2
2
9. Since, n = 2, = 2 2 = 4 rad/s k(2l) = m(3l) ….(ii)
T1
25
So acceleration = 2r = (4)2 m/s2 = 42 ….( x = 2l here)
100
167
v12 4v22 T
ns
v1 = 2v2 h L Tsin m
io
r1 12 = r2 22 r1 12 = r1 (21 )2 = r1 = 4 r2 O m
r
r 4
r2 = 1 = = 1 cm
4 4
at
The centripetal force required for circular
19. Time period of rotation of both the particles (A motion is given by
and B) is same mv 2
TA = T B = T sin ….(i)
r
2π 2π
lic
2π Also we have,
=
ωA ωR t ω mg = T cos ….(ii)
Dividing eq(i) by eq(ii) we get,
ωA
=1:1 mv 2 1
= T sin
ub
ωB
r mg T cos
21. As the car moves on a plain horizontal circular v2 = rg tan
track, the only force that can provide centripetal v = rg tan ….(iii)
acceleration so that the car does not skid is
P
From figure,
frictional force.
r
mv 2 v2 tan =
mg = h
r rg
r
et
= 60
5 get,
60 10
rg
18 r
v= rg
= 25/54 L r2
2
v2 g
For banking, tan = v= r
Ta
23.
Rg L r2
2
v2 28. rg
tan 45 = =1 vH =
9010
v = 30 m/s
3rg
24. vM =
O M
f
B
N mrω2 vL = 5rg
mg Centripetal acceleration at midway point (M)
D
v2 3rg
= M 3g
r r
168
ns
mv2 Total moment of inertia
T= + mg cos
r ml 2 ml 2 5
I=0+ + ml2 = ml 2
At the lowest point, 3 3 3
io
2 and 3 from axis of m
cos = 1 rotation is zero, they 1 2
mv 2 don’t contribute to
at
T= + mg moment of inertia. l
r
I1 = I4 = mR2
i.e., Tension is maximum at the lowest point So l
2
ml 2
=m 3
the chances of breaking are maximum. = 2 4
lic
2
ITotal = I1 + I4 = ml2
1
31. M.I. of disc, I = MR d2 ...(i)
2 35. According to the given condition,
2 MR 2 R 2 L2
ub
M.I. of sphere, Isphere = MR S2 ...(ii) M
5 2 4 12
volume of disc = volume of sphere R 2 R 2 L2
R 4 2 4 12
πR d2 d = π R S3 R 2 L2
P
6 3
4 12
3
R = 8R
d
3
S 12 R 2
L2 =
RS = R d 4
et
...(iii) L2 = 3 R 2
2
Substitute equation (iii) in equation (ii) L = 3R
2
R 2
rg
2 2 1
Isphere = M d = × MR d2 36. Isphere = Is = mR 2
5 2 5 4 5
Let s be angular speed of sphere,
1 1 2 I
= MR d = ...from (i) Esphere =
1
Is s 2
Ta
5 2 5
2
1 2
ML2 = mR 2 s 2 ....(i)
32. M.I. of thin Rod about one end, I = 2 5
3
Similarly,
L 1
Now, L = 2R R = Icylinder = Ic = mR 2
2 2
M.I. of ring about diameter, Let c be the angular speed of cylinder,
L 2 Then it is given
M 2 c = 2s
MR 2 4 ML
2
I1 = 1
2 2 8 2 Ecylinder = Icc 2
2
I ML2 82 82 11
= mR 2 2s
2
I1 3 ML2 3 ...(ii)
2 2
169
1 2 2
R
E sphere mR s
2 5
2 41. M= 0
0 r (2rdr)
= ...[From (i) and (ii)]
E cylinder 11 2 20 R 3
mR 4s M=
2
2 2 3
1 R 2
=
5
IC = 0
0 r (2rdr) r
20 R 5
37. K.E. possessed by rotating body, IC =
5
1
(K.E.)rot = I2 By parallel axis theorem,
2
I = IC + MR2
= 1 (MK 2 ) v 2
2
2 0 2R 5 0 2R 3
R I= R2
ns
5 3
= 1 Mv 2 K 2
2
1 1 160 R
5
2 R = 02R5
5 3 15
For M, R and same, v becomes constant.
8 2 3 2 8 2
I= 0 R R = MR
io
2
Hence, as K2 increases, K.E. i.e., work done in 5 3 5
R
bringing body to rest increases. 8
a= (∵ I = aMR2)
5
at
K 2
2 K 1 K 2 2
2 , 2 and 2 = 1
R A 5 R B 2 R C 42. I0 = Ic + Mh2
WC > WB > WA Ml 2 l Ml 2 Ml 2
2
= + m = +
38. Initial K.E., (K.E.)i =
1 1
I 12 + I22
lic 12 4 12 16
2 2 7Ml 2
I0 =
1 48
Final K.E., (K.E.)f = (2I2)
2 I 7 Ml 2
ub
2 But K = =
1 2 M 48M
=I
2
7
Loss in K.E. = (K.E.)i (K.E.)f K= l
2
48
1 2 1 2 1 2
P
= I1 I2 I
2 2 2 Ml 2 MR 2
44. I1 = and l = 2R
I 12 4
= (2 12 + 2 22 12 212 22 )
4 Ml 2 MR 2
et
I2 = and l = 2R
I 3 4
= (1 2)2
4 4MR 2 MR 2 MR 2 MR 2
I2 I1 =
3 4 3 4
39. M.I. of rod about an axis passing through centre,
rg
4MR 2 MR 2 MR 2
IC =
ML2
= MK12 ...(i) = = (4 1)
3 3 3
12
M.I. of rod about an axis passing through one I2 I1 = MR2
Ta
end, ML2
ML2 45. Icm = (about middle point)
IE = = MK 22 ...(ii) 12
3
L
Divide equation (i) by equation (ii)
2 2 I Icm
MK 1 ML 3
2
= ×
MK 2 12 ML2
K12 1
=
K 22 4
L/3 L/6 L/2
K1 1
=
K2 2 Applying theorem of parallel axes,
2
40. According to perpendicular axis theorem, ML2 L ML2
I = Icm + Mx2 = M
Iz = Ix + Iy = 20 +25 = 45 kg m2 12 6 9
170
m1 m2 P
O
x1 x2
O X
l
ns
Using parallel axes theorem,
m1l
x2 = ...(considering m2 as origin) M.I. about origin O,
m1 m 2
MR 2 MR 2 2
M.I. of the system is given by, IO = +6 M 2R
2 2
io
I = m1x12 + m2x22
2 2 MR 2 54MR 2
m 2l m1l IO = +
= m1 + m2 2 2
m
1 m 2 m1 m 2
at
55 2
m1m 22l 2 m 2 m12l 2 m1m2 (m2 m1 )l 2 IO = MR
= = 2
m1 m 2 (m1 m2 )2
2
Similarly, using parallel axes theorem,
M.I. about the point P will be,
=
m1m2l
(m1 m 2 )
2
lic IP = IO + 7M(3R)2
55
47. IP = MR2 + 63MR2
I 2
ub
181
IP = MR2
2
R R/2
49. Y 9M,R
P
R
2R
Moment of inertia of disc is given by r= 3
3
Idisc = Ir + Ihole ….{Ir = M.I. of remaining part} X
O
et
2 42 m=
R 0
2
R 3
M.I. of the remaining part of the disc,
M
M hole disc
…. 4
R
2
the surface density is same 2 M 2
I=
9MR
3 M 2R
MR 2 MR 2
2 2 3
Ihole = ….(iii)
32 16
Substituting eq (iii) and eq (ii) in eq (i) we get, 9MR 2 MR 2 4MR 2
I=
MR 2 MR 2 MR 2 2 18 9
Ir =
2 32 16 9MR 2 9MR 2 9MR 2 MR 2
I=
1 1 1 13 2 18 2 2
= MR2 = MR2
2 32 16 32 I = 4MR2
171
ns
3
Using theorem of perpendicular axes, 2
l 3
Ic = 2Id = 2I ….(ii)
Now, using theorem of parallel axes, R2 2
It = Ic + MR2 = 2I + 4I = 6I
l
3
io
….[from (i) and (ii)] R 2
51. Moment of inertia of a rod about 53. Angular momentum acts always along the axis
an axis passing through centre
at
perpendicular to the plane of rotation.
and perpendicular to its length is
ml 2 l 54. Angular momentum
= = I1 = linear momentum Perpendicular distance of
12 2 3
Where l = length of the rod.
Using parallel axes theorem;
lic line of action of linear momentum from the axis
of rotation
M.I about centroid = (M.I)cm + Mh2 = mv l
l 55. We know,
Here h =
ub
2 3 1
K.E. = I2
ml 2 ml 2 2
M.I about centroid =
12 12 Here,
2ml 2 (K.E.)A = (K.E.)B ...(Given)
M.I of each rod about centroid =
P
12 1 1
2 2
I A A 2 I B B 2
2ml ml 2 2
M.I of system = 3 = = I2
12 2 As IB > IA,
et
1 1
n=6 L A A L B B
2 2
52. as B < A
LB > LA
Ta
172
ns
I = Mg sin ….[from (i) and (ii)]
Using = I, 2
4.6 M.I. of rod here is,
6.9 102 = 3 102
t Ml 2
….(Considering magnitude only) I=
3
io
3 10 2 4.6 Ml 2 l
t= 2s = Mg sin
6.9 102 3 2
l gsin
at
1 =
61. R = 20 cm = m 3 2
5
Moment of inertia of
R 3gsin
=
flywheel about its axis, 2l
I=
1
MR2
lic 66. As no external torque acts on the body, its
2 angular momentum will be conserved.
2
1 1 2
= 20 = 0.4 kg m 67.
2 5
ub
Using = I, F = 25 N
1
25
FR 5 5 Nm = 12.5 s2
=
I I 0.4 0.4 kgm 2
P
RF F 30 decrease.
= = = = = 25 rad/s2
I mR 2
mR 3 0.4
68. I11 = I22
63. Torque zero is zero I = 2 I2 ….( I2 = 2I)
Ta
= 2t3 6t2
d 2 =
= 6t2 12t 2
dt 1 2
d 2 K.E.1 = I
0 12t 12 = 0 2
dt 2 1
t = 1 second K.E.2 = I222
2
64. Using, 2
…. I 2 2I, 2
1
= 2I
Tr = I , 2 4 2
I mr 2 mr T 2
T= r I
r 2 r 2 =
50 0.5 2 2
4
= N
K.E.1 – K.E.2 = 1 I2 1 1 1 I2 1 I
2
2
= 157 N 2 2 2 2 4
173
ns
8 K2 2 7
1 2 1
71. By conservation of angular momentum, R 5
I1 a rolling 5
I1 1 = (I1 + I2)2 2 = 1
io
I1 I 2 a slipping 7
Loss in kinetic energy = (K.E.)i (K.E.)f
77. Krolling = Kf + Ur
1 1 1 I I
= I112 I1 I2 22 = 1 2 12 Ktrans + Krot = 0 + Mgh
at
2 2 2 I1 I2
1 1 3v2
Mv2 + I2 = Mg
72. According to law of conservation of angular 2 2 4g
momentum, v2 3
I11 = I22
lic Mv2 + I
R 2
= M. v2
2
25I1
I11 = I1 2 I 3 MR 2
100 M+ .M I =
R2 2 2
I11 = 0.75I12
ub
I1ω1 78. Velocity of the small object is given as,
2 =
0.75I1 2gh
v =
1.5π k2
= ….(Given: 1 = 1.5 ) 1+ 2
r
P
0.75
= 2 2g3v2
2π 2π v2 =
But f = = = 1 rps æ k2 ö
ω 2π 4g çç1+ 2 ÷÷÷
çè r ÷ø
et
In rpm; f = 60 rpm
2
inertia. I
But k =
M
74. Acceleration of a rolling body on an inclined
I = 1 2 I = 1 Mr2 disc
plane is given by r
Ta
M 2 2
g sin
a=
K2 1 K2
1 2 79. K.E.initial = mv2 1 2
r
2 R
K2 2 K2 1
2 = ; 2 = 1 1 3
r sphere 5 r disc 2 For disc, K.E.initial = mv2 1 mv2,
2 2 4
asphere > adisc K.E.final = 0
sphere will reach the bottom of the plane first.
Work done = change in kinetic energy
75. For solid sphere: 3
=0– mv2
1 4
Kt = Mv2
2 3
=– (100) (0.2)2 = – 3J
and (Kt + Kr) = 1 Mv 2 1 K 2
2
4
2 R |Work done| = 3 J
174
ns
1
1 vH
2 Mg
K2 1 Q
.... For solid cylinders 2
io
R 2
3 vL
2 10 h = 16 Q
2
at
24 At highest point, T = 0
h= = 1.2 m Q2 mv 2H
20 Mg – =
40 R 2 R
h
Now, sin =
x
lic But Mg =
Q2
.... (Given)
40 R 2
1.2
sin 30 = vH = 0
x
According to work- energy theorem
ub
1.2 W = KE
x= = 2.4 m
1/ 2 1 2 1 2
mg (2R) = mvL mv H
2 2
81. If ring, solid disc and solid sphere are released
1 2
from same height on an inclined plane, then = mv L ....( vH = 0)
P
K2
value of 2 , early it will fall.
R Fx
vS vD vR M
rg
Fy
1 2E
83. E= mv2 v2 =
2 m
At midway point (M),
v2 2E
Ta
a= = Fy = mg
r mr
Fx =
mv 2M
r
= 3mg
.... v M 3rg
84. Change in momentum
mg 3mg
2 2
= Mv – (–Mv) = 2 Mv Fnet = Fy2 Fx2 =
S = 2(2r) = 4r v2 = K
R
= K 1 n 1
v2 mR n mR
at =
2 4πr
v = K 1 .... K K
v2 n 1 m
at =
8πr R 2
1 R 2
K.E. of particle = mv2 v K K
2 n 1
1 TR 2
mv2 = 8 10–4 J
2
16 104 95. Potential energy is given to be,
ns
v2 = = 16 10–2 k
0.01 U= ….(i)
2 2
v = u + 2ats 2r 2
v2 = 2ats ….{ u = 0} The force acting on the particle will be,
io
s = 2(2r) F = dU d k2 k 32
v2 = 2at4r dr dr 2r 2 r
v2 16 102 k
at = = = 0.1 m/s2 F=
at
8r 8 3.14 6.4 102 r3
As the particle is moving in circular path, the
91. Speed of the body after just reaching at the
force acting on it will be centripetal force.
bottom is v = 2gh ….(i)
It just completes a vertical circle using this
lic
F = mv k3
r r
2
mv2 =
k
r2
velocity.
1 k
To complete vertical circle, speed required is v Now, K.E. = mv2 = 2 ....(ii)
2 2r
v = 5g D
ub
….(ii) Total Energy E = K + U = 0
2
From equation (i) and (ii), ....[from (i) and (ii)]
D
2gh = 5g 96.
2
P
aT at
5
h= D
4 R
92. Given ac
et
Angular acceleration
= 2 rad s2
Angular speed = t =
rg
2 ac = ….(ii)
a= a c2 a 2t = 8 1 8 m/s
2 2
R
Tangential acceleration is given by,
93. Work done = increase in kinetic energy
dV dV dS
1 2 1 2 1 2 at = =
W= I 2 I 1 = 2 12 dt dS dt
2 2 2
dV
= 2 I v 2 v1
2 2 2 =V
dS
W
I =
2 v22 v12
2
= K S
d
dS
K S ….from (i)
1
94. The centripetal force acting on the particle is = K2 S
provided by the central force, 2 S
2
mv 2
1 K
=K n at = ….(iii)
R R 2
176
ns
Q = () = 2 100.
0
Relative angular separation of P and Q in time t,
vCM
= 2 t.
io
Relative speed between the points P and Q at
time t 1 2
| vr | = v v 2vvcos(2r)
2 2 L1 = L2;
at
L1 = LCM + mvCMr = LCM + mr20 = mr20
= 2v 2 (1 cos 2r)
[ LCM = 0 initially]
= 2v 2 2sin 2 r lic L2 = LCM + mvCMr = mr2 + mr2 = 2mr2
= 2v sin r 2mr2 = mr20
Since, | v r | will not have any negative value so 0
=
the lower part of the sine wave will come upper 2
side. vCM = r = r0
ub
2
98. B
MR 2
101. Torque: = I =
r 2 t
MR 2
P
r =
2t
A C D
2
But = R × F
F = = MR
et
2
Displacement of initial point of contact after 1
half revolution = AB =0+ 3 (8)2
2
AB2 = AD2 +DB2 = 96 rad.
2
C 103. I = 2 kg m2
AB2 = + 2r
2
2 0 = 60 rad/s
C We know,
But r =
2 0
=
2 2 t
C C
AB2 = + After time t = 5 min = 300 s,
2 π
=0
C2 C2 1 1 0 60 1
AB = = C = = rad/s2
4 2 2 4 300 5
177
1 In second case,
= 60 + 120
5
I = 3I
= 36 rad/s According to conservation of angular
Now, L = I = 2 36 = 72 kg m2/s momentum,
I = I
L2
104. K.E. = I I
2I = = =
I 3I 3
From conservation of angular momentum about 1
centre, L has to remain constant Now, K. E. in second case = I 2
2
ns
L2
K.E. = 1 2
2(mr 2 ) = 3I
2 9
L2 L2 1 1
K.E. = 4
r2 2(mr 2 ) = I2
io
2 m. 3 2
4 1
= E
K.E. = 4 K.E. 3
at
K.E. is increased by a factor of 4. 1
E E
K 3 2
105. Using principle of conservation of angular = =
K E 3
momentum
R0
lic 109. Using principle of energy conservation,
mv0R0 = mv v = 2v0
2 K.E. of rotation + K.E of translation of falling
1 2 mass = loss in P.E.
K.E. = mv 2mv02
ub
2 1 2 1 2
mgh = I mv
2 2
106. According to law of conservation of energy,
P.E = K.E 1 2 1
mgh = I m2 r 2 [ v = r]
2 2
P
1 1
mgh = mv2 + I2 2mgh
2 2 2 =
(I mR 2 )
1 1 mr 2 2
mgh = m (r)2 +
et
1
2 2 2 2mgh 2
= 2
mr 2 I mr
.… v r, I
2
rg
110. a = R
3
mgh = m2r2 mg – T = ma ….(i)
4 α
Also, T R = mR2
3 22 R
Ta
gh = r or T = ma ….(ii)
4
Solving eq. (i) and (ii), T
4gh 1 4gh mg = 2 ma
= 2
= T
3r r 3
g
a= m a
2 2 2
107. Isphere = MR2 = 100 102 = 4000 mg
5 5 111. lP > lQ
1 1
Idisc = MR2 = 100 202 = 20000 gsin gsin
2 2 aP = and a Q
lP mR 2
lQ mR 2
Changein I 20000 4000
= 1
time 60 60 aP < aQ v = u + at t tP > tQ
40 a
= kgm2 s–1
9 v2 = u2 + 2as v a vP < vQ
178
ns
S 1 15
gsin .(t) 2 ….(ii)
4 2
Dividing equation (ii) by (i), 116. Work done; W =
1 t2 W = I ….( = I)
or t2 = 4 t = 2 s
io
4 16 W
I=
1
113. Rotational K.E.of sphere = I 2 f2 i2 2
at
2 W
I= 2 2 2 ….
2 n 2 n1 22 n 22 n12
75% of K.E. = Heat energy
1 2 75
I = MS 2π π
2 100
lic 117. ω1 = 3 rpm = 3 =
60 10
rad/s, ω2 = 0
1 2 2 2 75 2
MR = MS Isp MR 2 = 2π rev = 4π2 rad
2 3 100 3
π2
0
ub
R
2 2
ω12 ω22 100 1
=
4S 2θ
2 4π 2 800
km MR 2
114. v = 54 = 15 m/s = I =
h
P
2
v 15 rad
2
ω0 = = ,=0 2 4 102 1
r 0.45 s = = 2 10–6 Nm
2 800
ω = ω0 + αt
et
=–
0.45 15 0.45 s 2 left) making an angle with the vertical
The magnitude of average torque a
3 300
Ta
= I =
0.45 45
T
= –6.66 kgm /s2 2 ma
179
ns
3. Since this is not a case of a normal string, the
velocity at the topmost point can be zero. M M
(T.E.)initial = (T.E.)final 9. = 3
=
4 3 4 R 7 4 3
1 R R
mgh + mv2 = mg (2R) 3 3 2 8 3
io
2
Mentire sphere = V
v = 2g (2R h)
M 4
In case of a string, v at the topmost point = R 3
7 4 3 3
at
should be equal to Rg to complete the 8 3 R
vertical circle as T = 0 and ball will fall
8
vertically down if v = 0. = M
7
4. Using,
lic = M1
1
= 0t + t2 M
2 Mrem sphere = = M2
7
1
= 4 10 + 2 (10)2 = 140 rad
ub
2 2 R
2
2 Isystem = M1 R2 –
M 2 R M 2
2
140 5 5 2
θ
n= = 22
2π 23.142 2 13
= M1 R2 – M 2 R2
5 20
P
5. v AB v A v B 2 8 2 13 M 2
= M R – R
Now, 5 7 20 7
v AB = v 2 v 2 2v 2 cos(180 ) 16 13MR 2
et
= MR2 –
35 140
[smaller angle between v A and v B
=
64 13 MR2
= 180 ]
140
rg
vB
= 2v 2 (1 cos ) 51
B = MR2
140
= 2v 2 2sin 2 ( / 2)
Ta
r2 r1
= 2 v sin (/2)
= 2 R sin (/2) vA M CM M
A
2
10. In one complete revolution, total displacement
mv is zero. So average velocity is zero.
6. N cos = 0
and N sin = mg
r
g N d d
tan = r mv02 11. k kt c1
v 02 dt dt
r
r = (kt c1 ) dt
2 mg
v0 kt 2
r= tan = c1t c 2
g 2
= quadratic equation which has a graph of
parabola
180
ns
14. net = I ML 2 2
L ML
2
3L
2
If = M M
MR 2 12 2 12 2
(Mg) R = 3mR 2
2 =
8
ML2
3
io
1 MR 2
Also, (Mg)R = 3mR 2 2 Ii i = If f
2 2 2 8
2 4mgR ML2 = ML2 f
= 3 3
at
M 6m R 2
f =
4mg 4
=
R M 6m 20. The catch here is that the incline is smooth/
lic frictionless. Hence, the rotational KE. of the
T sphere will not be affected.
15. Using, T = mr2 2 =
mr Conserving Energy,
1
ub
6.4 mv2 = mgh
= 3 rad/s 2
0.1 6
v = 2gh
16. Using,
v= rg
P
= 0.4 30 9.8
= 10.84 m/s
et
Area = = 2
2 2
2 1 = 2
2 = 2 + 2 = 4 rad/s
Ta
18. P
v
O v = R
vR = v 2 v 2 2v 2 cos
= 2v 2 1 cos
= 2 v sin
2
181
02 Mechanical Properties of Fluids
Hints
ns
4T
F 40 9.8
88. Excess pressure inside soap bubble, P =
3. Pavg = = = 1.96 105 Pa r
A 2 10 10 4 Smaller bubble has more excess pressure.
Force 90. Since the soap bubble has two surfaces, excess
io
5. Pressure =
Area pressure is
mg 2 2T 4T
hg = P= =
A r r
at
Weight = mg = Ahg = V g 1
91. P
P 105 r
7. h= = 3 = 10 m
g 10 10 P1 R 1
10.
lic
When air is blown through a hole on a closed
P2
= 2 = P1 : P2 = 1 : 2
R1 2
70 13.6
h= = 280 cm V2 r2 27
3.4
4T 4 0.04
93. P= =
P
= 144 N/m2
52. Using T = F/l we get,
1N 1 105 dyne 4T 4 30
T= = = 103 dyne / cm 95. P= = = 400 dyne/cm2
m 102 cm r 3 101
Ta
ns
dv 0.05 158. P1 P2 = g (h2 h1)
128. F = A = 2 0.04 =8N
dx 0.0005 = 1040 9.8 (0.5)
P1 P2 = 5096 N m2
129. F = A
dv
io
dx 159. From the Bernoulli’s Principle
1
=
F
=
2000 P1 P2 = v 22 v12
1 2
dv 10
at
A 1
dx 0.1 = 1.3 [(120)2 (90)2]
2000 0.1 2
= = 20 poise = 4095 N/m2 or pascal
10
0.01743 m/s
= 17.43 103 m/s 5. Total pressure = Pa + gh
= 1.01 105 + 103 10 10
137. Neglecting buoyancy due to air,
....[ water = 103 kg/m3]
Ta
2r 2g
v= = 2.01 105 Pa 2 atm
9
6. Pressure difference between lungs and
2 2 105 1.2 103 9.8
2
ns
= 1.01 105 + 0.20 1000 10 Total length L = 2 4L = 8L
= 1.01 105 + 0.02 105 = 1.03 105 Pa Force due to surface tension,
F = PA F = T L = T 8L = 8TL
F = 1.03 105 1 = 1.03 105 N F 720
io
25. T= = = 72 dyne/cm
2l 25
10.
Glycerine
at
10 cm 2TA 2 70 103 102
10–h F 28 N
t 0.05 103
A B
2AT 2 8 75
27. F= = = 105 dyne
Mercury
lic 28.
t 0.12 101
The force on disc = T circumference
At the condition of equilibrium
Pressure at point A = Pressure at point B = 7 10–2 2 r
PA = PB 22
= 7 10–2 2 (20 10–2)
ub
10 1.3 g = h 0.8 g + (10 h) 13.6 g 7
h = 9.6 cm = 8.8 102 N
5 10 T= dyne cm1
15. r1 = m , r2 = m, 4 22 7
100 100
= 70 dyne cm1
F2 = 1350 kg f = 1350 9.8 N;
31. Force due to S.T. = 2 (2r) T
rg
F1 F2
As, Force required to lift the ring,
a1 a 2
F = 2 (2r) T
a1 r 2
F1 F2 12 F2 =22
22 3
102 0.07
Ta
a2 r1 7 4
F1
r12
F
(5 / 100) 2
1350 9.8 = 22 3 102 0.01
r12 2
(10 / 100) 2 = 66 104 N
= 1470N 32. F = T (2 r1 + 2r2)
F F = T 2 (1.75 + 2.25) 102
Pressure, P 1 = 12
a1 r1 = 0.074 2 3.14 4 102
=
1470 = 1.86 10–2 N
(22 / 7)(5 / 100) 2
33. Net force on stick = F1 – F2 = (T1 T2)l
= 1.87 105 Pa = (0.07 – 0.06) 2 = 0.01 2 = 0.02 N
P1 P2 v 2 4.5 105 4 105 v 2 34. Pull due to surface tension = T 2 (l + t)
16.
g 2g 103 g 2g = 0.07 2(9.8 + 0.2) 102
v = 10 m/s = 14 103 N
184
ns
W = S.T. increase in area = T 8(25R2 9R2)
W = T 8 (16 R2) = 128 R2T
or S. T. =
increasein area
50. Work done in blowing a soap bubble of radius R
2 104 is given by, W = 8R2T
= 5 10–2 N/m.
io
=
(10 8 10 4)104 2
6 102 2
= 8 3.14 2.1 10
39. W = T Surface area of bubble 2
at
Since the soap bubble has two surfaces, = 47.4 105 J
W = T 2 4R2 = 8R2T
40. W = 2 4R2 ; R is increased by a factor of 51. Since conditions are isothermal, therefore,
2, so W is increased by a factor of 4. energy will be conserved.
T= surface area
2 (10 11 10 6) 104
= T (2A A)
43. Effective area = 2 0.02 m2 = 0.04 m2 =TA
Surface energy, TA = 5 N m1 0.04 m2 = 3 103 1.3 104
et
4 4 W = TA
2 R3 = R3 r = 21/3 R
3 3 = 40 103 (4 103)
Surface energy Area = 16 105 J
Surface energy before 2A1 2R 2
Ta
ns
Final surface energy R 1
r= = = 0.25 mm
= E2 = 4 R2 T = 4 r2n2/3 T = n2/3 E 4 4
Energy released = E1 – E2 = E (n – n2/3) Work done = T A = T [n4r2 – 4R2]
io
= 4T [nr2 R2]
59. W r2 = 4 72 103 [64 (0.25 103)2 (103)2]
W1 r12 and W2 r22 = 288 103 [4 106 106]
= 2.7 106 J
at
2 2
W1 r1 4
= 16 : 9
W2 r2 3 66. As volume is conserved,
60. Wr 2 4 4
R3 = n r3
W1 R2 and W2 (3R)2
lic 3
R3
3
0.5 102
3
W R2 n= = = (5)3 = 125
1 2 =1:9 3
W2 9R r 3
1 10
R3 = 125r3 R = 5r
ub
4
61. V = r3 V r3 r V1/3 W = n4r2T 4R2T
3
= n4r2T 4(25r2)T
Now, = 4r2T (125 25)
W = 4 r2 T W r2 V2/3 22
= 400 10–6 7 10–2
P
2 2 /3
W r 2V 2/3 1/3 7
= = = (2) =4
W r V = 88 10–6
W = 41/3 W W = 8.8 105 J
et
4r 3 4R 3
Initial surface area = 2 4r2 106 =
3 3
Energy released = [8r2 – 4 22/3 r2]T
R3 = 106 r3 R = 100 r
63. Surface energy = surface tension The surface energy of one million drops,
Ta
186
ns
r
T2 T1 2T
cos ( – ) = P =
T T d
T2 T1 2T 2 75 10
– cos = F = P.A = A=
T
io
T1 d 0.01
T1 T2 T2 = 150 103 dyne
cos =
T = 150 gm-wt
at
1 P r r 1 79. The length of the water column will be equal to
73. P 1 2
r P2 r1 4r 4 full length of capillary tube.
4T 1 80. In an artificial satellite, there is a state of
P
74. P
r r
lic weightlessness. So, water will rise up to full length
of tube and will form a new surface of higher
Further, as radius of soap bubble increases with
1 radius of curvature but will not come out.
time, P
t 2T cos
ub
81. From h = , the rise in capillary depends
75. P1 = 4 P2 rg
4T 4T upon the surface tension of the liquid and
=4 r2 = 4r1 surface tension of soap water solution is less
r1 r2
than water. Hence, height will be less in second
P
4
V = r3 V r3 case. Also, as the soap solution wets the surface
3 of capillary in contact, the shape of meniscus
3 3
V1 r 1 1 will be concave.
= 1 = =
et
V2 r2 4 64
2Tcos
82. h=
4T 4T rg
76. P1 = , P2 = P1 = 2P2
r1 r2 2T cos
hg =
rg
1 2 r 1 r
= 1 =
r1 r2 r2 2 2T cos 1
83. h= h
4 4 rg r
Now, V1 = r13, V2 = r23
Ta
3 3
84.
V1 = nV2
4 4 R
r13 = n r23 r13 = n r23
3 3 r
3 3
r 1 1
n = 1 = = = 0.125
r2 2 8
V1 8
77.
V2 1
4 3
r1
3 = 8
4 3 1 r
r2 From figure, R =
3 cos
187
ns
1 1
Here, h h1r1 = h2r2 4 cos 2 = 2 cos 2 =
r 2
hr 4 2 2 = 60
r2 = 1 1 = = 1 cm
io
h2 8
2Tcos hrg
97. h= T=
88. l cos 60 = 2 or l = 2 2 cm = 4 cm rg 2cos
at
h Tl h
89. l = = l l
sin (90 ) Tw w hw
h 6 12 850
= = = = 4 3 cm = 3.0 = 2.55
1000
sin 60 3/2 3
lic Tl = 7.0 102 2.55 = 0.18 N/m
r1 h 2 6.6 3
90.
r2 h1 2.2 1 2T cos 1 1
98. h2 – h1 =
g r2 r1
ub
2T
91. h= 4T cos 1 1
rg =
g D 2 D1
2T
r = (where r = radius of curvature) 4 7 10 2 cos 00
hg 1 1
= 3 6
P
2 547 103 10 10 3
=
1.356 13.59 980 28 10 2 1 1
= 0.06 cm
=
10 3 6 m
et
102. vC = Rn
= 1 g/cc D
2T 2 70 For laminar flow, Reynold’s number Rn = 200
h= =
rg (1/ 42) 1 980 200 103
Ta
vC =
140 42 103 2 102
h= h = 6 cm
980 = 0.01 m s1
2T cos 2 0.072 cos0 vρD
93. h= = 103. Reynold’s number Rn = ….(i)
rg 0.024 102 1000 10 η
= 6 cm ….[ cos 0 = 1] where v is the speed of flow.
Rate of flow of water Q = Area of cross section
2T cos hrg speed of flow
94. h= T=
rg 2cos πD 2 4Q
Tw h cos m w Q= v or v =
= w 4 πD2
Tm hm cos w m Substituting the value of v in equation (i),
10 cos 135 1 1 4QρD 4Qρ
= = Rn = =
3.42 cos 0 13.6 6.5 πD 2 η πDη
188
7 (21/3 r)2
For NR > 2000, the flow is turbulent. v2 = v1 = 5 22/3 = 5 41/3 cm s1
r2
Hence, the flow of water is turbulent with
Reynold’s number 5100. 122. In the first 100 m, body starts from rest and its
velocity goes on increasing and after 100 m it
104. From kinetic theory point of view viscosity acquires maximum velocity (terminal velocity).
represents transport of momentum. Further, air friction i.e., viscous force which is
111. With rise in temperature, viscosity of liquid proportional to velocity is low in the beginning
decreases while viscosity of gases increases. and maximum at v = vT.
Hence, work done against air friction in the first
ns
112. F r3 V 100 m is less than the work done in next 100 m.
As volume becomes doubled, F changes to 2F.
123. According to the equation of continuity,
115. Terminal velocity is caused due to viscosity, Av = constant
which is absent in vacuum. The speed of still water is very small and hence
io
area will be large. This makes the still water run
117. Volume of big drop = 2 (Volume of small drop) deep.
4 4
r23 = 2 r13
at
3 3 124. In steady flow of incompressible liquid rate of
flow remains constant i.e., V = av = constant.
r2 = 2 r1 1/3
This is equation of continuity.
Also v1 r12 , v2 r22 When pipe is placed vertically upward velocity of
v2 r2
= 22
lic flow decreases with height so area of cross
section increases and when pipe is placed
v1 r1
2
vertically downward, velocity of flow increases
r2 23 r 2 in downward direction so area of cross section
v2 = 22 v1 = 21 0.15
ub
r1 r1 decreases i.e., it becomes narrower.
v2 = 0.15 22/3 cm/s 125. The equation of continuity is derived on the
basis of the principle of conservation of mass
4 4
118. R3 = 8 r3 and it is true in every case, whether tube is kept
P
3 3 horizontal or vertical.
R = 2r
126. If velocities of water at entry and exit points are v1
Terminal velocity v r2
and v2, then according to equation of continuity,
v1 r2
et
2 v A r 2 4
2 2
v2 R A1v1 A2v2 1 2 2
v 2 A1 r1 3 9
10 r2
v 2 2r 2 127. If the liquid is incompressible then mass of
rg
9η Av = A1v1 + A2v2
vgold 19.5 1.5 18 24 10 = 12 6 + 8 v2
= = =2 240 72
vsilver 10.5 1.5 9 v2 = = 21 m/s
8
v gold 0.2
vsilver = = = 0.1 m s1 129. As air under the pan is blown, pressure below
2 2
the pan decreases. This as per Bernoulli’s
120. v r2 (neglecting density of liquid) theorem causes downward motion.
where = density of material of sphere. 130. According to Bernoulli’s theorem, when wind
4 ρ r3 velocity over the wings is larger than the wind
Now, r 13 1 = 4 r 32 2 1 = 23
3 3 ρ2 r1 velocity under the wings, pressure of wind over
3 the wings becomes less than the pressure of
v1 r2 ρ r2 r r
= 12 1 = 12 23 = 2 wind under the wings. This provides the
v2 r2 p2 r2 r1 r1 necessary lift to the aeroplane.
189
ns
1
P + 1 gh1 + 2 gh2 = P + 1v2 3m
2 B v
52.5cm
h h
v= 2g 1 1 2 2 = 2g h1 h 2 2
io
1 1
From equation of continuity av = AV
1 1 av
134. P1 + v12 = P2 + v 22 V=
2 2 A
at
2 P1 P2 2 By using Bernoulli's theorem for energy per unit
=v
volume
Energy per unit volume at point A = Energy per
2 P1 P2 2 3.5 3 105
unit volume at point B
v=
=
103
lic
= 10 m/s
1
P + gh + V2 = P + 0 + v2
1
136. According to Bernoulli's theorem, 2 2
2 2gh 2 10 (3 0.525)
v2 (2.45)2 v = = 50 m2/s2
h= h= = 0.300 = 30.0 cm 2
ub
2
a 1 (0.1)
2g 2 10 1
A
Height of jet coming from orifice
= 30.0 10.6 = 19.4 cm 141. Horizontal range will be maximum when
H 90
137. The height of water in the tank becomes h= = …(Using Shortcut 15)
P
2 2
maximum when the volume of water flowing
= 45 cm i.e., hole 3.
into the tank per second becomes equal to the
volume flowing out per second. 142. The pressures are
et
190
14 PA VA n A rA 3 n
A
PBVB n B 4S 4 nB
146. W1 = 8R2T1 8 (rB )
3
W2 = 8(2R)2T2 = 32R2T2 rB 3
W1 T Substituting S = 0.04 N/m, rA = 2 cm,
1
ns
W2 4T2 nA 1
rB = 4 cm we get,
When T1 = T2, W2 = 4W1 nB 6
When temperature increases, surface tension nB
decreases. = 6.
nA
io
W2 < 4W1
151. Outside pressure = 1 atm
147. T T Pressure inside first bubble = 1.01 atm
Pressure inside second bubble = 1.02 atm
at
Excess pressures will be
P1 1.01 1 0.01 atm and
P2 1.02 1 0.02 atm
lic
Here, Weight of metal disc = total upward force 1 1
Now, P r
= upthrust force + force due to surface tension r P
= weight of displaced water + T cos (2 r) r1 P2 0.02 2
ub
= W + 2 rT cos r2 P1 0.01 1
2 4
148. h = Now, V r 3
dgr 3
where, h = rise of liquid in capillary tube V r3
P
2 4 2
= Fh = (2) = . V2 r2 1 1
dgr dg
et
2 2 2
= r2dg = Hence pressure on side 1 will be greater than
dgr dgr dg side 2. So, air from end 1 flows towards end 2.
Hence option (C) is correct.
153. Velocity of ball when it strikes the water surface
Ta
2 2
Remaining energy is liberated as heat. v = 2gh .…(i)
dg
Hence option (D) is correct. Terminal velocity of ball inside the water
2 2 1
2Tcos v= rg .…(ii)
149. Using, h = , 9
rdg
Equating (i) and (ii)
Mass of the water in the first tube,
2 r 2g
2 2T cos
2 r2Tcos 2gh = ( 1)
m = r hd = r d = 9
rdg g 2
2 4 1
mr h= r g
m r 2r 81
2
m r r 154. A part of pressure energy is dissipated in doing
m = 2m = 2 5g = 10 g work against friction.
191
ns
(Air density, = 1 kg m3)
2Hg 2 4 0.6 10
pressure
Force ve2 = = 71 m2/s2.
1 0.2
2 2
area a
1
Force = pressure area A
io
ma = 550 20 (m = mass of a wing) ve = 71 = 8.4 m/s
11000
m= = 1100 kg ( a = g) 163. v1 = 10 m/s, a1 = 8 cm2 = 8 104 m2,
10
at
Assuming mass of the plane is mostly due to its a2 = 16 cm2 = 16 104 m2, P1 = 1 105 N/m2,
wings, P2 = 105 Nm/s2
Mass of plane = 2m = 1100 2 = 2200 kg. a1v1 = a2v2
a1v1 8 104 10
lic
158. A streamlined body offers less resistance to air. v2 =
a2
16 104
= 5 m/s
159. Weight of the ball 1 2 1
= Buoyant force + Viscous force P1 + v1 P2 v22
2 2
V1g = V2g + kv2
ub
1
kv2 = V(1 2)g P2 = P1 + v12 v22
2
Vg(1 2 ) 1
v= P2 = 105 + 103 (102 52)
k 2
P2 = 1.37 105 N/m2
P
ρ 103
P hg Pa (10 103 10) 1 105
3. =2
161. Time taken by water to reach the bottom, Pa Pa 1 105
2(H D)
t= and
Ta
ns
Volume of big drop = n(Volume of small drop)
Fflat T 2r 2 4 4
8. R3 = n r3
Fcurved T r 3 3
R3 = nr3
9. 2Tl = mg
io
1
mg 1.5 102 1.5 R = n3 r
T= = 2
= = 0.025 N/m
2l 2 30 10 600 Surface energy of n drops (En) = n 4r2 T
Surface energy of big drop (E) = 4R2T
at
10.
1
E n nr 2 nr 2 nr 2
2 2
2
n 3
= 3
n:1
E R 13 2
n r n 3
r
lic
r2 = r= cm
g 10
T r = 0.1 cm
r=
g r = 0.001 meter
et
ns
R1 R2 Also, the radius of capillary tube becomes
4T (R – r) after inserting wire of radius r.
As required pressure difference P = 2T
R h=
P = P1 + P2 R r ρg
io
4T 4T 4T
26. In a freely falling platform a body experiences
R R1 R 2
weightlessness, So,the liquid will rise upto to a
R1R 2
at
R= length of the capillary i.e., 20 cm.
R1 R 2
27. The angle of contact is given by,
2 1 104
= = 6.67 10–3 m ghr
2 1 102 cos =
h1r1 = h2r2 7 7
h1 r2
….(i) 28. h1r1 = h2r2
h 2 r1
et
h1r1 1.8 r
Also, area A = r2 h2 = = = 2 cm
r2 0.9r
r A
r2 A2 R n 3000 10 3
rg
D 720 5 103
h2 A1 A 3
Flow becomes turbulent, if the velocity is above
h2 = 3h1 = 3h 0.33 m/s.
24. Rise in capillary tube, 31. Flow of water (Q) = 100 liters per minutes
2T.cos 100 103
h= =
r g 60
Given that, h, T, r and g are constant.
= 5 × 10–3 m3/s
cos 3
= constant
5 103
Velocity of water, v = Q =
cos 1 cos2 cos 3 3 5 102
2
i.e. = = A
1 2 3
as 1 > 2 > 3 v = 2 = 0.2 m/s
3
194
F dv = 1 or [Using (i)]
shearing stress = nv r
2 n 2
A dx
n=4
5
9
2 2 r2
shearing stress = 10 18 = 0.25 103 N/m2 41. Terminal velocity, vT = ( )g
10 9
ns
2 102 2 12 2
35. F = A
dv
= 0.9 500 10–4 = 1.8 N vT1 = (1 0.01 2)g = (82 0.1 2)g
9 9
dx 0.5 103
2
36. Fv vT2 = (7.9)g ….(i)
9
io
2 22
vT2 = (2 0.12)g
9
8
at
vT2 = (0.9)g ….(ii)
9
Fv = mg vT1 7.9
4
mg = = 79
6rv = r3g vT2 4 0.9 36
3
4r 2g 4 12 1.75 980
lic 42. A1v1 = A2v2
= = = 1089 poise 2
3 6 v 3 6 0.35 v1 A d 10
2
= 2 = 2 = =4:1
v2 A1 d1 5
37.
ub
6πηrv 43.
R n holes
av = constant
VR 2
R2V = nr2v v =
nr 2
et
2 2 0.4 = 2
v= r g 2 4
9
d 3.6 103 m
6
2 0.9 10 10 9.8
2 3
v= = 98 ms–1
Ta
195
ns
1.25
Q F 105 105
2r = =
0.75 T 7 102
= 15 10–3 m = 1.5 cm
According to Bernoulli’s theorem,
io
Energy per unit Energy per unit 53. Energy released = (Af – Ai)T
=
volume at point R volume at point Q 3 R 3 3V
Af = 4R2 = 4 and
at
1 1 3 R R
P + gh + V2 = P + 0 + v2
2 2 V 3V
Ai = n 4r2 = 4r 2 =
av 4 3 r
But, V = ….[from equaion (i)] r
A 3
gh +
1 av 1
2
= v2
lic Energy released = T (Ai Af)
2 A 2 1 1
= 3VT
2gh 2 9.8 1.25 r R
v2 = = = 30.625
ub
1 (a / A) 2
1 0.2
2
54. Excess pressure inside soap bubble is given as
4T
v = 5.53 m/s 5.5 m/s Pi Po = ;
r
49. For maximum range, height of the hole Pi = Pressure inside soap bubble
P
3
hg = 2T/r V1 1
2T 2 0.07 V2 3
h= =
gr 103 10 104 V1 1
h = 0.14 m = 14 cm V2 27
rhg 4 3 4
51. Twater = 55. As, b N a 3
2 3 3
(Assuming water is pure and angle of contact b3 = Na3
zero) Energy released,
2Twater U = T 4a2 N T 4b2
h= ....(i)
rg b3
2
= T 4 T 4b2
Weight of water = Mg = r hg a
Substituting for h ....[From (i)] This energy is converted into K.E.
196
ns
submerged into water.
P0l
P = 61. Velocity of efflux for A: v1 = 2gh
l x
Now since level of water inside capillary Velocity of efflux for B: v2 = 2g 3h = 6gh
io
coincides with outside, the excess pressure, Water flowing out from A = Water flowing out
2 from B. ….(Given)
P = P – P0 =
r v1A1 = v2A2
at
P0l 2 Since, Area of square (A1) = L2
P0
lx r
Area of circle (A2) = r2
Solving above equation, we get, 2 2
2gh × L = 6gh × r
x=
l
P0 r
lic 6gh
1 L2 = × r2 = 3r 2
2 2gh
1 1 1 1
[vc] = [xyrz] L = 3 2 r = r 2 3 4
ub
57. 4
x + y = 0, –x – 3y + z = 1, x = 1
x = 1, y = 1, z = 1 Q1 a1 v1 = L2 2gy
Rate of flow of water from circular hole
58. Three vessels have same base area and equal
Q2 = a2v2 = R2 2g(4y)
et
L
R=
Force on base, F Pressure exerted on base, P 2
height of liquid (h)
Hence, the force on the base will be maximum 63. Power of heart = F velocity
Ta
at vessel C. F
= Area velocity
Area
59. From Bernoulli’s theorem, area displacement
v12 v2 = Pressure
P1 + + gh1 = P2 + 2 + gh2 time
2 2
volume
Here h1 h2 = Pressure
time
2
P1 – P2 =
2
v2 v12 = 0.6 (702 – 602) = 780 Pa = P.
dV
= hg
dV
dt dt
This pressure difference causes uplift of plane 5 10 3
Net force = upward force downward force = (0.15) (13.6 103) (10)
60
= (P1 P2) area weight 13.6 5 0.15
=
= 780 14 1000 10 ( weight = mg) 6
= 920 N (in upward direction) = 1.70 watt
197
ns
g r2
3 2
A1 r12 A
2 3T 3T Here where A1 = A and A2 =
r = r= A 2 r2 2 16
g(2 ) g(2 )
r12 16
io
r
2. Air flows from high pressure to low pressure 2
= 1 =4 .…(ii)
r2 1 r2
region. Thus the smaller bubble will be
From (i) and (ii), h2 = 5 4 = 20 cm
engulfed.
at
4 4 4
3. Balancing forces on the edge, 13. R3 = 64 r3 = (4r)3
3 3 3
(Tcos) 2r = mg
R = 4r
0.157 10 103
r=
2 3.14 0.075 1
m
lic S1 = 64 4r2 T and S2 = 4R2T
2
= 3.3 mm S1 64 4r 2 T r 64
64 =4
S2 4R T
2
R 16
4. F1 and F2 are balanced.
ub
14. Using Shortcut 3,
a F3 1 1 1
R r1 r2
F2 F1 r1r2
R= = 4 mm
P
r1 r1
15. W = 8r2T
b
F4 = 8 3.14 (1 102)2 3 102
et
= 7.54 10–5 J
Resultant force = F3 F4
= 1l 2l 16. Then P = P0 +
4S
= (1 2)l r
rg
4 3
5. If an bubble is formed, its radius is equal to that Now P r = nRgT
3
capillary
4S 4
Ta
2s P0 r 3 2RgT
Required pressure = P0 + gh + r 3
r
For 2 bubbles,
6. P = P0 + hg = 1.01 105 + (3 103 1030 9.8) 4S 3
3 107 Pa P0 A
rA n
A
8. The surface area is given by (S.T.) Area 4S 3 n B
P0 B
Work Done = Final surface energy Initial rB
surface energy. 4 0.004
2 3
2
= 4 (2r) 4r 2
8 (2 10 )
2 102 n
= 12r2 A
4 0.004 2 3 nB
8 2
(4 10 )
1 4 10
9. rh = constant r
h nB
8
Hence, if h is halved, then r is doubled. nA
198
ns
From Bernoulli’s theorem,
Force = Surface Tension length
h 1
i.e. Tension in the wire = (S) r 2gh + 4g 4 v 22
2 2
1
=S
io
v 2 2gh .…(ii)
8 2
S v2
= 2
8 2 v1
at
19. Fluids move from higher pressure to lower 24. Gauge pressure at point A = hg
pressure. In a fluid, pressure increases with Total pressure at point A
lic
depth, so pressure at the top Pa (the atmospheric
pressure) is lesser than at the bottom [Pa + dg].
= atmospheric pressure + gauge pressure
= Pa + hg
Hence the air bubble will move from bottom to
top. (It cannot move side ways as the pressure at 25. Using Bernoulli’s equation,
ub
the same level in a fluid is same). In coming 1 2 1
P1 + 1v1 P2 2 v 22 ….(i)
from bottom to top, pressure decreases, so in 2 2
accordance with Boyle’s law i.e., PV = constant, Also, P1 P2 = g 6 .…(ii)
volume V will increase. Thus, the air bubble From (i) and (ii),
P
(1.6) v 2 A1
v12 0.252 v 22
199
ns
= 400 N
27. According to equation of continuity,
Av = constant.
io
By attaching a jet, area of cross-section is
reduced. This results into increasing the velocity
of water flowing out of the pipe.
at
28. For a freely falling body, g = 0 Hence v = 0.
29. When the snow accumulates on the wings of an
lic
aeroplane, the upper surface of the wing
becomes flat. It means the curvature of the
surface decreases. Pressure difference which
causes the lift off of the aeroplane depends on
ub
the curvature of the wing. Thus, due to the
decrease in curvature, the lift-off of the
aeroplane also decreases.
P
2H
r 2gd
g
rg
2H
r2 = 2dg 4dH
g
r2
d
Ta
4H
200
03 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation
Hints
3RT
34. vrms =
Classical Thinking M0
ns
1
10. Ideal gas equation is, PV = nRT Now, K.E.(gram molecule) = M0 v2rms
2
n P
= = constant 1 3RT
V RT = M0
2 M0
io
Hence, at constant pressure and temperature,
both balloons will contain equal number of gas 3
= RT
molecules per unit volumes. This result is 2
known as Avogadro’s law.
at
3
35. K.E. = kBT
12. Ideal gas law is most accurate for monatomic 2
gases at low pressure and high temperature. 3
= 1.38 1023 300
20. P=
1 mn 2
vrms
lic
2
K.E. = 6.21 1021 J
3 V
3PV 3 105 100 106 36. Energy = 300 J/litre = 300 103 J/m3
n= = 5.4 1020
2
mvrms 4.556 1025 3502 2 2 300 103
ub
Using, P = E= = 2 105 N/m2
3 3
3P P
26. vrms = ,v=
3
37. kBT = 1 eV
2
v rms 3
P
3
= = 1.46 1.6 1019 2
v 1.41 T= 7730 K
3 1.38 1023
3P 3 1.013 105 5
et
28.
v H2 M0 1 32 4
Cp 7 2 7
59. = R = = 1.4
v 2rms (500) 2 6 102 Cv 2 5R 5
29. P= =
Ta
201
[R] =
Q = M L T
1 2 2
ns
93. Blackbody has maximum radiated energy at P (75 R + 105 R) = (0.5 + 1.5) R (273 + 69)
same temperature. P 180 R = 2 R 342
342
96. A blackbody has a continuous emission P= = 3.8 atm
io
90
spectrum
4. The equation of state is, PV = nRT
b 2.93 103
102. T = = = 107 K nRT
m 2.93 1010 P= (ideal gas condition)
at
V
103. According to Wien’s law, Let for M mass there is n moles, then for mass
T1 m24800 48 4 3Mn
= = = = 3M, there are = 3n moles
T2 m1 3600 36 3
lic M
V
Let n = 3n, T = T/3 and V =
1 3
104. As m
T T
n 'RT ' 3nR
3 = 3nRT = 3P
ub
T Then P = =
Temperature of other star must be
2 V' V/3 V
0 PV = N1kBT ....(i)
0T = 2T =
2 V
For the gas B, we have, (2P) = N2kB(2T)
8
106. According to Wien’s law, m T constant
et
erg
= 103 2 50 100 1
cm s K 4 =
V 100 2
112. Average K.E. of molecules per mole of ideal gas V = 100 mL
3
= RT M
2 8. PV = nRT = RT
Where, R = universal gas constant M0
T = same for all gases M density M0
Average K.E. of molecules for one mole of all
VP P RT
ideal gases at same temperature is same.
density M0
x ….(i)
115. As for a blackbody, rate of absorption of heat is P At 0C R(273)
more, thermometer A shows faster rise in
density M0
temperature but finally both will acquire the ….(ii)
P At 100C R(373)
atmospheric temperature.
202
Chapter 03: Kinetic Theory of Gases
and Radiation
From equations (i) and (ii) we get, 5 (5)
16. vavg = = 0 cm/s
density 273x 2
=
P At 100C 373 52 5
2
vrms = = 5 cm/s
2
9. Using ideal gas equation,
M 23 4
PV = nRT = RT 17. vmean = = 3 m/s
M0 3
MRT 2.88300 (27 273) 22 32 42 4 9 16 29
V = = vrms = = =
M0P 28 0.8211.013105 3 3 3
2.99 105 = 3.109 m/s
= 3 litre
105 v mean 3
= <1
v rms 3.109
ns
10. i. The dotted line in the diagram shows that
PV v1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5
there is no change in the value of for 18. v =
nT 5
different temperatures T1 and T2 for 10 20 30 40 50 150
io
increasing pressure. Hence this gas = = = 30 m/s
5 5
behaves ideally. Hence, dotted line
corresponds to ‘ideal’ gas behaviour. 102 202 302 402 502
vrms =
at
ii. At high temperatures, the deviation of the 5
gas is less and at low temperature the 100 400 900 1600 2500
deviation of gas is more. In the graph, =
5
deviation for T2 is greater than for T1.
T1 > T2
lic =
5500
5
= 1100 = 33.16 m/s
iii. The two curves intersect at dotted line.
PV v rms 33.16
Hence, the value of at that point on = = 1.105
nT v 30
ub
the y-axis is same for all gases. vrms : v = 1.105 : 1
3 7 1 2 4 3 20 TA T
11. Mean free path = = 19. 4 B
6 6 MA MB
P
32 42 52 TA T
12. Mean square velocity = 2 B
3 MA MB
50
= 16.7 m/s 3RTA 3RT
et
3 2
MA MB
3 45 c rms A = 2 c rms B
13. Average velocity = = 4 m/s
3
crms A
rg
=2
14. Mean square velocity =
(5) (6) (7)
2 2 2
crms B
3
25 36 49 20. Using, vrms T,
Ta
=
3 v rms 1 T1
110 =
= v rms 2 T2
3
Given that,
= 36.7 m2/s2
vrms 2 v rms 1 1
15. The R.M.S. velocity of the molecule of a gas is T2 = 273 k, v rms 1 = or =
2 v rms 2 2
3kT
given by, vrms = , where k is the 1 T1 273
m T1 = = 68.25 K
Boltzmann’s constant and m is the mass of a 2 273 4
molecule.
1
v rms 1 2 9
vrms v m1/2 21. = =
m v rms 2 1 8
(vrms)1 : (vrms)2 : 9 : 8
203
ns
1 M 2
3RT =2 v rms = 2P
23. vrms = 3 V
M0
P 1
v rms 2 =
T2 (273 90) P 2
= = 1.1
io
v rms 1 T1 (273 30)
1
v 29. P= v2rms ….(i)
3
% increase = rms 2 1 100
v rms 1 3RT
at
Let v2rms =
= 0.1100 M0
= 10% From equation (i) we get,
1 3RT RT
24. vH =
3RT
, vO =
3RT
lic P=
3 M0
=
M0
MH MO
PM0
1 =
As T = constant, vrms RT
ub
M0 P P
and
MH < MO vH > vO T
….( M0 and R are constant)
3RTN 3RTO
25. (vrms)N = and (vrms)O = Given that, P = 2P
P
MN MO
P T 1
Given that, (vrms)H = (vrms)O = 2 and =
P T 3
3RTN 3RTO ρ P T
= Then, = =23=6
et
MN MO ρ P T'
T 273 127 273 = 6
=
28 32
30. Mean kinetic energy of molecule depends upon
rg
400
T + 273 = 28 = 350 K temperature only. For O2, it is same as that of H2
32
at the same temperature of 73 C.
T = 350 – 273 = 77 C
31. In the mixture, gases will acquire thermal
Ta
204
Chapter 03: Kinetic Theory of Gases
and Radiation
3 3R 3R
33. K.E.av = kBT R+ =
2 2 2
K.E.av T 5
=
K.E.2 T 600 3
= 2 = =2
K.E.1 T1 300
45. Let molar heat capacity at constant pressure
K.E.2 = 2K.E.1 = 2K.E. = CP
K.E. 3 3 and molar heat capacity at constant volume
34. = P = 105 = 1.5 105 J = CV
V 2 2
CP – CV = R
35. K.E. T C
Now, principal specific heat, S =
K.E.1 T 27 273 M
= 1 =
K.E.2 T2 T 273 R R
ns
SP – SV = For H2, a =
But K.E.2 = 2K.E.1 M 2
K.E.1 300 R a
= For N2, b = = 14
2K.E.1 T 273 28 b
T + 273 = 600 T = 327 C a = 14b
io
3 3 46. Substances having higher specific heat take
36. E= RT = 8.31 273 = 3.4 103 J more time to get heated to a higher temperature
2 2
at
and longer time to get cooled.
37. Using, K.E. T,
K.E1 T T
= 1. P
K.E 2 T2
Given that, K.E.1 = 2K.E2, T2 = 273 K
lic Q
T1 R
2= T1 = 546 K
273
ub
38. From Shortcut 3,
Internal energy of a gas with f degrees of t
freedom, tP tQ tR
f
U= nRT If line is drawn parallel to the time axis, it cuts the
2
P
2 2 Qa Q
48. a= 0.75 = a
Q 200
Q 294
39. Cp = = = 29.4 J/mole K Qa = 0.75 200 = 150 cal
nT 25
rg
Q 10
Cp
Cp = 300 50. For athermanous body, Qt = 0
1.4
1 Qa Q
Cp 1 = 300 If = 20 % then r = 80 %
Q Q
1.4
0.4 Cp = 300 1.4 Coefficient of reflection,
300 1.4 Qr 80
Cp = = 1050 J/kg K r= = 80 % = = 0.8
0.4 Q 100
41. Cp – Cv = R 51. Q = p, Qr + Qt = q
Cp = R + Cv ….(i) Let, Q = Qa + Qr + Qt
also, Cp = Cv ….(ii) p = Qa + q Qa = p – q
3R Qa pq
substituting Cv = in equations (i) and (ii) Coefficient of absorption, a = =
2 Q p
205
ns
55. R= =
At A Q = eT4,
A=
(Q / t)
=
60
= 6 102 Q = 0.8 (500)4
R 1000 81
But area of cube, A = 6l2 = 0.8 (500)4 ....From (i)
io
(300)4
6l2 = 6 102 l2 = 102 64.8 625
l = 101 = 0.1 m = 10 cm Q= = 500 J/m2s
81
at
Q 0.3
56. R= = 0.50 kcal/m2 s 67. From Shortcut 6,
At 15 103 40 2 4
Q2 r T
57. In vacuum, heat flows by the radiation mode = 2 2 = (2)2 (2)4 = 64
Q1 r1 T1
only.
lic
T1 2000 2 2 68. By Stefan’s law,
58. m = m = m = m = m 4 4
2 T2 1 3000 1 3 1 3 Q1 T 27 273
Q T4 = 1 =
Q2 T 927 273
ub
b 2
59. m = 4
T 300 1
= =
b 2.93 103 1200 256
T= = = 7325 K = 7.325 103 K
m 4000 1010
69. Q1 T14 and Q2 T24
P
T2 1400 T1
4
Q2 1 Q
2
m2 T1 = 4 = Q2 = 1
61. By Wien’s law, = Q1 T1 16 16
m1 T2
rg
T 1500 T
4
m2 1 m1 5000 = 3000 Å
70. Q T4
Q1
= 1
T2 2500
Q2 T2
1 4
Ta
206
Chapter 03: Kinetic Theory of Gases
and Radiation
72. Radiated power by blackbody, dQ
78. AT4 r2T4 m2/3 T4
Q dt
P=
t dQ1
2/3 4
From Shortcut 6,
dt m1 T1
P1 r T
2 4
dQ 2 m 2 T2
= 1 1
P2 dt
r2 T2 2/3 4
2 4 8 2000
440 20 500 =
= 1 1000
P2 10 1000
= 4 16 = 64 : 1
1
P2 = 440 16
4 Q
79. For a blackbody, = P = AT4
P2 = 1760 W t
ns
4
dQ P2 T
73. = T4 Ae = 2
dt P1 T1
4
300 P2 273 727
= 5.67 10–8 (727 + 273)4 50 10–4 e =
io
60 20 273 227
300 P2
= 5.67 10–8 1012 50 10–4 e = (2)4 P2 = 320 W
60 20
at
300
e= = 0.0176 0.018 EA
283.50 60 80. For A, eA = EA = eA(Eb)A
(E b )A
74. Energy radiated from a body, EB
Q = AeT4t
4
lic For B, eB =
(E b )B
EB = eB(Eb)B
Q2 T
= 2 eA(Eb)A = eB(Eb)B ....[ EA = EB]
Q1 T1 (E b )A e 0.6
= B = =2
ub
1/ 4
T2 Q (E b )B eA 0.3
= 2
T1 Q1 Now, Eb T4
4.32 106
1/ 4 (E b )A T4 T
= = A4 = 2 A = (2)1/4
3 (E b )B TB TB
2.7 10
P
1/ 4 TA = (2)1/4 TB
16 27
=
108
27 81. According to Wien’s law,
mT = constant
et
2
= 2 10
T2 = 200 T1 = 200 400 = 80000 K m1 T1 m2 T2
m1 0 4
75. Rate of heat loss (T4 T04 ) T2 = T1 = T1 = T1
m2 3 0 3
rg
Q1 (T 4 T 4 )
= 14 04 4
Q2 (T2 T0 ) Now, P T4
Q1 (600) (300)4
1215 4
P2 T
4
Ta
= = = 2
Q2 (900) (300)
4 4
6480 P1 T1
16
Q2 = Q P2 4 / 3 T1 256
4
3 = =
P1 T1 81
76. For same temperature, refer Shortcut 6
82. Since, Q = mcd
77. Heat radiated per second per unit area T4 dQ d
Here, T1 = 127 C = 400 K = mc = A(T4 – T04)
dt dt
T2 = 527 C = 800 K d 4r 2 (T 4 T0 4 )
Since T2 = 2T1 and E T4, =
dt 4 3
4
Q 2 T2 2T1
4
r c
= = 4 3
= (2) =16
Q1 T1 T1 d 1
Q2 = 16 Q1 = 16 6 = 96 J dt rc
207
ns
p 2B M B p2B dT
3 RT = = ....(ii) 88. Rate of cooling emissivity (e)
M 2B MB dt
From equations (i) and (ii) we get, dT dT
From graph, ex > ey
p 2
p 2 dt x dt y
io
A
= B
at
MB
1/ 2
MA Competitive Thinking
pA = pB
MB
1
lic 1. Number of moles in 4 g of hydrogen,
M 4
84. P = v2rms n= = =2
3 M0 2
Since mass and volume is same, the density is PV = nRT = 2RT
ub
constant.
1 1 2. Ideal gas equation gives,
P v2rms But v2rms P PV = nRT
M0 M0
For n = 1
PO M H 2 1
P
= = V=
RT
....(i)
PH MO 32 16
P
1 molar mass
PO = 4 = 0.25 atm density =
16
et
volume
m(N A )P
f = ....[From (i)]
85. For 1 kg gas, energy, E = rT RT
2
R
rg
5 8 10 4
E= ….( f = 5 for diatomic gas) kT
2 4
E = 5 104 J 4. By ideal gas equation,
V nR
PV = nRT =
Ae(T 4 T04 ) T P
86. Rate of cooling, R =
t mC V
= constant ….(at constant P)
A Area T
R
m Volume Hence, graph (A) is correct.
1
For the same surface area, R 5. From ideal gas equation
Volume
PV = nRT
Volume of cube < Volume of sphere PV = n1RT
RCube > RSphere i.e. cube cools down at a faster After leakage,
rate. PV = n2RT
208
Chapter 03: Kinetic Theory of Gases
and Radiation
No. of moles of gas leaked is given by n1 n2 RT
12. vrms =
PV PV M0
i.e. n1 n2 =
RT RT 1
V vrms
n1 n2 = P P M0
RT
v1 rms M 0 1 32
6. Using ideal gas equation,
before heating, at T1 = 17 + 273 = 290 K,
v2 rms M 0 2 2
ns
M1 = 235 units and v2 be the rms velocity of
From equations (i) and (ii), uranium of mass M2 = 238 units
PV PV
n2 – n1 = v1 v 2 M 2 M1 238 235
R 300 R 290 = = = 0.0064
v2 M1 235
But, nf – ni = (n2 – n1)NA
io
v1 v 2
i.e., nf – ni =
PV 10 % ratio = × 100 = 0.64
6.02310
23
v2
R 290 300
Given: P = 105 Pa and V = 30 m3
at
3RT
14. vrms =
105 30 10 6.0231023 M0
nf – ni = = –2.5 1025
8.3 290 300 lic vrms T
1 1 v2 T
7. = = 2
d n 2 4r n 2
2 2
v1 T1
1
2 v2 = v1
T2
r
T1
ub
8. Mean free path of gas molecules is,
127 273
1 k BT v2 = 200
= 27 273
2 d P
2
1 k BT 400
v2 = 200
P
L= 300
2 4 r P
2
400
According to given conditions, v2 = m/s
1 k B T 3
et
L = v 1 T 1 6 1
2 4 r P
2
15. vrms T
v 2 T 2 300 100
L T r 2P 2T r 2P 1 The rms velocity will increase nearly by 1%
= = =
L r 2 P T 2r 2P
2
T 4
rg
v'rms =
3R(2T)
= 2 vrms vrms 1
=1
M0 / 2 vrms 2
209
ns
5 3 7
1 2
P= v .…(v r.m.s. speed) 28. Using Shortcut 3,
3
Amount of energy required is given as,
1 M
P = v2 f f
n RT NK T2 T1
io
3 V E
2 2
2 1 M 2 f
P=
3
v
2 V E = n N A k B T2 T1
2
at
2 K.E 1 where N = nNA and kB = Boltzmann constant
P= ....( K.E. = Mv2)
3 V 2 3
E= n N A k B (T 2 T1 ) ….( f = 3 for He)
2
3
22. K.E.avg = kBT
2
lic Now, n
M 1
M0 4
2 0.69 1.6 1019
T= = 5333.33 K = 5060 C 3 1 3
3 1.38 1023 E= N k (T T1 ) = N A k B (T2 T1 )
2 4 A B 2 8
ub
23. The average kinetic energy of monatomic gas
3 29. Molar specific heat at constant pressure
molecule (K.E.) = k BT 7
2 Cp = R
2
3
K.E. = (1.38 1023 J K1) (300 K) Using, Cp Cv = R
P
2
7 5
3 (1.381023 JK 1 ) (300K) Cv = Cp R = R R= R
= 2 2
2 (1.6 1019 J / eV)
Cp 7 / 2 R 7
= 3.9 102 eV = 0.039 eV = =
et
Cv (5 / 2)R 5
24. Average kinetic energy per molecule for any
kind of molecule of an ideal gas is 30. Given,
3 R
= 0.4
rg
K.Eavg = kT Cv
2
3 Cp Cv
(K.Eavg)hydrogen = kT1 and = 0.4
2 Cv
Ta
3 Cp
(K.Eavg)oxygen = kT2 = 0.4 + 1
2 Cv
But T1 = T2 = 1.4
(K.Eavg)O = (K.Eavg)H the molecules of the gas are rigid diatomic.
26. Using Shortcut 3, CP
Internal energy of a gas with f degrees of 31. Given: =
CV
freedom,
f C P CV 1
U= nRT =
2 CV 1
5 3 R
Now, fO2 = , fAr = =–1 .…( CP – CV = R)
2 2 CV
5 3 R
Utotal = (2) RT + (4) RT = 11RT. CV =
2 2 1
210
Chapter 03: Kinetic Theory of Gases
and Radiation
32. For rigid diatomic molecule, 2.88 106nmK
CP 7 5 max = 500 nm
= CV = CP 5760 K
CV 5 7 wavelength of maximum energy = 500 nm
Also for molar specific heats, i.e., U2 is maximum energy.
5
CP – CV = R CP CP = R 42. From Wien’s displacement law-
7
max T = constant
2 2
CP = R n= = 0.2857 If T is also same, max = constant
7 7
Hence, max max
33. dU = n × Cv × d
R R 44. Using Shortcut 6,
=n× × d ... C v l b
1 1 4
3 × 3 327 + 273 4
E 2 A 2 T2
= =
ns
8.314
= 2000 × × (–10) = –4.2 × 105 J E1 A1 T1 l × b 27 + 273
0.4
4
f 1 600
34. CP = 1 R =
2 9 300
io
E2 1
f=2
33.24
1 = 2 3 = 6 16
8.31 E1 9
16
at
35. r + a + tr = 1 E2 = E ....( E1 = E)
9
tr = 1 – r – a = 1 – 0.8 – 0.1 = 1 – 0.9 = 0.1
Q = 1000 J/min 45. Q T4
Heat energy transmitted per minute
Qt = Q t = 1000 0.1 = 100 J
lic
Q1
Q2
T T
= 1 = 1 =
4
1
16
4
T2 2T1
Heat energy transmitted in 5 minutes
Q2 = 16Q1
= 100 5 = 500 J
For blackbody, P = AT4.
ub
36. From Wien’s displacement law, 46.
1
1 For same power, A
T4
T 2 4
T r1 T2
=
P
37. As Red > Green > Violet, 47. For perfectly blackbody,
λQ > λR > λP. Q = AT4t
According to Wien’s law, TQ < TR < TP = 5.7 × 10–8 × 1 × (727 + 273)4 × 60
rg
m T = constant = 2 2
P1 r1 T1
40. From Wien’s displacement law r
Now, r2 = 1 and T2 = 2T1
b 2
T=
max P2 1
= 16
b = Wien’s constant P1 4
2892 10 6 P2 = 4 450 = 1800 W
T= = 200 K
14.46 106
49. 4R2 (T4 T04 ) = 912 R2
41. According to Wien’s displacement law, 912 912
1 T4 T04 = = = 40 108
max 4 45.7 108
T
T4 = 40 108 + (300)4 = (40 + 81) 108
maxT = b
T 330 K
also T = 5760 K
211
Hence,
R 6004 2004 16 3k BT
= 11.2 103
M0
51. Rate of loss of heat by radiation is given as
11.2
2
dQ 106 2.76 1026
– = A Thot 4
Tcold = R T=
dt 31.381023
RA Thot4 Tcold
=
4
A = 8.363 104 K
RB T 4
hot Tcold
4
1 U 1
ns
B
4
(327 273) 4 (27 273) 4
57. P= kT
RA 3 V 3
=
RB (227 273) 4 (27 273) 4 u
( T4 and k is constant of proportionality)
V
(6004 3004 ) 9
= =
io
PV = nRT
(5004 3004 ) 4
nRT 1 4
52. Using Shortcut 6, kT
V 3
2 4
V T–3
2 4
at
R1 r T 8 127 273
= 1 1 =
R2 r
2 T
2 2 527 273 Volume of spherical shell of radius R =
4
R3
4 3
400 16
= 16 = =1 i.e., V R3
TB max A 300 3
= 1.4
Now, from Shortcut 6, 2
Q r2 T4 But, = 1 +
power Ratio, A A2 A4 f
rg
Q B rB TB 2
f= =5
where, A = 4r2 1
2
Q A 32 54 5
i.e. 59. Q = msdT
Ta
Q B 52 34 3
dQ dT
55. According to Wien’s displacement law, = ms
dt dt
mT = constant Pdt = msdT
T1 m 2 3 / 4 0 3 P
dT = dt
T2 m 0 4 ms
1
212
Chapter 03: Kinetic Theory of Gases
and Radiation
ns
or TB = A = = 2000 K Q
2.6 2.6 15
Using Wien’s displacement law r= = 0.1
150
i.e., m T = constant
Using a + r + tr = 1,
we get, ATA = BTB
io
tr = 1 (a + r) = 1 (0.6 + 0.1) = 0.3
TB B Qt
or A = B = Now using, t = we get,
TA 2.6 Q
at
But B A = 1 m (given) Qt = Qt = 150 0.3 = 45 J
1.6
B B = 1 m or B = 1 m vrms 1 T1
2.6 2.6 9. Using, vrms T,
2.6 vrms 2 T2
or B =
1.6
B = 1.6 m
lic Given that, T2 = 273 K,
vrms 1
M RT 10 R 293 (vrms)1 = 4 (vrms)2 or 4
4. P0 = ….(i) vrms 2
M0 V M0V
ub
T1
Gas is heated to 50 C and x gram of gas 4=
273
escapes, pressure is still P0
(10 x)g (273 50) T1 = 273 16 = 4368 K
P0 = R ….(ii) = 4368 273 = 4095 C
M0 V
P
8RT
Mean momentum = mv = m
M 0 R1 r12 and R2 r22
2
3 r 1
2
= 1 = =
Mean kinetic energy = RT R1 1
Ta
2 R2 r 2 4
2
All the above equations are functions of
temperature, which is a constant. 13. According to Wien’s displacement law,
1
6. According to Kirchhoff’s law, good absorbers m m2 m1 …. ( T1 T2 )
T
are good emitters and bad reflectors. While at
Therefore I– graph for T2 has lesser
lower temperature, a blackbody absorbs all the
wavelength (m) and so curve for T2 will shift
incident radiations. It does not reflect any
towards left side.
radiation incident upon it when it is thrown into
the furnace. Initially, it is the darkest body. 14. From PV = nRT as per given data,
At later times, the blackbody attains the PHe n M / M He 0 M H 0
Pn = He = =
temperature of the hot furnace and so it PH nH M / M H 0 M He 0
radiates maximum energy. It becomes the
brightest of all. M H 0 2
PHe = PH × = 4 × = 2 atm
Option (A) represents the answer. He 0
M 4
213
04 Thermodynamics
Hints
ns
As volume decreases, the work done by the gas
7. Internal energy depends only on the temperature is negative.
of the gas.
32. Refer Mindbender 3(i)
10. W = PV; here V is negative. Hence W
io
will be negative 35. When heat is supplied at constant pressure, a
part of it goes in the expansion of gas and
17. Heat always refers to energy in transit from one remaining part is used to increase the
body to another because of temperature temperature of the gas which in turn increases
at
difference. the internal energy.
19. Refer Mindbender 3(ii). lic 37. Work done = PV = P(V2 – V1)
20. Q = U + W where W = PV 41. The process is very fast; so the gas fails to gain or
21. st
From 1 law of thermodynamics, lose heat. Hence, this process is adiabatic.
U = Q W 45. Air inside the tube of wheel when suddenly
U = Q (< 0) ….( W = 0) comes out, undergoes adiabatic expansion.
ub
During adiabatic expansion the temperature of
U < 0 the system decreases and thus, the air becomes
So, temperature will decrease. slightly cooler.
22. Q = U + W 48. In thermodynamic processes,
P
Isothermal
26. As the volume is continuously increasing and
the work of expansion is always positive, so the Adiabatic
work done by the system continuously V
Ta
increases.
50. By the first law of thermodynamics,
27. Work done = Area of triangle Q = U + W
1 In adiabatic process, Q = 0 U = – W
= AC AB
2
51. For an adiabatic process, Q = 0
1 PV
= VP= Work is done on the gas, W = – 90 J
2 2
From Q = U + W,
28. A quasi-static process like a slow isothermal 0 = U 90
expansion or compression of an ideal gas is
U = + 90 J
reversible process while the other given
processes are irreversible in nature. 53. In a closed cyclic process, the change in internal
energy is always zero E = 0
29. In isothermal process, heat is released by the gas
to maintain the constant temperature. 54. In isochoric process, volume remains constant.
214
ns
maintained in the refrigerator. 7. By 1st law of thermodynamics,
62. In a refrigerator, the heat dissipated in the Q = U + W
atmosphere is more than that taken from the 2 103 4.2 = U + 500
U = 7900 J
io
cooling chamber, therefore the room is heated if
the door of a refrigerator is kept open.
8. By 1st law of thermodynamics,
QC T Q = U + P(V)
at
64. = C U = Q – P(V)
QH TH
300
= 1500 – (2.1 105) (2.5 10–3) = 975 J
QH = 500 577 calorie
260 9. For the first process, using Q = U + W.
72.
lic
For path (2), V decreases for constant P which
8 105 = U + 6.5 105
U = 1.5 105 J
results in decrease in temperature of gas. Since final and initial states are same in both
73. The cyclic process 1 is clockwise whereas processes, U will be same in both processes
ub
process 2 is anticlockwise. Clockwise area For second process, using Q = U + W,
represents positive work and anticlockwise area 105 = 1.5 105 + W
represents negative work. Since negative area W = – 0.5 105 J
(2) > positive area (1), hence net work done is Negative sign indicates work is done on the gas.
negative.
P
10. Q = U + W
74. As internal energy is a state function, therefore U = Q W = 2240 168 = 2072 J
change in internal energy does not depend upon 11. Q = U + W = (Uf Ui) + W
the path followed i.e., UI = UII.
et
=52 W 1 3 2
= 1 – = 1 – = = 0.4
= 10 J Q 5 5
From first law of thermodynamics,
CP 5
U = |Q| – |W| = 15 – 10 = 5 J 13. For monatomic gas, =
Ta
CV 3
Using Shortcut 2(i),
Critical Thinking
U C V 3
= = 0.6
1. In first case, there is no change in volume. Q C P 5
So work done is zero. Similarly, from Shortcut 2(ii),
In the second case, W 1 2
1 = = 0.4
W = P(nV – V) = (n−1)PV Q 5
Percentage of heat utilized in increasing internal
2. W = P(V2 V1) = 105 (2 1) = 105 J
energy,
3. External work done = PdV = P (V2 – V1) U
100 = 0.6 100 = 60%
V1 = V = 4 m3 and Q
10V W
V2 = V + 10% V = V + 100 = 0.4 100 = 40%
100 Q
215
ns
= (300 – 100)10–6 (200 – 100) 103 = 20 J m V
= RT ln 2
As anticlockwise area of cyclic process denotes M V1
negative work, net work done by the system in
m V
this case, W = −20 J ≈ 2.3 RT log10 2
M V1
io
17. Work done = Area of PV graph (here trapezium)
96 140
1 = 2.3 R (273 + 27) log10
= (1 105 5 105 ) (5 1) 32 70
2
at
= 12 105 J = 2.3 900 R log102
V2
Also, area under curve a > area under curve b,
= –2.303 1 8.31 (273 + 0) log
22.4
W1 > W2
11.2
As Q = u + W
et
P1V1 PV 80V P 10
= 2 2 PV = P =
T1 T2 100 P 8
P1V1 5P V P P 10
= 1 1 100 = 1 100
Ta
T1 3T2 P 8
5T1 2
T2 = = 100
3 8
T = T2 T1 = 0.667 67% 1
= 100
21. In step-1 piston is not fixed hence, pressure is 4
constant and volume changes. So work is done = 25 %
while maintaining temperature constant. Hence, V1
the process is isothermal and c = ∞. 28. V2 =
4
In step-2 piston is fixed hence, pressure
The process being slow, is isothermal.
increases and volume is constant so work is not
done which increases the internal energy and T2 = 75 C and P1 = 50 cm ….(Given)
temperature of gas. Hence, process is not P1V1 50
P2 = = = 200 cm of Hg
isothermal and c ≠ ∞. V2 1/ 4
216
ns
Negative sign indicates decrease in pressure. 3
38. Here, =
31. As the change is sudden, the process is adiabatic 2
P1V1 = P2V2 For adiabatic process, TV–1 = constant
1
io
T2 V1 3
= 22 = (2)1/2
3/ 2 1
P2 V 4 8
= 1 = = T1 V2
P1 V
2 1 1
T2 = 2 T
at
P V P
32. Using, 2 = 1 = (8)5/2 39. For adiabatic process, TV–1 = constant
P1 V2 P 1/ 1 1/ ( 1)
V2 T
=
P = P (2)15/2 1
= 1
33. As the change is sudden, the process is adiabatic
lic V1
V
T2
1
2
P2 V1 (1.4 1)
=
P1 V2
1
41. For adiabatic change,
P PV = constant.
et
P
2 Negative sign indicates volume is decreasing.
Monatomic
> V2 V2 42. For a cyclic process, U = 0
Polyatomic
By 1st law of thermodynamics,
Ta
ns
P1 300 6
W = 1 3 10 cal
P2 = (2) P0 900
(P2 ) B (2) P0 = 2 106 4.2 J
Hence, = (2) 1
(P2 ) A 2P0 = 8.4 106 J
io
W Q QC 200 TH TC
46. = = H = 54. In first case, =
QH QH 746 TH
at
% = 26.8 % 27 % 2TH 2TC T T
In second case, = = H C
2TH TH
1g 2kcal
47. Input energy = 2 kcal/s
s g TH TC 50 T
W= joule
= 16.8 103 = 1.68 104 J 273
TC 33.6 17 10 4
50. =1 W= kWh = 0.058 kWh.
TH 273 3.6 105
Ta
218
ns
3Q 3
2
= 104 cal 4
60. We know that, slopes of isothermal and
adiabatic curves are always negative and slope Competitive Thinking
io
of adiabatic curve is always greater than that of
isothermal curve. AT BT 2
1. V=
Hence, in the given graph, curve A and B P
at
represent adiabatic and isothermal changes W = P V = P[V2 V1]
respectively. AT2 BT22 AT BT12
= P 1
61. For both the paths, U remains same. P P
For path iaf : U = Q W = 50 20 = 30 J. = A(T2 T1 ) B T22 T12
For path fi : U = 30J and W = 13J
lic
Q = 30 13 = 43 J. 2. Using first law of thermodynamics,
62. In adiabatic process, Q = 0 Q = U + W
ub
work is done on the system internal energy U = Q – W
of the system increases Given that, Q = 35 J,
U = W n Cv T = W Here, W is negative because work is done on
R 3 the system.
n 7 = 146 10
P
1 W = –15 J
8.3 U = 35 J – (–15 J) = 50 J
103 7 = 146 103
1
3. Q = U + W
et
219
ns
= = Thus, heat has been given by the system.
Q CP 5
14. In isobaric process,
Fraction of heat energy to increase the internal Q = nCPT and W = n (CP CV) T
energy be 3/5. W C
=1 v
io
5 Q Cp
7. For monoatomic gas, =
3 Cp
Using Shortcut 2(ii) but = = 1.4
at
Cv
W 1 3 2
1 1 300 1
Q 5 5 1
Q 1.4
8. Considering anticlockwise sense of area, 300 1.4
PV
WBCOB = – Area of triangle BCO 0 0
lic Q=
0.4
2 = 1050 J
Considering clockwise sense of area,
15. In adiabatic process, exchange of heat Q = 0
P0V0
ub
WAODA = Area of triangle AOD =
2 16. From Shortcut 3
Total work = 0 For an adiabatic process,
P T/1
9. QABC = QAC + WABCA Given that, P T3
P
In this case,
1 = 3 = 3 3
WABCA = Area of PV graph = AB BC 1
2
3
2 = 3 =
et
1
500 = QAC + (4 10 2 103)
4
2
2
QAC = 500 40 = 460 J 17. T1 = 27 + 273 = 300 K
T2 = 627 + 273 = 900 K, = 1.5
rg
11. At S.T.P., 1/ 2
P2 T2
3/ 2
P2
1/ 2
900
3/ 2
ns
3 4.6555
isothermal compression.
V1 = 1 L = 1 10–3 m3 and
V2 = 3 L = 3 10–3 m3 24. V1 V1/2
105
3 10 3 105 1 10 3
io
adiabatic
4.6555
W = –
1.4 1
isothermal
0.6444 1 102
at
=–
0.4
= 88.9 J
The nearest answer in the option is 90.5 J. Thus, isobaric
(C) is the correct option.
lic
20. For isobaric process, work done,
w1 = P(V2 – V1) V1/2 V1
= P(2V – V) ...( Volume is doubled)
ub
Work done = area under curve
For isothermal process, Wadiabatic > Wisothermal > Wisobaric
V2 For isochoric process, W = 0
w2 = nRT ln
V1 25. Figure shows the PV diagram of the given
P
2V process.
= PV ln
V
adiabatic
w2 PVln 2 P3
et
= isothermal
w1 PV P1
w2 = w1 ln 2
21. To raise the temperature of a gas, the amount of V2
rg
V1
heat that must be supplied From figure it can be said that,
At constant volume area under the curve for isothermal expansion is
Qv = mCvT lesser than area under the curve for adiabatic
Ta
221
ns
9 100 125 TC 125 TC 100
In process – II, P and V are related non-linearly
and also temperature is changing. 625 5TC = (900 9TC) 1.25
The process is adiabatic. = 1125 11.25 TC
In process – III, temperature is constant. 6.25 TC = 500
io
The process is isothermal. TC = 80 K
In process – IV, pressure is constant. TH TC 125 80
The process is isobaric. = 100 = 100
TH 125
at
TC = 36 %
29. Efficiency, = 1 –
TH
TC 1
T T 100 35. =1– =
= H C
TH 373
lic
= 0.268 = 26.8%
1
TH 6
TC
=1– = ….(i)
T TH 6 6
η = 1 C 100 = 1
300
30. 100 = 40%
TH 500 When T2 is reduced by 62 C,
ub
2 1
TC 1 T ' = 2 × = =
31. =1– i.e., =1– C 6 3
TH 10 TH
1 T 62
=1– C
TC 1 9 T 10 3 TH
=1– = H =
P
TH 10 10 TC 9
TC 62 2
T =
W = QC H 1 , TH 3
TC 5 TC 62 2
et
= ….[From (i)]
10 6 TC 3
10 = QC 1
9 6 310
TC = 310 K and TH = = 372 K
1 5
rg
10 = QC QC = 90 J
9
36. Efficiency of Carnot engine is,
T 390 20 TC TH TC
32. = 1 – C = 1– =1
Ta
TH 590 59 TH TC
20 If both TH = TH + x
Heat used in work, W = Q = 500
59 And TC = TC + x
= 169.49 kcal
TH TC (TH x) (TC x) TH TC
Heat delivered to sink = Q W = 330.51 kcal = =
TH TH x TH x
33. TH = 400 K, TC = 300 K As denominator of is greater that of
For heat engine <
W TH TC
Q TH QH T
37. = H
400 300 QC TC
W=Q
400 300 500
=
W 400 150 TC
Q= = 800 4 = 3200 J
100 TC = 250 K
222
ns
= – 20 ºC = – 20 + 273 = 253K heat delivered to the room by refrigerator is
TC given by,
K= QH TH
TH TC
253 W TH TC
io
5= Where, TH = room temperature = t1C
TH 253
TC = temperature inside the refrigerator
5TH – 1265 = 253
= t2 C
at
1518
TH = = 303.6 K = 30.6 ºC ≈ 31 ºC QH t1 273
5
W (t1 273) (t 2 273)
QC TC Q H t1 273
40.
W TH TC
here, TC = 4 C = 277 K, TH = 303 K
lic W t1 t 2
t 1s
Due to thermal expansion,
P = 236.5 W
M
V = V0 (t ) = (t )
41. Change in internal energy,
et
223
ns
49. 2
P
3
= (4p0v0 p0v0) + 2p0v0
2
A B
2p0
…( PV = nRT)
io
= 2 p0v0
9
p0 C 2
D
at
13
= p0v0
V 2
v0 2v0 lic Hints to Evaluation Test
7. As V2 = V1/8
U = W ....( Q = 0 in adiabatic process) V1
=8
V2
Option (B) is correct.
5
et
3. P3 = k V5
5
T1
P = k V3 T2 = 4T1
But, for adiabatic process, PV = constant As T1 = 17 C = 290 K
Ta
ns
n
10. As a and d are two points on the same adiabatic T T
path, = (nR – R) = (n – 1)R
n n
T1 (Va)1 = T2 (Vd)1 = RT (1 n1)
T1 (Vd ) 1
io
i.e., = 14. TH = 400 K, TC = 200 K
T2 (Va ) 1
For heat engine
Similarly, T1 (Vb)1 = T2 (Vc)1 W TH TC
at
T1 (V ) 1 Q TH
i.e., = c 1
T2 (Vb ) 400 200
W=Q
(Vd ) 1 (Vc ) 1 400
=
(Va ) 1 (Vb ) 1
lic Q=
W 400
200
= 1200 2 = 2400 J
Vd Vc V V
i.e. or a b
Va Vb Vd Vc 15. Given that, Q = 10 J
Work done (W) = Force displacement
ub
12. Coefficient of performance =32
TC =6J
K=
TH TC From first law of thermodynamics,
(273 13) 260 U = |Q| – |W| = 10 – 6 = 4 J
P
5
TH (273 13) TH 260 16. Coefficient of refrigerator,
5TH 1300 = 260 TC 300
K= = =3
5TH = 1560 TH TC 400 300
et
TH = 312 K = 39 C
13. P
rg
P A T
Ta
P T
n
B C
V
AB is an isochoric process
PA PB P P 1 T
or TB =
TA TB T n TB n
For 1 mole of the gas,
T 1
QAB = CVT = CV T = CVT 1
n n
1 n
= CVT
n
225
05 Oscillations
Hints
ns
6. F = – kx ma = –kx 21. v2= 9(16 x2)
x
= = constant
m
v 3 16 x 2
a k
kg m [M 1 ] Comparing with v = A2 x2 , we get
io
7. Unit of k = N/m = 2 = kg/s2 = 2
s m [T ] = 3, A = 4
= [M1L0T2] vmax = A = 4 3 = 12 unit
at
8. The standard differential equation is satisfied by 22. Here, Assertion is false because, the direction
only the function sint cost. Hence it of velocity in S.H.M. can be towards or away
represents S.H.M. lic from mean position whereas the displacement
is always away from mean position.
k 4.84
10. = = = 2.22 rad/s
m 0.98 24. Velocity is same. So by using v = A,
A11 = A22 = A33
k m1
11. = 2 =
ub
m 1 m2 25. Maximum acceleration of S.H.M.,
= 2A
m1 m
2= m2 = 1 Maximum velocity of S.H.M.,
m2 4
= A
P
2 2
a =
16. a = 2x = 2 T 4 2
x
x = 5 cm when t = 0
Ta
17. 2
A is the acceleration of the particle when it 5 cm = 10 cm sin (t + )
is at one extreme point. 1
sin =
2
18. a = 2x
a a 2 =
2 = = = 100 6
x x 0.02
Equation of displacement is
= 10 rad/s t
x = 10 cm sin
19. Since the particle start from x = 0 and have the 3 2
same amplitude but different time periods, they
will meet again at x = 0 where their velocities m 200 103
27. T = 2 = 2
are maximum equal to A1 and A2, i.e. k 80
v1 2 T2 6 = 2 25 104 = 2 5 102
= 1 = = =2
v2 2 T1 2 3 = 10 102 = 0.31 s
226
ns
= 2
mg Resultant amplitude,
R= A12 A 22 2A1A 2 cos 2 = (A1 + A2)
30. With respect to the block, the springs are
connected in parallel combination 1
io
Combined stiffness k = k1+ k2 54. E= m2A2E A2
2
1 k1 k 2
n=
2 m 1
55. Total energy = m2A 2 = constant
at
2
31. Force of friction = µmg= m2 A = m (2πn)2 A
1 μg 61. F = kx
n=
2π A dW = Fdx = kxdx
38.
lic
For S.H.M., displacement x = a sin t and
W
0
dW
x
0
kx dx
acceleration A = 2x sin t are maximum at 1
W = U = kx2
t = . 2
ub
2
1
39. Phase change = 2 2 = 4 radian 62. K.Emax = m2A2
2
40. y = Asin(2nt + ). 1
= 1 (100)2 (6 102)2 = 18 J
Its phase at time t = 2nt + 2
P
2 2 2
== T = 16 s
8 T A2 = 4x2 A = 2x
8
x= = 4 mm
= tan–1 = tan–1 = tan–1
b 6 3
42. 2
rg
2 K.E max
vmax =
O t m
2 16
vmax = = 100 = 10 m/s
0.32
dx
v Aωsin ωt
dt 3 A2 16
65. x= A 2 ….(i)
d2x 4 x 9
a = 2 Aω2cosωt 1
dt m 2 A 2
T.E. 2 A2 16
This is correctly depicted by graph in (C). = = 2 = ….[From (i)]
P.E. 1 x 9
m 2 x 2
48. Displacement and force (ma) are out of phase 2
(= ) in S.H.M. Therefore, the correct graph 80 16
will be (D) = P.E. = 45 J
P.E. 9
227
ns
F = –Akx; where A and k are positive constants
l g
= constant 6. As F = – kx | F | x
T 2 42
69. In the given case, effective acceleration geff. = 0 7. x = 6 cos 3t
io
3
T=
dx
= –6 sin 3t 3 and
70. When the pendulum is falling freely with dt 3
at
acceleration g,
d2x
l = 6(92) cos 3t
T = 2 = dt 2 3
gg
d2x
= – 92x
71. For seconds pendulum, T = 2 s
lic dt 2
l d2x
2 = 2 8. Comparing given equation with 2 x 0
g dt 2
ub
g 4.9 we get,
l= = 2 50 cm
2 2 = =
k p 2n = n=
76. 2= ,r= 2
m 2m
P
Fmax = m amax =
k p2 0.2 0.2
=
m 4m2 Fmax= 98.596 N
80. When two bodies have the same frequency, then 10. x = 0.25 sin (200 t)
rg
one is excited and other vibrates with its natural Comparing with x = A sint,
frequency due to resonance. A = 0.25 m, = 200 rad/s
vmax = A = 0.25 200 = 50 m/s
84. When the springs are stretched by the same
Ta
228
=
15. From the given equation, A = 5 and = 4, a max . 2 2 1000 10
x=3 1
Ratio of max. accelerations =
v = a x = 4 (5) (3) = 16
2 2 2 2 10 2
25. Comparing given equation with standard equation,
16. vmax = A
v max 10 y = Asin(t + ), we get, A = 2 cm, =
= = 2
A 4 2
2
Now, v = A2 x 2 amax = 2A = 2 = cm/s2
2 2
v2 = 2(A2 x2)
ns
v2 dx
x2 = A2 26. v= = 4 cos t
2 dt 3
52
v2 = 4 cos 4 = 4 cos
io
x= A2 = 42 = 2 3 cm
2 (10 / 4)2 3 3
1
17. Velocity of a particle executing S.H.M. is given = 4 = 2 cm/s
2
at
by
dv
v A2 x2 27. a= = – 42 sin 4
dt 3
2 A 2 2 3A 2 A 3
A2
T 4 T 4 T
lic = – 42 sin
3
= – 42
2
3
= – 2 3 2 cm/s2
18. vmax = A
100 = 10 = 10 rad/s 2 2
28. = = = 100 rad/s,
v = 2 (A2 x2) T 0.02
ub
(50)2 = (10)2 (102 x2) A = 2.5 m at t = 0
25 = 102 x2 Equation of particle performing S.H.M. is given
by,
x2 = 100 25 = 75 x = 5 3 cm
x = A sin (t + )
P
19. v A 2
x 2 2 60 2 20 2 113mm / s 2.5 = 5 sin (100 0 + )
2.5
= sin = 30 or
20. A = 50 mm = 50 103m 5 6
et
v0
2
2
2 2 2 35. T= s , 2A = 4 cm A = 2 cm
= (a – s ) 3
2
v=A …(Given)
v02
= 2(a2 – s2) ….(ii) A 2 x 2 2 x …(Numerically)
4
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i) 2 A2
A 2 x 2 2 x 2 x =
1 a2 s2 2 1
= 2 2
2
2
4 a s A2 4
x2 = = 1
a2 – s2 = 4a2 – 4s2 4 4 3 4
2 2
2 1 1
a2 + 3s2 = 4a2 4
2
T
a 2 3s 2 x = 1 cm
a =
2 2
36. y = a sin t
ns
31. We have, T
v2= 2(A2 – x2) and = 2x
a
a sin
2t
v2 = 2A2 – 2x2 and 2 = 4 x2 = 2 (2 x2) 2 3
2 1 2t
io
v2 = 2A2 – sin
2 2 3
2 2t 2t 1
v2 + = 2A2 sin sin t s
2 3 6 3 6 4
at
v2 2 4
+ 4 2 =1 38. 2A = 4 cm A = = 2 cm
A
2 2
A 2
v
2
2 4π2
amax = A2 = A 2
A
+ 2 =1
A
lic T
which is an equation of an ellipse. A 2 1
T = 2π 2 π = 2π = 2 s
a max 2π 2 π
32. In simple harmonic motion,
ub
y = A sint and v = A cost. From these 2 2 rad
39. = = =
y2
v 2
T 12 6 s
equations, we obtain = 1, which is an
A2 A22
2 = 4 sin t1 ….(For x = 2 cm)
equation of ellipse. 6
P
2
33. For S.H.M., v = A 2 x 2 = sin t1 t1
4 6 6 6
2A1
v1 = v0 = 1 A12 0 1A1 t1 = 1 s
T1
et
230
ns
time required for travelling from x = 6.5 to
W1> W2 k1<k2Reason is true.
x = 0 is t = 1 s
1 1
time required for x = 6.5 to x = 6.5 is 2 t = 2 s Assertion, W1 = k1x2 and W2 = k2x2
2 2
io
43. Comparing the equation with x = A sin t, we W2> W1
get, Assertion is false.
= 20 2n = 20 n = 10 Hz
49. T l,
at
44. Comparing with x = A sin (t + ) we get,
The effective lengths have the relation,
1
= 2n = n = lsitting>lstanding (T)Sitting> (T)Standing
2
50. From the graph, T = 0.04 s
1
n per min = 60 = 30 per min
2
lic 1 1
f= = = 25 Hz
T 0.04
45. As it starts from rest, we have,
x =Acost. At t= 0, x = A 51. v1max = v2max
ub
When t= , x= A–a and A1 ω2 k2 m
A11 = A22
Whent = 2, x = A –3a A 2 ω1 m k1
A – a = Acos ….(i) 1
Aa A1 k 2 2
cos =
P
A A 2 k1
A – 3a= Acos2 ….(ii)
1 2
A 3a 52. W1 = kx
cos 2 = 2
et
A
1
W2 = (2k)x2 = 2. kx 2
As, cos2= 2cos2– 1, 1
2 2 2
A 3a Aa
2 1 W2 = 2W1
rg
A A
A 3a 2A 2 2a 2 4Aa A 2 5T T 5
53. T
A A2 4 T 4
A2 3aA = A2 + 2a2 4Aa Here, the hanging mass performs S.H.M.
Ta
a2 = 2aA A = 2a M
With T = 2 and
Now, A a = Acos….[From (i)] k
1 Mm
cos= T = 2
2 k
2π π
τ T6
T Mm k
T 3
T k M
46. F = kx 5 Mm
mg = kx m kx 4 M
m1 k x M m 25
= 1 1
m2 k2 x2 M 16
4 k 1 m 9
= x2 = 3 cm 9 M = 16 m
6 k / 2 x2 M 16
231
ns
1 k
f= ….(ii) x = 8 sin(12t + )
2 m 2
From equations (i) and (ii),
f
2 f
f
Initial phase angle = rad
f 2 2
io
1 64. x = A sin (t + )
56. T T1 : T2 : T3
k +5 = 10 sin (2 0 +) = 10 sin
1 1 1 1
at
= sin1
= : : 1: 2 : 5 1 1
= sin = 6
k k/2 2k 2 10 2
57. System is equivalent to parallel combination of 65. y = 10 sin (20 t + 0.5)
springs
keq = k1 + k2 = 400
lic Comparing with equation y = A sin (t + )
we get,
m 0.25
T = 2 = 2 = s initial phase = 0.5 rad
k eq 400 20
66. y = 5 sin (t + 4)
ub
m x Comparing with standard equation,
58. mg = kx
k g y = A sin (t + )
x 2 2 A = 5, = 4
= 2 9.8 10 =
m
T = 2 = 2 s
k g 9.8 10
P
67. x = A sin t
59. Extensions in springs are x1 and x2 then 2 t
2.5 = 5 sin
k1x1 = k2x2 and x1 + x2 = A 6
2 t 1
et
k 1x1
x2 = or t = s
k2 6 6 2
k 1x 1 Phase difference corresponding to 6 s is 2.
x1 A
k2 1
rg
ns
= 5 3 cm Put A1 cos 1 + A2 cos 2 = A cos
A1 sin1 + A2 sin2 = A sin
70. = rad x = A cos sint + A sin cost
2
= A sin(t + )
y = Asin(t + )
io
Hence resultant is S.H.M. with same period T.
2
y = Asin
t
T 77. R= A12 A 22 2A1A 2 cos
2
y = 0.5 sin
at
t =
0.4 2 4 2 32 2 4 3cos
3 6
y = 0.5 sin 5 t = 0.5 cos 5t 25 12 3
2 =
dy1 R = 82 6 2 = 10 cm
74. v1 = 0.1 100 cos 100t
dt 3
80. In S.H.M., a = 2x
v2 = 2 0.1 sin t 0.1 cos t
dy
Acceleration is always opposite to displacement.
rg
dt 2
Phase difference of velocity of first particle with 81. f = F = kx and
respect to the velocity of 2nd particle at t = 0 is 1
P.E. = V = m2x2
2
Ta
1 2
3 2 6 V m2A 2
For option A : x x 0
F 2kx
75. x1 = A1 sin t and
Hence option (A) is incorrect.
x2 = A 2 sin (t + )
F kx
x = x1 + x 2 For option B : x x0
V m2 x 2
= A 1 sin t + A 2 (sint cos + cos t sin )
Hence option (B) is incorrect.
= A1 sint + (A2sin t cos +A2 cos t sin ) 1
= sin t (A1 + A2cos ) + cos t (A2 sin ) 2V 2 m2 x 2
For option C : x 2 x
Let R cos = A1 + A2 cos F kx
R sin = A2 sin m2 x 2
R = amplitude of resultant = x
m2 x
R2 cos2 + R2 sin2
=x+x=0
= (A1 + A2cos )2 + (A2 sin )2
Hence option (C) is correct.
233
ns
2 88. y = 0.05 sin 4(5t + 0.4)
1
P.E. = m2x2 y = 0.05 sin (20t + 1.6)
2 Comparing this with standard equation,
At extreme position, x = A y = A sin (t + ) we get,
io
K.E. = 0 and P.E. =
1
m2A2 A = 0.05, = 20
2 1 1
T.E. = m2A2 = 0.1 (20)2 (0.05)2
At mean position, x = 0 2 2
at
1 1
K.E. = m2A2 and P.E. = 0 = 101 4 102 2 25 104
2 2
K.E. increases and P.E. decreases. lic = 0.05 2 J
1 89. Comparing the given equations with the
84. P.E. = m2 x2 = 2.5 J
2 standard form we get,
1 A
2
A A1 = 4, A2 = 5, 1 = 10
m2 = 2.5 .…[ x = ]
2 2 2 1
ub
E= mA22 E (A)2
1 A2 2
m2 = 2.5 (A11)2 = (A22)2 A11 = A22
2 4
1 4 10 = 5 = 8 unit
m2 A2 = 10
P
2 2 A2
1 A 2
1
Total energy of system = m2A2 = 10 J K.E. 2 m 2
A 2
x 2
n
2 90. = = = n2 1
P.E. 1 2 2 A
2
m x 2
et
2E 2 n
85. K.E. =
3
1
m2 (A2 x2) = m2 A 2
1 1
1 91.
K.E. 2 m (A x )
2 2 2
A2 x 2 x2 2 4 2
rg
= = = 1
T.E. 1 A2 A2 A2
m2 A 2 A2 x2 =
2 4
2E 3A 2 3A
x2 =
Ta
3 =1 x
2
x=
4 2
E A2
x2 2 1 A 1
=1 = x= 92. K.E. = m2A2 cos2 t,
A 2
3 3 3 2
1
1 2 2P.E1 P.E. = m2A2 sin2 t
86. P.E.1 = kx x = 2
2 k 1
1 2P.E 2
K.E. P.E. = m2A2 [cos2 t sin2 t]
P.E.2 = ky2 y = 2
2 k 1
1 = m2A2 .cos2t
and P.E. = k(x + y)2 2
2 Angular frequency = 2
x+y=
2P.E 2 T
T = =2s
k 2 2
234
ns
Speed of particle is given by 2
v = A2 x 2 v A2 x 2 Potential energy is given by
A 1
At x = , = m2 x 2 .…(ii)
4 2
io
2 Now, for the condition of question and from
v A 2 =
A 15
A equations (i) and (ii),
4 16
1 1 1
m2 A 2 x 2 m2 x 2
at
A
At x = , 2 3 2
2 4 1 3
2 or m2 x 2 m2A2 or x 2 A2
A 3 6 2 4
v A2 = A
v
2 4
lic so, x
A
2
3 = 0.866 a = 87% of amplitude.
3 16 4
= =
v 4 15 5 1 2
98. T.E. = m2 A2 = 1 m 2 A 2
4 2
ub
2 T
Velocity at x = A/2 may be v
5 1 42A2 22mA2
Kinetic energy will be = m
2 T2 T2
2
K.E. v 4
= = = 0.8 A
P
K.E.
v 5 99. x=
2
K.E. = 0.8 K.E.
1
W = m2A2
94. Total energy of a particle executing simple 2
et
As x = A sin (t + ) 2 4 8
1 31 2 2
K.E.= k[A2 – A2 sin2 (t + )] = mω A
2 4 2
Ta
1 3W
= kA2 [(1 – sin2 (t + )] =
2 4
1 1
= kA2 cos2 (t + ) ….(i) P.E. = mω2 x 2
2 2
1 cos 2 1 A2 1 1
As cos2= , mω2 mω2A 2 W
2 2 4 8 4
cos2 (t + ) = 1 cos 2( t )
2 1 1
100. K.E. = mv 2 = mA 22 cos 2 t
Eq. (i) becomes 2 2
1 1 cos 2(t ) 1 cos 2 t
K.E. = kA2 =
1
m2 A 2
2 2 2 2
Kinetic energy of particle varies with two times hence kinetic energy varies periodically with
of frequency of particle. double the frequency of S.H.M. i.e. 2f.
235
ns
maximum kinetic energy of the oscillator.
l
1 Now, 2T = 2
K.E.max is kA2 g
2
T l
1 = l = 4l
io
= 2 106 (0.01)2 = 100 J 2T l
2
But T.E. 100J. l
111. T = 2
at
P.E. at equilibrium position = 160–100 = 60 J. g
P.E.max = 100 + 60 = 160 J Te gm ge / 6 1
=
1 Tm ge ge 6
m 2 x 2
103.
P.E.
P.E.max
= 2
1
lic Tm = 6Te clock becomes slower.
m 2 A 2
2 112. h = 10 cm = 10 102 m = 0.1 m
1 x2 A According to the principle of conservation of
= 2x=
ub
4 A 2 1
energy, mv2 = mgh
2
104. x = 0 at mean position,
or v = 2gh = 2 9.8 0.1 = 1.4 m/s
1
T.E. of S.H.M. = m2A2
P
2 l 98 2
1 113. T = 2 = 2 =
25 = 0.5 A2 2 g 980 10
2
2 2
2A2 = 100 A = 10 = vmax = = = 10
et
T 2 / 10
The particle in S.H.M. has maximum velocity
vmax = A = 10 2 10 = 20 cm/s
when it passes through mean position.
v = 10 m/s 114. Linear momentum will be maximum, if velocity
rg
of bob is maximum.
3 In S.H.M, vmax = A ….(i)
105. K.E. = T.E.
4 1
T.E. = m2A2 = E
Ta
1 3 1 2
m2 (a2 x2) = m2a 2
2 4 2 2E
2 2 2 = 2A2 = v 2max [From equation (i)]
4 (a x ) = 3a which on solving gives m
a 2E
a = 2x or x = vmax =
2 m
Linear momentum,
106. In vacuum, the bob will not experience any 2E
frictional force. Hence, there shall be no Pmax = mvmax = m = 2mE
m
dissipation. Therefore, it will oscillate with a
constant amplitude. l
115. T = 2
g cos
107. Time period of simple pendulum
(T = 2 l / g ) is independent of the amplitude 1 1
= 2 = 2
of vibration, when amplitude is small. 9.8 cos 60 9.8 1 / 2
236
2 1 10 l
= = = 120. T = 2
9.8 4.9 49 g
1
= 3.16 = 0.45 s l l
7 T = 2 = 2
g 4g
g
116. Period of a second’s pendulum is 2 s. 5 5
It will perform 100 oscillations in 200 s 5 l 5
T = 2 = T
117. Function of wrist watch depends upon spring 4 g 2
action so it is not affected by gravity but
121. T l . Time period depends only on effective
l
pendulum clock has time period, T = 2 . length. Density has no effect on time period. If
g
length is made 4 times, then time period
ns
During free fall, effective acceleration becomes becomes 2 times.
zero. Hence time period comes out to be infinity
122. n1: n2 = 7:8
i.e. the clock stops. Suppose at t = 0, pendulums begins to swing
118. Let T1 and T2 be the time period of vibrations of simultaneously.
io
pendulum A and B respectively. If n1T1 = n2T2,
n1 T l2
Then, T1 = 2
l1
and T2 = 2
l2 = 2 =
n2 T1 l1
at
g g
2
T1 l1 1.69 13 l1 n 8
2
64
= = = = 2 = =
T2 l2 1.44 12
lic l2 n1 7 49
If the two pendulums go out of phase in time t,
123. le = 1 m, gm = g/6
then in time t, if pendulum A completes n Time period of second’s pendulum is 2 s
vibrations, the pendulum B will complete Te = Tm
(n + ½) vibrations.
ub
le l
t = n T1 = (n + ½) T2 2 = 2 m
ge gm
T1 n 1 / 2 13
le 1 g 1
T2 n 12 lm = gm = = m
ge g 6 6
P
12n + 6 = 13n or n = 6
1 1 l
n+ = 6 + = 6.5 124. T = 2
2 2 g
et
4 2l 4 2
119. T1 = T T2 = where = constant
g g
T1 l1 1 1
= = = ….(i) T2 l
T2 l2 16 4
rg
dl
2
dT
x1 = A sin 1t and x2 = B sin 2t 100 = 100
T l
They are in phase after time t and phase dT 1 dl 1
difference is 2 100 = 100 = (2) = 1 %
T 2 l 2
Ta
1t – 2t = 2
There is change of 1% per second
2 2 In a day, there are 24 60 60 = 24 3600 s
t = 2
T1 T2 24 3600 1
= 24 36 = 864 s
1 1 100
t = 1
T1 T2 There will be change of 864 s per day.
t T1 l
1 = 1 125. T = 2 T l ….(i)
T1 T2 g
t 1 169 l1
1 = 1 .…[From (i)] l2 = l1 + 69% l1 = ….[Given]
T 4 100
t 3 4 l2 169
=1t= T =
T 4 3 l1 100
237
ns
t 1 When the lift moves upwards with acceleration a,
4 4.25
l
17.00 T = 2
t= = 68 s ga
0.25
T l
io
2 ….(ii)
l 2 ga
127. T = 2 T g1/2
g Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i) we get,
a = 3g
at
1 –1/2
dT – g
2
l
dT 1 dg 1 135. T = 2
=– = – (2%) = 1% g
T 2 g 2
lic
As acceleration due to gravity decreases, the T
1
g
time period increases.
T g g 2
128. l2= l1 + 300 % of l1 = 4l1 ….[Given] T g'
g 1
ub
l1 1
2
l2 4
T = 2T
Now, T l GM
136. On earth’s surface, g =
P
T1 l 1 R2
1 =
T2 l2 4 GM GM 1 GM
At a height R, gR = = = .
R +R
2
T2 = 2 T1 4R 2 4 R 2
et
T2 T1 1
Hence % increase = 100 = 100 % gR = g
T1 4
1 1 1
L Now, T T1 and T2
129. T = 2
rg
g g gR
g g
g 1 gR 1
Let a = (g2 + a2)½ = = = 0.5
T2 g 4
L
Ta
T = 2 a
(g 2 a 2 )1/ 2 137. l2 = 44% of l1l2 = 1.44l
T l T1 l1 and T2 l2
130. For a simple pendulum,
T2 l T
T l or T2l 2 2 1.44 1.2
T1 l1 T1
1 1
E 2 2
E T2 T1 1.2 1 100
T l % change in T = 100
Hence energy will become two times if length is T1 1
halved. = 20%
131. Inside the mine, g decreases. 138. At B, the velocity is maximum. Using
conservation of mechanical energy,
l
Hence from T = 2 , we conclude that T P.E. = K.E.
g 1
increases. mgH = mv2 v = 2gH
2
238
ns
NS = 2NL i.e. if NL = 1, then NS = 2 3
4 31
1 =
141. T = 2 l / g = 2 =2s 3 1000
2 = 0.04133 Nm
io
l 2 + b2 B
142. I = m 145. =
12 I
at
1600 100 3 1.6 105
I = 0.12 10
6
= = 4 rad/s
12 3 10 6
5
= 1.7 10 Am2 n= =
4 1
s
T = 2
I
lic 2 2
4
μB = 60 min1
2
I = 38.19 oscillations per minute
= 2
ub
μB
146. O
2 2
I
= 4
μB
4 1.7 105 R
P
B= = 2 105T
3.4
mgsin
143. With like poles together, the effective magnetic
Mean
et
μ1 + μ 2 B
Restoring force at angle = mg sin mg
With unlike poles together, the effective …(Assuming is very small)
magnetic moment is (μ1 μ2).
Torque applied to the block, ext = I
Ta
239
ns
1 x1
e100bT = = sint ….(i)
3 A1
In the second case, then second equation will be
A2 = A 0e bt 2 = A0e200bt = A0(e100bt)2
x2 = A2 sin t
io
2
2
1 A
A2 = A0 = 0
3 9 = A2 sin t cos cos t sin
2 2
The amplitude will be reduced to 1/9th of its
at
initial value. = A2 cost
x2
149. The initial mechanical energy of a harmonic cost = ….(ii)
A2
1
oscillator at time t = 0 is E1 = kA2
2
lic By squaring and adding equation (i) and (ii)
x12 x 22
But because of damping, its energy at time t sin2t + cos2t = +
bt A12 A 22
1
becomes E2 = KA 2e m where b is the damping x12 x 22
2 + = 1; This is the equation of ellipse.
ub
E A12 A 22
constant. It is given that at time t, E2 = 1
2 157. Wavelength = velocity of wave Time period
bt
E1 1
= bt E1 = 2 = em λ = 300 0.05 λ = 15 metre
E2 m E1 According to problem, path difference between
P
e two points = 15 10 = 5m
2
2
bt Phase difference = Path difference
= loge2
et
m
2 2
mloge 2 0.25 loge 2 = 5
t= = 15 3
b 0.05
t = 5 loge 2 159. U = k|x|3
rg
d(P.E.)
150. For a damped oscillator, the amplitude after time F= = 3k|x|2 ….(i)
dx
t is, A = A0 et , where is the damping Also, for S.H.M., x = A sin t and
constant.
Ta
d2x
A0 A 2 x = 0
= A0e6 ….[ A = 0 ] dt 2
27 27
d2x
1 Acceleration, a = 2 x F = ma
e6 = ….(i) dt 2
27
d2x
Let A be the amplitude after 2 minutes = m 2 m2 x ....(ii)
dt
Then A = A0e2 = A0[e6]1/3
3kx
A From equation (i) and (ii) we get, =
1/ 3
A = A0 1 = 0 m
27 3
2 m m
154. As the body starts from mean position, T= = 2 = 2
3kx 3k(A sin t)
v = A cost
1
2 2t T
v=A cos A
T T
240
ns
g
T g g(1 / ) = 4 10–2
= = = 0.04 m
T g g
2 2
1 = = = rad/s
io
= 1 = 1 T 2
The equation of motion is,
T 1
Substituting, =
, we obtain, x = A sin (t + ) = 0.04 sin t
at
T 2 6
1 1
= 1 = 2
2 166. With mass m2 alone, the extension of the spring
l is given by,
162. For body to remain in contact amax = g
2A = g 42n2A = g
lic m2g = kl ….(i)
With mass (m1 + m2), the extension l is given
g 10 by,
n2 = = = 25
4 A
2
4 (3.14) 2 0.01 (m1 + m2)g = kl = k(l + l) ….(ii)
ub
n = 5 Hz The increase in extension is l which is the
amplitude of vibration. Subtracting equation (i)
163. For the graph given, amplitude (A) = 1 cm
from equation (ii), we get,
Time period (T) = 8 s
m1g
2 m1g = kll =
P
= Hz k
8 4
Acceleration, a = 2A sin t 167. The coin will leave contact when it is at the
4 2 4 highest point and for that condition
At t = s, a = 1 sin
et
2
164. Total energy of particle performing
1 dT 1 dl
S.H.M. = m2A 2 . Kinetic energy of particle 168. =
2 T 2 l
Ta
dl
1 2 = (t2 t1) = (40 – 20) = (20)
performing S.H.M. = m2 A 2 cos 2 t l
2 T
1 dl
According to problem, kinetic energy = 75% of dT = T
total energy 2 l
2 1
m 2 A 2 cos 2
1 31 2
t m A
2
= T 20
2 T 4 2 2
2 3 2 3 1
cos 2 t cos t
= 86400 12 10–6 20
T 4 T 2 2
2 …[ 1 day = 86400 s]
T
t t s 5
T 6 12 = 86400 10 12
1 = 0.864 12
t= s
6 10.4 seconds
241
ns
dt 2
= = rad/s
T 8
4. The distance covered by a particle undergoing
Substituting in equation (i), we get,
S.H.M. in one time period is 4A.
=A cos 2
io
5. In one complete vibration, displacement is zero. 8 8
Average velocity, vavg = 0 A A 1
1= cos =
6. Acceleration, a = x 2 8 4 8 2
at
=
a 20
….( a = 20 m/s2, x = 5 m) A= 8 2m
x 5
12. Refer Shortcut 1(i)
= 2 rad/s
Period, T =
2
=s
lic y = A sin t
A Asin 2
t
2 T
7. Acceleration, a = 2x 2 t 1
sin 1
ub
16 10–2 = 2(4 10–2) T 2 6
= 2 rad/s T
2 2 t=
T= 3.142 s 12
2
P
= =
v max 0.5 v2 = 2 (A2 x2)
= 2 rad/s 1 2
= T= = 4
9. Particle velocities are 2
rg
v12 2 (A 2 x 12 )
14. When velocity is u and acceleration is , let the
v 22 2 (A 2 x 22 ) position of particle be x1.
On subtracting the relations When velocity is v and acceleration is , let the
Ta
242
ns
2 2 = 0 2A
When the particle is at a distance from
2 2 + – 2 = 0 3
( 2) + 1 ( – 2) = 0 equilibrium position it’s speed is,
( + 1) ( – 2) = 0
io
2
v = A 2
2A
= 2 rad/s
3
{ –1, Angular velocity cannot be negative}
4A 2 5A2
= A2 =
at
2
Time period, T = 9 9
5A
2 22 v=
T= 2 == 7 s 3
lic
velocity of particle at x = 1 is given by Now, v 3v = 3
5
A= 5A
3
v = A2 x 2 = 2 2 1 = 2 3 m/s
2 2
2
But v = A
2 2A
ub
16. Using v = A2 x 2 3
v2 = 2 (A2 – x2) Where A is new amplitude of motion,
2
v 4A 2
= A2 – x2 5 A = A
2
2
9
P
v2
+ x2 = A2 4 A2
2 5A2 = ( A )2
9
13 2
Case 1: 2 + 32 = A2 .…(i) 4 A2
et
( A )2 = 5A2 +
9
12 2
Case 2: 2 + 52 = A2 ….(ii) 49 A 2
( A )2 =
From equation (i) and (ii) 9
rg
7
13 2
+ 32
=
12 2
+ 52 A = A
2 2 3
1
(132 – 122) = 52 –32 m
Ta
2 19. T = 2
K
1 25 9
= KT 2
2 169 144 m=
42
1 16
= weight = mg =
KT 2
g =
KT 2g
2 25 4 2
42
5
= rad/s
4 m
20. T = 2
5 1 5 k
But f = = =
2 4 2 8 T m
17. Given: A = 3 cm T1 m1
i.e.,
when x = 2 cm, v = a T2 m2
i.e., A2 x 2 = 2x m1 = m, m2 = m + 1
243
ns
22. n = 5 Hz, T = s k3 = 2k
5 when connected in series combination,
m 1 1 1 1
T = 2 = + +
k k 6k 3k 2k
io
The restoring force is equal to the weight of the k = k ….(i)
spring. when connected in parallel combination,
kx = mg k = 6k + 3k + 2k
at
m x k = 11k ….(ii)
k g Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii),
x k k 1
T = 2 = =
k 11k 11
g
A
lic 1 k
T = 2 ….( At highest position, x = A) 26. n
g 2 m
1 A n k m k 2m
ub
2 1
5 g n m k m 2k
1 A
n n
4 2
25 g x y
27. sin t and cos t
P
g 10 1 a a
A= 2
2
100 100 102 y2 x 2
1 y 2 x 2 a 2
1 1 a2 a2
vmax = A = 2 5 m/s
a circle
et
10 2
1 t = 0, y displacement is maximum,
Also, spring constant (K)
Length(l ) so equation will be cosine function.
When the spring is half in length, then K y = a cos ɷ t
becomes twice.
Ta
2π 2π π
m T 1 T
ɷ= rad/s
T = 2 T T 4 2
2K T 2 2 a=3 m
24. ∴ y = 3cos
πt
Q 2
P
244
ns
y A0 = A sin t + B cos t ky
= (2x + y)
Resultant amplitude, 2
R = A2 B2 2ABcos900 1
kx2
io
41. W1 = ….(i)
R= A B 2 2 2
1
W2 = k(2x)2 ….(ii)
1 2
35. K.E. = m2A2 cos2t
at
2 Dividing equation (i) by (ii),
K.E. is maximum at mean position and W1 1
minimum at extreme position and extreme =
W2 4
T
position is reached at every
4
lic
. This is best W2 = 4W1
W = W2 – W1 = 4W1 – W1
depicted by graph (B). = 4 10 – 10 = 30 J
K.E. 1 2
ub
42. P1 = kx1
2
2P
x12 1
k
t 1 2
P
T T P2 = kx 2
2
4 2
2P
x 22 2
36. K.E. is maximum at mean position and P.E. is k
et
1 2
37. K.E. = m2 (A2 x2) 1
2 = k x12 x 22 2x1x 2
rg
1 2
P.E. = m2 x2
2 1 2P 2P 2P1 2P2
= k 1 2 2
K.E. A 2 x 2 2 k k k k
=
Ta
P.E. x2
P=
1 2
k P1 P2 2 P1P2
2 k
1
38. K.E. = m2 (A2 x2),
2 P = P1 + P2 + 2 P1P2
1
P.E. = m2x2 43.
2
K.E. A2 x 2
=
P.E. x2
A l
Here x = l
2
A2
K.E. A 4
2
3A 2 4 3
= 2
= 2= h
P.E. A 4 A 1
4
245
ns
Time period of pendulum of bob with material
1 g g
= M A2 …. density ‘’ oscillating in liquid of density ‘’ is
2 L l l
T1 = 2π
ρ
io
45. As pendulum is immersed in liquid, its apparent 1 g
weight is mg mg. σ
It is evident from the figure that restoring force T1 1
=
on bob is- 1
at
T ρ 2
1
σ
lic Given = 1 g/cc = 103 kg/m3
9
= × 103 kg/m3
T 8
T1 1
l = 1
T 2
ub
10 3
(mm)g sin 1 9
(mm)g cos × 10
3
x 8
(mm)g
T1 = 3T
P
F = (mg mg)
x 1
But = = 2
l g 2
rg
x 1
F = (mg mg) = 2
l 12
Now, mg = vg and mg = vg
=
= density of brass bob, = density of liquid 3
Ta
1 20
But = 48. TA = = 2 sec
10 10
1 x 9 x 10
F = (vg vg) = vg TB = = 1.25 sec
10 l 10 l 8
9 x But T l
F= mg
10 l
TA lA
9 x =
ma = mg TB lB
10 l
9 x lA T2 22
a= g but a = 2 x = A2 =
10 l lB TB 1.25 2
9 g lA 64
2 = =
10 l lB 25
246
ns
4l1 2.4 = l1
3l1 = 2.4 54. Elastic support
l1 = 0.8 m
io
l1 = 800 mm
B
C A
Given l2 = (l1 + 0.36) m ; T2 = T1
25
50. T1 D
at
100
The disturbance produced in A is transferred to
Time period of simple pendulum is given by,
all the pendulums through the elastic support. A
l and C will be in resonance, since they are of
T = 2
g
lic same length.
TA= TC = T = 2 l
T l g
ub
l T2 1
2 n=
l1 T1 T
l2 T2 frequency of A and C will also remain same.
P
2 amplitude of A and C will be maximum.
l1 T1
l1 0.36 T1 0.25 T1 55. At mean position, velocity is maximum.
2
vmax = A
et
l1 T1
l
1 0.36 1.25 T1 v1 = A
(1.25)2l1 = l1 + 0.36 v2 = A11
rg
l1 = 0.36 A1 m1 ω
0.56 =
A m1 + m2 ω1
l1= 0.64 m
k k
l1 = 64 cm But = ; 1 =
m1 m1 + m2
51. When magnet is cut along its axis, A1 m1 k m1 + m 2
μ =
A m1 + m 2 m1 k
µ = ….(1)
2 1/ 2
m 1 m1 + m 2
New moment of inertia, =
m1 + m 2 m1
m 2
l I A1 m1
I = 2 = ….(2)
A
=
m1 + m2
12 2
247
ns
2
l l
1 2 1 T = 2 , T = 2
sin 10 12
2 2
T 12 5
1 2 T = T
io
1 2 T 10 6
2 6 3
61. The total energy of particle performing SHM is
A
at
58. OP = A = 25 cm and OQ = = 12.5 cm 1 2 1
2 E= ka E = m2 a2
2 2
OPQ = 30
2E 2 2E
Similarly MNO = 30 =
PON = 60 =
Q
licP
ma 2 T
ma 2
ma 2
A/2 A
3 30 T = 2
O L 2E
t = A/2 30 0.2 (2 102 ) 2
ub
3 30 = 2
M N 2 4 105
2
t
T 3 0.2 4 104
T = 2 = 2 seconds
T 2 4 105
t=
P
6
62. Relation between ‘v’ and ‘x’ in SHM is
3
= (Given: Period = 3s) = 0.5 s v2 x2
6 + 2 =1 Ellipse
A
2 2
et
A
59. Given: l = 1 m, Major axis = 2A Y
Path length (2A) = 16 cm Minor axis = 2A
16 2A A
rg
l
T = 2 f = 10 Hz
g
2 2 63. T sin = mL sin2
But = =
T l
2
g
g
=
l T
2
= =
1
For maximum velocity;
vmax = A = 8 cm/s
mg
248
ns
A 10 k
240
B=A 14 2 (6) 2
=
10 36
io
A = 2.8
4 i.e., x = 2.8 m
B = A, = 240 =
3 68. When the spring gets compressed by length L,
at
K.E. lost by mass m = P.E. stored in the
65. Frequency of oscillation is,
compressed spring
1 1 k
f= = 1 2 1
mvmax kx2
T 2 m
lic 2 2
k = m(2f)2 k
vmax = x
Mole weight (i.e., atomic mass) of silver is m
given 108.
ub
Maximum momentum of the block,
Mass of 1 atom, Pmax = mvmax = mk x
108
m =
6.02 10 23 69. On the surface of the earth,
P
= 18 10–23 g 2h
time taken for falling, t =
g
= 18 1026 kg
Time period of simple pendulum,
k = 18 10–26 (2 1012)2
et
l
= 42 18 102 T = 2
g
k = 7.1 N/m
On the surface of other planet,
rg
66. At maximum compression, the solid cylinder Time taken for falling,
will stop. 2h 2h g
t = = = 2t ( g= )
So loss in K.E. of cylinder = Gain in P.E. of g g/2 2
Ta
249
t 1 1
1. x = cos(t), y = cos (100) x2= (9)
1
2 2 2 27
1 cos t 1 1 10
y= i.e. 2y2 – 1 = cos(t) x= = m = cm
2 300 10 3 3
2y2 = x + 1 represents a parabola. 5.8 cm
2. Since the amplitudes of the SHM is small, 6. U = 5x(x – 4)
1 = 0sin(1t), (taking first one as reference) = 5(x2 – 4x)
2 = 0sin(2t ) = 5[(x – 2)2 – 4]
ns
For the two to be in same phase, The particle executes SHM about x = 2.
1t = 2t dU
F= = 5[x + (x – 4)]
2 2 dx
Substituting, = = we get,
T 3 ma = 5(2x – 4)
io
2 2 21 a = 100x – 200 = 100(x – 2)
t= t+t= s 2 = 100 = 10 rad/s
3 7 8
2
at
3. The concept is that projection of a circle on its Time period = = s
5
diameter where the circular motion is uniform,
is an SHM.
8.
Amplitude of motion = 0.5 m ma
= 60 rev/min = 2 rad/s
lic
2
T= =1s
mg
ub
4. k n1 = 2k(x2) = 3k(x3)
as tension in the spring remains the same.
Also, x1 + x2 + x3 = A
x1 x1
x1 + + =A The block will lose contact when N = 0
2 3
P
i.e. mg = ma
6 3 2 x1 = A g = A2
6
g g
6A A= =
et
x1 = 2 4 2
11 2
x 3A T
x2 = 1 = 10
2 11 A=
rg
A 2
x1 6 2
Ratio of amplitudes = = 11 = F
x1 x 2 A 3
9 9. B= A
11
Ta
Ax
5. At the mean position, V0
M1v = (M1 + M2)v BA 2
3v = 9v F = – x
V0
v = 3v
1 1 BA 2
Also, Kx2 = Mv2 Time period = 2
2 2 MV0
K 10 1 10. At mean position,
v= x= (0.1) = m/s
M 3 3 1 2
1 P.E. = kx = 0
v = m/s 2
3 3 i.e., P.E. is minimum.
1 1 Also, velocity is maximum at mean position.
Kx2= (M1 + M2) v2
2 2 K.E.is maximum.
250
12. x = a sin t = A
T2
2 3.14
2
6
dx 12
v= a cos t .…(i) = 3 cm / s 2
dt 6 4
We know that vmax. = a l
a 19. T = 2
By substituting v = in equation (i) we get g
2
T l , hence if l is made 9 times then T
time (t)
becomes 3 times.
a
a cos t
2 6
ns
2 T
t .t t
3 6 6 T 12
1
m2A2,
io
14. T.E. =
2
(where A = amplitude) Potential energy
1
m2(A2 x2)
at
K.E. =
2
1 A
2
= m2 A 2
2 2
=
1
m2
3A 2
lic
2 4
1
= m2A2
3
2
ub
4
3
K.E. = T.E.
4
15. For a particle performing S.H.M.,
P
x = A sin t and
v = A cos t
a = – A2 sin t = A2 cos (90 + t)
et
a = A2 cos (t + )
2
The acceleration shows a phase lead of
rg
F 8
16. From graph, slope K = = =4
x 2
Ta
m
T = 2
K
0.01
T = 2 = 0.3 s
4
2
17. x = A sin t
T
A 2
…. x =
A
= Asin t m
2 T 2
2 1
sin t = = sin
T 2 4
2 T
t = t=
T 4 8
251
06 Superposition of Waves
Hints
ns
7. y = A sin (t – kx) (ideally)
Ratio = 0 : a = 0
Wave speed, v =
k
Maximum particle speed, vp = A 75. The loudness is higher if area of the vibrating
io
body is more. The hollow boxes are set into
According to given condition, vp < v
forced vibrations along with the strings. Thus
1
A < A< providing higher area of vibrating body and
k k
at
increase in the loudness of sound.
2
A< …. k
2
lic Critical Thinking
22. Phase difference between the two waves is 2. Comparing the given equation with standard
equation y = A sin (t – kx) we get,
ub
= (t 2) (t 1) = (1 2)
Resultant amplitude, 2
= 0.01 = 200 m
A = A12 A22 2A1A2 cos(1 2 )
2
Phase difference = (Path difference)
P
For pth overtone, we have (p + 1)th harmonic 3. Comparing the given equation with standard
form,
50. In closed pipes, only odd harmonics are present. 2x
y = A sin (t + ) we get,
rg
ns
T 2 2 3.14
= 12.56 = = 0.5 m
1 1 12.56
7. n= = = 25 Hz, v = 25 m/s,
T 0.04 13. n = 400 T = 1/ 400
v 25 1 = t1 – kx
io
Using, = = =1m
n 25 2 = t2 – kx (at same point)
Equation of the wave is, = 2 – 1 = (t2 – t1) = 2n (t2 – t1)
y = A sin 2
t x = 2 400 10–3 = 0.8
at
T
0.8 = 180 0.8 = 144 ….[ = 180]
= 0.02 sin 2 (25t x)
14.
8. y1 = A1 sin t 2x and
lic Compressional
maximum
Rarefactional
maximum
y2 = A2 sin t 2x
2
ub
LONGITUDINAL
So phase difference, = + and WAVE
2
Using, x = . we get,
1
2 T = 0.2 s n = = 5 Hz
T
P
5
10. x = 5 sin t x cm 15. Here, A 0.05m, 0.25 0.1m
0.04 4 2
Now using standard equation of wave,
x = 5 sin 2 t x
Ta
2
2 0.04 2 4 y A sin (vt x) we get,
Comparing with standard form,
y 0.05sin 2(3300t 10x)
x = a sin 2 t x we get,
T 16. y = 0.5 sin [ (0.01x – 3t)]
T = 2 0.04, = 2 4 = 0.5 sin [0.01 x – 3t]
4 Comparing with standard wave equation,
v= = = 100 cm/s = 1 m/s
T 0.04 y = A sin 2t 2x we get,
T
2
11. Phase difference = Path difference 2 2
=3 T=
2 T 3
= x =x 1 3
2 n= = Hz
From equation, y = 0.04 sin (500t + 1.5x) T 2
253
y1 = 10sin 3t
2
= 0.01 = 200 m 24. ....(i)
3
3 and y2 = 5 sin 3t 3 cos3t
Velocity = n = 200 = 300 m/s
2
= 5 2 1 sin 3t 3 cos3t
17. Comparing with standard equation we get
2 2
2
= 10 = 0.2 m
= 10 cos sin 3t sin cos t
3 3
= 2
2 2 y2 = 10 sin 3t ....(ii)
n= = 1 Hz t
2
and the wave is travelling along the positive ( sin (A + B) = sinA cosB + cosA sinB)
ns
direction. Comparing equation (i) and (ii), we get ratio of
amplitudes as 1 : 1.
ct
18. Here, is dimensionless and unit of ct is same 25. According to given information,
5 = 4 = 0.8 m
io
as that of x. Also unit of is same as that of A,
which is also the unit of x. Hence frequency,
v 128
n= = = 160 Hz
19. Given equation is, 0.8
at
t x t x and Angular frequency
y = 3 sin = 3 sin 2
0.02 20 0.04 40 = 2n = 2 3.14 160 = 1005 rad/s
Comparing with the standard form, Also, propagation constant,
y = A sin 2p we get,
lic k=
2 2
0.8
= 7.85 m1
1 1 100
T = 0.04 s n = = 25 Hz On substituting these values in standard
T 0.04 4
equation we get,
y = (0.02) m sin (7.85x 1005 t)
ub
400
20. n= = = 200 Hz ….[ = 400]
2 2 26. Comparing the given equation with standard
equation,
21. Given equation is 2
k= = 102 = 200 m and
t x
P
y = 5 sin 2 .
0.04 40 = 2n = 2 106 v = 106 Hz
Comparing with the standard form, 27. Points B and F are in same phase as they are
et
t x distance apart.
y = A sin 2 we get,
T 28. Given equation is,
= 40 cm t x
y = 0.03 sin 8
rg
ns
y = a cos (kx t) we get,
38. I1 A12 I1 = 25 = 1
2 2
k= = 25 I2 A 22 I2 100 4
0.08
2 2 39. Resultant amplitude
io
and =
T 2
A= A 2 A 2 2AA cos = 4A 2 cos 2
32. Amplitude of reflected wave = 0.9 A 2
at
On reflection at free end (rarer medium), no As I A2 , in this case, I 4A2
phase change is introduced.
Equation of reflected wave is 40. When the waves are in same phase,
I1 = (A+ A)2 = 4A2
y = 0.9 A sin (2nt)
33. Frequency remains constant in both media
lic When the waves are 90 out of phase,
I2 = A2 + A2 + 2A2 cos 90 = 2A2
n = 100 kHz = 105 Hz I1 4A 2 = 2 : 1
vair = 340 m/s, vw = 1450 m/s I2 2A 2
ub
Reflected wave travels in air and its wavelength
is 41. In case of interference of two waves, resultant
v air 340 intensity
air = = 5
n 10 I = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 cos
P
= 1
= 43. y = 1 sin t 1 sin t
A 2 A 2 2A 2 3A a b 2
2
Here, phase difference =
37. Waves travelling to the right can be given by 2
y1 = A sin (t kx) ….(i) The resultant amplitude
When getting reflected from the fixed end of the 2 2
1 1
string, there is an additional phase difference of A=
. The reflected wave is a b
y2 = A sin (t + kx + ) 1 1 ab
=
y2 = A sin (t + kx) ….(ii) a b ab
255
ns
= 2A cos sin t 0.1x Imin = I1 + I2 2 I1I 2
4 4
Required amplitude = 2A cos Sum of maximum and minimum intensities
4 = 2 (I1 + I2)
io
45. Given that y1 = 3 sin 2(50)t and 51. Resultant amplitude AR = 2A cos
2
y2 = 4 sin 2(75)t
= 2 (2A)cos = 4A cos
at
Comparing given equations with standard form,
y = A sin 2nt we get, 2 2
n1 = 50 and A1 = 3 and n2 = 75 and A2 = 4
53. Progressive waves propagate energy while
Now, I A2 n2
I1 2
= A1 n1
2
lic stationary waves do not propagate energy.
2
5 same line, so they will produce stationary wave.
Imax = (A1 A 2 )2 = A 2 A 2
3
Imin (A1 A 2 )2 2 59. Comparing given equation with the standard form,
5
A2 A2 2x
et
3
Imax : Imin : : 16 : 1 60. In closed organ pipe, if
yincident = A sin(t kx), then
2
A1 yreflected = A sin(t + kx + )
Ta
1
47. Imax = (A1 A 2 ) 2
= A2 = A sin(t + kx)
Imin (A1 A 2 ) 2 A1
2
Superimposition of these two waves gives the
1 required stationary wave.
A2
A1 ( ) ( )
1 61. cos + cos = 2 cos cos
A max = A2 2 2
A min A1 y = y1 + y2 = 2 0.05 cos (x) cos (4t)
1 For node, cos (x) = 0
A2
3 5
2
9 x = , , ,…
Given that, I1 = A12 = 2 2 2
I2 A2 1
1 3 5
A1 = 3 A max = 3 1 = 4 x = , , ,….
2 2 2
A2 1 A min 3 1 2 x = 0.5 m
256
ns
T L1 100 n2
2x x = =
= = 12 L2 101 n1
6 As L2 > L1 , hence n2 < n1
The distance between two consecutive nodes, n1 – n2 = 5
io
12 100 n2
= =6 =
2 2 101 n2 5
64. Energy is not carried by stationary waves.
101 n2 – 100 n2 = 5 100
at
65. The given equation can be written as, n2 = 500 Hz
x n1 = n2 + 5 = 500 + 5 = 505 Hz
y = 4sin 4t
16 77. According to problem,
v=
Co-efficient of t()
lic 1 T
=
v
....(i)
Co-efficient of x(k) 2l m 4L
4 1 T 8 3v
v= = 64 cm/s along + x direction. and = .…(ii)
/ 16
ub
2l m 4L
66. y = A sin (100t) cos (0.01x) Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii),
Comparing with standard wave equation, T 1
= 9T = T + 8 T = 1 N
2t 2x T 8 3
y = 2A sin cos we get,
P
T
v
2t 78. For closed pipe, n1 =
= 100 t 4L
T v
2 250 =
et
1 100
T= n= = 4 0.2
100 T 2 v = 200 m/s
2πx 2
Also, = 0.01 x = 79. Fundamental frequency of a closed pipe is given
0.01
rg
Velocity of wave, v
by n0 =
100 2 4L
v = n = = 104 mm/s Length l of air column first decreases and then
2 0.01
becomes constant (when rate of inflow = rate of
Ta
3
= 10 10 mm/s = 10 m/s
outflow). Therefore, f0 will first increase and
67. When two bodies have the same frequency, then then become constant.
one is excited and other vibrates with its natural
80.
frequency due to resonance.
/4
71. L2 = 3L1 = 3 24.7 = 74.1 cm
72. For closed organ pipe, only odd harmonics are
present. Hence note of frequency 100 Hz will
not be emitted as 100 = 2 50. The first resonance will occur at length L =
4
73. For a closed pipe, For closed pipe, only odd frequencies are present.
2nd overtone = 5th harmonic So next resonance will be obtained at length
5th harmonic = 5 fundamental frequency 3 5
, , …...
= 5 50 = 250 Hz 4 4
257
ns
For open pipe, no = nc ....[Given]
v
n= 2v 7v L 8
2L = o =
Lo 4L c Lc 7
n1 – n2 = 3 beats/s
io
v 1 1 90. Fundamental frequency of closed pipe,
=3
2 L1 L 2 v v
n = L=
v 1 1 4L 4n '
=6
at
102 50 50.5 Fundamental frequency of open pipe,
v v
6 50 50.5 102 n= L=
v= = 303 m/s 2L 2n
0.5
v v n
84. 1 = 2L, 2 = 2L + 2L
lic
4n '
=
2n
n =
2
v v
n1 = and n2 = 91. When one end is closed, n1 = 100/2 = 50 Hz
2L 2L 2L
n2 = 3 n1 = 150 Hz,
v 1 1
ub
No. of beats = n1 n2 = n3 = 5 n1 = 250 Hz and so on
2 L L L
vL 92. Let ‘L’ be the length of the pipe,
= v
2L2 n= ….(i)
2L
P
v 340
nc = = = 85 Hz 2L 3L
4L 4 L1 = L – =
Option B: For L = 2 m, nc = 42.50 Hz 5 5
Option C: For open pipe having, L = 1 m, v
rg
n =
v 340 4L1
n0 = = = 170 Hz
2L 2 v 5v
Option D: For L = 2 m, n0 = 85 Hz = =
3L 12L
4
Ta
258
ns
= 0.6 0.6
4 4n 2 2n1 6.2 6
=
n1n 2 6
=
2n 2 + n1 = 0.033 m = 3.33 cm
io
500 450
= v
2 450 500 107. Fundamental frequency n =
2L
= 160.7 Hz 161 Hz 350 1
at
350 = L = m = 50 cm
96. For a closed organ pipe, 2L 2
n1 : n2 : n3…. = 1 : 3 : 5 .…
108. For a pipe open at both ends,
97. n = 100 Hz and n = 500 Hz = 5 100
n = 5 n Pipe is closed at one end.
lic n=
v
333
2l 2 33.3 102
= 500 Hz
98. For a closed pipe, frequency of second note Frequency of 5th overtone,
3v 3 330 n = 6n = 6 500 = 3000 Hz
= 165 Hz
ub
4l 4 1.5 3v 4v
nd
109. nc = and n0 =
99. Frequency of 2 overtone 4L1 2l2
n3 = 5n1 = 5 50 = 250 Hz. nc = n0 gives,
l1 3
100. For a pipe closed at one end, 3l2 = 8l1
P
v 340 l2 8
n= =
4l 4 34 102 110. For resonance,
Frequency of 5th overtone nc = n0
et
340 102 v v L 1
n = 11 n = 11 = 2750 Hz 1
4 34 4L1 2L 2 L2 2
101. For a closed pipe, 111. Frequency of 5th overtone of closed organ pipe =
rg
v 330 4L 2L
102. For a closed pipe, n = =
4l 4 1 L 11
Frequency of second note = 3 L 12
3 330
n= Hz 112. Difference between two successive resonance
4 1 frequencies
103. Number of beats per second, n = 595 425 = 170 Hz
16 4 v 1 1 Similarly n = 425 255 = 170 Hz
n n n1 n 2 If pipe is open at both ends, air column will
20 5 4 l1 l2
vibrate with all harmonics i.e. n1, 2n1, 3n1, ….
4 v 1 1 0.01v v
= n = n1 = 170 Hz
5 4 1 1.01 4 1.01 4 101 But in that case, successive resonance
16 101 –1 frequencies will be multiples of 170 Hz which
v 323.2 ms
5 contradicts the given data.
259
ns
f2 = f1 where, n is odd 121. np = , nq = , nr = , ns =
4 4L 2L 2L 4L
As f2 > f1 n = 5 np : nq : nr : ns
114. Frequency of first overtone of closed pipe = v 2v 4v 3v
: : :
io
Frequency of first overtone of open pipe 4L 4L 4L 4L
3v1 v 2 3 P 1 P P np : nq : nr : ns : : 1 : 2 : 4 : 3
v
4L1 L 2 4L1 1 L2 2 2L
at
122. For a vibrating string, =
4L1 1 4L 1 p
L2
3 2 3 2 where p = Number of loops = Order of vibration
or mode
115. Fundamental frequency of a pipe closed at one
lic
end = Frequency of 2nd overtone of pipe open For fourth mode p = 4, =
2(2)
4
=1m
1
at both ends v = n = 500 1 = 500 m/s
2
123. y = 0.021sin(x + 30t)
ub
v 1 3v 1 3
4nL1 2 2nL 2 L1 L 2 Comparing this equation with the standard form
L2 = 3L1 = 30 cm we get,
= 30 rad/s and k = 1
116. t1 – t2 = 1 30
P
L L v= = = 30 m/s
1 k 1
340 3740
T
3400 L = 340 3740 Using, v = we get,
m
et
34 374
L= = 374 m
34 T
30 = T = 0.117 N
1.3 104
117. Critical hearing frequency for a person is
rg
n1 = = (2N 1)n 1 T 1 T
4l = =
20,000 = (2N – 1) 1500 2 2M 2 ML
L
N = 7.1 7 L
Also, in closed pipe, 1 96
Number of overtones = = 5 Hz
2 0.120 8
= (Number of mode of vibration) – 1
= 7 – 1 = 6. 125. Stretched wire produces integral number of
harmonics
l2 3 l1 49 3 16
118. e = = = 0.5 cm Let 420 = 6 70 Hz
2 2
490 = 7 70 Hz
119. = (15 + 1) 4 = 64 cm Fundamental frequency of wire is 70 Hz
3 1 T
For second resonance, L = n=
4 2L m
260
1 T 131. n T
L=
2n m n1 T1 and n2 T2
1 450 But T2 > T1 n2 > n1
L=
2 70 5 103 n n1 = 5
1 n k T1 = 5
= 3 100
2 70
n k 100 = 5
30
= = 2.1 m n 10 k = 5 ….(i)
14
n2 n = 5
126. L1 + L2 + L3 = 110 cm and k T2 n = 5
n1L1 = n2L2 = n3L3
n1 : n2 : n3 :: 1 : 2 : 3 k 121 n = 5
ns
n1 1 L L 11 k n = 5 ….(ii)
= = 2 L2 = 1 and Adding equeations (i) and (ii),
n2 2 L1 2
k = 10
n1 1 L L
= = 3 L3 = 1 Substituting in equation (i),
io
n3 3 L1 3 n 100 = 5 n = 105 Hz
L1 L
L1 + + 1 = 110 0.01
2 3 132. m = = 2 102 kg/m
0.5
at
L1 = 60; L2 = 30 cm, L3 = 20 cm
1 T
T
n=
T T 2l m
127. v = = v
m r 2 r
2 102
vA TA rB 1 1 1
lic n=
1
2 0.5
800
2 102
=
1
= 200 Hz
= . = . =
vB TB rA 2 2 2 2
133. nA = 324 Hz, nb = 6 Hz
1 The frequency of string B is
ub
128. n nB = nA nb = 324 6 = 330 or 318 Hz
L
n L
Now, the frequency of a string is proportional to the
= square root of tension. Hence, if the tension in A is
n L
slightly decreased, its frequency will be slightly
If length is decreased by 2%, then frequency
P
n2 n1 = n1 = 392 = 7.8 8
100 100 beat frequency is found to reduce to 3 Hz.
Hence, the frequency of B cannot be 330 Hz. It
129. n T is therefore 318 Hz. When the tension in A is
rg
n12 256 n1 T1
134. n T= = ….(i)
T = T2 T1 = 25 16 = 9 kg-wt n2 T2
50 150n1
1 T n2 = n1 + n1 =
130. n = 100 100
2l m n1 100 2
= = ….[From (i)]
1 n2 150 3
Let T = 2T , A = A
2 T1 4
=
Now, m = AL T2 9
1 m T2 T1 T
m = AL = AL = % increase = 100 = 2 1 100
2 2 T1 T
1
1 T 1 2T 1 T 9 500
n = = = 2 = 2n = 1 100 = = 125%
2l m 2l (m / 2) 2l m 4 4
261
ns
l1 T1 The beat frequency will remain fixed at 6 if
i. n1 remains same but n2 is increased to a
l2 = l1 169 new value n 2 n 2 12 by increasing
100
l2 = 1.3l1 = l1 + 0.30 l1 = 30% of l1 tension T2.
io
ii. n2 remains same but n1 is decreased to a
137. According to law of tension, new value n1 n1 12 by decreasing
N T tension T1.
at
Therefore, when the tension is doubled, the
frequency becomes 2 times. 1 L n
148. n 2 = 1
L L1 n2
138. Distance between six successive nodes,
5
85 cm
lic L2 = L 1
n1
n
2
= 50
270
1000
= 13.5 cm
2
2 85 T 60.5
34 cm = 0.34 m 149. v = = = 110 m/s
5
ub
m 0.035
Speed of sound in gas,
7
= n = 1000 0.34 = 340 m/s
150. String vibrates in five segments
140. 5 2l
A A l
P
N N 2 5
N
v v 20
1.21 Å n 5 5 5 Hz
2l 2 10
et
L=
2 n T
= =2
142. At fixed end, node is formed and distance n T
between two consecutive nodes, T = 4T = 16 kg-wt
Ta
= 10 cm = 20 cm n1 T1
2 152. n T
n2 T2
v = n = 100 20 10–2 = 20 m/s
n 10
= T2 = 40 N
143. n T 2n T2
144. Here, = 2l 153. n T
v = n = 480 2 0.3 = 288 m/s n 1 ΔT
=
v 36 1 n 2 T
145. Here, = = 0.5 m = m
n 72 2 1 ΔT
Beat frequency, n = n
Distance between wall and first antinode 2 T
1 1 2
= m = 400 = 4
4 8 2 100
262
1 T 1 T1 T1
154. Using, n = = =
2 m 3 T2 T1 8
1 T 1 1 T1 1
Number of beats = =
2 m l2 l1 T1 8 9
1 20 1 1 9 T1 = T1 + 8 T1 = 1 kg-wt
= 3
7
2 1 10 49.1 10 2
51.6 102
1 T
161. n =
1 T 2L r 2d
155. Fundamental frequency n
2l r 2 1 9T
n =
1 n r l r 2L 1 2L r2d
n 1 2 2
lr n 2 r1 l1 2r L 1 n 3L r
….(i)
ns
156. At resonance, frequency of A.C. will be equal to n L r
natural frequency of wire, mass remains the same
1 T 1 10 9.8 100
n 50 Hz r L
2l m 2 1 9.8 103 2
io
r L
157. Here, nl = constant Substituting in eq. (i)
n1l1 = n2l2 110 (l1) = (l1 – 5) n2 n L
3
at
110 60
= n2 n2 = 120 Hz n L
55
Number of beats = 120 110 = 10 L > L
n < 3 n
158. Mass per unit length of the string
1.0 103
lic
m= = 5 103 kg m1 162. L1 = 40 cm, L2 = 30 cm
20 102 1 T T
speed of waves in string n= = constant
2L m L
ub
I 0.5
v= = 10 ms1 T1 T2 L T1
m 5 103 = 1 =
L1 L2 L2 T2
Now, v = n
2 2
v 10 T2 L 30 9
= = = 0.1 cm = 10 cm = 2 = =
P
n 100 T1 L1 40 16
separation between successive nodes = Let T1 = Vdg and density of fluid in which
2 weight will be immersed is
et
= 5 cm
T1 – T2 = Vg
159. If a rod clamped in the middle, then it vibrates T1 T2
similar to an open organ pipe as shown in the =
T1 d
figure.
rg
A
T2 9 7
N
1– = =1– =
T1 d 16 16
A A d 16
l N =
Ta
7
l
163. On earth:
A
1 Mg 1 g
Fundamental frequency of vibrating rod is, n= = , Since M = 1 kg
2L m 2L m
v v
given by n1 2.53 On moon:
2l 2 1
v = 5.06 km/s. n =
1 Mg / 6
=
1 Mg
2L m 2L 6m
n1 T1
160. n T = For resonance: n = n
n2 T2
n2 = 3n1 ….[Given] 1 g 1 Mg
=
n1 1 2L m 2L 6m
=
n2 3 which gives M = 6 kg
263
ns
n1 l1 = (n1 – 2)l2 ....[n2 < n1 as length increases]
n1 = 220 Hz
l2 n1 250 125
l1 n1 2 248 124 176. Forks arranged in a series of increasing
frequency from n1 to n32
166. When the length of sonometer wire increases by n32 = n1 + 31(6) = n1 + 186 ….(i)
io
4%, the new length, Given condition is n32 = 2n1 ….(ii)
l2 = 1.04 l1 From (i) and (ii),
Now, nl = constant 2n1 = n1 + 186 n1 = 186 Hz
at
n1 l1 = n2 (1.04 l1) n1 = 1.04 n2
177. Here, 1 = 2n1 = 500 , n1 = 250 Hz
n2 = n1 8 …( n2 < n1)
2 = 2n2 = 506 , n2 = 253 Hz
n2 = 1.04 n2 – 8 No. of beats / s = n2 n1 = 253 250 = 3 Hz
0.04 n2 = 8 n2 = 200 Hz
lic No. of beats / minute = 3 60 = 180
167. Let the frequency of tuning fork be N. v v
178. n1 = , n2 =
As the frequency of vibrating string 1 2
ub
1 1 = 2 m, 2 = 2.02 m
length of string Since 1 < 2 ,
For sonometer wire of length 20 cm, frequency n1 > n2
must be (N + 5) and that for the sonometer wire n1 n2 = 2
of length 21cm, the frequency must be (N – 5)
P
= 2 v 2 1 = 2
v v
as in each case, the tuning fork produces 5
1 2
beats/s with sonometer wire 1 2
n1l1 = n2l2 (N + 5) 20 = (N – 5) 21 2 2 2 2.02
v= 1 2 = = 404 m/s
et
N = 205 Hz 2 1 2.02 2
264
10
n1 n2 = 186. Using v = n,
3 v v v v
n1 = and n2 =
v v 10 101 100 10 1 0.50 2 0.51
= v=
100 101 3 3 1 1
n = n1 n2 = v = 12
v = 33667 cm/s = 336.67 m/s 0.5 0.51
12 0.51 0.50
181. Let the frequencies of the 28 forks be v= = 306 m/s
0.01
n1 …… ni …….n28
Such that ni 1 ni = 4 Hz 187. Frequency of string = 440 5
When frequency of tuning fork is decreased,
n1 n28 = 108 Hz
beat frequency is increased.
n1
= 2 n1 = 2n28 Frequency of string = 445 Hz
n 28
ns
188. Comparing given equation with standard form,
2n28 n28 = 108 Hz
y = A sin 2nt we get,
n28 = 108 Hz and n1 = 216 Hz
n1 = 316 and n2 = 310
182. n11 = n22 2 2
io
110 110 Number of beats heard per second,
< ….[ n1 > n2]
177 175 316 310 3
n1 – n2 = =
n1 = n2 + 6 2 2
at
(n2 + 6)1 = n22 189. nA = Known frequency = 288 c.p.s
110 110 x = 4 b.p.s.,
(n2 + 6) = n2
177 175 After loading of wax on tuning fork B, nB
175 (n2 + 6) = 177 n2
lic decreases. If we consider nA > nB then,
after loading, nA nB will increase. But it
n2 = 3 175 = 525 Hz
n1 = n2 + 6 = 525 + 6 = 531 Hz contradicts the given data that x decreases to
2 b.p.s.
ub
183. Let n be a frequency of given fork. nB = nA + x = 288 + 4 = 292 c.p.s.
We have following possibilities for n:
190. nA = 512 Hz
Case I: When 2 beats/s are produced, oscillator
reads 514 Hz. Given that, nA nB = 8
When B is loaded with wax, the number of beats
n – 2 = 514 or n + 2 = 514
P
v 1 1 1
184. Using, v = n or n = we get, 192. T = = = = 0.2 s
n 2 n1 325 320 5
Ta
v 330 v
n1 = = 66 Hz 193. Using, v = n we get, n =
1 5
v 330 Given that, n2 – n1 = 5
and n2 = = 60 Hz
2 5.5 1 1
v = 5
Number of beats per second,
2 1
n1 n2 = 66 – 60 = 6 1 1 5 52 52.5
v = 5 v =
185. From the given equations of progressive waves, 52 52.5 0.5
1 = 500 and 2 = 506 = 10 52 52.5 = 273 m/s
n1 = 250 Hz and n2 = 253 Hz 273
n1 = = 520 Hz and
Hence, beat frequency = n2 n1 52.5 102
= 253 – 250 = 3 beats per second 273
n2 = = 525 Hz
Number of beats per minute = 180. 52 102
265
ns
196. Given equations are,
2 3 3
y1 = a sin (2000 t) = a sin 2 (1000 t) and = .
4 2
y2 = a sin (2008 t) = a sin 2 (1004 t)
Comparing with the standard form, 205. Given that, vmax = 4 vp
io
y = A sin 2 nt we get, A = 4 n
n1 = 1000 Hz and n2 = 1004 Hz 2 1
A =4
Number of beats = 1004 – 1000 = 4 beats/s T T
at
A
197. Loudness depends upon intensity while pitch A = 2 or =
depends upon frequency. 2
199. The loudness of sound is measured on decibel 206. For the second resonance, x = 3L1 = 54 but
scale which is logarithmic. during summer, temperature increases and
lic I
hence velocity of sound increases.
Loudness or sound level = 10 log . Each x > 3L1 i.e., x > 54 cm
I0
increase in intensity by a power of 10 increases I 12 2
207. dB = 10 log10 ; where I0 = 10 Wm
ub
decibel reading of 10 units. I0
Hence, to increase the decibel reading by 20,
I1 I1
there needs to be an increase in intensity by Since, 40 = 10 log10 = 104
10 10 = 100. I
0 I0
P
I2 I2
Also, 20 = 10 log10 = 102
200. At t = 0 and x = , the displacement I0
2k I0
I2 d2
y = A0 sin (0) k = A0 sin = A0 = 102 = 12 d 22 = 100d12
et
2k 2 I1 d2
Point of maximum displacement (A0) in d2 = 10 m ….[ d1 = 1 m]
negative direction is Q.
rg
p max p p 5 9g
= A 0 have p = 5 and T = 9g n1
p min p A p0 2l m
With 3 antinodes and hanging mass M, we have
I
202. Energy density (E) 2 2 n 2 A 2 3 Mg
v p = 3 and T = Mg n 2
2l m
vmax A 2nA E (v max ) 2
5 9g 3 Mg
i.e., graph between E and vmax will be a n1 = n2
2l m 2l m
parabola symmetrical about E axis.
25 9 g = 9 Mg M = 25 kg.
203. Wave velocity = v
209. In a stretched string, all multiples of
Particle velocity,
fundamental frequencies can be obtained.
= y0 2v cos 2 (vt x)
dy i.e., if fundamental frequency is ‘n’, then higher
vmax =
dt frequencies will be 2n, 3n, 4n, 5n …
266
ns
v0 = 332 m/s = 33200 cm/s 2 3
Error = 33280 – 33200 = 80 cm/s
216. For both the positions in Melde’s experiment,
M AL Tp2 = constant.
211. m A
L L T1p12 T2 p 22
io
T/A YlA
Y T . (m0 + m1)g p12 = (m0 + m2)g p 22
l/L L
Hence lowest frequency of vibration, m 0 p12 m1p12 m 0 p 22 m 2 p 22
at
l m 0 p12 p 22 m 2 p 22 m1p12
Y A
1 T 1 L 1 Yl m 2 p 22 m1p12
n m0 =
2l m 2l A 2l L p12 p 22
n
1 9 1010 4.9 104
35Hz.
lic 217. Minimum time interval between two instants
2 1 1 9 103 T
when the string is flat = = 0.5 s
212. As string and tube are in resonance, n1 = n2 2
ub
|n1 – n| = 4 Hz T=1s
When T increases, n1 also increases. It is given Hence = v T = 10 1 = 10 m
that beat frequency decreases to 2 Hz.
218. From the figure,
n n1 = 4 n = 4 + n1
Given that, v1 T1
P
n1 ; T2 = 2 T1
n1 = n2 v2 T2
n = 4 + n2 where, T1 = tension in string AB
3v 3 340 N frequency = n and T2 = tension in string CD
et
n2 =
4l 4 (3 / 4) v1 T1 1
=
= 340 Hz A v2 2T1 2
n = 344 Hz 219.
rg
N reflected transmitted
213. The waves 1 and 3 reach out of phase. Hence
resultant phase difference between them is . 4/
Ta
267
2
221. = sin t (x cos ycos )
Competitive Thinking
represents a wave travelling along a line in x-y
600
plane through origin making an angle with x- 1. v= = 300 m/s
k 2
axis and with y-axis.
2
= (x 2 x1 )cos (y2 y1 )cos 2.
2
y = a sin 2nt x
5
Comparing with the given equation, we get
For particle velocity vp,
= 30, = 60, = 1 m, = 30/s
dy 2
Let (x1, y1) (2 3 m,2m) and a 2n cos 2nt x
dt 5
(x2, y2) (3 3 m,3m)
(vp)max = 2na
ns
On substituting the values and simplifying
Comparing with standard equation progressive
we get,
constant,
= 4 = n n = 4
2 2
k= =5
222. y1 = 4 sin (400 t), y2 = 3 sin (404 t) 5
io
Comparing with standard form, y = A sin 2nt Wave velocity v = n = 5 n
we get, (v p ) max 2na 2a
A1 = 4, A2 = 3, n1 = 200, n2 = 202 =
v 5n
at
5
Beat frequency = n2 n1
= 202 200 = 2 beats/second 3. Given equation of the wave can also be written as,
(A A 2 ) 2 (7) 2 49
Intensity ratio = 1 = = t x
(A1 A 2 ) Y = 3 sin 2
2
(1) 2
lic
1
2
6 10 4
A1 4 t x
I A 1 1 49 Comparing with y = A sin 2
223. Using, max = 2 = 3
= T 4
1
Imin A1 1 4 1
ub
A 3
(where, x and y are in metre)
2
we get,
224. In the given case, the wave must be bounded. 1
A = 3 m, F = = 0.17 Hz, = 10 m and
225. T
P
v = F = 1.7 m/s
Hence, option (D) is correct.
A = 60, = 1800, k = 6
Velocity of wave propagation is
1800
rg
vw = n ; n = ,
Fundamental frequency (2n + 1) = L 2 2
4
2 2
(2n 1) =
f= v k 6
Ta
4L
1800 2
3 vw = = 300 m/s
For 1st case, l = m 2 6
8
f 680 3 Velocity of particle is
(2n + 1) = 4l = 4 =3 dy
v 340 8 vp = = 1800 60 cos (1800 t 6x)
n=1 dt
Next overtone is for n = 2 v pmax = 1800 60 m/s
Thus,
v pmax = 1800 60 106 m/s
5 5 1 5
L = = = m
4 4 2 8 v pmax 1800 60 106
=
5 3 1 vw 300
X = = m = 25 cm
8 8 4 = 360 106
226. String crosses mean position simultaneously. = 3.6 × 104
268
ns
A 2vB n
2
= x B n vB
2 2
λA = 2λB
4
The no: of loops (n) in the wire are given as,
io
x = cm 2l
8 n=
6. Given equation is, n1 2l
at
y = A sin (100 t + 3x) B
n 2 2 B 2l
n1 1
t x
= A sin 2 n2 2
1 2
50 3
lic Hence no: of loops in wire are l and 2
respectively
Comparing with the standard form, A
t x 2 A
y = A sin 2 we get, =
ub
T 3 N N N N
A
A phase difference of rad corresponds to a
3 ratio of no: of antinodes p:q is 1:2
x 1 2
path difference of m = = m
P
n0 : n1 : n2 : n3 : n4 = 1 : 3 : 5 : 7 : 9
t x = 100 : 300 : 500 : 700 : 900
with y = A sin 2
T Number of possible natural frequency = 5.
Here, A = 2 cm
rg
v
v = n = 100 50 = 5000 cm/s where, nc =
4L
Hence, option (C) is incorrect.
In open organ pipe, for pth mode corresponding
9. For stationary wave, the resultant particle frequency is
velocity at all points is zero. (np 1)0 = p n0
v
x where, n0 =
10. y = 2 sin (cos 48t) 2L
15
2 ….(Given length and medium is same for both
= the pipes)
15
v
= 30 units
Distance between a node and its next antinode,
n p 1 0
p
2L
2p
30 n p 1 c
v 2p 1
2p 1
= 7.5 units
4 4 4L
269
ns
….(i) Hence, option (B) and (C) are correct
4l
Pressure variation is minimum at antinode
2n 1 v = 220 Hz ….(ii) Option (D) is incorrect.
4l
Subtracting equation (ii) from equation (i),
io
23. For an open pipe,
2v e = 0.6 d
= 40
4l e
v d =
at
Fundamental frequency = = 20 Hz 0.6
2l e
2r =
18. For 1st resonance, 0.6
v 340
l0 =
4n
=
4 340
= 0.25 = 25 cm
lic r =
0.8
1.2
2
= cm
3
Next resonance will occur at a distance of
3l0 = 75 cm and further at 5l0 = 125 cm (which 24. Fundamental frequency of closed organ pipe
is not possible). v
ub
=
Hence, h = 120 – 3l0 = 120 – 75 = 45 cm 4L
= 0.45 m v 3v
v v 4L 2l0
19. nl+e=
4(l e) 12 20
P
4n l0 =
v 2
l= e
= 120 cm
4n
Here, e = (0.6)r = (0.6)(2) = 1.2 cm
et
v 4l1 2l2
20. Fundamental frequency of open tube, n =
2L l1 3
where v is the velocity of sound in air and L is =
l2 4
the length of the tube
Ta
270
ns
of length . n2 =
2 4l
After dipping in water, here, L be length of open pipe,
v v
Fundamental frequency f = = =f
3v
=
3v
l 2l
io
4 2L 4L
2 4L
L = = 2L
28. For a closed pipe, 2
at
7v
n3 = ....(i) 32. Fundamental frequency of open organ pipe,
4l
v
For an open pipe n1 =
2lo
3v
n2 =
2l
....(ii)
lic Frequency of third harmonic for closed organ
pipe,
According to given condition, we have
3v
7v 3v n2 =
= + 150 ….[from (i) and (ii)] 4lc
4l 2l
ub
7v 3v Given: n1 = n2
= 150 v 3v
4l 2l
7v 6v 2lo 4lc
= 150
4l 2lc 2 20
P
lo = = 13.33 cm
v 3 3
= 150
4l
33. For a pipe closed at one end,
Fundamental frequency of pipe open at both
et
v
ends is n1 = and for a pipe open at both ends,
4L1
v
= 2 150 = 300 Hz v v v
2l n2 = L1 = and L2 =
rg
2L 2 4n1 2n 2
v
29. no = v v
2Lopen For the new pipe, L = L1 + L2 = +
4L1 2 L2
v
nc = 3
Ta
v v n1n 2
4Lclosed n= = =
4L v v 2n1 n 2
v v 4
nc = 3 3 4n
1 2n 1
Lopen
4 2Lopen
2 v
34. n1 =
= 3 100 = 300 Hz 2(l1 2e)
30. For a pipe open at both ends, v = 2n1 (l1 +2e) ….(i)
V v
f= n2 =
2L 2(l2 2e)
V V v = 2n2 (l2 + 2e) ….(ii)
f1 = , f2 =
2L 2(L d) From equation (i) and (ii), we get
V V n 2l2 n1l1
beat frequency fb = f1 f2 = e=
2L 2(L d) 2(n1 n 2 )
271
ns
frequency of fundamental mode is A
v
n0 N
L0
2 A
2
io
= 2n0 = 2 4 Hz = 8 Hz N
When the length of the closed pipe is doubled, A
at
its frequency of fundamental mode is N
v 1 1 A
nc n c = 2Hz = 1 Hz
4 2Lc 2 2
Hence, number of beats produced per second
= n0 nc = 8 – 1 = 7.
lic For third overtone, the pipe has 4 nodes and 5
antinodes
(2n 1)v
36. Here n = 1250 l2 3l1 74.1 3 24.1
4L 39. e= =
ub
2 2
(2n 1) 340
1250 e = 0.9
0.85 4 But e = 0.3d
2n – 1 12.5 n 6.75 e 0.9
d= = 3 cm
P
3v l2 = 31.25 cm = 0.3125m,
For closed pipe first overtone, n1 =
4L f = 800 Hz
Number of beats produced are, v = 2 800(0.3125 0.0975)
rg
v 3v v = 2 800(0.215)
n1 n1 = =3 v = 344 m/s
L 4L
v 1 T 1 1
=3 41. n= n and v n v
Ta
4L 2lr r r
v
= 12 ….(i)
L 1
42. Velocity of transverse wave on string, V
L r
When length of open pipe is made , the 1
3 VA
….(i)
fundamental frequency becomes, rA
v 3v 1
n= = VB .…(ii)
L 2L rB
2
3 Divide equation (i) by equation (ii)
When length of closed pipe is made 3 times, the VA r r
= B = B .…{ rA = 2rB}
fundamental frequency becomes, VB rA 2rB
v v VA 1
n = = =
4(3L) 12L VB 2
272
ns
Distance between a node and antinode is half of
0.4 From equation (i)
length of loop = = 0.2 m T = (180)2 2 102
2
T = 648 N
45. n T
io
1 1 1
n T 49. l1 : l2 : l3 = : : =6:3:2
n1 n 2 n 3
n T
at
6
n 2T l1 = 99 = 54
11
n T
3
n = 2 n l2 = 99 = 27
11
46.
lic 2
l3 = 99 = 18
11
m1
50. Fundamental frequency of the first wire is
ub
1 T 1 T 1 T
n= = =
2l1 m 2l1 r1
2
2l1r1
m2
1 T
The first overtone n1 = 2n =
P
1 v1 n
3 T
velocity of transverse wave on string n2 =
2l2 r2
T
v= Given that n1 = n2
rg
m
where, m is linear density. 1 T 3 T
=
l1r1 2l2 r2
In this case, v T
m 2 m1 3l1r1 = 2l2r2
Ta
2 v2 T2
l1 2r
1 v1 T1 m2 = 2
l2 3r1
Where, T2 is tension at upper end of rope
and T1 is tension at lower end of rope. 2r2
= ….( r1 = 2r2)
3( 2r2 )
n T 1
47. = =
2L m 3
….(where ‘m’ is mass per unit length)
M 1 T 1
But, m = 51. =
L 2l m l
n T n T l = l1 + l2 + l3 ….(Given)
= =
2 2
M 2 ML 1 1 1 1
L
L 1 2 3
273
ns
2n 2n1 2n 2 2n 3 n1 = n – 6 …(ii)
1 1 1 1 n2 = n + 6 …(iii)
n n1 n 2 n 3 n1 T1 225 15
= = =
io
53. String vibrating in second overtone forms four n2 T2 256 16
nodes and three antinodes as shown, n 6 15
L L 5L
= …from (i), (ii), (iii)
L 2L n+6 16
at
6 2 6 16n – 96 = 15n + 90
3 3
n = 186 Hz
54. n=
1 T
lic order, then,
nm = n1 + (m 1)X
2L r 2d where X = no. of beats produced.
1 4T here,
n =
ub
2L r2d n3 = n1 + (2)X
n 2L r n + 1 = n 1 + 2X
….(i)
n L r 2X = 2
mass remains the same X=1
P
n < 2 n 3n = n + 4 55
55. nx = 300 Hz n = 110 Hz
x = beat frequency = 4 Hz, which is decreasing
a = 250 4 = 254 Hz or 246 Hz
Ta
60.
after increasing the tension of the string Y.
b = 513 5 = 518 Hz or 508 Hz
Also, n T , tension of wire Y increases so
Now, b = 2a
ny increases Which is 508 = 2(254)
Hence, if ny > nx
= 254 Hz
beat frequency increases, which contradicts the
data. 61. Let n be the frequency of fork C
ny < nx 3n 103n 2n 98n
nA n and n B n
nx ny = x 100 100 100 100
n y n x x 300 4 296 Hz 5n
But n A n B 5 5 n 100Hz
56. Suppose np = frequency of piano 100
nf = Frequency of tuning fork = 256 Hz (103)(100)
nA
x = Beat frequency = 5 b.p.s., which is decreasing 100
after changing the tension of piano wire. = 103 Hz
274
T n 9 2
dt =
g 0
x 1/ 2 dx
2 =2 = = 0.02 0
T n 900 100 20
1 x1/ 2
t= ( L = 20 m)
64. v = 4nl ….(i) g 1 / 2 0
P 2
v= ….(ii) = 20 = 2 2 s
10
P
= 4nl ....[From equation (i) and (ii)] t x
68. y = 0.02 sin 2
0.04 0.50
ns
84 4
2
1.2 1
=
1.0 105 T T
0.04
Using, v =
= 1.354 1.4 m k 0.04 1
io
0.50
65. na = 250 4 = 254 Hz or 246 Hz 2
nb = 513 5 518 Hz or 508 Hz 0.50 2
T= 0.04 = (12.5) 0.04
Now, nb = 2na 0.04
at
Which is 508 = 2(254) . = 6.25 N.
n = 254 Hz 69. As string is clamped resulting wave is a
n1 n2 = 6 standing wave of equation y = 2A sin kx cost
66.
1 T 1 T
lic Comparing with given equation,
6 2
2l m 2l m = 60 and k =
3
1 T 60
600 = 6
ub
2l m Now velocity v = = = 90 m/s
k 2
1 T 3
= 606 ….(i)
2l m Also, velocity of transverse wave,
1 T T T
P
606
2l m 70. For a resonance tube experiment, difference
1 T 600 between lengths of column for two successive
resonances is given by,
2l m
rg
T T v
= (1.01) = (1.02) Ln+1 – Ln =
T T 2 2n
v = 2n(Ln+1 – Ln) = 2 320 (0.73 – 0.20)
T = T(1.02)
Ta
= 339.2 m/s
Increase in tension,
T = T 1.02 T = (0.02T) 71. A A
T N
Fractional increase in the tension, = 0.02
T
T
67. Velocity of transverse string v = , where, m 1
m
is linear density. L = 2 60 cm
Tension T = Mg = mxg v
Fundamental frequency, 0 =
mxg 1
v=
m here, 1 = 2L
dx Y
xg Also, v =
dt
275
v 1 Y M M 6 103 kg
0 = 74. = = = 6 2
1 2L V AL 10 m 0.6 m
kg
0 =
1
9.27 1010 = 104
m3
2 60 102 2.7 103
= 4.88 103 Hz 5 kHz T
As v = ….(i)
1 T where T: Tension in wire
72. f =
2l m : linear mass density
1 stress A l
= T = YA ….(ii)
2l M/L L
M V AL
=
1 stress
=
1 stress And = = =
L L L
ns
2l M/V 2l density
= A ….(iii)
1 strain 1 2.2 1011 0.01 from (i), (ii) and (iii),
= =
2l density 2 (1.5) 7.7 103 L
YA
178.2 Hz L = Yl
io
v=
A L
73. 2 f1 = 600 f1 = 300 and
squaring and rearranging, we get,
2 f2 = 608 f2 = 304
v2 L 90 2 104 0.6
at
|f1 f2| = 4 beats L = = = 3 105 m
Y 16 1011
I max (A1 A 2 ) 2 (5 4) 2 81
L = 0.03 mm
I min (A1 A 2 ) 2 (5 4) 2 1 lic
Hints to Evaluation Test
1. Direction reverses after reflection and phase 4. A node will be formed in the middle with two
ub
difference introduced after each reflection antinodes at the ends of the pipe. Pressure
depending upon nature of support. antinodes are displacement nodes.
2. Given equation is, 3
5. k= and = 300
y = y0 sin 2 f t
x 2
P
4
dy x = m and f = 150 Hz
= [y0 cos2 f t 2f
3
dt 2 2
…[ = and f = ]
et
dy K
= y02f
dt max x = 0 is pressure maximum, hence a node.
Given, maximum particle velocity = 4 times It is closed at x = 0
rg
276
ns
1 T
2l 2 82.5 19. Using, n =
2L m
v = f = 1000
5
5 100 T
330 m/s For given m, n
L
io
9. Comparing the given equation with n1 L T1 1 1 1
= 2 = =
y = A sin(t kx) we get, = 3000 n2 L1 T2 4 4 8
n = = 1500 Hz n2 = 8n1 = 8 200 = 1600 Hz
at
2 22. By comparing the given equation with standard
and k = 2 = 12 = 1 m form, we get
6 A = 0.05 m, = 40 rad/s
Using v = n,
lic vmax x 0.375 = A = 0.05 40 = 2 m/s
v = 1500 1 = 250 m/s 23. In this case, n(2) = (n + 1) (1.6)
6
n 1 2 5
= =
ub
11. Since = , n 1.6 4
2 5n = 4n + 4
A= A12 A 22 = (4) 2 (3) 2 = 5 n=4
L = 8.0 cm
13. Velocity, v = n ,
P
2 4
First overtone of closed pipe = First overtone of
L = 2(n + 1)d
open pipe
v v 26. The frequency of the wire remains the same.
3 = 2 ;
Ta
4L1 2L 2 p T
n=
where L1 and L2 are the lengths of closed and 2L
open organ pipes. p1 p2
=
L1 3 l 4l 4
=
L2 4 p1 1
=
p2 8
16. Since they are turned to same pitch,
fundamental frequencies are same, no = nc 2l 2(4l )
= = =l
v v p 8
=
2L o 4L c
Lo 4
= =2:1
Lc 2
Lo : Lc : : 2 : 1
277
7 Wave Optics
Hints
c a
ns
Now, ang =
Classical Thinking vg g
7. Light is electromagnetic in nature. It does not a 7500
g = = = 5000 Å
require any material medium for its propagation. a ng 1.5
io
12. Direction of wave is perpendicular to the a g = 7500 – 5000 = 2500 Å
wavefront. = 2500 1010 m = 2.5 107 m
at
20. From Huygens’ principle, if the incident va a
30. an m =
wavefront be parallel to the interface of the two vm m
media (i = 0), then the refracted wavefront will
a 3
also be parallel to the interface (r = 0). In other = 1.5 =
m
words, if light rays fall normally on the
interface, then on passing to the second
lic m 2
2
a 2 3 1
m
medium, they will not deviate from their a 3 a 3 3
original path. 1
Percentage change = 100
ub
24. Speed of light in glass depends upon the colour 3
of the light. Violet colour travels faster than the = 33.33% (in magnitude)
red light in a glass prism.
32. Ultrasonic waves are longitudinal waves.
This is because refractive index of glass for
P
violet colour is less than that for red. 35. The magnitude of electric field vector varies
periodically with time because it is the form of
sin30 1
25. sin r = = 0.3125 electromagnetic wave.
1.6 3.2
et
n 1.5 1
cos =
27. vg = 2 108 m/s, vw = 2.25 108 m/s 3
vg 2 10
8 = 55
gnw = = 0.89
Ta
49. n= 3 = tan θB
76. Path difference = 5 = 10
θB = tan 1
3 = 60 Point is bright.
2
Using, yn = nW we get,
50. tan θB = n = 1.55
0.5 = 5W W = 0.1 mm
θB = 5710
r = 90 θB = 90 5717 = 3249 D
77. W= W for the same set-up.
d
52. For interference, phase difference must be W1 1
constant.
W2 2
54. For destructive interference, path difference is 1.0 5000
odd multiple of . W2 6000
2
ns
6000
W2 = = 1.2 mm
5000
56. I (amplitude)2
78. W
D
62. Fringe width (W) = W2
io
d = 2 W2 = W1 2
W1 1 1
W
4800
As red > yellow, hence fringe width will = 0.32
6400
at
increase.
= 0.24 mm
63. For interference, wavelength of two interfering Change in W = 0.32 0.24
waves must be same. = 0.08 mm = 8 105 m
64.
lic
If slit width increases, the contrast between the 79. W=
D
d=
D
fringes decreases. For very large width, uniform d W
illumination occurs. 6000 10 (40 102 )
10
d= = 0.2 cm
0.012 102
ub
71. Let a1 and a2 be amplitudes of two waves.
a1 4 D D'
80. W= and W =
a2 3 d d'
a1 a 2 43 7 d
= = But d = and D = 2 D
P
a1 a 2 43 1 2
(2D) D
a1 a 2
2
49 W = =4 = 4W
= (d / 2) d
a1 a 2 1
et
2d
odd multiple of (2 2 1) D 3 D
2 y2 = =
2d 2d
destructive interference
3 1
Ta
3
1 10 = = 6 105 cm
73. Path difference = 29 2 0.9 103
82. Distance of 6th bright fringe,
= 58
2 nD 6D
y6 = =
= even multiple of d d
2 Distance of 4th dark fringe,
point is bright (2n 1)D 7 D
y4 = =
2d 2 d
74. x = 260 = 130 = even multiple of D 7 5 D
4 2 2 y6 y4 = 6 =
d 2 2 d
point is bright.
5 4 107 1
=
75. For maxima, path difference, l = n 2 1103
For n = 1, l = = 6320 Å = 103 m = 1 mm
279
ns
has to be increased by 10% maxima = =
d 1 103
10 = 2.4 mm
Increase in = 5890 = 589 Å
100
1.22 y
110. d = =
io
86. From Shortcut 6, a d
N 1.22d 1.22 5 107 103
t= y= =
n 1 a 10 102
at
Here N = 3 = 6.1 10–3 m
5
3 5.4510 = 6.1 mm 6 mm = 0.6 cm
t= = 32.7 105 cm
1.5 1
111. Resolving power of telescope,
88.
lic
Colours of thin film are due to interference of
R.P. =
d
1.22
light. 1.22 1.22 5000 1010
(n 1)t D R.P. = 2 106
91. Shift in the fringe pattern
ub
d
5 2
(1.5 1) 2.5 10 100 10 Critical Thinking
= = 2.5 cm
0.5 103
2. When the point source or linear source of light
92. Fringe shift, is placed at very large distance, a small portion
P
(5000 1010 )
= 2W
i.e., The central bright maximum will shift
rg
2 fringes upwards.
2
93. 2 = (where d = slit width)
d
Ta
280
ns
cos r cos 287
Number of waves in 10 cm of water = 10/w
....(Refer Notes 1)
8 10 w 5
Thus, 1
g w g 4 Ratio of widths = 0.801 =
1.2475
io
c c
Now, ng = and nw =
vg vw sin i
13. n=
sin r
ng v w n w w
at
= = = sin i sin 35 0.5736
nw vg n g g sin r = = =
1.5 1.5
w 5 4 5
ng = nw = = sin r = 0.3824
g 4 3 3
lic r = 22.48 = 22 29
5 vd 5 3 v 3 W2 cos 22.48
9. vd = c = ; vw = c w = Required ratio = 1.13
12 c 12 4 c 4 W1 cos35
ub
nd c / vd 12 / 5 12 3 9 ....(Refer Notes 1)
wnd = = = = =
nw c / vw 4/3 5 4 5
2 3
sin i 14. vd = c vw = c
Using, wnd = 5 4
sin r
c 5 c 4
P
9 9 1 9 = nd nw
sin i = wnd sin r = sin 30 = = vd 2 vw 3
5 5 2 10
d 5 / 2 15
wnd =
i = sin–1
9
w 4 / 3 8
et
10
sin i sin i
wnd =
10. sin r sin 30
i
O
15 sin i
rg
8 sin 30
(i – r)
r t 15 1 15
M sin i =
8 2 16
Ta
x 15
NA i = sin1
16
x
In OAM, sin (i – r) = 15. In the propagation of e.m. waves, plane of
OA
polarisation contains the direction of
x = OA sin (i – r) ….(i)
propagation.
ON
OAN, cos r =
OA 17. When unpolarised light is made incident at
t polarising angle, the reflected light is plane
OA = ….(ii)
cos r polarised in a direction perpendicular to the
From (i) and (ii), plane of incidence.
t sin (i r) Therefore, E in reflected light will vibrate in
x =
cos r vertical plane with respect to plane of incidence.
281
ns
8
polarised light component
1 1
Ip I p cos 2 sin2 2 = or sin 2 =
2 2
(Ip ) max = Ip for = 0 and 2 = 45 or = 22.5
io
22. From Brewster’s law, n = tan θB
(Ip ) min = 0 for =
2 c
Now the maximum transmitted intensity n= = tan 60 = 3
v
at
I0
= Ip + c 3 108 8
2 v= 3 10 m/s
3 3
I0
and the minimum transmitted intensity =
It is given that,
lic 2 23. From the figure,
i + r = 90 r = 90 i
I0 I sin i sin i
Ip + 3 0 = = = tan i
2 2 sin r sin (90 i)
ub
Ip 1
Ip = I0 =1:1 sin ic = = cot i
I0
20. Let I0 be the intensity of unpolarised light. The 24. i + i' = 90
i = 45 ….( i = i')
P
I0
intensity transmitted by the first sheet is .
2 sin i 3
n=
I0 I 0 sin r 2
Transmitted intensity = I0 = .
et
2 2 2 2 1 2
sin r = sin i = =
This will be the intensity of incident light on the 3 3 2 3
second polaroid. The intensity transmitted by the
25. =ir
I
rg
sin =
15 θB = 57
12
cos = ….[ 1 sin2 = cos2 ] 26. Here θB + 90 + r = 180
15
I0 I0 12
2
8 i.e., θB = 90 – r
2 θB
cos = = I0
As θB – r = 34
2
2
15 25
Ratio of intensity of emergent light to that of 90 – r – r = 34
8 r
unpolarised light = i.e., 2 r = 56 r = 28
25
21. Let be the angle between the first two 27. The refractive index of air is slightly more than
polarisers and be the angle between the next 1. When chamber is evacuated, refractive index
two. Here, decreases and hence the wavelength increases
+ = 90 and fringe width also increases.
282
ns
31. Two independent light sources cannot be 37. For dark fringe at P,
coherent because they cannot generate waves
S1P S2P = l = (2n 1)/2
having a constant phase difference.
Here, n = 3 and = 6000
io
32. y1 = a sin t and 5 6000
l = =5 = 15000 Å = 1.5 micron
2 2
y2 = b cos t = b sin t
2 38. Distance between nth bright fringe and mth dark
at
So phase difference, = /2 fringe (n > m)
2 1
33. For maxima, 2 n (XO) 2l x = n m W
2
2
(XO) 2(n l ) or (XO) = (n + l)
lic
= n m
1 D
2 d
34. The interference patterns due to different 1 6.5 107 1
= 5 3 1.63 mm
component colours of white light overlap. The 2 1 103
ub
central bright fringes for different colours are at
the same position. Hence, the central fringe is 39. = ,
white. For a point P for which S2P S1P = b/2 3
where b(= 4000 Å) represents wavelength of Let a1 and a2 be amplitudes of two waves.
P
2
r (= 8000 Å) is the wavelength for the red 40. Resultant intensity,
colour, the fringe will be predominantly blue. IR = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos
Thus, the fringe closest on either side of the For maximum IR, = 0
rg
D S1 P
y = (2n 1)
2d
D d = 2
= (2n 1) 6 d = 12
2b S2
x
….( ‘missing wavelength’ minima
Let x = S2P – S1P
and here, d = b)
S1 (S2P)2 = (S1P)2 + (S1S2)2
y = (12)2 + (2)2
b = 1442 + 42
= 1482
S2
S2P = 12.17
x = 12.17 – 12 = 0.17
D 6
283
ns
D
3
2 xd Number of fringes = = 2.5
= × 1.2
D
Phase difference,
2xd
IR = I1 + I1 + 2I1 cos = 2n = 2 2.5 = 5 radian
io
d
D
I I I 2xd 48. W= W D
= 2 cos d
4 4 4 D
at
W1 D1 W W2 D1 D 2
I 2xd 2 xd 1
or IR = 1 cos = I cos W2 D 2 W2 D2
2 D D
W W2 2
43.
lic
Let the amplitudes of the two waves be a1 and a2
a12 4I and a 22 I
D D 2 d 2
3 105
2 103 6 107 m 6000 Å
Let amplitude of the new wave = a 5 102
a2 3I 49. The fringe width between first and seventh
ub
Let K be the constant of proportionality bright fringes is
a12 = K (4I), a 22 = K(I) D
W = (7 – 1)
a2 = K (3I) d
a2 = a12 + a 22 + 2 a1a2 cos
10
= 6 6000 103 1.0
P
3 = 4 + 1 + 4 cos
1 50. For nth maxima in Young’s double slit
cos = experiment,
2
nD yd (103 m)(2 103 m)
= 120 y= or = =
rg
d nD n(2m)
44. Resultant intensity,
100001010 m 10000
I = I1 I2 2 I1I 2 cos = = Å
n n
Ta
At central position with coherent source, But 3500 Å < < 7000 Å
Icoh 4I0 ( I1 = I2 = I0) ….(i) For n = 1, 2, 3
In case of incoherent at a given point, varies = 10000 Å, 5000 Å, 3333.3 Å
randomly with time (cos )av = 0 For n = 2, = 5000 Å lies between 3500 Å to
7000 Å. The other wavelengths cannot fulfil this
I In coh I1 I 2 2I 0 ….(ii)
condition.
Icoh 2
….[from (i) and (ii)] 51. For dark fringes,
I Incoh 1
D
yn = (2n – 1)
45. Fringe width of maximum just opposite to slit, 2d
nD d 3 D
Wn = = For n = 2, 3 = …(i)
d 2 2 d
d2 D
n= For bright fringe, yn = n
2 D d
284
ns
60. In case of an excessively thin film, the path
53. D = 1 m, d = 1 mm, v = 40 cm, u = 60 cm
v 40 difference is . As the path difference between
d1 = d= 1 mm = 0.67 mm 2
u 60
io
two rays is , the film appears dark.
u 0 2
54. d = d1 = 1.2 = 0.3 cm = 3 mm
v 80 61. In the presence of thin glass plate, the fringe
at
55. Using Shortcut 4, pattern shifts but no change in fringe width
n1 1 = n2 2 occurs.
n1(2500) = n2(3500) 62. Path difference at P,
n 3500 7 S1
1 =
n2 2500
=
5
lic = (S1P + (n 1)t) S2P
So we can say, 7th order of 1st source coincides = (S1P S2P) + (n 1)t S2
with 5th order of 2nd source. P
ub
56. Using Shortcut 4,
(n + 1) g = n r tD tD 5 D
63. (n1 – 1) (n2 – 1) =
(n + 1) 5200 = n 6500 d d d
52n + 52 = 65n tD 5 D
[(1.7 – 1) (1.4 – 1)] =
P
n=4 d d
0.3tD 5 D
57. Using relation, d sin = n we get, =
d d
n 5 4800 1010
sin = 5
et
d t= =
0.3 0.3
For n = 3, = 8 106 m
3
sin = = 8 103 mm
rg
d
3 589 109 64. = 600 nm = 600 10–9 m
= = 3 106 t = 18 m = 18 10–6 m
0.589
tD
= sin1(3 106) Shift, S = (n – 1) ….(i)
Ta
d
58. In Young’s double slit experiment, Fringe width,
sin = = (y/D), so = (y/D) D
W= ….(ii)
Hence, angular fringe width 0 = d
(with y = W) will be (n 1)t W
From equations (i) and (ii), S =
W D 1
0 = = =
D d D d S (n 1)t
No. of fringes = =
Here 0 = 1 = (/180) rad and W
= 6000 Å = 6 10–7 m (1.6 1) 18 106
180 =
d= = 6 10–7 600 109
0 0.6 18 103
=
= 3.44 10–5 m 600
= 0.03 mm = 18
285
ns
1 5000 1010 1
5 103 =
66. For Young’s double slit experiment, the position d
of minima is; d = 104 m = 0.1 mm
1 D 2
y = n
io
2 d 72. Angular width, =
a
Adjacent minimum is the 1st minima or n = 0 1 1 1 6000
1 D D 2 2 70 2
at
y1 = 0 = 1
2 d 2d 100
2 4200Å
When immersed in liquid, =
m
D
y1 =
lic 73. In a single slit diffraction experiment, position
of minima is given by, d sin = n
2 md
Now fringe shift due to introduction of sheet on So, for first minima of red, sin = 1 R
d
ub
the path of one of the beams is W. and as first maxima is midway between first and
D
W= ( 1)t second minima, for wavelength , its position
d will be
The requirement is, minimum must appear on 2 3
the axis. d sin = sin
P
2 2d
D p D According to given condition sin = sin
W = y1 or 1 t =
d m 2 m d 2
= R
et
3
t=
2( p m ) 2
589 = 392.6 nm = 3926 Å
3
67. Band width
rg
286
ns
d n= n= 3
1
The angle subtended by the object at the human
2
y
eye is = 85. For 10th order fringes (for 1),
D
io
where, y is the separation between the marks 101D
= 2.37 1.25 = 1.12 mm
and D is the distance of the marks from the eye. d
Now for clarity of vision, > R
1.12mm
=
10 D
….(i)
at
y 1.22 yd 1 d
> D<
D d 1.22 For 2, 10th order fringes,
yd (1103 m)(1.8103 m) 10 2D 1.12mm
Dgreatest = = = 2 ….[From (i)]
1.22
lic
1.22 5550 1010 m d 1
= 2.66 2.7 m 7000
= 1.12 10–3 = 1.30 mm
78. Limit of resolution (d) 6000
Reading for 10th order would be
ub
d1
= 1 1.25 mm + 1.30 mm = 2.55 mm.
d2 2
The zero order reading would be same for both
0.1 6000 wavelengths.
d2 = 0.08 mm
d 2 4800
86. I = I0 cos2
P
x= = = 163.9 m P0
1.22 1.22 5 107 PAverage = P0 (cos2 )Average =
2
80. d = angle of the cone of light from the objects 1
….[ average of cos2 over a cycle is ]
rg
287
ns
1 length 1
a 1 = 30
r 10
90. In polar regions, magnetic compass becomes 3
inoperative hence sunlight which is easily 3. On the wavefront, all the points are in same phase.
io
available and scattered by earth’s atmosphere
gives plane polarised light when scattered sin i c
6. n= and n =
through 90. This is used for navigation sin r v
at
purpose. For same i, as r increases, value of n decreases.
92. For diffraction at circular aperture, 1
But n , hence as value of n decreases v
1.22 v
=
d
1.22 (6107 m)
lic increases.
This means as sin r increases v increases.
= = 3.66 104 rad Therefore, speed of light is minimum where
(2 103 m)
angle of refraction is minimum.
If r is the radius of the image formed by the lens
ub
r sin i i
at its focus, then = 7. n= = ( i << , sin i i)
f sin r r
r = f = (6 102 m) (3.66 104 rad) n=
c
=
c
=
i
= 21.96 106 m v 0.75c r
P
i=
S 4 4
8103 W
= ca c
15.141010 m 2 8. n= = a
cg 0.8ca
rg
kW
5.2 sin i 1
m2 =
sin r 0.8
93. When a beam of light is used to determine the for small angle i, sin i i and sin r r
Ta
288
ns
10. S 2
1
I2 = I1 = I1 = 0.25 I1
d 2 4
io
thickness of slab (t) = 5 cm 19. By law of Malus, I = I0 cos2
n = 1.6 Now, IA = IAcos230
at
Now, ng =
c d/T d
and IB = IBcos260
v t/T t As IA = IB
d = n t = 1.6 5 = 8 cm IA 3 = IB 1
4 4
11.
c
=
c
v t/T
cT
t
lic IA 1
=
IB 3
t
T=
c 20. Intensity of unpolarised light after passing
ub
through polariser A,
12. Speed of light in medium of ref. index (4/3) is I
IA =
c 3 108 9 108 2
v=
n 4/3 4 Given that the intensity of light after passing
P
dg d 2
= w
g w Now, when the light passes through C and then B.
air I I
But g = and w = air IB = cos2 cos2 =
2 8
Ta
g w
1
ngdg = nwdw (cos2)2 =
4
n gdg 1.5 6 9
nw = = = = 1.286 cos2 =
1
dw 7 7 2
1
14. When polaroid is placed making 45 to y-axis, cos =
intensity of emergent light would lie between 2
2 = 45
Imax i.e., I0 and Imin. i.e., I0. Amongst given
3 21. Using Malus’ law,
options, only option (C) satisfies this condition. I = I0 cos2,
15. Using law of Malus, where is angle between polarizer and analyser.
I0
I = I0 cos2 = I0 cos2 60 = I 0 = I0 cos2
4 10
289
ns
perpendicular to the plane of incidence. centre as O, path difference will be constant,
giving steady interference.
24. Here i = 57
Given: 34. A2 = a12 a 22 2a1a 2 cos , where A is amplitude of
io
tan 57 = 1.54 = refractive index of glass slab resultant wave and given that, a1 = a2 = a, where,
This means according to Brewster’s law, light is a is amplitude of individual wave.
incident at polarizing angle.
Therefore, reflected light will be plane A2 = 2a2(1 + cos ) = 2a2 1 2cos 2 1
at
2
polarized. Hence, upon analysing, its intensity
will gradually reduce to zero and then increase
A2 cos2
as the polaroid is rotated. 2
Now, I A2
25. θB + r = 90
lic
r = 90 – 57 = 33 I A2 cos2 I cos2
2 2
27. For polarising angle,
I
= cos2 ;
ub
tan = =
c 35.
I0 2
v
v 2
cot = phase difference = path difference
c
2 2
P
v = x = =
= cot1 6 3
c
3I
29. Given that, I = I0 cos2 = 0
6 4
et
nw
n g = tan(51) n w = 1.235 1.4 = 1.73 for path difference /4, phase difference
2 = /2.
30. According to Brewster’s law,
Using, I = 4I0 cos 2
Ta
n = tan θB 2
sin i 1
But n = (In this case). I1 cos 2 (1 / 2)
sin r slope
I2 cos 2 (2 / 2)
1 1
tan θB = 3 K cos 2 (2 / 2) 1 K
slope tan 30o I2 .
I2 / 2 1 / 2 2
θB = tan1 3 = 60 cos 2
2
290
ns
For I = Imax , cos = 1 Imin = (ab ad)2 = (4 1)2 = 9
Im
Im = 9I0 or I0 = I max a 2 a1
2
9 43.
For a phase difference of , I min a 2 a1
io
I = I0 + 4I0 + 2 4I02 cos a 1
Given, 1
a2 3
= I0 + 4I0(1 + cos )
a2 3
at
= I0 1 8cos 2 .... 1 cos 2cos 2 a1 1
2
2
a 2 a1 3 1 a a 3 1
Im = 4 and 2 1 =2
=
9
1 8cos / 2
2 lic a1 1 a1 1
2
39. Resultant intensity is given by, I max 4
I min 2
IR = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos
I max
π =4
At point P, = I min
ub
2
(IR)P = I + 9I + 0 ...{ cos90° = 0}
2 2
44. Imax I1 I2 4I 9I 25I
(IR)P = 10I
9I
2 2
At point Q, = I min I1 I2 4I I
P
I1 = I2 = I0
Minimum intensity: Imin = (a1 a2)2 =
2
So Imax = 4 I0 I1 I 2
and Imin = 0
Imax + Imin = I I + I I
2 2
Ta
I I 1 2 1 2
Hence, Iaverage = max min
2 = I1 + I2 + 2 I1 I2 + I1 + I2 – 2 I1 I2
Iaverage = 2I0
= 2(I1 + I2)
I1
41. =n I1
2
I2 I1
1 1
We know, I a2 Imax I2 I
47. = = 2
a1 Imin I1 I1
n ….(i) 1 1
a2 I2 I2
2 2
a1 1
1 1 2
I max (a1 a 2 ) 2 a 2 5 1 36 9
Now, = 25 = = =
I min (a1 a 2 ) 2 a
2
1 1 5 16 4
1
1 1
a2 25
291
1 1 9 1 S1 P d
I max I
48. 2 1 4 yn =
2
I min I 9 1 d = 5 O
1 1 1 S2 x E
I
2 1
D = 10 d
49. I0 3
I0
4 8 Path difference between two interfering waves
I0 arriving at point P is,
d
d
yd 2 d
x= = =
D (10d) 20
3 3
I0 I0 5
8 x=
ns
4 20 4
phase difference, = = 90
Given that, 25% of total intensity of incident 2
light is reflected from upper surface. This
I = I0 cos2 = I0 cos2 45
io
implies, if intensity of incident light is I0, the 2
intensity of light reaching the lower surface of I0
3 I =
plate will be I0. 2
at
4
As 50% of this intensity is reflected, the final
52. From formula, I = Imax cos2
intensity of light emerging from glass plate will 2
3 I 1
be
8
I0.
lic cos2 =
2 I max
=
2
I 2
cos = 0, cos = 0
I1 = 0
4 3 5
3 = , , ,…
ub
I2 = I0 2 2 2
8 Corresponding path difference,
2
Imax I1 I 2 3 4
Now, Δx= , ,
4 4 4
2
I min I1 I 2
P
Δ x = (2n + 1)
1 3
2
4
D
= 2 8
53. =
1 3
et
d
2 8 increases from violet to red
50. Given, R > G > B R > G > B
I1 54. Fringe width is independent of the order of fringe.
rg
=n
I2
Path difference 1.8 105 1.23 105
I1 = n I2 55. =
6000 1010
2 2
Imax = I1 I2 = nI2 I2
Ta
n 1 2 n n 1 2 n
56. Second minimum is exactly in front of one slit
= d
n 1 2 n n 1 2 n indicates, y2 =
2
4 n 2 n (2n 1) D
= = But y2 =
2n 2 n 1 2d
292
ns
= 2.4 mm
D
58. In Young’s double slit experiment, for nth 63. W=
d
minimum,
2n 1 for n = 1, 2, 3,... W and =
io
Δyn = '
2 W
2 5 1 9
Δy5 = W' '
at
2 2 W 3
W' W = 0.2 = 0.15
' 4
59. The dark band formed at point A is of the order
n = 5. D 6000 107 D
Path difference of nth dark band is given by, 64. Using, W = , W1 = = 2 mm
λ
lic d d
yn = 2n 1
D
=
2 1
= 104
2 d 6000 10 7
3
2 5 1 6 × 107 When the apparatus is dipped in water,
y5 =
ub
2 wavelength and hence fringe width decreases by
= 2.7 106 m a factor of (R.I.).
–4
= 2.7 × 10 cm W1 2
W2 = = = 1.5 mm
1.33
W
P
2 2 2d 2 d
For 8th bright fringe in medium,
61. For nth bright band, 8D
D y8 m , where is refractive index of
rg
yn = n d
d medium
For nth dark band,
D y y
'
5 a 8 m
yn = (2n –1)
Ta
2d 9 D 8D
D D 2 d d
yn+1 = [2(n+1) –1) = (2n + 2–1)
2d 2d 8 2
= ≈ 1.78
D 9
= (2n + 1)
2d 66. Using Shortcut 4,
Since, dark fringe is on the other side of bright n11 = n22
fringe. n11 4 5000
D nD 2 = = 4000 Å
yn+1 + yn = (2n + 1) + 2 5
2d d
D 67. Using Shortcut 4,
= 2n 1 2n n11 = n22
2d
D n11 3 700
= (4n + 1) 2 = = 420 nm
2d 2 5
293
ns
76. For any point in interference pattern,
n11 = n22
nRed = (n + 1) Green I = Imax cos2
2
n 1 Re d 6000 6
I max
n Green 5000 5 Imax cos 2
io
4 2
6 n = 5n + 5 1
n=5 cos2 =
2 4
at
71. Given: Wn = Wn+1 1
cos =
Using Shortcut 4, 2 2
n1D (n 1) 2 D
= 60 =
2 3
d d
n 780 10–9 = (n + 1) 520 10–9
lic =
2
780n 520n = 520 3
260n = 520 We know that,
2
ub
520 = x , where ∆x is path difference.
n= =2
260
and x = dsin
72. Using Shortcut 4,
2 2
n11 = n22 dsin
P
3
n1 520 4
= 2 = =
n2 1 650 5 sin
3d
n11 = n22 = 520 5 = 650 4 = 2600 nm
et
N 7 7 600 109
73. Using shortcut 4, t= = = = 7 m
n 1 (n 1) (1.6 1)
n1 10000 Å 5
= 2 = = 78. λ d, size of the obstacle.
n2 1 12000 Å 6
Ta
n11 = n22 = 5 12000 = 6 10000 = 60000 Å 79. Angular spread of central maxima is = 2/a
n D 60000 1010 2
Therefore, x = 1 1 = 80. blue < yellow
d 2 103 Hence diffraction bands become narrower.
= 6 103 m
= 6 mm 84. In diffraction of light by single slit, the width of
central maximum is given as -
2D
74. Angular width of fringe: = width of central maxima, Wc =
d d
For = constant, Given: Wc = d
1 2D
d=
d d
d d2
= D=
d 2
294
ns
6000 0.7 a
= = 4200 Å
Distance between two minima on either side of
87. In single slit diffraction, for small angle, the central maxima is
2D 2 5000 1010 2
2y1d = = = 102 m
io
d = 2n is the condition for minimum. a 0.2 103
2
n 1 698 109 1.22f
d= = 93. d =
c
at
D
2
180 1.22 5000 1010 5
= = 1.22 10–3 m
d = 2 105 m 2.5 103
d = 0.02 mm
88.
lic
For first minima in diffraction pattern,
94.
a sin = 1 Red 0.25 cm
For first maxima in diffraction pattern,
ub
3
a sin = Pupil
2
3 1.22
As both coincide, Red = 1.22 (500 109 m)
2 R.P. = =
2nsin 1
2 1
P
2 2
= Red = 6600 = 4400 Å 100
3 3 = 3.05 10–5 m 30 m
89. For nth minima in single slit diffraction,
95. N. A =
et
a sin = n 2a
For n = 2 and = 60 For = constant
a sin 60 = 2 1
N.A
a
rg
3/2 3
a 2 4 96. Angular magnification focal length of
For 1st minima, n = 1 and = 1 objective lens.
a sin 1 = Angular resolution aperture (diameter) of
Ta
3 objective lens.
sin 1 = 0.43
a 4 97. Resolving power of a microscope is,
1 = sin1(0.43) 25 1
R.P.
90. th
For n secondary minimum,
R.P.1 6000 3
path difference = a sin n = n and = 2 = =
for nth secondary maximum, R.P.2 1 4000 2
path difference = a sin n = (2n + 1) D
2 98. R. P. of telescope =
st 1.22
For 1 minimum, a sin 30 = ….(i)
1
For 2nd maximum, a sin n = (2 + 1) R. P.
2
….(ii) As decreases, R. P. increases.
295
ns
1.22 L
c = L =
R1 2 5500 5 a
L
R 2 1 4400 4 b=a+ ….(i)
a
io
102. Consider a plane wavefront travelling horizontally. For minimum value of b,
When it moves, its different parts move with
a 2 L
1 0=
different speeds (as n ). Ray 1 will travel a
at
v
faster than Ray 2. So, its shape will change as a2 = L ….[considering magnitude]
shown and beam will bend upward. a = L
Substituting value of a in equation (i)
Higher R.I.
lic bmin = L
L
= 2 L 4L
Ray 2 L
D
107. W =
ub
d
Ray 1 % change in fringe width,
W D d
Small R.I. 100 = 100 100
W D d
P
1 as d is decreased]
sin r = r = 30
2 = 0.8 %
10D 2D
Positive value indicates increase in fringe width.
104.
rg
d a
Fringe width increases by 0.8 %.
2d 108. Angular width of central maximum,
a= = 0.2d = 0.2 1 mm = 0.2 mm
10 2
=
Ta
296
v a a a x(Blue) 4360
1. an m = =
v m m m x(Green) 5460
Also, anm = tan ip x (Green) > x (Blue)
tan ip = a 7. Distance of 5th bright fringe from central fringe,
m
5D
1 W5B = ….(i)
m = a d
tan i p Distance of 3rd dark fringe from central fringe,
a = m tan ip (23 1)D 5 D
ns
W3D = = ….(ii)
2d 2 d
2. Angle made with surface = 60
From equations (i) and (ii), required distance,
i = 90 60 = 30
5 D 5 5107 1
1.5 =
sin i W5B W3D = 5 =
2 1103
io
2 d
sin r
= 1.25 mm.
sin i sin 30o
sin r = 0.3333
1.5 1.5 8. Let I0 be the intensity of unpolarised light. The
at
r = 19 28 I0
intensity transmitted by the first sheet is .
Ratio of the width 2
cos r cos19 28 0.9428 I0 I 0
= = 1.088 1 : 1 Transmitted intensity = I0
cosi cos30 0.8661
lic
= .
2 2
ng vm 4
This will be the intensity of incident light on the
3. mn g = = = second polaroid. The intensity transmitted by the
nm vg 3
I
ub
v m vg 43 1 second polaroid will be 0 cos2
= = ….(i) 2
vg 3 3
where is the angle between their axes
Given that, vm vg = 6.25 107 4
Substituting in equation (i), sin =
P
5
vg = 3 6.25 107 m/s 3
vm = 6.25 107 + 3 6.25 107 cos = ….( 1 sin2 = cos2 )
5
= 4 6.25 107
et
2
I0 2 I0 3 9
= 25 107 = 2.5 108 m/s cos = = I0
2
2
5 50
I1 a2 100 Ratio of intensity of emergent light to that of
4. = 12 = , where a1 and a2 be amplitudes
rg
I2 a2 1 9
unpolarised light =
of two waves. 50
a1 10 a a 11
= 1 2= 9. Using, l = (2n 1)
a2 1 a1 a 2 9
Ta
2
2 2
I max a a 11 121 5000 108
= 1 2 = = 0.05 = (2n 1)
I min a a
1 2 9 81 2
0.1
D 6000107 mm 2510mm = (2n 1)
5. Using, W = = 5105
d 1mm
10000
= 15 102 mm = 0.15 mm 2n 1 = n 1000
5
nD 10. Angular width of central maxima
6. Distance of nth bright fringe, xn =
d 2 2 589.3 109
xn = = rad
d 0.1 103
x n1 1 180
= = 0.0117 = 0.68
x n2 2
297
ns
W (d / 2)D bands is y3 + y10
W = 2.5 W 5 D 19 D
y3 + y10
= +
2 d 2 d
12. Using Shortcut 4,
io
n 900 6 12 5896 1010 0.60
= = = =
n 750 5 0.4 103
Hence the first position where overlapping 1.1 10–2 m
at
occurs is, 1.1 cm
nD 18. Interference effects are commonly observed in
y = y6 =
d thin films when their thickness is comparable to
=
6(1.5m)(750 109 m)
(2 103 m)
3.4 mm
lic wavelength of incident light.
For excessively thin film, as compared to
wavelength of light, it appears dark and for a
diameter of the telescope film which is too thick, it results into uniform
14. d = illumination of the film. In thin film,
ub
distance of themoon
interference takes place between the waves
5 5
d = = reflected from its two surfaces and waves
4 10 10
5 3
4 108
refracted through it.
1.22
d = D
P
d 19. W=
1.22 1.22 6 107 d
d= = 6000 1010 1
d 5 = = 104 m
8 6 103
et
4 10
Fringe width = 10–4 m
d = 58.5 m 59 m
103
No. of fringes formed per mm = = 10
15. For the first minimum on either side of the 104
rg
maximum,
20. Phase difference between any two points on a
a sin = or sin = wavefront is zero. Also two points on a given
a
wavefront are equidistant from source hence
3
Ta
298
8
displ
Electrostatics
Hints
270
ns
4. As no charge is enclosed within the cylinder, = pE cos 90
270
=0
Total flux. = q = 0
C
50. C1 = (for series); C2 = 4C (for parallel)
5. Electric field is zero at any interior point as 4
io
there is no line of force. C1 1
C2 16
13. The potential at the centre is same as on surface
at
i.e., 80 volt. 1 1 1 1 1
51. = + + = Cs = 2 F
19 Cs 3 9 18 2
= 9 109 1.6 10 10
q
17. V= 1
4 0 r 0.53 10 Cp = 3 + 9 + 18 = 30 F
V = 27.2 volt
lic
Cs
Cp
=
2
30
=
1
15
V = W = 4 10 1.6 10 = 256 V
20 19
18.
q 0.25 52. We will arrange the capacitors such that three of
ub
them are in parallel and the fourth one is in
19. V= W series with the combination,
q 1 1 1 1 1 4 1
6 W = + = + = =
8 10 = Ceff . (4 4 4) 4 12 4 12 3
40
P
Ceff. = 3 F
W = 40 8 106 = 320 106 = 3.2 108 J
53. Let C be capacitance of each capacitor
pcos
23. V connected in parallel.
et
r2
Ceff. = 3C
If = 0° then V = maximum
Now, 3C and C are in series.
If = 180° then V = minimum
1 1 1 4
= + =
rg
p Ceff . 3C C 3C
24. V = 9 109
r2 3C
Ceff. = = 3.75
= 9 109 1.6 1019 1.28 1010 4
Ta
3.75 4
12 10
10 2
C= = 1.25 4 = 5 F
3
V = 0.128 V = 0.13 V
54. Potential of both spheres will be same.
29. U = pEcos
It has minimum value when = 0° Q 40 40
55. C= = = =2F
U = pE cos 0° = pE V 10 (10) 20
31. The work done is zero along any one of the path
56. Two capacitors of 1.5 F each are in parallel.
AB, AC, AD and AE.
Ceff = 1.5 + 1.5 = 3 F
32. In the given condition angle between p Now, 3 F, 3 F and 3 F are in series,
1 1 1 1 3
and E is zero. Hence potential energy = = =1
Ceff 3 3 3 3
U = pE cos = pE i.e., minimum. Also in
uniform electric field Fnet = 0 Ceff = 1 F
299
ns
C A and C
d 4 R 2 R 2
E= =
4 k 0 r 2 k 0 r 2
V V 20 1
60. E= d= = = m = 5 cm
d E 400 20 1 1 1
6. E E1 and E2
io
k k1 k2
Ak 0
61. C= E1 6
d E2 = = = 2 N/C
k2 3
at
(5 104 ) 5 8.85 1012
=
2 103 1
7. E= i.e. E
= 1.10 1011 = 11 1012 F = 11 pF lic 2K0r 2
67. The type of current which flows from the E r 20 1
= = =
positive plate of the capacitor to the negative E r 40 2
plate of the capacitor without passing through E 0.4
E = = = 0.2 N/C
the battery is conduction current. 2 2
ub
1 q2 R 2
71. q = CV and U = CV2 = 8. E=
2 2C k 0 r 2
1 R2
72. U= CV2 Just outside the conductor, R r 1
P
2 r2
1 4
= 10 106 (1000)2 E= =
2 k0 40 k
= 0.5 10 106 106 = 5 J 12 10 12 4 3.14 9 109
et
=
3.14
1 1 = 43.2 10–2 = 0.43 V/m
73. U= CV2 = 8 106 (100)2
2 2
rg
= 4 102 = 0.04 J Q
9. E=
40R 2
1 1
74. U= QV = 6 106 500 Qmax
2 2 Emax =
40R 2
Ta
= 15 104 J
Qmax = 40R2 Emax
1
Critical Thinking = (10 10–2)2 2 106
9 109
q 2
1. Flux, = 105 C
0 9
For, q = 1 C, numerically, = 0–1 10. E1 + (E2) = 0
E1 = E 2
3. Flux = E d s Let x be the distance of the point from centre of
A where electric field is zero.
= Eds cos 1 q1 1 q2
=
Flux is maximum when, cos = 1 40 x 2 40 (80 x) 2
= 0
300
ns
q = .A = (4 R2)
1
Distance of point from centre = 105 = 5 C/m
2
r = R + 0.2 = 0.1 + 0.2 = 0.3 m
1 q q
io
E= 19. 0 [ charge on dipole is zero.]
40 r 2 0
2
1 (4 R 2 ) R 20. Total flux = (14 78.85 56)nC / 0
= =
40 r2 0 r
at
4
1.8 106 (0.1)2 2 107 8.85 109 C
= = 40
(0.3)2 0 0
= 8.85 109 9 109 4
12. As 1 = 2,
lic = 1000 Nm2C1
Q1 Q2
= 21. By Gauss’ law,
4r1 2
4r2 2
1
Q1 Q2 = (Qenclosed)
ub
= 0
40 r12 4 0 r2 2
Qenclosed = 0
E 1 = ( 8 103 + 4 103)0
E1 = E2 1 = or E1 : E2 = 1 : 1
E2 1 = 4 103 0 C
P
1 ne 1
13. E= 22. E= E
40 r 2 20 r r
Er 2 23. Relation for electric field is given by,
et
n= 40
e
0.036 0.1 0.1 E=
n= 20 r
9 109 1.6 1019 2 2 0 rE
= 20rE =
rg
360 2
= 105
144 1 2 102 7.182 108
= 2.5 105 =
2 9 109
Ta
301
ns
28. Total flux E
37. Electric potential inside a conductor is constant
= E . A = E A cos and it is equal to that on the surface of
(where is an angle L conductor.
io
between E and A) R E kq 1
For top and bottom 38. V i.e. V
R R
faces of the cylinder,
Potential on smaller sphere will be more.
= 90
at
= EA cos 90 ....( cos 90 = 0) 39. Potential energy U = 1 q1q 2
=0 4 0 r
where, q1 = 50 e = 50 1.6 1019 C,
29.
lic
The electric field is due to all charges present
whether inside or outside the given surface. q2 = 1.6 1019 C, r = 1012 m
9 109 50 1.6 1019 1.6 1019
q U=
30. Total = A + B + C = ; 1012
0
ub
= 11.5 1015 J
B = and A = C = [assumed]
q 1 q 40. Change in potential energy (U) = Uf – Ui
2 + = = . q3
0 2 0
P
0 q2
From this expression, it is clear that total flux q1
D
linked with a closed surface only depends on the 30 cm
enclosed charge and independent of the shape 10 cm
rg
40 cm
and size of the surface.
q 1 q1q 3 q 2q 3 q1q 3 q 2q 3
= E.d S 0
= 20 Vm ….[Given] U
40 0.4
0.1 0.4
0.5
Ta
q 1 q
Thus, is constant as long as the enclosed U [8q 2q3 ] 3 (8q 2 )
0 40 40
charge is constant k 8q 2
The flux over a concentric sphere of radius
20 cm = 20 Vm. 41. A free positive charge moves from higher
33. Inside the hollow sphere, at any point the (positive) potential to lower (negative)
potential is constant. potential. Hence, it must cross S at some time.
A
34. Electric potential is a characteristic of electric 42. Since VA = VB = VC = VD
field. It does not matter, whether a charge is WAB = q (VB VA) = 0 r
Q r
placed in the electric field or not. B r D
Similarly WAC = WAD = WAA = 0 r
35. At any point inside the sphere, the potential is
same and is equal to that at the surface. C
302
ns
1 1
Q1 = R1 51. For a charge V and for a dipole V
r r2
Q2 R2
52. 12 10–9 C
1 q 12 10–9 C
46. V=
io
40 r 6 cm A 4 cm
q1 q2
V = 1 q'
40 r ' 1 q1 q2
V = V1 + V2 =
at
2
1 nq 40 6 10 4 102
= ( q = nq, r = n1/3 r )
40 n1/3r
= 9 109 12 102 12 102
9 9
2/3
V = Vn 6 10 4 10
47. E=
V
= (V2 V1 ) =
(VQ VP )
lic 9 7
= 9 10 10 (2 3) = 900 V.
x (r2 r1 ) (rB rA ) 53. Potential at A = Potential due to (+ q) charge
=
5 10 + Potential due to (– q) charge
= 5 V/m
ub
65 1 q 1 (q)
0
48. 40 a b
2 2 40 a 2 b 2
A B
5
54. Electric potential due to each charge at the
Potential in volts
4
P
1 40 l 0 l
C
O 55. Diagonal of the cube,
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 2
a12 = 2a + a
rg
Distance R in metre
From the graph, it is observed that slope of BC = 2a2 + a2 = 3a2
is same, indicating uniform electric field a12 = 3a2 a1 = 3a
between B and C.
Ta
ns
9
field is non-zero. Potential at the centre due to
9 10
2q charge V2q 2q 14
r U = 2.56 10 J
2q
67. Potential energy of the system when charge Q is
io
r at O is
r r qQ qQ 2qQ
U0 =
E– q E2q E– q a a a
at
–q –q
When charge Q is shifted to position O, the
and potential due to – q charge potential energy will be
q
V q
r
(r = distance of centre point)
lic q Q
q
total potential V V2q V q V q 0 O O
x
2
. 2qQ x 2
1
40 l = 1
a a
2
a a a
62. For the isolated charged conductor the potential
is same at every point. 2qQ 2
= (x )
Y a3
63.
Ta
68. +10 V 4 V
Equipotential P Q
surfaces E
X Work done in moving 100e from P to Q, (Work
done in moving 100 negative charges from the
Z positive to the negative potential).
64. Potential inside the sphere will be same as that W = (100e) (VQ VP)
q = (100 1.6 1019)(14 V)
on its surface i.e., V Vsurface stat volt,
10 W = 2.24 1016 J
q
Vout stat volt 69. V = W 4 10 1.6 10
20 19
15
q0 0.25
Vout 2 2
Vout V
V 3 3 = 256 V ( 1eV = 1.6 1019 J)
304
ns
=0 surface of the carriers which take inflammable
Uf = 1 [(q)(2q) +q(2q) +(2q)(2q)] material.
4 0 (2r)
76. The conductor may be at positive, zero or
=0 negative potential, it is according to the way one
io
W = 0. defines the zero potential.
72. The total potential energy of the arrangement of 80. E without dielectric 2 105
k 2
at
charges is the sum of the energies of each pair E with dielectric 1 105
of charges. The potential energy of the system
comprising the three charges q1, q2 and q3 is 81. Q = VC V = Q / C
U = W1 + W2 + W3 As V is constant,
= 1 q1q 2 q1q 3 q 2 q 3
lic
Qg
=
Qo
Co
Q
Qo
C
g = g where Cg is the new
Co
4 0 r12 r13 r23 Cg
capacitance and Qg is new charge.
q3 = q Cg > Co Qg > Qo
ub
Electron
82. Q = CV = 6 106 18 = 108 C
r13 r23 83. Potential difference in the circuit = 24 – 12 = 12
Proton volt. This potential difference is divided among
P
Proton
two capacitors C1 and C2 in the inverse ratio of
their capacities (as they are joined in series)
q1 = + q r12 q2 = + q
V1 = C2 V = 4 12 = 8 volt
et
C1 C 2 24
Let q1 , q3 be charges on two protons and q2 be
charge on electron. As plate of capacitor C1 towards point B will be
at positive potential, hence
1.6 1019 1.6 1019
rg
U = 9 109 VB – VA = 8 volt
1010 VA – VB = –8 V
1.6 1019 1.6 1019 1.6 1019 1.6 1019 84. On connecting O at A, 4 F capacitor is charged
+
1.5 1010 1010 to a constant potential (E).
Ta
305
ns
Relation for the capacitance between P and Q,
A F
1 1 1 1 5 6
= + + = or C = F X E B Y
C 4 4 3 6 5 C C C
87. Given six capacitors are in parallel
io
Figure (a)
Ceq = 6C = 6 2 F = 12 F Join B and E together. Similarly, join A and F.
Then the given circuit becomes as shown in
88. Capacitance of first capacitor (C1)
figure (b)
at
= 30 F = 30 106 F and its voltage (V1) C
= 500 V X Y
Capacitance of the second capacitor (C2) C
= 15 F = 15 106 F and its voltage (V2)
= 300 V
lic C
C1V1 C2V2 Figure (b)
Common potential (V) =
C1 C2 Ceq = C + C + C = 3C = 3 2 = 6 F
ub
6 6
(3010 500) (1510 300) 93. Given circuit can be drawn as,
=
(30106 ) (15106 ) 8 F
433 V
8 F
P
1 1 1
89. = + A B
Ceff C1 C 2 C3
8 F
= 1 + 1
et
2 2 1 8 F
= + = 5
1 1
2 3 6 Equivalent capacitance between A and B
= 6 F = Cp = 4 8 = 32 F
rg
Ceff
5
Q
Total charge, Q = 6 10–6 120 = 14410–6 C 94. V= But Q = Ceff V ....(i)
C
5
Cp = 3 + 6 + 3 = 12 F
Ta
306
ns
4 4 C2 3
Hence, values of capacitors are 6 F and 10 F.
104.
96. P P
q1 q2 q3 2C 2C
io
2C 2C
2C 2C C
C1 C2 C3
C
C C 2C Q
Q
at
V1 V2 V3
C + C = 2C 2C/ 2 = C
V
2C P 2C P
In series grouping of condensers, the charge on
each plate is same, q1 = q2 = q3 = q
lic
2C
CPQ=3C
2C
q C
Let q = CV V = C 2C
C Q Q
ub
q1 q2 q C+C=2C
V1 : V2 : V3 = : : 3
C1 C 2 C 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
= : : 105.
C1 C2 C3 Ceq 3 10 15
P
Ceq = 2 F
23 6
97. Equivalent capacitance F Charge on each capacitor,
23 5
Q = Ceq V = 2 100 = 200 C
6
et
C 2 A VP B
Potential on internal plates = 1000 600 = 400 V
1 1 1 1 In series combination, charge on each capacitor
98. = + +
Ta
99.
1
=
1
+
1
+
1 3Vp = 1200 Vp = 400 volt
CR C1 C2 C3
1 1 1 1 3 2 4 9
CR = C11 C 21 C31 107. = = =
1
Ceff . 20 30 15 60 60
307
108. 12 F and 6 F are in series and again are in 117. The given arrangement is equivalent to the parallel
parallel with 4 F. combination of three identical capacitors. Hence
Effective capacitance resultant of these three 0 A
equivalent capacitance 3C 3
capacitor will be d
12 6
4 4 4 8 F 118. Total charge on capacitors connected in parallel
12 6 is,
This system is in series with 1 F capacitor. C0
8 1 8 Q0 = ….(i)
Its equivalent capacitance F ....(i) V0
8 1 9
Where C0 = effective capacitance of parallel
Now, equivalent of 8F, 2F and 2F combination.
4 8 32 8 = C + C = 2C
F .....(ii)
4 8 12 3 ….( C1 = C2 = C)(ii)
ns
Combinations (i) and (ii) are in parallel and are
in series with C C1
32
8 8 32 C
and Ceq 1 9
io
9 3 9 32
C C2
9
32
C F V0
at
23
Let C2 be kept in a dielectric medium,
109. The given figure is equivalent to a balanced then, C2 = kC
Wheatstone’s bridge. C0 = C + kC = (1+k)C
Ceq = 6 F
lic Hence, total charge on the capacitors,
110. C p 4Cs C0 1 k C
Q0 ….(iii)
CC V0 V0
(C1 C 2 ) 4 1 2 Dividing equation (iii) by equation (i)
ub
(C1 C 2 )
(C1 C 2 ) 0
2
C1 C 2 Q0 1 k C V0 1 k
….from (ii)
Q0 V0 C0 2
C1V1 C2 V2 1 k Q0
111. Common potential = Q0
Ceff .
P
2
20106 500 10106 200
= = 400 V Q
20 106 10 106 119. C = ….(i)
V
et
C 40r =
Since V decreases, so C will increase. d
A (20 103 ) 2
Ak0 d= = = 0.1 mm
113. C = 4r 4 1
Ta
d
0A kA
114. By inserting the dielectric slab, capacitance (i.e. 120. C = = 8 pF and C = 0
d d
ability to hold the charge) increases. In the
But A = A , d = d/2
presence of battery more charge is supplied
0 k A 2 50A
from battery. C = =
d/2 d
115. Refer Shortcut 10 C = 10 8 pF = 80 pF
For a spherical capacitor,
0A
ab 121. Without dielectric, C0 =
C 40 k Ck d
ba
k A
With dielectric, C1 = 1 0 = 2k1 C0
116. The two capacitors thus formed are in parallel. d/2
0 A k 20 A
C (k1 k 2 ) and C2 = = 2k2 C0
t2 d/2
308
ns
and charge remains same, Q = C1V1
Charge supplied by the battery later = Q Q
By increasing the distance, we get same
potential difference as in first case. = 480 C
Q = C 2V ….(ii) 0 A
A 129. Using, C
io
C= 0 d
dt
Cd 3 5 103
1 d 3 2.4 3 d 0.6 3 A 1.695109 m 2
= + = + 0 8.85 1012
at
C2 0A k0A 0A k0A
From equations (i) and (ii), Q Qd
130. V = Vd
C = C2 C 0 kA
1 1
C
=
C2
lic 131. C
1 C d
1 2
15 2
d d 0.6 3 d C 2 d1 C2 6
= + C2 = 45 F
0 A 0A k0A
ub
3 A A A
d = d – 0.6 + 132. C = C1 = 1 and C2 = 2
k d d1 d2
3
k= =5 C2 A d A d 1 1 1
0.6 = 2 1 = 2 1 = =
C1 d2 A1 A1 d 2 2 2 4
P
309
ns
2 d 2
compared to the charges on the plate)
V 200 20000 144. Displacement current does not depend on the
E= = 2
= = 10000 V/m moving charges but it changes with time which
d 2 10 2
causes variation in the field.
io
138. The two condensers filled with k and with air 145. Change in the field results in the formation of
are in parallel. magnetic fields. Hence displacement currents
0 3A 3 0 A lead to magnetic field between the plates of a
at
With air: C1 = capacitor.
d 4 4d
0 K A 0 Ak 1 1
146. U1 = CV12 , U2 = CV12
With medium: C2 = 2 2
d 4 4d
Ceq = C1 + C2
lic
U1 V2
= 12
U2 V2
30 A 0 Ak A 3 k
= 0 (k 3)
C
Ceq = V22 900
4d 4d 4d 4 4 4 U2 = U1 = U1 = 9 U1
ub
2
V1 100
C
Ceq = (k 3) 1 1
4 147. Increase in energy = C1V12 – C0V02
2 2
0 A 1
= C (V12 – V02) ....( C1 = C0 = C)
P
139. C = 2
d
1
0 A 0 r A = 10 10–6 (121 – 100)
C1C2 . 2
d/ 2 d/ 2
et
C= 1
C1 C2 0 A 0 r A
= 10 21 10–6 = 105 10–6 J = 105 J
2
d/2 d/2
20 Ar 2Cr 1 1
= 148. U1 + U2 = C1 V12 + C2 V22
rg
d(1 r ) (1 r ) 2 2
1
= [4 106 50 50 + 2 106 100 100]
140. In air, the potential difference between the plates, 2
1 3
= [102 + 2 102] = 102 J
Ta
Vair = .d
0 2 2
In the presence of partially filled medium, 149. U = 1 CV2 = 1 Q
2
t 2C2 2kC1
Vm = (d d ') t
0 k Now, C k C2 = kC1
According to question, Vair = Vm which gives Decrease in energy = U1 U2
= Q Q = Q 1 1
2 2 2
t 2
k= k= =5 2C1 2kC1 k 2C1
t d' 2 1.6
310
ns
Ceff C C C C 8
Ceq = F
5
C
Ceff = = 2F C = 6 F 1 1 8
3 U= CeqV2 = 106 225
2 2 5
Now, for parallel combination,
= 180 106 J
io
Ceff = 3C = 3 6 = 18 F
= 180 106 107erg = 1800 erg
1 1
U= Ceff V2 = 18106 (200)2
160. Energy stored in fully charged capacitor,
2 2
at
6 4
= 9 10 4 10 = 36 10 2 1
U= CV2
= 0.36 J 2
But work done by battery W = QV or
153. In parallel combination, U = W = CV.V = CV2
Ceff = C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 + C5 + C6 = 6 1
lic Energy required to charge the capacitor,
= 6 F and V = 2 V 0 A 2 0 Ad 2
U = CV2 = .V = 2 V
Q = CV = 6 2 = 12 C d d
ub
Q 12 V
Q1 = = = 2 C = 0 E 2 Ad …. E
6 6 d
Q 2 C
In series, V1 = 1 = =2V 1 1
C1 1 F 161. U CV 2 6 106 (100) 2 0.03J
2 2
P
VT = 6V1 = 12 V
C 1 162. Work done in placing the charge = Energy
Ceff (in series) = = F stored in the condenser
6 6
Q2 (8 1018 ) 2
et
1 W 32 1032 J
Using E = CV2, 2C 2 100 106
2
1 1 1
E= 106 12 12 = 12 106 J = 12 J 163. U QV Area of triangle OAB
2 6
rg
2
C 3C 164. Heat produced = Energy stored in capacitor
154. Ceff = C + =
2 2 1 1
= CV 2 = 4106 (400)2 = 2 106 16 104
Ta
1 3C 3CV 2 2 2
Work done = V 2 = 0.32 J
2 2 4
1 1
1 165. U = CV 2 = 700 1012 (50)2
qV 1 2 2
155. The required ratio,
2 = 350 1012 2500 = 8.75 107 J
qV 2
166. C1 = 4 106 F, V1 = 50 volt, C2 = 2 106 F,
2
1Q V2 = 100 volt
156. Energy, U = .
2 C Total energy before connection
For a charged capacitor, charge Q is constant 1 1
= C1V12 + C2V22
and with the increase in separation, C will 2 2
1 1
decrease (C ). = (4 10 50 50 + 2 106 100 100)
6
d 2
Hence overall U will increase. = 1.5 102 J
311
ns
1 north hence rate of change of potential will be
= CpV2
2 along this direction, but it is zero along east and
west.
1 2 2
= 6 106 (102)2 Q1 Q2
2 3 3 175. When ; current will flow in
io
R1 R2
4
= 102 connecting wire so that energy decreases in the
3 form of heat through the connecting wire.
= 1.33 102 J
at
176. Work done, W = Uf Ui
1 1 (C) 1
.(3V0)2 = 3 CV02
2
1Q Ui = CV02 and Uf =
167. Using, U = , 2 2 3 2
2C
1.21U =
1 (Q 2) 2
lic
1 2
Uf Ui = CV 0 (3 1) = CV 0
2
2
2 C
AV 2 A
1.21 (Q 2) 2 1.21 Q 2 W= 0 0 …. C 0
d d
Q2
ub
1 1 Q
1.1Q = Q + 2 Q = 20 C 177.
k2 = 6
k1 = 3
169. Suppose charge on inner sphere is + Q as A air A
shown.
P
1 1
3 Q +Q 6 cm d1 d2
4 6 1 1 1
= = k10A k 20 A
Q = 36 e.s.u. Cmed C1 C 2
rg
1 1 0A 2 k1k 2 0 A
170. U = CV2 = V Cmed =
2 2 d k1d 2 k 2 d1
At any instant, let the separation between plates 3 6 0A 180 A
=
Ta
be x 2d d 4d
3 6
3 3
1 0A 2
U= V C med 18 0 A d 18
2 x
Cair 4d 0A 4
1 0 AV
2
dU 1 1 dx
= 0 AV2(–1) 2 =– 2
(v) Cmed =
18
9
dt 2 x dt 2 x
4
i.e., potential energy decreases as (1/x2). = 40.5 pF
171. As separation between plates is reduced, C 178. Initial energy of the system,
1 1 1
increases but charge on it remains same. Hence, Ui = CV12 CV22 = C V12 V22
1 q 2
2 2 2
from the relation U = , U decreases. Also,
0
312
ns
a
Energy stored in the capacitor, kq
Surface charge density, = = k0
b A
Q2l n
1 Q2 1 2
a Q k
U= 188. A charged cloud induces opposite charge on
io
2 C 2 20 L L
pointed conductors. At sharp points of the
where k is a constant.
conductor, surface density of charge is very high
If the charge and length are doubled,
and charge begins to leak from the pointed ends
at
Q2 4 Q2
k = 2 times the energy. by setting up oppositely charged electic wind.
L 2 L
When this wind comes in contact with the
180. Heat produced = Energy of charged capacitor charged cloud, it neutralizes some of the charge
1
CV 2
lic on it. Hence, the potential difference between
2 the cloud and the building is reduced. This in
1 turn reduces the chance of lightening striking
(2 106 ) (100)2
2 the building (if the lightning strikes the building,
ub
0.01 J then the charge is conducted to the earth and the
1 building remains safe).
CV 2 40 106 (3000) 2
181. Power = 2 = 90 kW 189. Volume = 1 litre = 1 103 m3
t 2 2 103
P
1 1
u= 0E2 = 8.85 1012 (103)2
182. The ±q charges appearing on the inner surfaces 2 2
of A, are bound charges. B is uncharged initially = 4.425 106
and as it is isolated, the charges on A will not be
et
affected on closing the switch S. No charge will Energy stored in 103 m3 of air
flow into B. = 4.425 106 103 = 4.425 109 J
qin
rg
313
ns
the two capacitors in C 6
parallel in E. Hence the Hence the circuit gets reduced as shown in the
charge stored in each is (19/11)C figure below. C/2
C C/2
q1, q2 = CE .…(i)
io
The other two capacitors
are in series. Hence the
charge in each of them is C A B
at
q3 = (19/30) CE .…(ii)
C
Therefore the potential across the (19/11) C
capacitor is
V1 = q3 /[(19/11) C] = (11/30)E
lic
Now working backwards we get the circuit,
C
The equivalent capacitance of the above
C
(8/3)C
2C A B
C
P
C
C
C C
2/7 V 3/7 V 2/7 V
et
(2/3)C
Q enc 100 Q. By applying Gauss' law,
1 1
2C (Qenc. ) (100Q)
2C 0 0
q enclosed
C C 3. Electric flux, ϕ =
C 0
The charge on the X = 2 C capacitor is The flux through a closed surface containing an
Q6 = (3/15)CE = (1/5)CE electric dipole will be zero.
314
0
= 1440 N/C
ns
6. Charge 8q is placed at one corner of the cube, 11. There will be zero charge inside closed surface
we can imagine it to be placed at the centre of a
large cube which can be formed using an 1 q
12. E=
arrangement of 8 similar cubes. 40 r 2
Charge 8q is at centre of the 8 cubes arranged to
io
9 109 3 109
form a closed box. E= = 3 104 V/m
(3 102 ) 2
By using Gauss’s law,
8q kq
at
total flux through the bigger cube = 13. E=
0 r2
Er 2 2 0.3
2
1 8q q 2 9 102 109
Flux through one small cube = . q= =
8 0 0 k 9 109 9
7.
lic q = 2 10–11 C
14.
+
a
ub
q 60
30
+
Let charge enclosed in the sphere of radius a be
E cos60o xˆ sin 60o yˆ
P
q
E.4r2 = A B
0 15. Electric field at point P
q + + -
4Ar3 = ….( E = Ar) due to line charge A as + -
0
rg
+
shell is zero at all points inside shell. -
= î +
i.e., E = 0 for r < R 20 R
According to Gauss’ theorem, Similarly, electric field due to line charge B,
q ˆ
E= EB i
4 0 r 2 20 R
For r > R, Total electric field at point P is,
E 1 E EA EB
r2
ˆ ˆ
Hence, for r > R, value of electric field = i i
2 0 R 2 0 R
decreases with increase in r.
As, the net charge on dipole is zero, the net flux
= N/C
0 R
across the sphere is also zero.
315
2
For a infinite thin plane sheet (assuming air VA – VO = 10x 3 = 80 J
0
medium),
25. Potential at surface of a sphere is,
E2 = ….(ii)
20 q
V=K = 10 V
Comparing (i) and (i) r
E1 = 2E2. where, q and r are the charge and radius of the
small drop respectively.
Q
17. Total flux = using Gauss’ law As the volume of 27 small drops equals volume
0
ns
of the large drop,
Q 4 4
flux through one face = 27 r 3 = R 3
60 3 3
18. where, R is radius of large drop.
io
R = 3r
a/2 a/2 The total charge on large drop is Q = 27q
O Q
a Q a P Hence, potential at surface of this drop is
at
KQ (27q) Kq
V = = K =9 = 9 10
R (3r) r
Flux due to charge at O, V = 90 V
Q
1 = 5
60
lic 26.
E
dV
dr
Flux due to charge at P i.e., electric field is directed along decreasing
Q potential.
2 =
ub
60 VB > VC > VA
Q Potential is maximum at B.
= 1 + 2 =
0
dV
19. Eight identical cubes are required to arrange so 27. E=
dr
P
q r = xi + y j + zk
8 0 V V V
E = i j z
et
x y z
q = (6 y) i (6 x 1 + 2z) j (2 y) k
a 2a At point (1, 1, 0),
rg
a E = 6 i 5 j 2 k = (6 i +5 j + 2 k )
21. V1 + V2 = 0
2a
28. V=
1 q
= 9 109
65 109
Ta
40 r 25 102
kq kq r
= 0 q = 1 q V = 2340 volt
r1 r2 r2
q q 29. Electrical potential, V = Q
22. V= 40 R
40 r 40 R
Now, q = .4r2 and q = .4R2 Electric field, E = 0
.4r .4R
2
(R r)
2
30. Potential at the surface of bubble,
V= V=
40 r 40 R 0 kq
V=
Kq Kq r
23. U = Vdq dq V
R R Since bubble collapses into droplet of radius R.
1 KQ 2 4
= So (4r2)t = R3
2 R 3
316
ns
Here EA = EC and EB < ED Work done,
W = q(V1 V2)
32. q q =1C
q Q1 Q Q Q
r W= 2 2 1
4 0 R 2R R 2R
io
2 2 m O
W=
q Q1 Q2 2 1
2 40 R
at
q q
The potential at point O is the addition of the 37. As V will is same in all condition, work will
potentials created by all four charges. be same.
V = 4 Vq W = q (Vf Vi)
q 1
Now, Vq = K where, r = diagonal
lic 38. +q 2q +q
r 2
but, diagonal of a square = 2(sideof square) a a
ub
Diagonal = 2 2 2 = 4 m 1 q1q 2 q 2q 3 q 3q1
U=
1 40 r12 r23 r31
r = 4 = 2 m
2 1 2q 2 2q 2 q 2
1 106 9 =
P
+q +q =
A B Cs 1 2 4
4
a
O Cs = pF
7
Ta
2
Q Q
41. For series combination, V1 = and V2 =
D C1 C2
C
+q +q V2 C1
=4:1
10 V1 C 2
10 9
9
V = 4 9 10 3 = 1500 2 volt
8 10 2 42. The given circuit can be redrawn as shown in figure
2 where, C = (3 + 2) F = 5 F
1 1 1 1 12 F
= + +
34. Potential energy of a system of charges is CPQ 5 20 12
1 q1q 2 P
=
20
=
1
Q 5 F C
U=
4 0 r 60 3
In case of like charges, (q1 q2) is positive CPQ = 3 F
20 F
317
4 F 4 F
A B 2 F 2 F B
B
4 F
A 2 F A 2 F
4 F 4 F 2 F
3 F
8 F
A B
B
ns
CAB = 8 F
44. C 2 F
A
C C
io
A B 47. 3 F
C
Q Q2
+80 C
at
3.75 F
4 F
CP = C + C + C = 3C
Q1
3C C 2 F
A B
lic As C =
Q
V
3.75 F CQ
ub
Q1 C1
3C C
Ceq = Q 2 C2
3C C
3C 2 Q1 2
3.75 = i.e.,
4C Q2 3
P
3C Q = Q1 + Q2
3.75 =
4 i.e., Q1 = Q – Q2
3.75 4
C= = 5 F i.e., Q1 = 80 – Q2
et
3
80 Q 2 2
45. The circuit resembles Wheatstone’s balanced Q2 3
network 3(80 – Q2) = 2Q2
rg
Q2 =
5
A B
Q2 = 48 C
318
ns
+ V
Q Given,
C1 = C2 = C (say)
We have,
14 F V = V1 + V2
io
100 V
When capacitor C1 is completely filled with
Q1 C1V1 6 F V dielectric material of constant K,
Now,
Q 2 C 2 V2 14 F V V2 q
at
V1 = ...{ initially V1 = V2 ; V2 = }
Q1 6 K C2
Q 2 14 V2
V= + V2
K
50.
1 F 2 F 5 F
lic KV = V2 + KV2
KV = V2(1 + K)
+ – KV
V2 =
10 V 1+K
ub
Equivalent capacitance of capacitor is given by, 53. The given circuit can be redrawn as follows.
1 1 1 1 The P.D. across 4.5 F capacitor,
4.5 F 9 F
Cs 1 2 5 9
V 12
P
10 9
Cs = F 9
17 2
Now, charge is given by,
= 8V
et
10 100
Q = C sV = 10 C 12 V
17 17 54.
Potential difference across 2F capacitor
100/17 50 6 F
rg
= V
2 17
51. 3 F 6 F 6 F 6 F
6 F
Ta
C1 C2 240
Here, 6F, 6F and 6F are in series.
+ –
900 V 1 1 1 1
= + +
Cs 6 6 6
Q = CV, Here Q is a constant
Cs = 2 F
1
C The circuit can be drawn as,
V
C1 V2 3 V 2 F
2 V1 = 2V2
C 2 V1 6 V1
6 F
Also V1 + V2 = 900 V
2V2 + V2 = 900 V
V2 = 300 V and V1 = 600 V 240
319
ns
A P C R C B
C C C U C (VC) given by the relation,
Total charge Q0 Q
VC =
Total capacitance C 2C 3C
C C
The final charges on two capacitors are
io
C Q.S.U C
A.P.R T.V.B
CQ Q 2Q
Q1 = CVC = and Q2 = 2CVC =
C C 3C 3 3
at
61. The charge flowing through C4 is
3C 3C q4 = C4 V = 4 CV ….(i)
A B
lic For the series combination of C1, C2 and C3,
1 1 1 1
The equivalent capacitance between A and B is Ceq C 2C 3C
1 3C 3C
Ceq = 1.5C 1 6 3 2 11 6C
Ceq (3C)(3C) Ceq =
Ceq 6C 6C 11
ub
57. C1 and C2 are in parallel, Now, Ceq and C4 form parallel combination
Ceq1 = C1 + C2 = 18 pF giving,
Ceq2 and C3 are in series, 6C 50C
C = Ceq + C4 = 4C
11 11
P
Ceq1 C3
Ceq 2 = = 6 pF 50
Ceq1 C3 Net charge, q = CV = CV
11
Ceq2 and C4 are in parallel, Total charge flowing through C1, C2, C3 will be
et
Ceq2 + C4 = 6 + 9 = 15 pF 50 6CV
q = q q4 = CV 4CV = ….(ii)
58. To hold 1 kV P.D., minimum four capacitors, 11 11
which can withstand P.D. upto 300 V, As C1, C2, C3 are in series combination, the
rg
connected in series are required. charge flowing through them will be same.
1 From equations (i) and (ii),
Cs = F 6CV/11 3
4 the required ratio =
4CV 22
Ta
63.
8 0 A
1 kV 2
Electrostatic force, F = qE = q
0A
Hence, the minimum number of capacitors
required are 8 4 = 32. Thus, F is independent of distance between the
plates.
320
ns
CV 2
V 30 10 F=
67. E= = 2000 Vm1 2d
d 2 102
73. +q –q
68. Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with a
io
dielectric of dielectric constant k,
C = k 0 A
d
at
…. d
V
C = k 0 AE
V E
12 4 As separation between the plates are decreasing
= k 8.86 10 10 10
6
–12
15 × 10
500
lic as they approach each other
and V = E.d
k = 75 = 8.5 Electric field remains constant between the
8.86
plates, so V d
ub
69. Volume of 8 drops will be same as volume of 1 q2
large drop formed by combining smaller drops. Now, force on each plate = But, F = ma
2A0
4 4
8 r 3 R 3 acceleration (a) =
F
3 3 m
d
P
R = 2r q2
the capacitance of bigger drop is i.e., acceleration (a) =
2A 0 m
C = 40R = 40 2r = 2C t
a = constant
et
4 3
t
X Y
74. When a dielectric is introduced between the
3 2 plates, as battery remains connected, E or V
Ta
Q remains unchanged.
The condensers P and Q are in parallel. Hence Charge on plates before introduction of
their equivalent capacitance is 2C. This dielectric medium is, q0 = C0V
combination is in series with capacitor R. Hence After inserting the medium, q = kC0V
the equivalent capacitance between X and Y is Induced charge, q = q q0
given by = C0V (k 1)
C 2C 5
CPQ = = 90 1012 20 1 = 1.2 nC
C 2C 3
2 2 0 A
= C= . 75. Electric field inside parallel plate capacitor having
3 3 d Q
charge Q at place where dielectric is absent =
71. E= = k0E A 0
k 0
Q
= 2.2 8.85 1012 3 104 6 107 C/m2 and where dielectric is present =
kA0
321
Ceq = 1 2
1 1 CC
+
– C1 C 2 C1 C 2
+
– 5 10 10 10
A +
k = F = 10–6 F
+ –
15 3 3
–
+ 1 1 10
+ – U = CeqV2 = 10–6 3002 = 0.15 J
2 2 3
t
1 Q2
Potential difference between the plates, 82. U=
2 C
V = Vair + Vmedium = (d t) + t Increase in energy =
1
Q 22 Q12
0 k 0 2C
t Q t 1
V= (d t + ) = (d t + ) = [0.52 0.12]
ns
0 k A 0 k 2 4810 6
Q 0 A 0 A 106
C= = = = [24 102]
V t 1 96
dt d t 1
k k = 0.25 104 = 2500 J
io
0 A 0 A 0 A 2 0 A
77. C= Q
q
2d d 2d d 83. W= C dq
at
q
78. Ceq= C1+C2+C3 10C
A A A
q = 10C
q q 2 75C
= 0 + 0 + 0
3d 6d 9d lic W=
q = 5C C
dq =
2C
5C
=
2
11 A Let W be the work done in increasing the
= 0
18d voltage across capacitor from 10V to 15V.
15C
dE q 2
q = 15C
q 125C
79. Displacement current = Ak 0
dt W = dq = 10C =
C 2C 2
ub
6 12 q = 10C
2.21 10 = 1 k 8.85 10 25
W 125
6
2.21 10 10 3 =
K= 12
= 9.98 103 10 W 75
8.85 25 10
W = 1.67W
P
c1 c 2 24 6 U= CV2
2
8 1 1
–6
Q = Ceff V = 106 6 = 8 10 C Ceq V12 Ceq V22
6 2 1 2 2
Ta
Q = 8C 1 C1 1
Now , 9V 2 N 2C 2 V 2
2 N1 2
1
U= CV2 C2 N1N 2
2 C1 =
9
1 8
= 106 62 85. When another capacitor is connected in parallel,
2 6 then capacitance increases by a factor 2 and
= 24J potential difference becomes half.
1
81. C1 = 5F C2 = 10F Final energy (U) = CV2
2
2 2
1 V CV
= 2C =
2 2 4
Total electrostatic energy of resulting system
300 V decreases by a factor 2.
322
ns
C C C2 C
87. Given that net FE and FG is zero. C1 =
C C 2C 2
i.e., FE = FG When one of them is filled with dielectric
1 (e) 2 Gm 2 material, effective capacity becomes,
io
2 2 ….(i)
4 0 d d 1 1 1
….(where K is dielectric constant)
In case of hydrogen atoms, net charge on one H- C 2 C KC
atom will be e 1 1 1
at
1
G C2 C K
e = m ….[from (i)] C CK
1 C2 = =
1 (K 1)
40
lic 1 K
6.67 1011 Change in effective capacities,
= 1.67 10–27
9 109 CK C
C2 – C1 =
= 1.438 10 –37
C K 1 2
ub
K 1
= C
88. Force on charged particle in electric field, K 1 2
F = eE 2K (K 1)
= C
eE 2(K 1)
P
C K 1
=
As, mp > me, ae > ap 2 K 1
As electron is pulled with greater acceleration, it
will take lesser time to cover height h. 93. Electric flux, E = E.d S = EdScos
rg
= EdScos90 0
89. AB = B A = a 4ˆj 3kˆ
The lines are parallel to the surface.
Ta
Work done = F AB 95. Refer Shortcut 7
ˆ Let r be radius of each small drop and R be
= q
20
k a 4jˆ 3kˆ radius of bigger drop.
The volume remains constant
3qa 4 4
R3 = n r3
20 3 3
90. As it is evident from symmetry of figure, plates R = n1/3r
2 and 4 have charges + Q/2 each. For the small drop,
q Q / 2 Capacitance, C0 = 40r and
We know that, C = C= charge q0 = C0V = 40rV
V V
For the bigger drop,
0 A 0 A Capacitance, C = 40R and
Q = 2CV = 2 V …. C
d d charge Q = nq0
323
ns
4 3 4
R = n. r 3 d
3 3
The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor in
R3 = nr3
the presence of dielectric slab of thickness t and
R = (n)1/3 r
dielectric constant k, is
Potential on big drop
io
0A 0 A
kQ C = =
V = t 3 3d
R (d t) d d
k 4 4k
kng
at
V = 1/3 0A 4k0 A
n r C = ….(ii)
d 3d d(k 3)
Ratio of energy start in big drop to small drop
1 kg 2/3 4 4k
U 2 QV ng. n
U
1
QV
gV
r
lic
kg
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i) we get,
C 4k 0 A d 4k
gV g.
2 r C 0 d(k 3) 0 A k 3
n 5/3 100. In steady state, current through capacitor is zero
U =
ub
1 E r
1
97. Using, U = CV 2 , I r1
2
1 A0 V P Q
P
U= (Ed)2 …. E C
2 d d r2
R S
1
= 0E 2Ad VPQ = VRS
2
et
E
Also, I =
98. Q1 r r2
Q E
1F VPQ = r2 = VRS
rg
r r2
C r2
Q2 Charge on capacitor is, QC = CVPQ = CE
2F (r r2 )
Ta
324
ns
Q
dq = dL
i.e. V9F = 2V L
Q9 F = 9 2 = 18 C kQ
L
dL
Q = Q4 F + Q9 F = 42 C V=
L Lr
io
0
kQ 9 109 42 106
E= = 420 N/C kQ kQ
ln L r 0 =
L
r2 30 30 = ln2
L L
103. q1 = CV1 Q1, C,V Q
at
= ln 2
+ 40 L
lic 107.
+
q2 = CV2 Q2, C,V
Q a
Initially from charge conservation
q1 + q2 = Q1 + Q2
ub
r dr
CV1 + CV2 = CV + CV
C(V1 + V2) = 2CV
V1 V2
V=
2
P
2 2 2 2
a r b.
1
= CV12 V22 2V 2 A
2 charge on shell, dq = Area = 4 r2d r
r
rg
1 V V
2
b
= C V12 V22 2 1 2
2 2 total charge in the region a r b is, q = dq
a
1 1 1
C V12 V22 V12 V22 V1V2
b
b
r2
Ta
2 2 2 = 4A r dr = 4A
a 2 a
1 V12 V22
C V1V2 2
q = 2A [b a ] 2
2 2 2 Electric field at r = b is,
1 1
CV12 V22 2V1V2 C V1 V2 k 2 A b 2 a 2 Q
2
4 4 Eb = ….(ii)
b2
1
U = C V1 V2
2
For electric field to be constant in the region
4
a r b we must have, Ea = Eb
1 from equation (i) and (ii)
104. Initial energy stored, U = 2F V 2 2 A b 2 a 2 Q
2 kQ
Energy dissipated on connection across 8 F, k
a2 b2
1 C1 C 2 2 Q b2
U= V Q 2 A b 2 a 2
2 C1 C 2 a2
325
Q b2 Q a 2 Kq
2 A b 2 a 2 Electric field, E =
a2 r2
Q b2 a 2 6
2 A b 2 a 2 E= V/m
a 2 r2
Q
A= 112. y
2a 2
ns
io
V
kˆ pEsin kˆ ….(i)
1 Q
but V = for a spherical body.
4 0 R
E 2 3 E1 ˆj ….(Given)
at
C = 40R
C = 4 8.85 1012 6400 103 T2 p cos ˆi p sin ˆj 3 E1ˆj
C = 7.1 104 F
kˆ 3 pE1 cos kˆ ….(ii)
110.
lic
r1 = 9 cm
from (i) and (ii), we get,
r2 = R pE sin = 3 pE cos
9 cm sin 3 pE
O
ub
R cos pE
tan = 3
= tan–1 3
q
Capacity of isolated sphere, C = = 60
P
V
C = 40r1 ….(i) 113. Potential at O, V = Kdq
Capacity of earthed concentric hollow sphere Lr
et
r1 r2 Q
is; CH = 40 dq = dL
r2 r1 L
r1 R KQ L
KQ
10C = 40 ….(ii) V= dL = ln L r 0L
Lr
rg
(R r1 ) L L
0
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i),
10C r1 R 1 KQ Q
= ln2 = l n2
= L 40L
Ta
C R r1 r1
9R 1 KQ
10 = 114. V =
(R 9) 9 R
r
10R 90 = R VR A
Q=
9R = 90 K
R = 10 cm KQ
As, E =
q r2
111. Electric potential, V = K
r Substituting for Q,
Considering the 60 V equipotential surface, K VR
Kq
E=
60 = r2 K
10 102
VR
Kq = 6 E=
r2
326
ns
40 r1
2 A b 2 a 2
1 q2 a2
For 2nd sphere: V2 =
4 0 r2 Q
A=
But V1 = V2, 2a 2
io
q1 q 118. Initially, charges on the two spheres will be,
= 2
r1 r2 q1 = (4R2) and
at
q q2 = [4 (2R)2] = (16R2)
Let, = be the surface charge density of the
A q1 + q2 = 20 R2
sphere. lic After redistribution of charges, final charges on
1 A1 2 A 2 the spheres will be,
then,
r1 r2 Q1 R
A r 4r 2 r r 5 Q 2 2R
1 2 1 22 1 2
2 A1r2 4r1 r2 r1 4 Q2 = 2Q1
ub
117. As charges are conserved, total number of
charges on both the spheres will remain
constant.
i.e., q1 + q2 = Q1 + Q2
P
a Q1 + 2Q1 = 20 R2
b Q 20 5
dr Q1 = R2 = (4R2)
et
r 3 3
40 5
and Q2 = R2 = (16R2)
3 6
5 5
rg
327
ns
From equations (i) and (ii), inside and on the surface of the shell will
qE change by the same amount and hence the
tan θ =
mg potential difference between sphere and shell
q = 5 × 10–6 C, E = 2000 V/m, m = 2 × 10–3 kg
io
will remain unchanged.
5 106 2000
tan θ = K0 A
2 103 10 122. Capacitance of element =
dx
at
1
tan θ =
2
θ = tan–1 (0.5) lic
121. Shell
x dx
K 1 x 0 A
Sphere Capacitance of element, C =
dx
+Q –Q +Q
ub
d
r1 1 dx
C K A 1 x
0 0
r2
1 1
ln 1 d
C K0A
P
x2 x3
Let r1 and r2 be the radii of the sphere and Now, log(1+x)=x− + ........
2 3
hollow shell respectively.
Given, d << 1
et
1 Q 1 Q
Vsphere = and Vshell = 1 1 2d 2
40 r1 40 r2 d
C K0A 2
potential difference between the two spheres
rg
328
ns
As inner and outer shell are connected, 2
V1 = V2 = 3/4 CE2
In the second case, when the switch 2 is ‘ON’,
Kq Kq
= q = 0 or R1 = R2 the circuit diagram would be as given in figure
R1 R2
io
(ii)
The later is not possible q = 0 B
K(3Q) 4C 4C
Thus, V2 = V2 = V2
at
R2
So the potential of the outer shell does not 3C
change after connecting with wire.
6C 6C
(A) is correct.
3. q +q q +q
lic A q
C 2C
5V E
ub
Figure (ii)
The circuit is symmetric about AB. Therefore,
As both the earthed points are at 0 V, we can we can say that charge entering the 4C capacitor
redraw the circuit as, to B would be the same as charge leaving B
2CC 2 through the other 4C capacitor. Therefore, there
P
C and 2C in series = = C
2C C 3 would be no charge flow along 3C capacitor.
2 Hence, Energy in the 3C capacitor = 0.
q = CeqV = C (5 V)
3 5. Total number of surfaces = 6
et
2 Total charge, Q = 24 C
= 6 F (5 V) = 20 C Q
3 Total flux, =
0
rg
4. The circuit with the switch 1 in ‘ON’ position is So, flux through each surface
shown in figure (i). We apply the Kirchhoff’s
24 4
2nd law. Consider the closed loop through the = = = V-m
6 60 0
6C capacitors.
Ta
1
4C 4C 6. Potential V
r
r
V = V
r
6C 6C q 16
= V =8V
2
7. An electric dipole produces uniform electric
E field. For uniform electric field, equipotential
Figure (i) surface is planar.
Potential drop across the capacitors 8. By using W = QV
q q 2
= 1 1 V = = 0.1 volt
6C 6C 20
329
ns
i. X-Y plane 3 100 = 300 1 qQ qQ q 2
0=
ii. Y-Z plane 8 100 = 800 40 x 2x 3x
iii. X-Z plane 4 100 = 400
3 qQ q 2
Hence, the required ratio = 3 : 8 : 4 0=
io
2 x 3x
11. Using Shortcut 7 Q 1 2 2
Potential of the bigger drop
q 3 3 9
at
= n 2/3 potential on each droplet
6
V = 1 = 9 109 25 10
= 642/3 10 q
18.
= 42 10 40 r 10
= 16 10 V = 22500 V
= 160 V
lic
19. V = V1 + V2
9 9
12. Redistribution of charges takes place and during = 9 109 4 10 2 10
flow of charges some energy is lost as heat. 3 2
ub
20 =3V
20
10V 2
13. 5 (10V 4)dV = 5 4V 20. There are two loops, each having two capacitors
0 2 0
of 20 F each in parallel.
= 5[5 400 + 80]
Ceff. = 20 + 20 = 40 F for each loop.
P
= 5[2000 + 80]
Now, these two capacitors of 40 F each are in
= 5 2080
series.
= 10400 J
40 40 1600
Ceff. = = = 20 F
et
Q k 40 40 80
14. C= ,C= 0
V d
1
1 1 21. u= CV2
C C 2
rg
V d
2u 250
As ‘d’ increases, C decreases V= = = 10 6
Hence ‘V’ increases. C 100106
V = 103 V = 1000 V
The electric potential V (x, y, z) = 3y2 2z
Ta
15.
dV
E =
dr
ˆ V ˆ V ˆ V
E = i x j y k z
= 6y ˆj 2 kˆ
= 6y ˆj 2kˆ
At point (1, 2, 4)
ˆ ˆ
E = 6(2) j 2k
= 12ˆj 2kˆ
|E|= 12 2 2 2 148 2 37 units
330
9 Current Electricity
Hints
I Ig = nIg
Classical Thinking I
Ig =
ns
n 1
2. At a junction,
Ig 1
Current entering = Current leaving
I+4+2=5+3I=2A I n 1
38. The resistance of an ideal voltmeter is
io
8. In Wheatstone bridge experiment, some
smaller part of the experimental wire may be found considered as infinite so that it does not change
under metallic strip at the ends. This additional the current in the circuit.
at
length has some resistance known as end 40. The voltmeter is a high resistance galvanometer.
resistance. Hence, to measure the accurate length,
first the balancing length is obtained by keeping
the known and unknown resistances left and right Critical Thinking
E=
L 3. By Kirchhoff’s current law,
dE V V
= be small. 15 A
dl L L I2 B 3A
rg
A
28. When null point is obtained on potentiometer wire,
the cell whose potential difference is to be 8A
I3
measured does not supply current to potentiometer
D
Ta
ns
I1 2V 2 I1
A I1 I2 B A B
2
I3 D C
I2 2V 2 I2
io
(I1 + I2) (I1 + I2)
0V
Let V be the potential of the junction as shown
in figure. Applying junction law, we have E F
at
5
20 V 5V V0
+ =
2 4 2 Applying Kirchhoff’s second law for closed
40 – 2V + 5 – V = 2V loop AEFBA we get,
5V = 45 V = 9 V
lic (I1 + I2) 5 (I1 2) + 2 = 0
V 7I1 + 5I2 = 2 ….(i)
I3 = = 4.5 A Again, applying Kirchhoff’s second law for a
2
closed loop DEFCD we get,
ub
6. According to Kirchhoff’s voltage law in loop (I1 + I2) 5 (I2 2) + 2 = 0
ABQPA, 5I1 + 7I2 = 2 ….(ii)
(i1 + i2)R i1r1 + E1 = 0 Multiplying (i) by 5 and (ii) by 7 we get,
E1 (i1 + i2)R i1r1 = 0 35I1 + 25I2 = 10 ….(iii)
P
1 4 V 8V 2 6
P Q
I Substituting the value of I2 in equation (i)
we get,
I
9 1 7 1
rg
7I1 = 2 5 7I1 = I1 = A
6 6 6
1 The current through the 5 ,
2I + 8 – 4 (1 I) 9I = 0 I = A 1 1
3
Ta
= I1 + I2 = +
1 6 6
Potential difference across PQ = 9=3V 1
3 = A
3
8. Applying Kirchhoff law,
(2 + 2) = (0.1 + 0.3 + 0.2)I 110
11. I= ….(i)
I=
20
A 20 103 R X
3 Now, V = IR
Potential difference across A 110 3
20 4 5= 20 10 ….[From (i)]
= 2 0.1 = V (less than 2 V) 20 10 R X
3
3 3
Potential difference across B 105 + 5RX = 22 105
5
20 10
= 2 0.3 =0 RX = 21 = 420 k
3 5
332
D I2 C
8V 12V 2
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop (1) Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to ABCA,
and loop (2) we get, 2 4I1 4(I1 + I2) = 0 ….(i)
1 Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to ADCA,
28i1 6 8 i1 A and
ns
2 2 2I2 4(I1 + I2) = 0 ….(ii)
1 Subtracting equation (ii) from equation (i),
54i 2 6 12 i 2 A
3 4I1 + 2I2 = 0
5 2I2 = 4I1 I2 / I1 = 2
i3 i1 i 2 A
io
6 16. I – I1
A R D R E
13. I 1 I – I1
I1
at
I1 V
6V R
A 2 R=2 I R
B V
lic
Applying Kirchhoff’s law to loop A, B C F
6 – I 2I1 = 0 ….(i) For loop ADCBA,
Applying it to loop B, IR + I1R + V – V = 0
ub
– 2(I I1) + 2I1 = 0 ….(ii) (I + I1)R = 0 I1 = – I
– 2I = – 4I1 I = 2I1 Now, In loop AEFBA,
Substituting in equation (i), IR + (I – I1) R + (I – I1)R – V = 0
6 – 2I1 2I1 = 0 IR + IR – I1R + IR – I1R = V
P
6 3IR – 2I1R = V
I1 = = 1.5 A
4 3IR – 2(– I)R = V
14. The circuit can be simplified as follows: V
5IR = V I =
et
B C 5R
I1 30
I3 I3 17. 60
A D
i
rg
40 40 V 15 1 5
I2 A B
F E i1
40 80 V 1A 2 1A
i2
Ta
ns
1A 15 5 4 8 12
10
a b a
20/3 b
18.
io
A 2 4 6
R1 = 3 R2 = 6 6
12 6
at
RAB = =4
X 10 Y (12 6)
22.
R4 = 5 R3 = 10 R R
B
lic R
R R R 2R/3 2R/3
R1 R 2
=
R4 R3 A R B A R B
ub
Wheatstone’s bridge network is balanced.
Hence there is no current flowing through AB 2R/3 2R/3
R R R R
(through R5).
The given circuit is equivalent to R R
P
3 A 6
As the bridge is balanced,
X Y 2R
Req =
et
3
5 B 10
Alternate Method:
Rxy = (3 + 6) | | (5 + 10) Refer Shortcut 1.
9 15
rg
45 Q SX 2 3 X 3 X
= S X 3 X
8
3X = 6 + 2X X = 6
R R
19. As the bridge is balanced, AB = AD
R BC R DC 24. The resistances in four arms of a Wheatstone’s
15 6 15 (6 || 6) bridge are, 10 , 10 , 10 and 20 .
=
(X || 8) 3 4 (4 || 4) Let S be the resistance to be connected across
21 18 20 .
=
8X 42 Balance condition is,
3
8X 10
10
20 S = 10 (20 + S)
168 + 21 X = 33X + 72 10 20S
96 20 S
12X = 96 X = =8
12 10 S = 200 S = 20
334
ns
12 R
Alternate Method:
Refer Shortcut 1. 33. Since it’s a balanced Wheatstone’s bridge, the
circuit can be redrawn as
26. This is a balanced Wheatstone’s bridge circuit.
io
Hence potentials at B and D will be same and no I 10 2
current flows through the resistance 4R.
27. The bridge is balanced. 1.4 A
at
The balance condition after replacing 10
resistor by 20 resistor will remain the same.
4 28 4 28 7 (1.4 I) 25 5
Req. = 4 || 28 = = =
V 12 2
4 28 32
lic
2
12 I = 30 (1.4 – I)
I= = = 3.4 A 12 I = 42 30 I I = 1 A
R eq. 7
34. The equivalent circuits are as shown below
ub
P Q
28. Wheatstone’s network is balanced as C C C
R S 2 2
No current flows through galvanometer.
25 50 A B A B
Reff. = A
P
25 50
2 2
25 50 50
= = D B
75 3 D D
V 6
et
R AD R CD V V 5V
i=
R 18 / 5 18
44
= 10 || 5
4 5 || 5 36. As I is independent of R6, no current flows
X
3 through R6. This implies that the junction of R1
8 50 / 15 and R2 is at the same potential as the junction of
= R3 and R4. This must satisfy the condition
4 25 / 10
X R1 R 3
3 , as in the Wheatstone’s bridge.
R2 R4
8 50 10 4
=
4 15 25 3 R1 2
X 37. 1st case: = .…(i)
3 X 3
4 4 14 R2 3
+X=6X=6– = 2nd case: = .…(ii)
3 3 3 X 2
335
ns
38. Let X be the smaller resistance in the metre
100 l
bridge lX = 20 cm 41. X = R
l
lR = 100 20 = 80 cm
100 l
As the bridge is balanced, Initially, 30 = 10
l
io
lX X
= l = 25 cm
lR R
100 l
20 Finally, 10 = 30
= X l
at
80 R
l = 75 cm
X 1
= So, shift 75 cm 25 cm = 50 cm
R 4
42. For first case, the balancing condition is
R = 4X
From second condition,
....(i)
lic 10 R1 50
X 15 40 R2 50
R 100 40 R2 = 10 + R1.
ub
X 15 40 For second case, the balancing condition is
R 60 R1 40
X 15 2 R 2 60
R 3 R1 2
R1 = 20
P
2R = 3X + 45 10 R1 3
3X 45
R= ....(ii)
2 R1 l1 l1
43. In balancing condition,
Equating (i) and (ii) we get, R 2 l2 100 l1
et
3X 45 X 20 1
= 4X ....(i)
2 Y 80 4
8X = 3X + 45 4X l
rg
and ....(ii)
5X = 45 X = 9 Y 100 l
4 l
RP 2
39. 1st case: 4 100 l
RQ 3
Ta
l = 50 cm
2
RP = RQ ....(i) 44. Balancing length is independent of the area of
3
nd
2 case: Resistance, instead of RQ is cross-section of the wire.
10R Q lP P 1
RQ||10 = = R 45. 3P = Q
10 R Q lQ Q 3
Now, R P R =1 RP = R 3P Q = 0 ....(i)
P 40 3
RP =
10R Q
....(ii)
Q 40 5
10 R Q
5P + 200 = 3Q + 120
From equations (i) and (ii),
5P 3Q = 80 ....(ii)
2 10R Q
RQ = Solving equations (i) and (ii) we have,
3 10 R Q P = 20 , Q = 60
336
I E : E1 : : 4 : 1
48. Potential gradient =
A e
2 3 2
56. I=
10 10 10 10 9
(R R h r)
=
102 104 V 2 5
=
102
ns
L (15 5 0) 1
= 6
10 K = 0.5 V/m = 0.005 V/cm
= 108 V/m
E 4 1
57. I= = = A
I 0.1 107 Rr 30 30 15
io
49. Potential gradient = = 10–2 V/m
A 106 1
V=IR= 30 = 2 V
15
E 2
50. I= 0.2A 2 1
at
R r 82 K= = V/m
10 5
V = IR = 0.2 8 = 1.6 V
V 1.6 e R
Potential gradient = = 0.4 V/m 58. K=
L 4
lic 10 3
(R R h r) L
2 3
E 2 2 =
51. I= A 102 (3 R h 0) 1
R r 990 10 1000
Rh = 57
ub
2
V = IR = 10
1000 e R
59. K= .
V 2 1 (R R h r) L
Potential gradient = = 0.01 V/m 3
L 100 2 0.2 10 2 R
=
P
2
10 (R 490 0) 1
E 5 5
52. I= 0.1A R = 4.9
R r2 40 10 50
e
et
e.m.f. = 1.45 V
R = 19,989
1.45
Current, I = = 0.5 A 61. P.D. across potentiometer wire = 2 V
2.9
V 2
Ta
337
ns
I
EA : EB : EC = 200k : 240k : 300k For Ig =
10
= 10 : 12 : 15 = 1 : 1.2 : 1.5 I / 10 G
EA = 1 V, EB = 1.2 V, EC = 1.5 V S= G
I I / 10 9
io
64. Using,
Ig 1 S
E1 E 2 l1 73. = =
I 34 S 3663
E1 E 2 l2
at
3663
1.5 1.1 260 S= = 111
33
1.5 1.1 l2
2.6 260 260 Ig G 15 103 5
l2 = 0.4 = 40 cm 74. S= = = 0.0505
0.4 l2 2.6
lic I Ig 1.5 15 10 3
E1 l1 l2 58 29 87 3 IG S 2.5 2.5 25 1
65. = = = = 75. = = = = =
E2 l1 l2 58 29 29 1 I SG 2.5 25 27.5 275 11
ub
E1 l l (6 2) 2 76. Ig = 5.4 106 A,
66. = 1 2 = = Ig S
E2 l1 l2 (6 2) 1 =
I SG
l 120 1 SG 6 1 30
= 5.4 10
P
67. r = R 1 = 5 1 = 5 = 2.5 I = Ig
l1 80 2 S 1
= 5.4 106 31 = 1.67 104 A
l
r = R 1 = 10
75
68. 1
et
60 S
l1 77. Ig = I
SG
= 10
15
= 2.5 10 S
60 I = I
rg
100 SG
l1 l2 1 10
69. r= R =
l2 10 10 G
55 50
r =
Ta
10 + G = 100
10 = 1
50 G = 90
60 78. Shunt resistances,
70. n= =2
30 Ig G 10 99
S= = = 11
G G (I Ig ) (100 10)
Now, S = =
n 1 2 1
G
79. Ig = 10 106 A
S = S = G = 12 Ig
1 Using, S = G
I Ig
4
71. Ig = I 10 106 1000
100 = 102
1 10 106
Ig G
Using, S = we get, = 0.01
I Ig
S = 0.01 is parallel
338
ns
G 90
82. G = 6000 3 = 18000 = 18 k S= = = 10 in parallel
(n 1) (10 1)
V 3 1
Using, Ig = = = 103 A, SG S 500
G 18 103 6 90. Reff. = 25 =
V SG S 500
io
Value of series resistance, R = G 500
Ig 500 S = 25 S + 12500 S =
19
12
= 18 103
at
1 3 GS
10 91. Resistance of shunted ammeter =
6 G S
= 72 103 18 103 Also,
I
=1+
G
= 54 103 = 5.4 104 Ig S
Ig 0.25 103
=
SG I
S 15 103 5 103
85. Ig = 5 103 A = =
S5 6 2
V
et
R 200
In (A), 10 mA < 15 mA I < Ig l1
To take null point at same point or to remain
I 10 mA l2
87. The current through the galvanometer R
unchanged, should also remain unchanged.
3 X
= Therefore, if X is increasing R should also
2950 50
–3 increase.
= 10 A
To reduce the deflection from 30 divisions to 20 94. V1 = 80 volt,
divisions, the current required R1 = 200 80 = 16000 = 16 k,
20 2 V1 80
= 10–3 = 10–3 A I1 = = = 5 103 A
30 3 R1 16000
3 2 Current in series connection of voltmeter
The required resistance, R = = 10–3
R 50 3 remains constant.
339
I2 = 5 103 A, R2 = 32 103 , 7R
Req =
V2 = I2R2 = 5 103 32 103 = 160 V 5
Line voltage = V1 + V2 = 80 + 160 = 240 V 3b 5b
Entering current, (a + b) = b I
95. Since in a given loop the current coming out 2 2
from the positive terminal is equal to the current b I
Current in common side, (a – b) = .
entering the negative terminal, the current in the 2 5
respective loop will remain confined to the loop. 99. iAD = iDB + iDC
current through 2 resistor is zero. Let potential at D be V
96. Voltmeter is connected in series in the circuit (7 V) (V 0) (V 1)
hence there is no Potential difference across 10 20 30
voltmeter. On solving the above equation, we get VD 4 V
Hence option (A) is correct.
ns
97. The circuit for the dashed lines can be drawn as,
Currents through the sections DB and DC are,
1 1 1 1 1 74
A B = 0.3 A,
10
Req = 5 1 = 5 4
io
= 0.2 A,
The circuit obtained by adding dashed lines can 20
be drawn as, 4 1
= 0.1 A
1 30
at
Hence option (B) is correct.
1 1 1 1 1 Power = I2R
A B
Total power drawn = (0.3)2 10 + (0.2)2 20
1
lic + (0.1)2 30
= 0.9 + 0.8 + 0.3 = 2.00 W
Considering Wheatstone’s network, R eq for this Hence option (D) is correct.
combination after simplifying the circuit,
ub
R eq = 3 Competitive Thinking
Difference in the final and initial values of Req is 2. Given circuit can also be drawn as,
2 . 2
A
P
R R
(a b) a
B F
R 1
B
rg
R R
a
A By Kirchhoff’s voltage law,
(a+b) b R
VA (2 2) (3) (2 1) VB = 0
VA 4 3 2 VB = 0
Ta
E VA VB = + 9V
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law in loop 3. B
ABCDEA and loop ABFA we get, 4V
E aR 2Rb = 0 ….(i)
aR (a – b)R + 2Rb = 0 ….(ii)
I2 4
2aR = 3Rb 2a = 3b
A I1 O
3b
E=R 2Rb = (a + b) Req 8V
2 I3
2
7Rb 3b 2
b R eq
2 2
7Rb 5b 2V
R eq C
2 2 Let potential at O be V0.
340
ns
2
+ – VC – VD = (30 20) = 0.4 V
D C 50
E, 1 5
7. 1 1
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law in loop
io
ABCDA,
1
–2 – 0.1(1) – 0.1 (3) – 0.1 (5) – 0.1 (1) + E = 0 1.2 V 3 1
–2 – 1 + E = 0 1
at
E=3V 2 1
5. 100 B
A C Req = (1 + 2) = 3
I2 .....( Considering shortest path)
I1 I3
50
lic
25 I=
V
=
1.2
= 0.4 A
10 V R eq 3
5V
F D 8. Voltage across 10 = voltage across 40
ub
E I1 (10) = I2 (40)
Considering direction of I1 and I2, 2.5 10
I1 + I3 = I2 I2 = = 0.625 A
40
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law in loop 50 50 25
BCDEB R= = =8
P
I1 I 2 2.5 0.625
25I3 + 5 + 50I2 = 0
25I3 + 5 + 50(I1 + I3) = 0 9. 4V 2V
6V
50I1 + 75I3 = 5 ….(i) H F D B
et
175I3 = 20 2V 2V 2V
4 0V
I3 = A G E C A
35 6V 4V 2V
Ta
6. From figure, resistance in branch ACB is, Consider potential at points A and B be zero.
RACB = 20 + 30 = 50 Hence, potential at points C and D will be 2 V.
2 Similarly, potential at E and F is 4 V.
Current in ACB, IACB = A This implies, potential drop across each resistor
50
R1, R2 and R3 is zero.
2
Similarly, current in ADB, IADB = A current through each resistor is zero.
50
20 C 30 10. Current from D to C = 1 A
A VD VC = 2 1 = 2 V
B
VA = 0 VC = 1 V,
V
VD VC = 2
VD 1 = 2 VD = 3 V
30 D 20 VD VB = 2
3 VB = 2 VB = 1 V
2V
341
13 V 2 10 10 10
10 AB
Q
10
10
Eeq= E1r2 E 2 r1 12 2 13 1 37 V
r1 r2 1 2 3 This network can be redrawn in the bridge form
r r 1 2 2 as, S
Also, req = 1 2 =
r1 r2 1 2 3
Current in the circuit will be, 10
10
ns
37 10
I= E eq 3 37
A
R req 2 32 P
10 A B
3
io
The voltage across the load, 10
10
37 10
V = IR = 10 = 11.56 V
32
at
12. For parallel combination of batteries, Q
E1 E E3 AS AQ
2 In this case, Hence, bridge is balanced
2R1 R 2 2R1 SB QB
Eeq =
1 1 1
2R1 R 2
2R1
lic and no current will flow through SPQ branch
and thus, is neglected.
2 4 4 This modifies circuit into,
= 2 2 2 S
1 1 1
ub
2 2 2 10
10
5 2
=
3
A B
10
Eeq = = 3.3 V
P
3 10 10
13. 1.5 R
R O
et
X Y Q
20 in series
3R 10 S 10
rg
1.5R 3R
ROY = =R
(1.5 3)R A B
RXO = ROY = R 10 10
Ta
ns
According to Kirchhoff’s current law, 10 lx
I1 + I2 = 2.1
30 100 lx
I1 + 3 I1 = 2.1 lx = 25 cm
4
The distance through which balance point is
io
7
I1 = 2.1 shifted lx lx = 40 – 25 = 15 cm to the left
4
I1 = 2.1 4 = 1.2 A 21. Let lX be balancing length obtained in front of
at
7 smaller resistance.
3 lX = 40 cm, lR = 60 cm
18.
r r When the bridge is balanced,
1 X lX 40 2
1
lic
r 2
R lR 60 3
….(i)
r r
R= ….(ii)
r r 3
1 2
From equations (i) and (ii),
r r X 2
r r
et
(X 30)
=
3
4 2
r 3
3X 2
rg
r
2(X 30) 3
1 1 1 1
= + + 5X = 120
Rp 2r 2r r
X = 24
r
Ta
Rp = 5 R
2 22. Initially, = ….(i)
l1 100 l1
P R
19. 5 R/2
Q S Finally, = ….(ii)
P
1.6 l1 1.6 l1
100
Since P and Q is constant will be constant R R
Q =
R 1.6 100 l1 2 100 1.6 l1
= constant
S 160 1.6 l1 = 200 3.2 l1
R 5 7 1.6 l1 = 40
S S S3 l1 = 25
5(S + 3) = 7S From equation (i),
15 = 2S 5 R
R = 15
S = 7.5 25 75
343
X = 10.6 G
24. Initially, l1 l2
R 1 l1 60 3
….(i)
R 2 l2 40 2
When, wire is stretched by 20 % i.e., becomes
E
1.2 L
When galvanometer and cells are interchanged,
ns
Using shortcut 3, the balance condition remains unchanged.
Resistance will increase to 1.44R2
Hence, after stretching wire, P Q
io
R 1 l
E G
R 2 100 l
But R1 = R and R 2 = 1.44 R2 l1 l2
at
R1 l
= l1 2
1.44R 2 100 l 27. Unknown resistance, X = R =6
l2 3
From (i),
3 l
lic X=4
Resistance of bridge wire RW = 0.1 /cm = 10
1.44 2 100 l
X =4 R =6
300 3l = 2.88 l
ub
300
l= 51 cm G
5.88
2 3
25. Let balancing length be l , RW = 10
P
R1 = l ()
....(i)
R2 100 l E = 5V K
Equivalent resistance,
If R1 and R2 are interchanged balancing length
et
R1 E 5
I= =
Req 5
From equations (i) and (ii),
I=1A
l = 110 l
Ta
ns
After increasing the length by 1 m,
E n + 1 = 10 1 1
E = x n
11
10
Substituting for E from equation (i) n– =9
io
E E n
2.5 = x n2 – 9n – 10 = 0
10 11
2.5 11 n2 – 10n + n – 10 = 0
at
x= = 2.75 m
10 n (n – 10) + 1 (n – 10) = 0
l (n + 1) (n – 10) = 0
31. R= Neglecting negative value of n,
A
R 40 108
= 5 10–2 /m
lic n = 10
l A 8 106
35. E1 L1 and E1 L2
Potential gradient is given by,
E1 L1 1.25 30
V IR =
ub
= 0.2 5 10–2 = 10–2 V/m E 2 L2 E2 40
l l
5
32. P.D. across the wire E2 = 1.67 V
= Potential gradient length 3
V0 = 1mV/cm × 400 cm = 0.4 V
P
R= = 1 2 50 5
I 0.05
E1 E 2 10 1
33. (E, r1) (E, r2) E 1 5 1 6 3
+ – + –
rg
E 2 5 1 4 2
I V1 37. E0 r1
Ta
R A l
P r
2E B
Current in the circuit: I =
R r1 r2
Terminal p.d across 1st cell is V1 = E – Ir1 E
Given: V1 = 0 E0
E – Ir1 = 0 Current in wire AB =
r1 + r
2E
E– r1 0 i r E0 r
R r1 r2 Potential gradient (K) = =
L r1 + r L
2Er1
E= E = Kl
R r1 r2
R + r1 + r2 = 2r1 E0 r
E= l
R = r1 – r2 r1 + r L
345
ns
40. Internal resistance, 50. I
l G
r = 1 1 R S
l
2
52 12 5
io
= 1 5 = = 1.5
40 40 S
GS
42. Reason is correct as, to increase range additional Now, G = S
G S
at
shunt is connected across it. But, assertion is
GS
incorrect as shunt is added in parallel. G S
G S
l G2
43. R=
A
lic S =
G S
Shunt wire must have low resistance. IG S
For low resistance, wire should be short (l ≪) 51.
I SG
and thick (A≫, i.e., radius of wire ≫) .
ub
1 3
G 4 3G
44. Is = I 3 + G = 12
S G
G=9
P
45. n= 500 S 2 3
Ig 0.2 23 6
S = = 1.2
G G 23 5
R=
n 500 I S 1.2 1.2 1
rg
Now, G
I S G 1.2 9 10.2 8.5
Ig G 5 103 102 0.5
46. S= = 250mV
I Ig 1 5 10 3
1 5 103 52. For full scale deflection, Ig = ampere
G
Ta
ns
3
for 2nd case, 500 = G ….(ii)
Ig V 3
Also, I = =
By subtracting equation (i) from (ii) we get, eq
R r 3000 r
V 2 3
= 450 10–3 =
io
Ig 3 3000 r
Substituting this value in equation (i), r = 1500
G = 450 – 50 = 400
59.
at
57. Case I:
Ig
G 50 G R
I
lic 10 mA
I1 R1
V
V = Ig (G + R)
ub
V 100 = 10 10–3 (50 + R)
I = Ig + I1
I 50 + R = 10000
I= + I1 R = 9950
51
50I
P
I1 = V
51 60. R= G
Ig
But P.D across R1 = P.D. across G
I1R1 = IgG 3 3 104
R= 50 50
et
50 I 5 104 5
IR 1 G = 6000 50 = 5950
51 51
G = 50 R1 ….(i) 61. Given: Ig = 5 103 A and G = 15
rg
347
ns
well as ammeter.
230 V (100V, 500 W)
R left gap l
65. =
R right gap 100 l
io
Resistance increases with the increase in B
R I
temperature. Hence, the new balancing length
Power P = IV
at
will be greater than l.
P 500
I= = = 5A
66. S1 is open and S2 is closed V 100
12 12 By Kirchhoff’s law,
So, I = =
(6 4) 10
lic
230 V = IR + VAB
230 V = IR + 100 V
I = 1.2 A
IR = 130 V
67. B 130
R= = 26
ub
R1 R3 5
A C 69. F = qE
G
F F V
E=
R2
P
R4 q q L
D FL 2.4 1019 6
V= = V=9V
q 1.6 1019
+ –
et
E e.m.f. of cell = V = 9 V
Figure (a) 70. Equivalent circuit is given by
In the Wheatstone bridge shown in figure (a), 100 400
rg
348
ns
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law from B to C
via D, 30 V
3 1 10 6 3
VB 0.5 10 2 10 + = VC 480 20
2 10 6 Req = 40.8 +
io
1 500
VB – VC = 1 = 0.5 V
2 = 40.8 + 19.2
72. = 60
at
50
G 30
I= = 0.5 A
60
Ig
So reading of ammeter is 0.5 A
lic
75. Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop
8V 3950 containing VCC, RL and Transistor -
the current in the circuit for which galvanometer + VCC ICRL VCE = 0
ub
shows full scale deflection of 30 divisions is VCC = VCE + ICRL
V 8
Ig = = = 2 mA Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop
R 3950 50
containing VBB, RB and Transistor-
For deflection to become 15 divisions, the
+ VBB IBRB VBE = 0 VBB = VBE + IBRB
P
V
but, Ig = G
R 5 F
8 Ig 2
=
R s 50 2
rg
= 1 mA 2
8 8V Rs 2
= 103 3V
R s 50
Ta
3V A
Rs + 50 = 8 103 A
Rs = 7950
73. 1
I I
I I
3V
A
I I I
1970 2V
V 3
V 2 2 I=
I= = = = 1 mA R 1
R + r 1970 + 30 2000
I=3A
for 10 divisions of deflection, I = 0.5 mA
349
E e R P R
1. = 5. For balanced Wheatstone bridge,
l (R R h r) L Q S
5 5 12 x6
0.4 = l
(5 45 0) 10 1 / 2 1 / 2
l=8m x=6
X 2
2. The given circuit is a balanced Wheatstone’s 6. =
network as shown in figure (ii). Hence, points 100 X 3
Q and S are at the same potential 3X = 200 – 2X
ns
VQ – VS = 0 V 5X = 200 X = 40 cm
Q 7. Metrebridge is balanced,
4 12 R AC 20
= =
io
R 80 BC 80
P, T G R = 20
8 24 8. RAB = 2 10 = 20
at
S 3 3 1
I= = =
10 20 30 10
+
1
V = I RAB = 20 = 2 V
6V
Figure (ii)
lic V 2
10
= = 0.2 V/m
L 10
3. Applying Kirchhoff’s junction rule to point A,
(see figure) l1 l2
ub
I1 – I2 – I3 = 0 9. r = R
l2
I1 + I2 + I3 = 0 .…(i)
25
If VA is the potential at A, by applying Ohm’s R= 2 = 0.5
law to R1, R2 and R3 then we get, 100
P
VA – V1 = I1 R1, G 50
VA – V2 = I2 R2 and X 10. S = 12 = ,n= =5
n 1 10
VA – V3 = I3 R3 I1 G G G
VA V1 S= = =
et
I1 = , R1 n 1 5 1 4
R1 G = 4 S = 4 12 = 48
V V2 A
I2 = A , R3 11. I = 40 mA
R2 R2
rg
I2 I3 = 40 103 A
VA V3 E
I3 = Z Using, I =
R3 Y
R net r
Substituting for I1, I2 and I3 in equation (i) we
Ta
3
get, 40 103 =
100 R V
1 22
1 1 V1 V2 V3 100 R V
VA 0
R1 R 2 R 3 R1 R 2 R 3 100 R V 3
4+ 75
V1 V2 V3 1 1 1
1
100 R V 0.04
VA =
R1 R 2 R 3 R1 R 2 R 3 RV 245
12. i2 4
4. This is a balanced Wheatstone bridge. Hence
no current will flow from the diagonal i1
resistance 10 .
10 10 10 10 4 6
Equivalent resistance =
10 10 10 10 i i1
= 10 4V 2V
350
ns
S = 8 in parallel = 51.269
Ig S 4 4.3
14. = = I= = 0.08 A
I SG 40 51.269
io
Ig 19. 1.5 V = k.l1 = k(76.3) ….(i)
100 = 10 %
I E – ir = i(9.5 ) = kl2
V E 1.5
15. X= –G i=
at
Ig 9.5 r 9.5 r
(1.5)
V (9.5) kl2 ….(ii)
0= – 100 9.5 r
3 103
Dividing (ii) by (i), we get,
V = 100 3 10–3 = 0.3 V
lic 9.5 l
2
64.8
9.5 r 76.3
16. E r1 E r2 9.5 r l1 76.3 9.5 64.8
r 76.3
1
ub
I I 9.5 64.8
76.3
X r= 1 (9.5)
64.8
From the figure, = 1.7
P
EE 2E
I= ….(i)
r1 r2 X r1 r2 X
P.D. across first cell, V1 = E Ir1
et
2E
=E r1
r1 r2 X
Given that, V1 = 0
2 E r1
rg
E=
r1 r2 X
X + r1 + r2 = 2r1 or X = r1 r2
Ta
17. R
x y
x y
V
Figure (i) V
Figure (ii)
Equivalent resistance decreases. Hence current
will increase. As a result, ammeter reading
will increase.
Vx + Vy = V
Due to the change, Vx increases
voltmeter reading will decrease.
351
10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current
Hints
qB
20. Cyclotron frequency, f =
ns
Classical Thinking 2m
where, q = charge of proton
7.
1.6 1019 1.4 49
F q v B
f= = 107 Hz
22 27 22
2 1.6 10
io
Electron is a negatively charged particle, 7
therefore force F will be acting in negative
Z-direction. mv p 2mK 1 2mV
21. R=
at
qB qB qB B q
8. F = qvB sin
where, K = K.E. of the charged particle.
= 200 106 2 105 5 105 sin 30
m
F = 103 N R
lic q
9. F = qvB sin 2 2
m1 R1 q1 R q
For = 90 and v = 103c, = =
m 2 R 2 q 2 R / 2 4q
F 10 2 3
= 1.732
ub
q= m1
vB 10 3 108 2 10 5
3
=1
m2
3 3
= 102
3 2
26. F=BIl
= 5 103 C
P
F mg 7.5 105 10
B= = =
10. F = qvB sin Il Il 4 10 1
F B = 1.875 103 T
B=
et
qvsin
27. F = BIl sin
F
Bmin = ….(when = 90) 7.5 = 2 5 1.5 sin
qv
= 30
rg
10 10
Bmin = 12
= 103 tesla in ẑ - direction 28.
10 105 A A
4 4 2
10 A
11. 1 G (gauss) = 10 T (tesla) = 10 Wb/m 10 A B
Ta
B
14. For motion of a charged particle in a magnetic 3 cm
mv F
field, we have R = i.e., R v
qB
B 4 cm C B C
18. Particles are entering perpendicularly. Hence,
they will describe circular path. Since their Force on the conductor ABC = Force on the
masses are different, they will describe paths of conductor AC
different radii. F = Il B sin
mv =IlB ….( = 90)
19. R=
eB F = 10 (5 10–2) 5 = 2.5 N
Now, v 2v
34. NBIA 100 0.5 1 400 10 4 2 N-m
R 2 R = 2 2 cm = 4 cm
352
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
35. Field is radial (plane of coil parallel to magnetic 0I
53. B=
field) 2 R
= NIAB 4 107 10
= = 5 105 N/A m
= 100 100 10–6 (5 2 104) 0.1 2 4 102
= 106 N m
0 I
54. B=
36. = NIAB sin 2 r
= 20 12 (101)2 0.8 sin 30 0
5 105 =
= 0.96 N m 2 r
0
37. NBIA 100 0.2 2 0.008 0.32N m r=
5 105 2
Direction is given by Fleming's left hand rule. r = 1040 metre
ns
5 0 I
38. B= = =2T 55. B=
NIA 100 5 50 10 4 2R
1
K 5 107 45 B
39. I= = R
io
NAB 200 0.02 0.08 0.2
B1 R
I = 3.5 104 A = 2
B2 R1
40. B = 80 gauss = 80 104 tesla 10 8 12
at
For equilibrium of coil, =
B2 4
NBIA = K B2 = 3.33 109 T
NBIA
K =
4 3
lic4
56. In the figure, magnetic field at mid-point M is
given by,
40 80 10 0.2 10 5 10 P Q
= Bnet BQ BP
20
0 2
= 1.6 109 Nm/degree (IQ IP ) 2.5 A 5A
ub
4 r M
41. m = NIA, thus independent of magnetic field of 2
0 (5 2.5) 2.5 m
induction. 4 2.5
42. m = NIA = NI(r2) m r2 = 0 5m
P
2
43. m = NIA = 5 1 (4 102)2
58. Since currents are flowing in opposite direction.
m = 8 103 A m2
Hence force of attraction does not exist.
et
F 0 2I 2
47. W = mB cos1 mB cos2
L 4 R
= mB (cos1 cos2) If R is increased to 2R and I is reduced to I/2,
Ta
Here 1 = 0, 2= 90 the force per unit length becomes,
W = mB(1 cos 2) = 40 0.25 (1 cos 90) F 0 2(I/2) 2
= 10 J
L 4 2R
0 Idl sin 0 2I 2 1 F
51. dB = × =
4 r2 4 R 8 8L
F
0 I F =
52. B= 8
2r
r 0 I1I2 L
New distance = 61. F=
2 2d
0 2I F 4 107 2 4
New magnetic field = = 2B =
4 r L 2 101
2 = 1.6 105 N/m
353
ns
Force on wire Q due to wire R is
2 20 10 76. Magnetic field on the axis of circular current
FR = 107 0.1 0 2nIa 2
0.02 B= × 2 2 3/ 2
= 20 105 N (Towards right) 4 (a x )
io
Fnet = FR – FP = 14 105 N = 1.4 104 N B
na 2
(a 2 x 2 )3/ 2
F 2I I 2I 2
64. = 0 12 = 0 ( I1 = I2 = I)
l 4 d 4 d
at
0 nIR 2
2 78. B =
2I 2(z 2 R 2 )3/ 2
2 107 = 107
1 4 107 50 1 (5 102 ) 2
I= 1A =
2[(0.05) 2 (0.2) 2 ]3/ 2
68. Element ‘dl’ and radius are perpendicular
lic 105 25 104
=
0I 4 107 107 [(25 400) 104 ]3/ 2
69. B= = 0.5 = B = 9 106 Wb/m2
2r 2r r
ub
But 22 102 = 2r 0 IR 2 1
2 79. Bz Bz 3
1110 2r 3 r
r=
π
80. Magnetic moment, m = IA
10 7
P
2r 2 5 102 X.2r
5 So, m = r2
= 4 10 tesla 0
2r 4 r r 0
107 2 250 (20 103 )
= 0 I n R 2
40 103 81. Since z >> R, B
2z 3
Ta
354
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
88. B = 0ni = 4 107 10 5 = 2 105 T
Critical Thinking
90. B = 0 n I B does not depend upon radius.
2. Fm = qvB sin ,
1014
91. Mean radius = = 12 cm Since v = 0
2
Fm = 0
The magnetic field B,
N
F q (v B) 10 11 (108 ˆj 0.5 ˆi)
B = 0ni .... n
3.
2R
5 10 4 (ˆj ˆi)
1500 100
= 4 107 10
2 12 = 5 104 N along k̂
= 25 103 T 4. Force on the charge in motion in magnetic field,
ns
92. F = qvB sin = qvB sin 90
F q v B , implying F is perpendicular
F = evB
0I
B= to v .
2 R
io
at
= F v cos 90 F v
0I
93. B= =0
2 R lic
4 107 I 5. As per the figure,
1.33 104 =
2 0.1 F = q(E + v B) = qE + q(v B)
I = 66.5 Now, Fe = qE
n=
It = 16 1018 104 ( k̂ )
ub
e = 16 1014 k̂
66.5 1
n= 4.16 1020 And Fm = 16 1018 (10 î B ĵ )
1.6 10 19
= 16 1017 B( k̂ )
94. Magnetic induction at O due to coil,
P
F = Fe + Fm = 16 1014 k̂ 16 1017 B k̂
0I
B1 = Since, the particle will continue to move along
2r
+ X-axis, so resultant force is zero. Therefore,
Considering perpendicular distance between Fe + Fm = 0
et
I I
= 0 + 0 9. t = 2.3 108 s
2r 2r
T = 2t = 4.6 108
I 1
= 0 1
1
1
= 2.17 107 Hz
2r f=
T 4.6 108
95. Magnetic field at distance of 10 cm due to wire,
0I 5 0 2mK
B= 10. r r K
2r 2 0.1 qB
Magnetic force on electron, R K
R2 R 2
Fm = qvB R2 2K
5 4 107
= 1.6 1019 3 106 2 qB 2m
2 0.1 v0
11. T
T m qB
= 4.8 1018 N
355
2 2 2
1 2 qBR
mv = m B = NI A B = NIAB sin
2 2m
For an -particle, the charge is two times that of but = 90
the proton but mass is 4 times that of the proton. = NIAB sin(90 ) = NIAB cos
Hence compared to kinetic energy of a proton,
Plane of the
for the same conditions in the cyclotron, energy
coil
of alpha particle is E.
13. Kinetic energy in magnetic field remains
constant and it is K.E. = qV B0
K.E q
(V = constant)
ns
K.Ep : K.Ed : K.Ea = qp : qd : qa = 1 : 1 : 2
normal
14. Maximum force will act on proton so it will
move on a circular path. Force on electron will 24. Suppose length of each wire is l.
be zero because it is moving parallel to the field. 1
io
r
B
15. From figure, vector length of wire l = 3 cm 2
F = BIl = 2 2 3 102 = 0.12 N l l2
A circle r 2
2 4
at
Now, F = ma l/4
0.12
a= = 12 m/s2 (along Y-axis) Magnetic moment m IA
10 103
msquare Asquare r
16. Let Fm be the force arising due to magnetic
lic
field, then the given situation can be drawn as
m circle A circle
follows l 2 / 16
Fm cos 60°
l 2 / 4 4
60°
ub
Fm 25. As shown in the following figure, the given
B situation is similar to a bar magnet placed in a
mg sin 60° 60°
mg cos 60° uniform magnetic field perpendicularly. Hence
60° mg torque on it is given by,
P
B
Fm = BIl mg sin 60 BIl cos 60
o o
S
0.01 10 3
B 1T
0.1 1.73
et
17. = N I B A sin N
does not depend upon shape of the loop.
Area. The area of circle is largest.
rg
ns
solid current carrying conductor.
4 107 20
B= = 40 106 T = 40 µT
0 2I 2 0.1
30. B= (For infinitely long conductor)
4 r
0 I
1 35. By using, B (sin 1 sin 2 )
io
B 4 r
r 0 I
Hence, graph (C) is correct. B (2sin )
L/2 5
L
4 (L / 4)
4
at
31. L/2 2
Also, sin P
4 cm 5L / 4 5 L/4
4 0 I L/2
B
I P 3I
lic 5L
36.
x 4x
45 l
ub
At neutral point P, B1 = B2
2l i
0 I 3I
= 0 O
2 x 2 (4 x)
x = 1 cm
P
32.
Using Biot Savart’s law,
I 2I Magnetic field due to one side of the square at
et
r r centre O
A C 0i
O B1 = sin 45 sin 45
4l
rg
2i
= 0
4 l
Let two wires be A and C carrying current I and Hence magnetic field at centre due to all sides,
2I respectively. The magnetic field produced by 0 ( 2)i
Ta
B = 4B1 =
two wires at mid-point ‘O’ will be in opposite l
direction. Hence net magnetic field at O is, Magnetic field due to n turns
I I 2 0 nI
B = B1 B2 = 0 1 0 2 Bnet = nB =
2r 2r l
= 0 (I1 I 2 ) = 0 (I 2I) 0 (I) 37. Bnet
2r 2r 2r B1
Here negative sign indicates the direction of B.
Hence neglecting it, |B| = |B1| ….(i) B2
ns
6A
As the forces are equal and opposite,
X
1 1 r 5
8A F1 = F2 = 1=
3r1 5r2 r2 3
io
0 2(6)
and that due to wire (2), B2 42. Force between two long conductors carrying
4 d current,
16 12
2 2
0 I1I 2
F= ….(i)
at
Bnet B12 B22 0 0 l
4 d 4 d 2 d
After carrying out changes,
0 2 5
10 0 0 (2 I1 )(I 2 )
4 d d F = l
39. Magnetic field due to 1st wire,
lic 2 d
From (i) and (ii),
0I
B1 = …(R = 3 m) F 2 / d d 0.5 2
2 3 2 2
F 1/ d d 1.5 3
Magnetic field due to 2nd wire,
ub
2
0 I F = F
B2 = …(R = 4 m) 3
2 4
Net magnetic field, 0 I1I 2l
43. F=
B= B B
2 2 2a
P
1 2
mg 0 I1I 2
0I 1 1 =
= l 2a
2 9 16
20 103 9.8 2 2 102
et
I2 =
0I 25 4 107 200
=
2 144 m
0 I 5 50 I = Linear density
= l
rg
2 12 24 I2 = 98 A
40. 44. Mass per unit length of conductor XY,
m = 5 102 kg/m
Ta
0 i A I1 = 25A B
Here, B = 6 (sin 1 + sin 2)
4 r
F
3 mg =
For r x l
2
0 I1 I 2 0 2I1 I 2
0 i (2sin 30) 3 0i mg = =
B = 6 2a 4 a
4 3 x 2 25 I2
x mg = 107
2 4 103
358
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
25 52. Using Shortcut 3(iv),
5 102 9.8 = 104 I2
2 B = B12 B12 = 2 B1
2 5 102 9.8 B
I2 = = 392 A = 2
25 104 B1
0 I I
46. B1 = , B2 = 0 53. Using shortcut 1,
4 a 4 b
Ratio of initial to final turns = 2 : 1
0I 1 1 1
Field due of ABCD = B1 B2 = n=
4 a b 2
47. In the figure, magnetic fields at O due to B1
B2 = n2B1=
sections 1, 2, 3 and 4 are considered as B1 ,B2 ,B3 4
B1 4
and B4 respectively. =
ns
4 B2 1
R2 2 Alternate Method:
R1
L = n1(2r1) = n2(2r2)
io
r1 n
O 3
= 2
1 r2 n1
B1 B3 0 2 2
B1 n I / 2r1 n r n 4 4
= 0 1 = 1 2 = 1 = =
at
0 i B2 0 n 2 I / 2r2 n 2 r1 n 2 2 1
B2 . (directed into the paper)
4 R 1
0 i 54. Using shortcut 1,
B4 . (directed out of the paper) Here n= 2,
4 R 2
As | B2 | | B4 |
lic 2
B2 n 2 B1 = 2 B = 4B
Given that,
2 I
0 (2 )I 0 2 N1 = 1, N2 = 2, r1 = r, r2 = r / 2,
B= =
4 r 4 r B1 = B
30I
et
B 1 r/2 1
B= B2 4B .…[From (i)]
8r B2 2 r 4
0 nI 55. Using shortcut 1,
49. Magnetic field at the centre of coil B =
rg
2r Here n = 3,
L 2
n = 1 and 2r = L r = B2 n 2 B1 = 3 B0 = 9B0
2 Alternate Method:
0 2I 0 I 0 NI 0I 1 0 I
Ta
B= = B0 = for 1 turn.
2L L 2a 2a 2a
q For rewinding the coil in three turns, new radius
50. I= = 100 e a/3, number of turns (N) = 3.
t
2I 2 100e 0I 3 9 I
Bcentre = 0 = 0 New magnetic field = 0 9 B0
4 r 4 r 2 (a / 3) 2a
0 200 1.6 1019 56. The magnetic induction at centre of a coil is
= = 1017 0
4 0.8 0 Ni
B=
0I q qf 2r
51. B= = 0 = 0 10 0.2 10 0.3
2r 2r t 2r B1 = 0 , B2 = 0
4 107 1.6 1019 6.8 1015 2 20 102 2 40 102
= 15 5
2 0.5 1010 B = B1 + B2 = 0 5 = 0
= 13.7 T 4 4
359
ns
=
1 2(a 2 a 2 )3/ 2
0 Ia 2
=
r 2(2)3/ 2 a 3
2 O
io
4107 1
= = 107 T
4 2 a 2a
3
at
Magnetic fields due to different portions 1, 2 0 Ia 2
62. B1 = ,
and 3 are respectively, 2(a x 2 )3/ 2
2
B2 x
B
O 0 2I
63. Magnetic field at centre, B = ×
C 4
et
r
A D Magnetic field at a point on the axis,
0 2 I r 2
Field due to ABC, B =
4 r 2 z 2 3/ 2
rg
0 I 3
B1 = B B
4 r 2 Given B = =8
8 B
Field due to AD at O,
0 2 I
Ta
0 I 0 I
B2 = 4 r =8
2r 2 4r 0 2 I r 2
…[ A is at the end of the wire] 4 r 2 z 2 3/ 2
0I 3 r z2
2 3/ 2
Total induction = 1 =8
4r 2 r3
(r 2 z 2 )3
60. Here, magnetic field due to straight portion, = 64
r6
0I
BPQ = (sin + sin ) r 2 z2
4R cos =4
r2
( OM = R cos ) r2 + z2 = 4r2
=
0 I 2sin 0 I
tan 3r2 = z2
4 R cos 2R z= 3r
360
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
0 I R 2 P
64. B=
2(R 2 z 2 )3/ 2
I
0 I(6) 2 102
2
108 106 = I
2 6 2 82 104
3/ 2 3/ 2
0ni
0 I 108 10 10
3/ 2
6 2
10 6 108 105 72. B=
= = l
2 62 10 4 36 4 107 n 10
….(i) 0.2 =
0.8
At the centre of the coil, z = 0
4 104
0 I 0 I n=
B= =
2R 2 6 102 Since n turns are made from the winding wire,
ns
Using (i) so length of the wire (L)
108 105 = 2r n [2r = length of each turns]
B= = 5 104 T = 500 T
36 6 102 4 104
L = 2 3 102 = 2.4 103 m
io
0 IR 2 I
65. Baxis = , Bcentre = 0
2(z R )
2 2 3/ 2
2R 73. The magnetic field in the solenoid along its axis
R3
(i) at an internal point = 0ni
Baxis = Bcentre = 4 107 5000 4 = 25.1 103 Wb/m2
at
(z R 2 )3/ 2
2
(Here, n = 50 turns/cm = 5000 turns/m)
Baxis z 2 R 2
3/ 2
(ii) at one end
Bcentre = 1 ni 25.1 10 3
R3 Bend = Bin = 0 =
Bcentre =
(54)(4 32 )3/ 2
2
=
54 125
= 250 T
lic 2 2 2
33 27 = 12.6 103 Wb/m2
74. I = 10 A;
0 2nIR 2 1
66. B 2 B 2 Total number of turns = 4000
ub
4 (R z 2 )3/ 2 (R z 2 )3/ 2 Mean radius of toroid,
2/3
8 (R 2 z 22 )3/ 2 8 R 2 0.04 25 26
2 r= = 25.5 cm = 25.5 102 m
1 (R z1 ) 2 3/ 2
1 R 2 0.0025 2
R 2 0.04 Total length (circumference) of the toroid
P
4
2
1 R 0.0025
, = 2r = 2 25.5 102 = 51 102 m
Therefore, number of turns per unit length,
On solving, R = 0.1 m
4000
n=
et
0 2nI 51102
68. Using, B = ,
4 r = 31.4 103 T
2nI 2 25 4
B = 107 = 107 75. The coil is made up of tiny current elements.
r 5 102
Ta
361
ns
Circular loop
Ex = Ey = 0, vy = vz = 0 and Bx = Bz = 0
Substituting in equation (ii), Direction of magnetic
q field due to straight
ax = ay = 0 and az = [ E z v x By ]
m current carrying wire
io
As electric field is along the negative z-axis,
hence Ez is negative. Magnetic field due to straight wire is either
Again az = 0, as the particle transverses through parallel or antiparallel to the current flow in
at
the region undeflected. loop depending on direction of current in wire.
Ez = vx By Thus force F exerted by this magnetic field B is,
E z 5 104 F Idl B
By = = 2.5 103 Wb/m2
vx 20
lic = IdlB sin = 0 ( = 0 or 180)
1
78. Ekinetic = mv2 83. Current carrying coil is a closed loop. Net force
2
acting on the coil due to uniform magnetic field
ub
1
2 1.6 1013 = 1.67 1027 v2 is always zero. But there will be a non-zero
2 torque acting on the coil, except when plane of
v2 = 3.83 1014 the coil is perpendicular to the field.
v = 0.196 108 m/s
84. B at the centre of a coil carrying a current, I is
F = qvB sin
P
0I
= 1.6 1019 0.196 108 2.5 sin 90 Bcoil = (upward)
2r
F = 7.84 1012 N
0 I
1 B due to wire, Bwire = (downward)
et
0I I
If the proton is moving undeflected, then the = (upward) + 0 (downward)
deflection produced by the electric field must 2r 2r
nullify the deflection produced by magnetic I I I 1
= 0 0 = 0 1 upward
field. 2r 2r 2r
Ta
362
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
Now, magnetic field,
0I O
B = r
2r
0 v
q
2r 2r N B
vq
0 2
4r
4107 2.2 106 1.6 1019 t
=
4 510
11 2
ns
2Vq 2
m
in space, electrostatic force is dominant over m
magnetic force between them. Hence due to
electric force they repel each other. Bt q q
= Bt
m 2V 2Vm
io
87. Deflecting couple on magnet
= mB sin = (2l × pole strength) B sin 92. Change in momentum = Impulse
= (10 8) 0.32 sin 45
at
t t
2e t
88. Current due to motion of particle = = Bl I dt = Blq
T
2e
lic 0
89. For magnetic field to be zero at centre of loop, 93. Here magnetic force = BIa
0 Ic 0 Ie Weight of a side is mag, where m is mass per
P
2R 2H unit length, and that of two sides i.e., 2 mag is
IR effective at the centre.
H= e
Ic
et
a/2
90. If a wire of length l is bent in the form of a
circle of radius r then 2r = l
rg
l 2 a/2
r= = =
2 2 2
Magnetic field due to straight wire magnetic force (BIa)
0 2I 2 2 (2m a)g
(m a)g
Ta
B1 = = 0
4 r 4 1 102
Also, magnetic field due to circular loop, Then taking moments,
0 2I 2 2 a
B2 = = 0 2 mag sin + mag a sin = BIa a cos
4 r 4 / 2 2
B2 1 i.e. 2ma2g sin = BIa2 cos
=
B1 50 BI
tan = But m = A
2 mg
1
91. Using qV = mv2, we get BI
2 tan =
2Ag
v= 2Vq / m
2Ag
mv 2 mv B= tan
Again, Bqv = i.e., r = I
r Bq
363
ns
i ( k) j Bq
While, =
m
B = –k
i.e., is independent of r.
2. The particle is released from rest
io
11. Momentum p = qBR
and E B
12. Time period of revolution is given by,
Fnet FE FB ….(i) 2m
T=
at
qB
FE q E and FB q v B Hence, time period is independent of velocity of
the particle.
As v = 0, FB = 0
hence, Fnet = FE
lic13. Radius of circular path:
mv
r=
qB
As FE is acting along the direction of electric
1
ub
field, particle will always move in the direction r
B
of electric field. Also, v being parallel to B , B
particle will not deviate. When B is reduced to , r is doubled
2
3. When particle moves undeflected, magnetic New radius of circular path is 2r.
P
B i.e., B =
qr
9.1 1031 106 9.1
4. FB = q v B B=
–5
105 = 2.84 10 T
19
1.6 10 0.2 1.6 2
rg
FB = q a i b j ck mv v
15. r= r
qB
q
B
= q abk ac( j) m
Ta
109
r= = 102 m
FB = qa bk c j (1011 ) 104
Taking magnitude on both sides, 16. Initially FE = Fm
qE = qvB
FB = qa b2 c2 E 2 10 4 2
B= = = = 2 10–2 T
v 106 100
FB qa(b2 c2 )1/ 2
Now when E is switched off,
mv mv v
mv 2Em r= = =
7. r= qB eB e
qB qB B
m
mv 106 1
8. r= rv = 0.5 m
Bq 2 102 108 2
364
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
17. From figure, we know that 2m K.E.
r1 < r2 21. r=
Bq
also,
m 2m 4m
mv rp : rd : r : = : : = 1: 2 :1
r= q q 2q
qB
v and B being constant, 22. For cyclotron,
m mv m
r B= ….( v = R)
q eR e
m 2 2m
m1 m2 =
e e
q1 q2
1 2 1
K.E. = mv max m R
2
m m
ns
i.e., 2 2
q 1 q 2 1
= mR 2 42 2
2
18. For charged particle moving perpendicular to
mv p
= 2 mR222
io
uniform magnetic field, r = =
qB qB 23. Radius in magnetic field
Given that, pH = pα = p(say) mv 2mE
R=
p p qB qB
at
rH = and rα =
qHB qa B q 2 B2 R 2
But, qα = 2qH E=
2m
rH q a B 2q H B 2 For proton
ra q H B q H B
1
lic E1 =
e 2 B2 R 2
2 mp
19. For a charged particle inside a magnetic field,
radius of path is, For -particle
ub
mv p (2e) 2 B2 R 2
r= E2 =
qB qB 2 4m p
E=
1
mv2 =
p2 E1 = E2 = 1 MeV
2 2m
P
2m
p m
r or qB
q q Cyclotron frequency is f =
2m
For given particles,
rg
mp 4m p mp
rp , re 1836 , r E = 2 2mf2r2 ....(in joule)
qp qp 2q p qp 2 mf r
2 2 2
E= ....(in eV)
re < rp = r e
2 10 1.67 1027 10 106 0.6
2 2
q 2 B2 r 2 = eV
20. K.E. = 1.6 1019
2m
But here K.E. = qV = 7.5 106 eV
qV 2m = 7.5 MeV
r2 =
q 2 B2 The closest value in the option is 7 MeV
Option (C) is correct.
r m
2
m1 r1 2m T m q 2
25. T= p
m 2 r2 Bq Tp m p q 1
365
ns
1 109 Hz = 1 GHz =
2
29. The oscillator frequency must be same as 1.1
proton’s cyclotron frequency. = = 0.35 N
qB
io
f= K
2 m 35. I= I
27 NAB
2 mf 2 3.14 1.67 10 12 10 6
B= =
q 1.6 1019 36. B
at
2
= 78.6 10 T 0.8 T
30
30. Component of velocity parallel to the field,
60 A
makes the particle move in direction of field and
due to perpendicular component of velocity,
lic
particle follows circular path making combined
path as helical.
ub
31. Parallel component drags the particle to side and
perpendicular component gives circular path. τ = NAIB sin θ
Hence the path is helical. = 50 × .012 × 2 × 0.2 × sin 60º
= 0.20 Nm
32. F = IlB sin
37. A
P
= 90
sin 90 = 1 For square coil,
F = IlB Area (A1) = length2 = a2
For circular coil,
mg = IlB
et
2
2.5 50 102 0.5 a
m =
IlB
= =
1
= 62.5 g Area (A2) = (radius)2 =
g 10 16
a2
= = a2
rg
33. We know
FB = i l eq B = i leff B ….( leff B)
1 A a2
= 1 = 2 =1
2 A2 a
Ta
For PQ l eq || B
38.
(FB ) PQ = 0 B m
For PR
3
lPR = l (which is perpendicular to B )
2
3
(FB)PR = i leff B = i l B
2
B
3
(FB)PR = i lB
2 When = 0 (parallel) it is in stable
Similarly for QR equilibrium.
3 When = 180 (anti-parallel), it is in unstable
(FB)PR = i lB
2 equilibrium.
366
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
39. For stable equilibrium 0 Idl sin
45. By Biot-Savart’s law, dB = ×
m magneticdipole moment ||B 4 r2
1
z i.e., dB ∝
r2
46.
B I1
I B2
I y d
I B1
x I
I2
ns
z
0 2 2 1/ 2
B= B12 B 22 =
2d
I1 I2
B
47. Magnetic field due to first wire is given by
io
I 0I
I y B1 =
I 2 r
x I Magnetic field due to second wire is given by
at
4
40. m = nAI = 2000 1.5 10 2 = 0.6 0 I I
B2 = = 0
2 1 2 (3r) 6 r
= mB sin 30 = 0.6 5 10
2 Net Magnetic field at P is, B = B1 + B2
= 1.5 102 Nm
lic B=
0I I
+ 0
2 r 6 r
41. m B = mB sin θ
m 30I + 0I
=
6 r
ub
= NIA × B sin 90
40I 2 0 I
2 = =
τ = NI (πr ) B× 1 O
B 6 r 3 r
= B πr2 IN
48.
P
d 3
43. K.E = mB(cos1 cos2)
2
Here, 1 = 0 (along East - West) 60
2 = 90(along North-South) 60
rg
i.e., U = nI( A B ) 2
also, magnetic dipole moment,
0 2I 3 3 0I
m nI A = 2 =
4 d 3 2 2d
given A 0.04 i 0.05 j 0.07k
49. 2
m 15 12 A 180 A
I 16 A
= 7.2 i 9 j 12.6k
U = 7.2 i 9 j 12.6k . 0.2 i 0.3 j 0.4k
r
x x
= [1.44 2.7 5.04] 2 O 1
= (6.3)
367
ns
For net force to be zero, net magnetic field at 4107
= 32 42
that point should be zero, i.e., 2 2102
B1 = B2 = 5 105 Wb m2
0 (1) 0 (2)
io
2x 2(0.1 x) 0 I
60. B1
2x = 0.1 + x 4 R 1
c
x = 0.1m
here, 60
at
3
F 0 2I1I 2
52.
l 4 r I
0 3 I
Here, r = b and I1 = I2 = I B1 0
F 0 2I
2
lic 4 R1 12 R1
Similarly,
l 4 b
F 0 I1I 2 55 I
53. = = 2 107 0 3 I
B2 0
l 2d 1
ub
4 R 2 12 R 2
= 5 106, attractive Bnet = B1 – B2
I I l 4107 5 5 5 102 I 1 1
54. F= 012 = = 105 N =
0I I
0 = 0
2d 2 2.5102
12R 1 12R 2 12 R1 R 2
P
0i 2l
= ....( I1 = I2 = i) 62. Magnetic field at C due to semi-infinite wire,
2d
0i
i 2l
2
2 0i 2l i 2l B1 =
Fnet = 2 0 = = 0 4r
rg
368
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
Now, (R2 + z2)1/2 = 2R
B′ =
0 I I
where I′ = and r′ = 2r R2 + z 2 = 4R2
2r 2 z 2 = 3R2
I B z = 3R
∴ B′ = 0 =
8r 4
67. According to Ampere’s circuital law,
64. Refer shortcut 1 the magnetic induction on axial line of a straight
Alternate Method: current carrying conductor is zero.
Let the wire of length l be bent into circle of The segments DE and AB do not produce a
radius R. magnetic field at O.
0 nI For segments BC and EF,
B=
2R 0 IC I
BBC , BEF 0 F
here, n = 1 4 rC 4 rF
ns
l Bnet = BBC + BEF
R=
2 4 9
0I Bnet 107 5
5 10 T
B= 0.02 0.03
l
io
2
2 68. By Ampere’s circuital law,
I
B= 0 ....(i) B dl I 0 enclosed 0 (2 1) 0
2l
at
When the same wire is bent into coil of n turns, 0 2I
69. B
let R be the radius of the coil, 4 r
2nR = l 105 107
2I
R =
l
2n
lic I=5A
(10 102 )
nI 0nI I
B = 0 = = 0 n2 70. Net current through system I = I1 + I2 + I3
2R l 2l
2 =35+8=6A
ub
2n Using Ampere’s law,
B = n2B ….[From (i)] 0 I 4 107 6
65. Bcentre = 5 5 Baxis B= = 12 106 T = 12 µT
2R 2 0.1
0n I 0n IR 2
=5 5 71.
P
2 R 2 z2
3/ 2
2R
(R2 + z2)3/2 = 5 5 R3
(R2 + z2)3 = 125 R6
et
a
/2 a
R2 + z2 = 5R2 B
z2 = 4R2
2a
z = 2R
rg
B
z = 2 0.1 ….( R = 0.1) According to Ampere’s Circuital law,
z = 0.2 m For inside loop,
0 nI 0 r I I A
B .... as I
Ta
I
Bc B o ....(i)
Given: Baxis = 4a
8 For outside loop,
0 nIR 2 nI B (2r) = µ0I
= 0
2 R 2 z2
3/ 2
8 2R 0I I
B 0 ....(ii)
2(2a) 4a
R2 1
= From equations (i) and (ii),
2 R 2 z2
3/ 2
16R
B
1
(R2 + z2)3/2 = 8R3 B
369
Y
mg
As magnetic field inside conductor is zero,
For d < R, B = 0
ns
However, for d > R, To keep the rod stationary,
I BIl cos = mg sin
B= 0
2d mg tan
I =
io
1 Bl
i.e., B
d g tan
= ….( m/l = )
Hence, the variation is best depicted by graph B
at
(C). 0.5 9.8 tan 30 19.6
I= = 11.32 A
0.25 3
73. The proton is moving parallel to the axis of
Force
lic
solenoid. The magnetic field inside the solenoid
is uniform hence it doesn’t affect the velocity of
78. Electric field =
Charge
ma 0
proton. = (in west direction)
e
B = 0ni Magnetic force = Fm
ub
74. ....(n = N/L)
= 3ma0 ma0
400
= 4 3.14 107 5 = 2ma0 (in west direction)
0.4 102
( v B is directed towards west)
= 0.628 T
P
Since, v is directed towards north for positive
75. Magnetic field, B = µ0ni
0 N1I
B1 = B
2R 1 l = 3m
For second toroid,
0 N 2I I = 10A z
B2 =
2R 2
x
B1 N1 R 2
= Magnetic force on conductor
B2 R 1 N 2
F = B I l sin
=
200 0.2
Here, B = 3.0 10-4 e0.2 x T, I = 10 A and
0.4 100 l = 1.5 (1.5) = 3 m
=1:1 F = 3.0 104 e0.2 x 10 3
370
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
Substituting in equation (i), As the system is in equilibrium vertically,
2
T cos = gL ….(i)
4 0.2x
W= 3.0 10 e 10 3dx
0
Along horizontal,
= 9 103
2
0
e 0.2x dx
T sin =
0 I I L
….(ii)
9 10 3 2 (2Lsin )
= e 0.2 2 1
0.2 0I1I 2l
9 103 F and here d 2Lsin
= 1 e 0.4 2 d
0.2 4 Lsin Tsin
= 45 103 [1 0.67] I2 =
0 L
14.84 103 J
14.84 103 T
P = 2.97 W I = 2 sin ....(iii)
5 103 0
ns
80. For given two coils, magnetic induction at their Using equation (i),
centres is same. gL
T=
Let B1 = B2 cos
io
0 I1 0 I 2 Substituting for T in equation (iii),
2r 2 2r gL
I 1
I = 2 sin
1 0 cos
at
I2 2
Using Ohm’s Law, 84. Dipole moment M = nIA = I R2
1 If dipole moment is doubled keeping current
V
V1
I
lic constant,
M = I (R)2
V2 1 2M = I (R)2
2 (I R2) = I (R)2
81.
ub
R = 2 R
Magnetic field at centre of loop is,
a 0I
B=
2R
P
1
B
0 I a 2 R
B=
2 a r 2 B1 R 2
et
0 I B2 R 1
B= a
2 r 2
85. Force on moving charge in magnetic field is
Ba
rg
given by,
82. m = nIA
For coil, magnetic induction at the centre, F = qvBsin θ
0nI but, θ = 90°
B= ∴ sin 90° = 1
Ta
2R
B 2R ∴ F = qvB
I=
0n Kinetic Energy of proton is given by
For n = 1, Area A = R2 E=
1 2
mv
B 2R 2BR 3 2
m= R2 =
0 0 2E
∴ velocity (v) =
m
83.
2E
∴ F=q B
T m
2 2 106 1.6 1019
F = 1.6 1019 2.5
1.6 1027
(L)g F = 8 1012 N
371
ns
2mqV =
Radius of circular path: r = BB L 16 0 I 16 8 2
qB
89. The electron is revolving along a circular path
r V where B is constant
K.E. = qV ….(i)
i.e., V r2
io
2
also, we know,
V2 r2 1
K.E. = mv2
V1 r1 2
at
V2 2r
2
but, v = r
=4
1 2 2
V r K.E. = mr ….(ii)
V2 = 4V 2
88. Case I,
lic Equating (i) and (ii)
1 2 2
mr = qV
Wire is bent to circle, 2
L = 2r mr 22 9.1 1031 (0.20) 2 (120) 2
V=
ub
L 2q 2 1.6 1019
r=
2
V = 1.638 109 V
magnetic induction at centre,
0I 0I 90.
Bcircle
q
P
2r L
2
2 Q
I
BA 0 ….(i)
et
Case II
KqQ
Wire is bent to square, Electrostatic force of attraction, F =
rg
r2
L = 4l mv 2
l But, centripetal force is given by, F =
L B l C r
l= 2
mv KqQ
Ta
4
= 2
1 2 r r
1
v
P r
Time taken by charge to complete a circular
2r
path is given by, T =
v
A D
r
T
v
1
T r3/2 …. v
Magnetic induction at P due to side BC r
0 I I
BBC (sin1 + sin2) But, for circular loop, B = 0
4 l 2r
372
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
I 93. Magnetic field at centre of coil
B
r 0ni
B1 = ….(i)
Q 2r
As current I =
T Magnetic field at distance h,
1 1 0 nir 2
I 3 B2 =
T
r2 2 h 2 r 2 3/ 2
r 3/ 2 0 nir 2
B =
r 2 3/ 2
h2
Br 5/2 r 3 1 2
r
1
i.e., B 5/ 2
Using equation (i)
r
ns
3/ 2
h2
B2 = B1 1
91. F qv B r2
I/2 3h 2
= B1 1 ….(Using Binomial equation)
io
2r 2
3h 2
I I B2 is less than B1 by fraction
at
2r 2
= 64 106 N/m
I L = 64 µN/m
et
Force of attraction between wires, 95. For a current carrying coil, a magnetic field line
0 I1I 2 forms a closed loop. Each of these loops cuts the
F= L
2 d plane twice, once outside the coil and once
rg
4 102
= 0.4 N
The force would cause displacement in spring I
F
x= where, k is spring constant.
k
0.4
= m Since the flux in two regions are equal but
50
opposite in direction.
Work done = F x
0.4 i = 0
= 0.4
50
= 3.2 103 J
= 3.2 mJ
373
q 2 1.6 1019 0 I
2. I= = 11. By using B (sin 1 sin 2 )
t 2 4 r
= 1.6 1019 A 0 I L
B (2sin )
L/2 17
0I 1.6 10 19
4 (L / 8) 8
B= = 0
2r 2 0.8 L/8 1
Also sin P
= 0 1019 17 L / 8 17 L/8
4 0 I L/2
q 2 B2 R 2 B
3. K.E = 17 L
2m
ns
=
1.6 10 0.5 4 10
19 2 2 1 2
12. Bc =
0 I
2r
2 1.67 1027
0Ir 2 0I r 2 0I
1.6
2
1038 25 102 16 102 Ba = = =
2 r2 r2
io
3/ 2
= 3 3/ 2
2r (2 ) 2r (2 2)
2 1.67 1027
1024 10 42
Ba : Bc = 1: 2 2
= = 306.58 1015
3.34 1027
at
13. Y
= 3.06 1013 J B C
13
3.06 10
= eV
1.6 1019 10 A
= 1.9 106 eV
lic 15 cm
= 1.9 MeV
F 0 I1I 2 4 107 1 1 10 A
4. = =
ub
L 2d 2 1 A D
F 7 10 cm
= 2 10 N/m 2 cm
L X
0 I 1 The effective force is only on AB and CD.
B
P
6. B=
2r r The force on AB is attractive and that on CD is
When r is doubled, B is halved. repulsive.
Force between two current carrying conductors
et
K 1.5 109 10 0 I1 I2
7. I= = is F1 between XY and AB = l attractive
NAB 100 15 104 0.025 2a
= 4 10–6 A = 4 A I I l
force and F2 between XY and CD = 0 1 2
2d
rg
Bq
8. Cyclotron frequency, f = repulsive force.
2m
1 1.6 1019 2 0 10 10 0.15 20 10 10 0.15
F1 – F2 =
f = 4 0.02 4 0.12
2 3.14 9.1 1031
Ta
374
Chapter 10: Magnetic Fields due to Electric
Current
| F | = 2 1.6 10
19
6 105 0 2 I
4 r = 27
= 1.92 1013 N 0 2 I r 2
0 I 4 3
15. Using, B = , (r 2 x 2 ) 2
2r 3
2I 2 2 (r 2 x 2 ) 2
B = 107 = 107 = 8 108 T = 27
r 5 r3
1
(r 2 x 2 ) 2
IAB 2 10 5
=3
16. K= = = 2 106 Nm/degree r
10
r2 x2
=9
17. Here, net field, r2
r2 + x2 = 9r2
ns
B = Field due to circular portion
Field due to straight portion 8r2 = x2
I I I 1 I( 1) x= 2 2r
= 0 0 0 1 0
2r 2r 2r 2r 21. Refer shortcut 3(vi)
io
(perpendicular to the plane of page and directed Alternate method:
into it) Here, the wire does not produce any magnetic
Field due to circular portion is directed into the field at O because the conductor lies on the line
at
plane of the paper and that due to straight through O. Also, the loop does not produce
portion is directed outward and perpendicular to magnetic field at O.
the plane of paper. Thus net field is directed into
the plane of the paper. 22. Using shortcut 1,
lic Here, n = 2
p 2 (mv) 2 (qBR) 2 | Bc | = 4 | B c | = 4 0.2 = 0.8 T
18. Energy, E =
2m 2m 2m
0 I1I 2
mv 2 23. F= l
ub
qvB 2d
R (2I1 )I2 2 0I1I2 2
(2e BR) 2 F = 0 l = l = F
Then, E = 2 3d 3 2d 3
2 4m p
P
or Ed = 2E = 2 2 = 4 MeV
0 I
19. Magnetic induction, B =
rg
2r
For the coil,
2r = 4(2r) r = r/4
40 I
Ta
0 2I
20. Magnetic field at centre, B =
4 r
Let the distance be x.
Magnetic field at a point on the axis,
0 2 I r 2
B =
4 (r 2 x 2 ) 2
3
B B
Given, B = = 27
27 B'
375
11 Magnetic Materials
Hints
I
Classical Thinking 5. T = 2
M BH
ns
1 MBsin 1 sin 1 sin 90 1 Where I is moment of inertia
5. = = = = =
2 MBsin 2 sin 2 sin 0 0 m(L2 b2 )
I= ….For rectangular block
12
6. = MB sin (m = Mass of magnet)
io
M = MB sin
T m,
1 = B sin 90 [ = 90]
Hence, if mass is increased 4 times, period gets
B = 1 Wb/m2 doubled.
at
Also, 1 Wb/m2 = 104 gauss
e
M 7. Orbital magnetic moment M L
10. Gyromagnetic ratio = 0 2m e
L0
lic Angle made by orbital angular momentum with
14. r < 1 and r > 1. direction of orbital magnetic moment is 180.
20. With rise in temperature, their magnetic e
susceptibility decreases, i.e., 8. I= = e and I
ub
T
1
m Minitial = IA
T
Mfinal = 2IA = 2M
52. Soft iron is highly ferromagnetic.
9. As we know for circulating electron magnetic
P
moment
Critical Thinking 1
M evr ....(i)
2
et
d
1. = MBH sin = MBH cos and angular momentum J mvr ....(ii)
d
eJ
This will be maximum when = 0. From equations (i) and (ii) M
2m
rg
2. = MB sin sin
10. The magnetic moment of the revolving electron
1 sin 1 sin 90
is
2 sin 2 / 2 sin 2
e 2r
M = IA = r2 But T =
Ta
1
sin 2 = 2 = 30 T v
2
ev evr
angle of rotation = 90 30 = 60 M= r2 =
2r 2
3. W = –MB(cos2 cos1) 1.6 10 2.5 106 0.5 1010
19
M=
Here, 1 = 0 , 2 = 60 2
W = – 2.5 3 105 (
1
– 1) = 1023 Am2
2
= 37.5 106 = 37.5 J 11. r = 0.5 Å = 0.5 1010 m,
f = 1010 MHz = 1016 Hz
4 I The revolving electron is equivalent to a current
4. B=
mT 2 M = IA = (ef) r2
B=
4 10 8 106
= 1.6 10–3 T M = 1.6 1019 1016 3.14 (0.5 1010)2
5 102 (2)2 = 1.256 1023 Am2
376
ns
0.4 104 5000
= (600 1) = 599
25. Diamagnetic substances are repelled by
16. Relative permeability, magnetic field.
0.1256
R = =
io
0 4107
26. Repelled due to induction of similar poles.
0.1256 30. On heating, different domains have net
= magnetization in them which are randomly
4 3.14 107
at
distributed. Thus, the net magnetisation of the
1256 104
= = 105 substance due to various domains decreases to
12.56 107 lic minimum.
M net M 1 32. As every atom of a diamagnetic material is not a
17. Mz = = =
V Al 5 10 6 102
4
complete magnet in itself, its susceptibility is
= 3.3 104 A/m not affected by the temperature.
20. The bar magnet has coercivity 4 103 Am 1 i.e., Net dipole moment
it requires a magnetic intensity H = 4 103 Am1 Mnet = 8 1010 9 1024 A m2 = 72 1014 A m2
to get demagnetised. Let i be the current carried M net
Magnetization, MZ =
Ta
ns
43. In the given figure, OQ refers to retentivity while
2
OR refers to coercivity, for permanent magnet
both retentivity and coercivity should be high. I
5. T = 2
49. Iron is ferromagnetic in nature. Lines of force mB
io
due to external magnetic field prefer to pass When magnet is cut into two equal halves,
through iron. m I
m = , I =
50. 2 2
at
B1
Time period
1 2
I
N S S N T = 2
mB
d
M1
M2
lic T =
1
2
T
2 1
Both the magnets are placed in the field of one
another, hence potential energy of dipole (2) is T = T
ub
2M I
U2 = –M2B1 cos 0 = –M2B1 = –M2 0 . 3 1 6. Period of oscillation T = 2
4 d MB
dU
By using F = , 7.5 10 6
dr T = 2 = 0.665 s
6.7 10 2 0.01
P
0 MM I 12 106
= 6 14 2 T = 2 = 2
4 d MB (6 102 2 102 )
0 6M1M 2
It can be proved F1 F2 = F = 1
4 d4 T = 2
rg
10
1
F Now, for 20 oscillations
d4
t = 20 T
B 1
Ta
378
I M net
T 2 17. Intensity of magnetization =
M B Volume
M net
M1 2L
2 =
m 2L length×area of cross-section
T I M 12 2 12
= = = 8 3
T I M M1 L2 m 3 1 =
4L 3 10 2 2 104
12 4
= 5 105 A/m
T = 2 2 T
19. Magnetic field inside a solenoid is given by,
I
9. T = 2 B=nI
MB
= 0 r n I = 0 (1 + ) n I.
1
T 20. m r 1 m 5500 1 5499
ns
B
T B 21. H = nI
T B H 3 103
Also 30 osc/min T = 2 s I 3A
n 1000
io
B 2
T 2= 2s
B / A 6 104
2B 2 22. = = = =
H H HA 2000 3 104
q e
at
nh
10. L= and I = = = 10–3 Wb/Am
2 T 2
Now, M = IA
23. B = Mz Also, B =
e eR 2 A
R2 =
M=
2 2
lic =
B
=
e 2 nh enh Mz AMz
M= R =
2 2mR 2 4m 5 105
M enh 2 e =
ub
= = 0.5 104 5000
L 4m nh 2m
= 2 104 Wb/Am
M e 1
11. = = specific charge of an electron 26. B = (1 + )H
L 2m 2
For paramagnetic materials, is small and
P
379
1 T 2 200
34. 1 2
T 2 T1 0.0075 100
1.0 105 2 = 0.0150
T2 = (273 + 27)
1.5 105 39. Even in the case of a permanent magnet all the
= 200 domains are not perfectly aligned due to thermal
K = 73 C agitations.
1 T 40. Diamagnetic material is repelled by magnetic
35. 2 1
T 1 T2 field. This magnetic field energy of current
2 273 73 sources will be converted into potential energy
of the rod which is set up by switching on the
0.0075 273 173
current source.
ns
Hints to Evaluation Test
io
= 200 0.25 sin 30 absence of tungsten, B0 = 0H
= 25 N-m When filled with tungsten, B = 0(1 + )H
The increase in field = B – B0
at
2. W = –MB(cos2 cos1) = 0H
Here, 1 = 0 , 2 = 60 The percent increase in the magnetic field
1 B B0
W = – 4.5 2 105 ( – 1) = 100
2 B0
= 45 106 = 45 J
lic 0H 100
=
0 H
I
3. Period of oscillation T = 2 = 100
MB
ub
= 4.6 10–5 100
T = 2
5.5106
= 0.687 s = 4.6 103
4.6102 0.01
8. The relative permeability of the rod is given by,
Time taken for 10 oscillations = T 10 = 6.87 s R = 1 + m = 1 + 599 = 600
P
4. Magnetic field lines avoid passing through The permeability of iron = = 0R
diamagnetic materials. Due to this reason, the = 4 107 600
bar of diamagnetic material aligns perpendicular B = H = 4 107 600 800
et
380
ns
12. Mean radius = r
68
= = 7 cm
2
io
= 7 102 m
Number of turns/length,
N 1500
n= 3412.19
at
2r 2 7 102
As B = ni, where B = 2 T and i = 0.5 A
B 2
=
ni 3412.19 0.5
= 11.7 104 Tm A1
lic
11.7 104
r = = 931.5
0 4107
ub
13. B = 0 (H + I) where, I be intensity of
magnetization.
B
I = H
0
P
H
= H
0
et
= r H H
= (r 1) H
For a solenoid of n turns per unit length carrying
current i; H = ni.
rg
I = (r 1) ni
Here, n = 6 turns/cm = 600 turns/m
I = (900 1) 600 0.4
Ta
381
12 Electromagnetic Induction
Hints
ns
y
35. = LI L = = henry
1. The magnitude of induced e.m.f is directly I x
proportional to the rate of change of magnetic
flux. Induced charge doesn’t depend upon time. 36. = LI = 5 103 2 = 0.01 weber
io
Since e B, so by reducing magnetic field to 10 106
5. 37. L= = = 4 103 H = 4 mH
half, induced e.m.f. will also be reduced to half. I 2.5 103
at
d 240
6. |e|= = =2V
dt 2 60 dI
39. e=L = (2) (0.5) = + 1 V
3
d 3 10 2 10 3 dt
7. |e|
dt 25
= 0.04 103 = 0.04 mV
lic 40. Inductance of coil,
e 8
L= = = 0.2 H
9. The energy of the field increases with the dI 8 4
magnitude of the field. Lenz’s law infers that dt 0.1
ub
there is an opposite field created due to increase dI
or decrease of magnetic flux around a conductor 41. e = L = 5 2 = 10 V
dt
so as to hold the law of conservation of energy.
e 5 5
dB 42. L= = = 103 H = 5 mH
P
44. n = LI
= 90
n 500 4 103
= 1 4 103 0.4 cos 90 = 0 L= = 1 henry
I 2
17. e.m.f. induced between ends of conductor,
Ta
dI
e = Blv = 5 10–3 1.5 5 = 37.5 10–3 V 45. | e | L
dt
18. e L 10 10
1= L 25 mH
19. With the increasing speed, increases. Thus 0.5
current reduces due to increase in the back
1 2 1
e.m.f. 46. Energy stored E = LI = 50 10–3 4
Also, according to Ohm’s law, 2 2
Ve = 0.1 J
I=
R
and e 47. uB =
B2
=
2 10 = 159.2 J/m3
2 2
20 2 4 107
Hence, as increases, e increases reducing
current.
49. Induced current is produced in secondary coil,
20. Commutator converts a.c. into fluctuating dc. hence main current remains same.
382
ns
12. e=
Critical Thinking t
50 (0 2 102 ) 100 104 cos0o
2. As through coil is constant and there is no t=
0.1
relative motion between magnet and coil, t = 0.1 s
io
neither e.m.f. nor current is induced in coil.
13. d = nAB = 10 4 102 102
n(2 1 )
3. e= = 4 103 Wb
at
t
d 4 103
50(1 106 31 106 ) |e|= = = 8 103 V = 8 mV
= dt 0.5
0.02
= 7.5 10–2 V dB
lic 14. | e | = nA
dt
d
= 100 50 10–4
0.1 0.05 0.5 V
e 1 d
= =
dt
4. I= (4t2 – 4t +1) 0.05
R R R dt
ub
8t 4 8 (1 / 2) 4 d dB
I= = =0 15. e=– = – nA
R 10 dt dt
dB gauss tesla
d d Now, = 108 = 104
5. e=– = – (6t2 5t +1) dt s s
P
dt dt
e = –10 10–3 104 = – 100 V
= (12t 5)
e = 100 volt (numerically)
As t = 0.25 s, e = [12 (0.25) 5]
e 100
= (3 5) = 2 V I= = = 5 ampere
et
R 20
e 2
I= = = 0.2 A
R 10
16. |e| =
d BdA
B
r 2 L2
dt dt dt
rg
d
6. e= 2
dt 44
0.2 222 104
= (10t 4)
=
e = (10 0.1 4) = 3 volt 0.4
Ta
= 6.6 103 V
d d
7. |e|= = (5t2 + 3t + 16) = (10t + 3)
dt dt d d dB B
17. |e| (BA) A =1 = 5B
When t = 3 s, e3 = (10 3 + 3) = 33 V dt dt dt 0.2
When t = 4 s, e4 = (10 4 + 3) = 43 V
d dA d 2 dr
Hence e.m.f. induced in fourth second 18. |e| = B B (r ) = 2Br
dt dt dt dt
= e4 e3 = 43 33 = 10 V
|e| = 2 0.04 2 102 2 103 = 3.2 V
8. The energy of the field increases with the
magnitude of the field. Lenz’s law infers that 20. = 90 30 = 60, 1 T = 104 G
there is an opposite field created due to = nAB cos
increase or decrease of magnetic flux around a = 100 ( 104) (106 104) cos 60
conductor so as to hold the law of conservation 1
= 100 102 = 0.5 Wb
of energy. 2
383
ns
= B A = B L2 = constant. magnetic flux increases (nonlinearly). Also
d there is a change in polarity of induced emf
e = = zero when the magnet passes on to the other side of
dt
the coil.
io
25. e = Blv IR = Blv
32. 2 = 377 = 60.03 Hz
IR
v =
Bl 33. e = IR
at
Il l 440 1
= .... R I= = A
BA.l A (4000 400) 10
I 3 10 3 9 106 Voltage across the load, V = IR
= =
BA
27 10 9
2 1.8 107
3
lic =
1
10
4000 = 400 V
= 8
= 101 = 0.075
36 10 4 34. For the A.C. generator,
v = 7.5 102 m/s Flux = NAB cos t and I = I0 sin t
ub
26. e = vt Bl = (v sin ) Bl = vBl sin 30 When I = 0, sin t = 0 or t = 0 and then
1 = NAB cos 0 = NAB
= 10 0.5 1 = 2.5 V
2 = 1000 2 0.2 = 400 Wb
Note: When I = 0, then is maximum.
P
Induced e.m.f.,
v cos
e = BA sin
l
= 0 ….[Given]
28. The magnitude of induced e.m.f. is given by
rg
lv 0.5 5 22
= 2 2 7 105 100 = 88 mV
7
29. Potential difference between B
1 37. e0 = nAB = 2fnAB
O and A is V0 VA Bl 2
2 2000
=2 50 80 104 0.05
1 2 60
O and B is V0 VB Bl
2 4
A B = V
O 3
30. B
38. e0 = 2 f nAB
600 4 4
= 2 (5000)(50 10 ) 8 10
A P 60
l = 12560 104
= 1.256 V
384
ns
B 2l 2 v 2 where N is the total number of turns.
Electrical power = P = i2R = As L N2
R 2
Since v is doubled, the electrical power becomes L2 N
= 2 = (2)2
four times. Since heat dissipation per second is
io
L1 N1
proportional to electrical power, it becomes 4 L2 = 4L1
times.
0 N 2A
at
41. The emf induced in the rod of length 0.5 m is 51. L= or L N2
l
e = Bnvl = 0.50 4 0.5 = 1 volt 2
induced emf is from B towards A. L 2 500
The current in the circuit ABCD, L2 = 75 mH
e 1
ub
i= = =5A 52. Let 1 = 2 =
R 0.2
The force required to maintain the motion
L= I=
= ilB = 5 0.5 0.5 = 1.25 N I L
Mechanical work done by the force per second
P
I1 = , I2 =
or mechanical power L1 L2
= Fv = 1.25 4 1 = 5 watts
I1 L L 2 103 1
= 1 = 2 =
et
R 53. L = 0nI
l2
2 2 L2
Bl 2 ….( n and I are same)
= 2 2 = 3.125 103 J L1 0
R
L2 = rL1 = 900 0.18 = 162 mH
Ta
dI
44. e=L L = volt-s/ampere 54. U=
1 2
LI
dt
2
2
45. N = LI U2 I
2
= 2
1 1
i.e.,
LI 8 10 3 5 103 U1 I1 2 4
= =
N 400 1
U2 = U1
= 107 = 0 Wb 4
4
di 2 0.5
55. emf = L = = = 50
nd LdI dA LdI dt 0.03
46. nB
dt dt dt dt 1 1
Estored = Li2 = 50 0.52
11 5 2 1 2 2
L 3
L 10 H
103 2 10 = 25 0.25 = 6.25 J
385
ns
the increase in . Hence decreases (By Right 66. For 100% efficient transformer, VSIS = VPIP
Hand Rule). The induced current will be counter
VS I P N S
clockwise. = =
VP IS N P
dI I I IP 25
e = M = M 2 1
io
59. =
dt t 4 100
05 IP = 1 A
= 4 3 = 2 104 V
10
at
68. PP = PS = ISES
60. Maximum induced e.m.f., PS 2000
IS = = 10 A
dI ES 200
e = M
dt
d
lic Now,
NS
NP
I
= P
IS
= 0.01 (5 sin 200 t)
dt N P I P 1000 0.1
NS = = = 10
= 0.01 5 200 cos 200 IS 10
ub
= 0.05 200 ….( cos 200 = 1)
eS NS 1500
= 10 V 69. Using, we get,
ep N P 50
61. VP = VI = 300 volt, eS = 30 eP
VS = Vo = 15 kV = 15 103 volt
P
d
NP V 300 2 1
Now, | ep | = = 4 volt
= P = = = dt
NS VS 15 103 100 50 eS = 30 4 = 120 V
et
VS N N Pout VI
62. = S VS = S VP 70. n% = 100 = S S 100
VP NP NP Pin VP I P
500 2 440
= 220 = 1100 volt 0.8 100 = 100
rg
100 220 I P
NS V IP = 5A
63. = S
NP VP Vs I p
71. Using,
Ta
200 V Vp Is
= S
100 120 11000 2
VS = 240 V Ip 100 A
220
VS I
= P d
VP IS 73. e = n
240 10 dt
= e n d
120 IS i=
R R dt
IS = 5 A
R 3R
Given, R + ,
VP N P 500 1 2 2
64.
VS N S 2500 5 d = 2 1, dt = t
200
2n 2 1 2n 1 2
VP = = 40 V i=
5 3R t 3Rt
386
ns
e 0.15 d d 2 2
I= = = 0.05 e= (10Ba cost) = 10 Ba sint
R 3 dt dt
F = BIl = 0.15 0.05 0.5 = 3.75 10–3 N 86. Comparing given equation with the standard
form,
io
77. Component of the length perpendicular to the
field l = l sin 60 e = e0 sin t we get,
e = 200 sin 100
3
= 1.0 = 0.5 3 e0 = 200, = 100
at
2 Now, e0 = nAB
e = l Bv = 0.5 3 0.5 10 B=
e0
= 4.3 volt An
78.
lic
The e.m.f. induced is directly proportional to =
200
= 0.01 T
(0.25 0.25) 1000 100
rate at which flux is intercepted which in turn
varies directly as the speed of rotation of the 87. It is evident that when viewed from the magnet
generator. side, the induced current will be anticlockwise.
ub
e2 f 2
ef S
e1 f1
120 N
f2 = 1500 r.p.m. = 1800 r.p.m.
100
P
79. F1 = mg
When bar is just ready to levitate,
IlB = mg
et
P = eI = BlI
1 0.5
= 1.25 103 0.1 1 50
E = IR = (20)25 = 500 V = 6.25 103 W = 6.25 mW
d e = nBA sin t
Ta
ns
d
3. e = = (100t) d
dt 10. e=
dt
At t = 2 s,
= B.A
e 100 2
io
I= = 0.5 A Here A = r2 as magnetic field is restricted to
R 400
region of radius r.
4. 1 = 4 104 Wb 2
e = r .
dB
in loop 1
at
2 = 0.1 1 = 0.4 104 Wb dt
d = |2 1| = 3.6 104 Wb As the loop 2 is outside the region of magnetic
dt = t second
lic field, e = 0 for loop 2.
d 11. e = Bvl = 0.1 × 15 × 0.1 = 0.15 V
e=
dt (Considering B, l and v are mutually
3 3.6 104 perpendicular.)
0.72 10 =
t 12. Induced emf, e = Blv
ub
4
3.6 10 = 5 10–4 0.1 5
t=
0.72 103 = 2.5 10–4 V/s
t = 0.5 second
13. e =Bvl
n 2 1 d = 5.0 105 1.50 2
P
e
5. I= = …(e = n )
R R t dt = 10.0 105 1.5
n 2 1 n 2 1 = 15 10–5
= =
(R 4R) t 5Rt = 0.15 mV
et
d 5
iR = 15. v = 1080 km/hr = 1080 = 300 m/s
dt 18
d = R I dt Induced emf
This means e = B l v = 1.75 105 40 300 = 0.21 V
Ta
d e = = 0.125 V
e= = (10t 4) 2 2
dt
Br 2 0.2 10 2
2
At, t = 0.2 s, e = (10 0.2 4) = 2 V
18. e=
e 2 2 2
I= 0.2 A
R 10 e=4V
388
dQ I e
t
Bl 2 0 dt
e= ….( r = l) 0 t =0
2
1 1
Q = I0 0
ns
20. e = Bleff v (where leff = Diameter) e e
= B(2r)v I0
= 2rBv Q=
and R is at higher potential by Fleming’s right
io
hand rule. di
32. E= M
dt
The induced emf e = l . v× B
21. d(5sin10t)
E = 2 10–2
at
dt
= l(vB sin ) = Bvl
= 2 10–2 5(cos 10t) 10
e
Induced current, i = Emax = 2 10–2 5 1 10 =
R
= 4500 cos t = 1
= 4.5 × 103 volt
dI
= Im
= 4.5 kV dt
et
e = 0.005 10 100 = 5
23. Maximum emf
e0 = NBA 34. Q = M IP
= 100 × 0.01 × 2 × 102 × 2 × 3.14 × 50 But
rg
= 6.28 V dIQ
|ep| = M
dt
25. Time varying magnetic field gives rise to eddy
e dt
currents in accordance with Lenz’s law. M= P
Ta
dIQ
27. Given: N = 1000; I = 4A; = 4 10–3 Wb. e P dt
total magnetic flux linked with solenoid = N Q = IP
dIQ
N
Self inductance, L = ….( = LI) 15 103
I P = 1.8
10
1000 4 103
L= =1H P = 2.7 103 Wb = 2.7 mWb
4
35. As efficiency is always less than unity in
28. I practice, output power is less than the input
If solenoid is pulled out then flux decreases power.
resulting into decrease in the value of current.
Poutput 100 100 10
1 1 36. = 100 90%
Pinput 1 110 11
29. U = LI2 = 2 1 = 1 J 220
2 2 2
389
ns
Pi IR + E L – VAB = 0
dt
80
Po = Pi = 4 103 W VBA = 2 2 + 12 (5 103 102)
100
But Po = es Is di
isdecreasing hence rate is negative
io
es Is = 0.8 4000 dt
0.8 4000 VBA = 4 + 12 + 0.5 = 8.5 volt
Is =
240 dI
at
Is = 13.33 A 47. VAB – IR + E + L =0
dt
40. Transformer works on A.C. alone which VAB = (2) (7) – 4 – (9 10–3) (103)
changes in magnitude as well as in direction. = 14 – 4 – 9
41.
N s Vs
lic VAB = 1 V
N p Vp d
48. E=
dt
50 V
s d B.A
ub
1000 220 E=
dt
Vs = 11 V
Now, VsIs = VpIp dB d 0 I
E = A = A
11 Is = 220 1 dt dt 2 vt
0 d –1
P
Is = 20 A AI (t )
2v dt
VS N I
42. = S = P
VP NP IS AI 0 t–2
2v
et
N S IS 25 1
i.e., IP = = × 2 = 50 A E 2
NP 1 t
90 Area of square loop, A = 10 cm 10 cm
rg
390
54. Induced emf e = Blv
kx
x
B iBl P + S
+
x a v
x v
Since, i is induced current, 2
e Blv
i= =
R R Q R
ns
Blv a a
F = – kx – × lB 2 2
R
a
B 2l 2 x
F = – kx – ×v 2
R
io
Above expression shows it is a case of damped εPQRS = εPQ + εRS
oscillations. 0I 0 I
= av av
Comparing it with, a a
2 x 2 x
at
F = – kx – bv, 2 2
B 2l 2 0 Iav 2 2
b= =
R 2 2x a 2x a
For damped oscillations, amplitude is given by,
A = A0e–bt/2m
lic =
0 Iav 2x a 2x a
(2x a)(2x a)
A0
For A = = A0e–bt/2m 2 0 Ia 2 v
e =
bt (2x a)(2x a)
ub
= –1
2m 55. e
B 2l 2
t
R =1 +
t
P
2m
2mR 2 50 103 10 –
t= 2 2
0.1 0.1
2 2
Bl
e = nAB sint
et
t = 104s
e changes direction twice per revolution.
m 50 103 2π
Now, T = 2π = 2π 56. Current passing through the solenoid I(t)
k 0.5 10
= I0t(1 t)
rg
Number of oscillations,
Magnetic field B at the centre of the solenoid is
t 10 4 10
N= 5000 B = µ0nI(t) = µ0nI0t(1 t)
T 2π
Area of the small ring placed co-axially at the
Ta
ns
0 3 3 1 d d
e = r2 (I0 et ) Using, e = (B r2)
L 3 2 dt dt
dr
0 r 2 3 3 1 = (B) 2r
io
= I0 et dt
L 2 2
Hence during this period, the emf is as shown in
I r 2 3 3 1 t (D).
at
= 00 e
L 3 2
11. Assertion and Reason both are correct and
d reason is correct explanation of assertion
2. |e|=
dt
lic because e = L
di
dt
1 0.1
=
0.1 12. Rate of work done by external agent is:
0.9
ub
= =9V dW BIL(dx)
0.1 = BIL v and thermal power
dt dt
e 9 dissipated in resistor = eI = (BvL) I
I= = = 0.09 A
R 100 Clearly both are equal. Hence (A) is correct.
P
3
hence (B) is correct.
10
e
Both the statements are true and statement 2 is Since, I =
R
correct explanation of statement 1.
On doubling ‘R’, current and hence required
rg
392
Es Ns
15.
Ep Np
Ns
Es = Ep
Np
1000
= 20
100
= 200 V
ns
The frequency, in a transformer, remains
unaffected.
As = MI
io
16.
M=
I
at
6 102
=
0.03
=2H
17.
lic
Mutual inductance of the pair of coils depends
on relative position and orientation of the two
coils. This is in addition to other factors not
ub
given in the alternatives.
dI 2 2
18. = 80 A/s
dt 0.05
P
dI
As e = L
dt
16 = L (80) ; L = 0.2 H
et
dt
d
= (NAB cos t)
dt
Ta
= NAB(sin t)
emax = NAB sin 90
= NAB
20. M= L1L 2
= 49
= 6 mH
393
13
-
AC Circuits
Hints
ns
Classical Thinking Comparing these equations with the standard
forms,
9. Ipeak = I0 = Ir.m.s 2 = 10 2 A e = e0 sint and
I = I0 sint we get,
io
10. e = 100 sin (100 t + 0.6) e0 = 100 V and
Comparing with the standard form, I0 = 100 103 A
e = e0 sin (t + ) we get, e0 I 0
P = e rms Irms =
at
Peak volt = e0 = 100 V 2 2
100 100 103 10
12. e0 = erms 2 = 220 2 311 volt = = =5W
2 2 2
13. er.m.s. =
e0
=
423
300 V
lic 40. At resonance, VL = VC
2 2 VT = VR = 100 V
e0 141.4 1
14. erms = = 100 V 41. Using, fr =
ub
2 1.414 2 LC
1
18. The reactance of the circuit is zero either when =
the circuit contains only resistor or the circuit 2 100 106 4 108
contains an inductor and capacitor connected in 1
=
P
1 1
23. XC = = 2. In D.C. ammeter, a coil is free to rotate in the
C 2fC
magnetic field of a fixed magnet. If an
XC = ....[f = 0 for D.C]
alternating current is passed through such a coil,
1 1 the torque will reverse its direction each time
24. XC = C= the current changes direction and the average
2fC 2fX C
value of the torque will be zero.
1
C= = 0.5 104 = 50 F 3. The instantaneous current in a circuit is,
400
2 25 i = sin (t + )
As i = i0 sin (t + )
XL XC 300 200 100 i0 = 1 A
25. tan = = =
R 100 100 i0 1
irms = = A
tan = 1 = 45 2 2
394
ns
= tan
e0 2fnAB R
7. erms = = = 2 fnAB
2 2
1000 4 4 2
= 2 2 50
50 (30 10 ) 5 10 1 2 50 106
io
60 = tan
10
5.55 mV
8. e = 200 sin 50 t 90
at
Comparing this equation with the standard form, XL 2 f 2 L 2 2f1 2L1
e = e0 sin t we get, e0 = 200 V 16. XL = fL =4
X L1 f1L1 f1L1
200
erms = V
2
lic X L2 = 4 1000 = 4000
erms 200
Now, irms = = = 2 2 = 2.828 17. The impedance of combination,
R 2 50
1
Z = 2fL
ub
9. Comparing the given equation with the standard 2fC
form, i = i0 sin t we get, i0 = 4 A 1
= 2 50 1.2
i0 4 2 50 105
irms = = = 2 2 ampere
2 2 = 376.8 318.5 = 58.3
P
10. Comparing given equation with the standard 18. e= e2R (eC eL )2
form,
e = e0 sin t we get, = 2f = (40) 2 (80 40) 2
et
2
i rms Rt = 3 I Rt
2
X L e L L
2
tan 45 = = =
i 2
=32 X R eR R
rms
L = R eL e
irms = 2 3 = 3.46 A
Ta
R R
L= = = 45
12. Z= 2
R +X 2
L = 10 2 2f
100 eR
e0 = 2 e = 220 2 V =
2 3.14 1000
e0 220 2 100
i0 = = = 22 A = 10–3
Z 10 2 6.28
16 10–3 H = 16 mH
1 1 1
13. XC = = = e
C 2fC 2 3.14 50 10 106 20. i=
318.5 Z
e 50
irms =
erms
=
200
= 0.6 A Z= = = 25
XC 318.5 I 2
Z2 = R2 + (XC – XL)2
i0 = irms 2 = 0.6 2 A 252 = 202 + (XC – XL)2
395
ns
4
XL = 2fL
XL CR = 1
L = Given that, = 100 rad/s
2f
1 1
173.2 CR = s
io
= = 0.55 H 100
2 3.14 50
From all the given options, only option (A) is
120 correct.
22. R =
at
0.5
e
= 240 27. i=
R X L2
2
Effective impedance for A.C. source,
120 220 220
= 300 i= = = 3.33 A
Z=
0.40
lic (20) (2 50 0.2)
2 2 66
Using, Z2 = R2 + X 2L
L 1
E 28. We have, XC and X L L 2 f
XL = Z2 R 2 C 2f
120 V
ub
= (300)2 (240)2
30. In series LCR circuit,
= 180 2
1
2fL = 180 Z= R 2 + L
c
180
L =
P
2
2f 1
300 1000 0.9
2
= 6
180 1.5 1000 2 10
= = 0.48 H
2(60) 2
106
et
= 9 104 900
e e 2 103
23. i= =
Z 1
2
C
For DC, f = zero
1 e 100 X L(AC)
Now, L – = = = infinity
C i 5 X L(D C)
= 20 ….(i)
If the value of capacitor is decreased to half then, V 12
32. R= = =3
1 100 I 4
L – = = 10
C 10 e 12
Z = rms = =5
2 i rms 2.4
L
2
= 10 ….(ii) Z2 = R2 + XL2
C XL2 = 25 9 = 16
By equation (i) – equation (ii), we get XL = L = 4
1 4
= 10 L= = 0.08 H = 8 102 H
C 50
396
ns
XL – XC = 100 – 40 = 60 43. Comparing given equations with the standard
Z = R 2 (X L X C ) 2 = 802 602 = 100 forms,
R 80 e = e0 sin t and I = I0 sin(t + )
Power factor, cos = = = 0.8
io
Z 100 e0 = 200 V, we get, I = 1 A, = rad
3
37. IWL = Irms sin 200 1
erms = , Irms =
3
at
2 2
3 = 2 sin sin = = 60
2 P = ermsIrms cos
1 200 1
Power factor = cos = cos 60 = = cos = 50 watt
2 2 2 3
1
lic 44. Z = (R) 2 (X L X C ) 2
38. cos =
2
L = (8) 2 (31 25) 2
= 60, tan 60 =
ub
R = 64 36
3R 3 100 3 = 10
L= = = H
2 50 R 8
Power factor, cos = = 0.8
2
Z 10
1
P
2
2.5 When energy is stored equally between the
2 50 106
electric and magnetic fields, then energy in the
Z= (3000) 2 (4000) 2 = 5 10
3 1
capacitor is E2 = E1
rg
2
R 3000
Power factor, cos = = = 0.6 If Q is the charge on the capacitor in this case,
Z 5 103
Q2
v 2 cos then E2 = .
Power dissipated, P = erms Irms cos = rms 2C
Ta
Z
Q2 1 Q 2
(200) 2 0.6
P= 2C 2 2C
5 103
Q
= 4.8 W Q = .
2
2
Ip I 2p R
40. Power = I2R = R= 1
2 2 47. Magnetic field energy LI2 changes from
2
41. Comparing the given equations with the max. to zero, when current changes from I0 to
standard forms, zero i.e. in T/4 sec.
e = e0 sin t and I = I0 sin (t + )
T
= 5 ms, T = 20 ms = 20 103 s
we get, 4
1 1 103
e0 = 100 V, I0 = 100 mA and = rad f= 3
= 50 Hz
3 T 20 10 20
397
ns
8
4 10
60. Phase difference relative to the current,
104
= = 5 103 rad/s
2 = 314 t 314t = rad
6 6
1
io
51. f=
2 LC 61. Comparing given equation with the standard
1 form, I = I0 sin t we get,
f= 80 Hz
2 1
at
2 2 2 106 = 200 T = s
T 100
1 1 T
52. fr = = The current takes s to reach the peak value.
2 LC 2 9 103 10 106 4
=
1
=
10000
= 0.530 kHz
lic
Time to reach the peak value =
1
s
2 3 10 4 6 3.14 400
1 1 2
53. Using, fr = L for fixed fr 62. e 2L = e e 2R
ub
2 LC C = (20)2 – (12)2
L 2 C1 C L = 400 – 144
L2 =
L1 C 2 2C 2 = 256
54. Impedance of LCR circuit will be minimum at eL = 16 V
P
resonant frequency
63. XL = L = 2fL = 2 50 0.7 220
1 1 105 1
f0 = = = s Z= R 2 X 2L = 220 2 220 2 = 220 2 ohm
2 LC 2π 1×103 × 0.1×106 2π
et
ev 220 1
55. Given that, VL = VC Iv = = = = 0.707 A
Z 220 2 2
1 1
fr =
rg
2 LC 2 3 103 30 106 2
1
10 4 64. Z R 2 2fL
= 530 Hz 2fC
2 3
From above equation at f = 0 z =
Ta
1 1 1
56. fr = fr When f (resonant frequency)
2 LC LC 2 LC
1/ 2
(f r ) 2 1 LC ZR
L1C1 1 1
(f r )1 L 2C 2 L 2C 2 1
For f Z starts increasing.
1/ 2 2 LC
LC 1
= 1/ 2 i.e., for frequency 0 – fr, Z decreases and for fr
2L 4C (8)
to , Z increases. This is justified by graph C.
(f r ) 2 1
(f r )1 2 2 1
65. Brightness Pconsumed for Bulb
f1 R
(fr)2 =
2 2 As, resistance of the bulb remains same for both
f AC and DC supplies, the brightness will be
(fr)2 = ….[ (fr)1 = f]
2 2 equal in both the cases.
398
ns
e = e0 sin t ….(i) e 2 (iR) 2 (220) 2 (10 8) 2
q L2 = = 2
we know that, C = i 4 f
2 2 2
10 4 (3.14) 2 (50) 2
e ~ L2 = 0.425 102
q = Ce = Ce0 sin t
io
L = 0.065 H
dq
I= = Ce0 cos t
dt 13. Given, eL = 40 V; eC = 120 V; eR = 60 V
I = I0 cos t ….(taking I0 = Ce0)
at
e2R eL eC
2
Source voltage, e =
I = I0 sin (/2 + t) ….(ii)
Thus, on comparing (i) and (ii), we see that = (60) 2 (40 120) 2
current leads the voltage by a phase angle of
= (60) 2 (80) 2
/2.
lic V = 100 volt
1
6. XC = 14.
C Vo = 200 V
angular frequency () for D.C. source is Zero ~
ub
Capacitive reactance becomes infinite.
R C L
1
XC X L 2fC 2fL
8. tan = tan 45 =
P
R R R = 100 , Vo = 200 V, f = 50 Hz
C-I: When capacitance is removed then circuit
1 is L R circuit
C=
et
2 f (2fL R) X
= tan1 L
XL 3R R
9. tan 3
R R X
60 = tan1 L
rg
60o / 3 100
XL
XL tan 60 =
10. tan = = 1 = 45 or /4 100
R
Ta
XL
1 3=
L C
100
XL XC
11. tan = = XL = 100 3
R R
C-II : when inductor is removed then circuit is
100 1 R C circuit
3
2 3.14 50 10 103 XC
2 3.14 50 = tan1
= 2 R
10
X
60 = tan1 C
100
XC
i.e. tan = 1 tan 60 =
= tan–1(1) 100
= 45 XC = 100 3
399
Now, Z = R 2 (X L X C ) 2 XC 1 / C 1
tan 30 = = ….(ii)
R R CR
2
Z= R 100 3 100 3
2
From equations (i) and (ii),
tan 60o L
Z = R Z = 100 = 2LC
tan 30o R 1
The current in L C – R circuit is,
CR
Vo = io Z
3
io =
Vo = 2 60 103 0.5 106
1
Z
200 3
io = 3 = 2 3 108
100
io = 2 A 2 = 108
= 104
ns
15. erms = 10 V, = 200, R = 50 , 2f = 104
L = 400mH = 400 × 10-3 H, 104
C = 200F = 200 × 10-6 F f= Hz
2
2
1
R 2 XL XC =
2
Z= R 2 L
io
22. For pure inductor =
c
2
1
2
= 502 200 400 103 6
Pav = VI cos = VI cos
2
at
200 200 10
Pav = 0
502 80 25
2
=
23. In LCR circuit power is always dissipated
Z = 74.3 through resistor.
irms =
erms
=
10
= 0.13459 A
lic 24. For LR series circuit,
Z 74.3
eL = irms XL = 0.1345 × 80 = 10.8 V Z = R 2 2 L2
V
R 2 XC XL =
I=
ub
2
16. Z= (3) 2 (14 10) 2 R 2 L2
2
Z=5 V 2R
P = I2R =
e0 R 2 L2
2
17. i0 = ( Z = XL for pure inductive circuit)
XL
P
e2 rms
2 e rms 2 200
25. For purely resistive circuit Power (P) =
i0 = = R
XL 2fL When inductance is connected in series with
resistance
et
2 200
i0 = = 0.9 A P = erms irms cos
2 50 1
e R e2
18. XL = L = 2fL = erms rms = rms R
Z Z Z2
rg
XL f
PR R
The graph will be a linear graph. P =
Z2
e 2
rms PR
19. i PR 2
P = 2
Ta
Z
26. P = VI
P 100 5
eC eL I= = = A
V 220 11
400
ns
31. P = erms Irms cos and Pmax = ermsIrms Z2 = R2 + (XL Xc)2
Since P = 50 % Pmax = 0.5 Pmax Z2 = 502 + (6.28 – 31.85)2
Z2 = 3153
cos = 0.5 =
3
io
Average power,
Using, P = VI cos = I2 Z cos we get, R V02 R 100 50
2
32. Vrms
Pav = = 0.79 W
P 2 Z 2
2 Z2 2 3153
cos = = = 0.5
at
I2 Z 4 1
R
33. Comparing given equations with the standard 36. Power factor = cos =
Z
forms, as current remains same, we can write,
e = e0 sin t and i = i0 sin(t + ) we get,
e0 = 100 V, I0 = 100 mA
lic cos =
R
=
VR
Z VR VL VC
2 2
e = 100 sin (100 t) V and
80
I = 100 sin 100 t mA = 0.8
ub
3 80
2
60
2
e0 I0
Power = cos
2 2 37. For CR circuit, power factor is given by
100 100 R R
cos = =
P
= cos 103
2 3 R X 2 2
1
C R2
100 100 1 (C) 2
= 103
2 2 R
(cos )1 =
et
….(i)
= 2.5 W 1
R 2
2
Vrms V2 R (1C) 2
34. P= cos = rms
Z Z Z 1 R
rg
=
2
V R 2 1
P= 0
….(i) R2
2 Z2 (1C) 2
Given V0 = 10 V; = 340 rad/s; L = 20 mH; 1 R2
Ta
C = 50 F; R = 40 =
2 R2 1
Z = R 2 (X L X C ) 2 (1C) 2
(10) 2 1
P= (40) R2 + = 2R2
2 (1C) 2
1 1
R2 = ….(ii)
3 1
2
(1C) 2
(40) 340 20 10
2
340 50 106 Now,
2000 2000 R
= = (cos )2 =
1600 [6.8 58.8]2 1600 [2704] 1
R2
2000 (2C) 2
= 0.46 W
4304 1
But, 2 =
Nearest answer is option (C). 2
401
ns
(1C) 2 R
Using eq(ii), 1 1 100
0 = = = rad/s
1 R R 2 2 LC 9 100 10 6 3
(cos )2 =
2 R 2 4R 2 100 9
io
Q= = 30
1 2R 2 3 10
= 2
2 5R 46. Irms = (I2 ) = (8 6sin t) 2
at
1
(cos )2 = Irms = (64 96sin t 36sin 2 t)
5
Irms = (64) 96(sin t) 36(sin 2 t)
38. e = 100 sin 30 t
Since (sin2t) = 0.5 and (sint) = 0
erms =
100
2
lic Irms = 64 0 36 0.5 = 9.05 A
47. Alternating voltage: e = 200 2 sin(100 t) volt
I = 20 sin 30t
4 Comparing with e = e0 sin t
ub
20 = 100 rad/s, e0 = 200 2
Irms =
2 Capacitive reactance,
1 1
Also, = XC = = = 104
4 C 100 106
P
4
20 1 20 2 2
I= 10 A
2 2 2 48. Ammeter measures the rms value of current
39. As the electric and magnetic fields share energy Vrms V0
Ta
Irms = = (C)
equally in an LC circuit, XC 2
1 2 1 50 2
Li = CV 2 = 100 10 10–6
2 2 2
= 5 10–2 A = 50 mA
1/ 2
CV 2
I =
L 49. For AC circuit,
16 10 20
6 2 1/ 2
V V
= = 0.4 A Current, I = = 0.2 A
3 Z R XL XC
2 2
40 10
When connected to DC source, if the capacitor
1 1
42. f0 = is present in the circuit, it will provide infinite
2 LC 2 5 103 2 106 resistance to current and the current in the
104 5 103 circuit will be zero. However, the current in the
= Hz
2 circuit changes to 0.4 A.
402
dI d E E LRt 52.
e
dt dt R R
E R LRt i0
ns
= e
irms
R L
E LRt trms tpeak
= e ….(ii)
L
io
Rate of energy dissipated across resistance is, For i = i0,
PR = I2R i0 = i0 sin t
Rate at which magnetic energy is stored in coil
sin t = 1 t =
at
is, 2
dI 2
PL = EL I = L × I t
dt T 2
T
Let at time t,
PR = PL
lic tpeak =
4
....(i)
Similarly, for i = irms,
dI
I2R = L × I irms = i0 sint
dt
ub
i0
From equations(i) and (ii), = i0 sin t
2
E Rt
E Rt
1 e L × R = L × e L sin t =
1
R L
2
Rt Rt
P
1– e L
= e L 2
i.e., t = t
Rt
1 4 T 4
e L
T
2 trms =
et
Rt 8
loge 2 = Time for current to reach from rms value to
L
Substituting values for R and L, i0
peak value is i.e., irms i0 i0
rg
10 t 2
ln 2 =
20 T T T
t = tpeak trms =
t = 2 ln 2 4 8 8
Given that, f = 50 Hz
Ta
403
ns
= 61. Quantity of heat liberated in the ammeter of
2 resistance R
= 2 102 A = 20 mA i. due to direct current of 3 ampere
= [(3)2 R/J]
55. eo = io XL
io
ii. due to alternating current of 4 ampere
XL = L = 2fL = 2(50) = 100
= [(4)2 R/J]
2
io = ampere Total heat produced per second
π
at
(3) 2 R (4) 2 R 25R
2 =
eo = 100 = 200 V J J J
π
Let the equivalent alternating current be I virtual
1
2
ampere; then
56. Z2 = L
R
C
2
lic I 2 R 25R
or I = 5 A
J J
c 3 108
Z 62. f =
ub
300
= 106 Hz
1 1
0 Now, fr = LC
2 LC 2f r
As we gradually increase frequency, Z first
P
1
decreases and then increases L=
42f r2C
57. Let 1 = 50 2 L = 20 1
2 = 100 2 L = 40 L=
et
I=4A R
58. From V = 200 2 sin t, V0 = 200 2
V0 200 2 200 2
When L is removed,
I0 = =
Ta
R
Z R X L XC 20 15 15
2 2
2 2
XC /3
tan
200 2 R 3
I0 = = 10 2 XC
20 X C R tan Z1
3
59. For inductor, When C is removed,
1 1 XL
I tan
XL f R 3
Hence, as frequency increases, current decreases.
For capacitor, XL = R tan Z2
3 XL
1
I f Z= R X L XC R
2 2
XC
Hence, as frequency increases, current R /3
cos = =1 R
increases. Z
404
ns
At resonance, XC = XL and impedance increase, hence voltage across capacitor gets
decreases. decreased.
When iron rod is inserted, impedance increases.
1 1 1
Hence current decreases. Hence option (D) is 69. f= f
io
correct. 2 LC C
1
X L XC 70. Frequency of oscillation, f =
66. Phase difference = tan1 2 LC
R
at
1
For pure L, R circuit; f
L C
XL 1
= tan1 = tan R f air Cdielectric
R =
2fL
lic f dielectric Cair
= tan1 C dielectric
R But =k ….(k = dielectric constant)
25 C air
2 2 f air
ub
= tan1 100 = k
f dielectric
125
= k
1 100
= tan (1)
2
P
= 45 5
k=
4
XL 1/ 3
67. tan = = k = 1.56
R 1
et
But,
= t i i
/6 1
t= = = s
2 50 600
68. R C In the above circuit,
q
iR L
di
=0
dt C
~ L
d 2q dq 1
+ R + (q) = 0 ....(ii)
V = V0 sin t 2
dt dt
C
1 Comparing equations (i) and (ii),
Xc
2fC 1
L m, C ,Rb
current in ciruit k
405
I0 6 i = q 02 q 2
1. Irms = = = 3 2A
2 2
= 2.9 104 48 10 24 10
6 2 6 2
1
2. f0 =
2 LC = 2.9 104 106 12 4 1
1 = 1.2 A
=
2 3.14 5 104 20 106 7. Through element X, current is in phase with the
4
10 E 0 100
f0 = 1592 Hz voltage. Therefore, X = R = = 40 A.
6.28 I0 2.5
ns
3. Comparing the given equation with standard form, Through element Y, current lags behind the
e = e0 sin t we get, = 120, e0 = 240 V applied voltage by 90. Therefore, Y must be an
120 7 inductor,
io
f= = 19 Hz E 0 100
2 2 22 XL = = 40 A.
I0 2.5
240
erms = = 120 2 170 V When X and Y are connected in series,
2
at
Z R 2 X 2L 40 2 40 2 40 2 ohm
1 1
4. XC = XC E E 100 5
2fC f I = 0 A.
X C
=
f
=
50
=
1
lic Z 2Z 2 40 2 4
XC
= 10000 Hz tan = = tan 60 = 3
R
1
f = XC = 3R
et
2 LC
R 2 XL XC
2
= (10000 100)Hz Z=
= 9900 Hz
= 1002 0
rg
f C
= = K = 100
f C0
E 200
2 2 I = = 2A
f 10000 Z 100
K = = 1.02
Ta
f 9900 R
P = EI cos = EI
Z
6. C = 2 µF = 2 106 F, V0 = 12 volt
100
q0 = CV0 = 2 106 24 = 48 106 C = (100)(2)
100
When V = 6 volt,
q = CV = 2 106 12 = 200 W
= 24 106 C 9. On introducing an iron bar in the inductor,
=
1 inductive reactance XL = L increases.
LC Therefore, impedance of the circuit
1
R 2 XL XC ;
2
= Z=
3 6
0.6 10 2 10
Increases, current through the bulb decreases
= 2.9 104 rad/s and it becomes dim.
406
11. In the circuit shown, L and C are in series. Total energy dissipated in 10 min.
Therefore, it amounts to a series resonance = 0.22 10 60
circuit. The current through a.c. source is = 132 Joule
ns
maximum.
io
system = 1/ LC
14. As VR = I0R
at
VR 100
I0 = = 0.1 A
R 1000
At resonance, XL = XC
L =
1
;
lic
C
1
L=
2C
ub
1
= = 50 H
100
2
2 10
6
E 0 200
15. R= = 40
I0 5
et
E 0 200
XL = = 40
I0 5
Z = R 2 X 2L
Ta
= 402 402
= 40 2
16. L = 20 103 H,
C = 100 µF = 100 106 F = 104 F
R = 50 , t = 20 min = 20 60 s, E = ?
From V = 5 sin 314 t, E0 = 5 V,
= 314 rad/s
XL = L = 314 20 103 = 6.28
1 1
XC = = 31.85
C 3.14 10 4
407
14 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
Hints
ns
hc 1. For no emission of photoelectron,
13. =
0 energy of incident light < work function
hc
= = h < <
io
20 2 h
25. The maximum velocity or the kinetic energy of 2. If threshold frequency is 0, then light frequency
photoelectrons depends on frequency and not on becomes 1.50.
at
intensity. If we make it half it becomes 0.75 0, which is
smaller than threshold frequency, therefore
27. If the frequency of incident radiation is kept photoelectric current is zero.
constant at a value greater than 0 (threshold
lic
frequency), then the rate of emission of 3. 0 =
hc
=
6.6 1034 3 108
= 3 1019 J
photoelectrons from emitter is directly 0 6600 1010
proportional to intensity of incident radiation.
hc
28. Intensity No. of photons 4. = 2 eV
ub
max
No. of photoelectrons
hc 6.63 1034 3 108
29. Intensity increases means that more photons of max = =
2eV 2 1.6 1019
same energy will emit more electrons of same 6.63 3
energy, hence only photoelectric current increases. = 10–7
P
3.2
30. Photoelectric effect is one photon, one electron = 6215 Å
phenomenon, i.e., one photon cannot eject more
than one photoelectron. 5. 0 = h0
et
=
y = mx + c, we can say that, 6.63 1034
this is the equation of straight line having 8 1014 Hz
positive slope (h) and negative intercept (h0) 6. 0 = h0
Ta
on K.E. axis.
hc 6.63 1034 3 108
0 = =
37. Velocity of photon c = 0 5000 1010
1 = 3.978 10–19 J
48. 3.978 1019
m = = 2.48 eV
me < mp < m 1.6 1019
e > p > 7. Minimum kinetic energy is always zero.
34
h 6.63 10 8. The velocity of the photoelectron ejected from
49. = = = 6.63 1033 m
mv 103 100 near the surface is larger than those coming
from interior of metal because for the given
h 6.631034
50. = = energy of the incident photon, less energy is
mv 210 103 100 102
3
spent in ejecting the electron near the surface
= 3.32 1028 m than that from the interior of the surface.
408
ns
11. If the voltage given is V, then the energy of
electron, get,
1 1
mv2 = eV h(1 2) = m(v12 v22 )
2 2
io
2h
2eV 2 1.6 1019 1000 (v12 v22 ) = (1 2)
v= = m
m 9.1 1031
= 1.875 107 1.9 107 m/s But 2 = 1
at
2 2
1 2 2h h
12. mv max eV (v12 v22 ) =
2
m 2 m
2eV 2 1.6 1019 9
vmax =
m
=
9.1 1031
lic 19. eV0 = h 0
6 eV0 = (2.4 1.6) eV
= 1.8 10 m/s
V0 = 0.8 V
13. K.Emax (eV) = E(eV) 0(eV)
(2 eV 0.6 eV)
ub
(E 0 )
= 6.2 4.2 20. V0 = = = 1.4 V
= 2 eV e e
K.Emax(joule) = 2 1.6 1019 J hc
= 3.2 1019 J 21. eV = 0
P
14. E = 0 + Kmax 1 2
mv max eV
12375 2
E 2.475eV
5000 v2 m v2 1
V = max max
et
= 9.2 eV – 4.2 eV
= 5 eV
hc hc
= 5 1.6 1019 22. eV1 = – 0 , eV2 = – 0
1 2
= 8 1019 J
Ta
hc hc
hc hc – eV1 = – eV2
16. E= 0 and 2E = 0 1 2
1 1
E 0 e (V2 – V1) = hc
2 1
2E 0
1 0 / E 1 2
= hc = e (V2 – V1)
2 0 / E 12
(1 0 / E) 1 λ e
Since > , so > h= (V2 – V1) 1 2
(2 0 / E) 2 2 c 1 2
h
17. Let K1 and K2 be the maximum kinetic energy 23. Retarding potential, V0 = ( 0)
e
of photoelectrons for incident light of frequency
and 2 respectively. 24. Refer Shortcut 3
409
ns
36. p= =
hc 1017
Assuming 0 to be negligible in comparison to ,
h
37 p
1 1 c
v 2max v max
io
pc 3.3 1029 3 108
= 1.5 1013 Hz
On increasing wavelength from to 4, vmax h 6.6 10 34
becomes half.
h h
at
29. Number of photons emitted per second 38. = v=
mv m
p 10 103
n = = 1.72 1031 =
6.6 1034
h 6.6 1034 880 103
(66 109 ) (9 1031 )
30. Intensity of light
lic = 0.011 106
I
Watt nhc
= 1.1 104 ms1
Area A
4 / 1000
IA 39. mHe = kg
Number of photon n
ub
6.02 1023
hc
1 A 1 1 104 300 109
= 6.64 1027 kg
n= = h
100 hc 100 6.6 1034 3 108 =
mv
= 1.5 1012 /s
P
6.63 1034
31. Energy received from the sun =
6.64 1027 2.4 102
= 2 cal cm2 (min)1 = 8.4 J cm2 (min)1 = 0.416 109 m = 0.416 nm
Energy of each photon received from sun,
et
8.4
= = 2.3 1019 2mE 2 9.11031 50 1.61019
3.6 1019
10
6.631034
32. = 1 Å = 10 m = = 1.737 Å
34 1.456 1047
hc 6.6310 310 8
E = hmax = =
110 10 h h
42. = =
= 19.8 1016 J mv 2mqV
33. The stopping potential gives maximum kinetic e m pq p V mp
energy of the electron. It depends on the = =
p me e V me
material as well as the frequency of incident
light whereas the current depends on the number [ V is the same and qp = e (in magnitude)]
of incident photons. Hence, it is 0.5 V. By e mp
1/ 2
410
ns
V 1
34
hc 6.63 10 3 10
8
….(ii) 0 = = = 3.10 107 m
0 4 1.6 1019
i.e., will decrease with increase in V.
= 310 nm
If there is a maxima of the diffracted electrons
io
at an angle , then
5. o = hc
2dsin = o
Hence,
hc
at
sin Case (i) 1 =
0 1
i.e., with decrease in , will decrease. hc
Case (ii) 2 =
Thus when the voltage applied to A is increased, 0 2
lic
the value of will be less than the earlier value.
Dividing equation (i) by (ii),
46. E = eV = 1.6 10–19 105 = 1.6 10–14 J
1 0 2 6000 1010 3
47. b sin = n 2 0 1 4000 1010 2
ub
12.28
Here, b = 0.6 Å, n = 1 and = Å
600 hc
8. K.Emax = joules 2.2 eV
12.28
0.6(sin ) = = 0.5013
600 hc
P
( K.Emax = 0 )
sin = 0.84 = sin 0.8 –1
hc
1 K.Emax = 19
eV 2.2 eV
48. Using Einstein equation, E = 0 + mv2 1.6 10
et
2
K.Emax = 2 eV 2.2 eV = 0.2 eV
2(E 0 )
=v As kinetic energy can never be negative, hence
m
photo-emission doesn’t occur.
A charged particle placed in uniform magnetic
rg
mv 2
mv A
evB = r=
r eB 2hc
KB = h0
2m(E 0 ) A
r=
eB KB
KA <
2
Competitive Thinking
10. E = 0 + K.Emax
1. Initially when the moving electron is very far 1 = 0.5 + (K.Emax)1 (K.Emax)1 = 0.5
away from stationary electron, it only has 2.5 = 0.5 + (K.Emax)2 (K.Emax)2 = 2
kinetic energy but as it approaches the (K.E max )1 0.5 1
stationary electron, its K.E. decreases due to (K.E max ) 2 2 4
repulsion and gets converted to P.E. according
v1 (K.E max )1 1
to law of conservation of energy. Hence, K.E. 11. When, 1 = 20,
decreases and P.E. increases. v2 (K.E max ) 2 2
411
ns
v2 2
Initially,
12. Cut off frequency is given as h = 0.4 + 0 ….(i)
Work function 0 = h After increasing incident frequency by 30%,
Now, E = K.E. + 0 h(1.3 ) = 0.9 + 0 ….(ii)
io
1 multiplying equation (i) by 1.3 and then
2h = mv2 + h subtracting from equation (ii),
2
0 = [0.9 – 1.3(0.4)] + [0 – 1.3 0]
at
1
mv2 = 2h h 0.3 0 = 0.9 – 0.52
2
1 0.38
mv2 = h 0 = = 1.267 eV
2 0.3
v=
2hν
lic 18.
1 2 hc
mv1 0
m 2 1
1 2 hc
13. Using, E = h 0 for the two cases we get, mv 2 0
ub
0.5 = h 0 ….(i) and 2 2
0.8 = 1.2 h 0 ….(ii) hc
0
v1 1
2
By equation (i) 1.2 equation (ii) we get, 2
2
v1
…. 2
0.2 0 = 0.2 or 0 = 1 eV v 2 hc 0 1 v2
P
2
1 2
14. Kmax = mv max = h 0 ….(i) 4hc hc
2 40 0
2 1
Now, when is doubled, then
et
1 4hc hc
m (2 vmax)2 = 2h 0 30
2 2 1
1 4 1240 1240
4 mv 2max = 2h 0 = 30
rg
2 310 248
4(h 0) = 2h 0 ….[from equation (i)] 30 = 11 0 = 3.7 eV
30 = 2 h 1 2
2h 19. mvmax = eV
Ta
0 = 2
3
2eV
vmax =
hc m
15. KE1 = 0
1 2 hc hc 1
hc 2hc 20. mv = 0 or = mv2 + 0 and
KE2 = 0 = 0 2 2
/2
1 2 hc 4 1
KE2 = 3KE1 mv1 = 0 = mv 2 0 0
2 3 3 2
2hc hc
0 = 3 0 4
4
hc v12 v 2 + constant
2 0 = 3
1
hc 4 2
0 = So, v1 > v
2 3
412
ns
hc 1 2 2 4
= mv2max + 0 hc hc hc
λ 2 = .... 0
hc 1 0 4 0
= eV0 + 0 ...( mvmax = eV0)
2
io
λ 2 0 = 4
1
V0 29. From Einstein’s equation,
h = eV0 + h0
at
Thus, if incident wavelength is decreased, then
hc hc
stopping potential will increase. = eV0
0
23. According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation case (i) = ; V0 = V
E = 0 + Kmax
lic hc
hc
= eV ....(i)
hc 1 1 0
V0
e 0 V
case (ii) = 3 ; V0 =
As decreases, V0 increases.
ub
6
hc hc eV
24. eV0 = h – h0 = ....(ii)
3 0 6
If increases, V0 will increase.
dividing equation (i) by equation (ii)
P
25. eV0 = h 0 hc hc
hc
= 0 0
=6
hc hc
et
6.631034 3108
= 1.07 eV 3 0
9 19
33210 1.610 1
1 1 1
= 2.67 eV = 6
0 3 0
rg
2000 + =
0 0
Using, E = 0 + eV0
5 1
(E 0 ) (6.18eV 5.01eV) =
V0 = 0
e e
= 1.17V 1.2V 0 = 5
30. Using Einstein’s photoelectric equation
27. In photoelectric effect, energy is conserved.
Case I :
h
V0 = ( 0) hc hc 1 1
e eV = = hc ....(i)
6.6 1034 (8.2 1014 3.3 1014 )
0 0
V0 = Case II :
1.6 1019
6.6 4.9 V hc hc
= 101 2.0V e
1.6 4 2 0
413
ns
= 2
proportional to the intensity of incident radiation E2 1
but it is independent of its frequency. Hence, E11 3.2 1019 6000
saturation photoelectric current becomes double, E2 = = = 4.8 10–19 J
2 4000
when both intensity and frequency of the
io
incident light are doubled. 42. The plate current reduces with increasing
wavelength. When wavelength exceeds certain
33. Photoelectric current intensity of light
value, photo electric effect ceases, making
at
I1 < I2 current value zero.
34. Above threshold frequency (0), the stopping 43. We know,
potential increases with the increase in (K.E.)max = h 0
frequency.
lic 2 eV = 5 eV 0
35. Energy radiated as visible light 0 = 3 eV
5 Hence, when h = 6 eV,
= 100 = 5 J/s
100 (K.E.)max = 6 eV 3 eV = 3 eV
ub
If n be the number of photons emitted per Also, (K.E.)max = eV0 = 3 eV
second, then, nhv = E = 5 V0 = 3 V
5 5 5.6 107 As, stopping potential is a retarding potential,
n= = 1.4 1019 potential of A relative to C = 3 V
hc (6.62 1034 )(3 108 )
P
h hc
hc 25 45. p= , E=
36. N = 200 ….[Given]
100
Thus, if decreases, both p and E will increase.
et
37. K.E. = E 0 h 1
47. = p
0 = 10.20 3.57 p
6.63 1.6 1019
v0 = = 1.6 1015 Hz 48. E=
1
mv 2
m 2 v2
Ta
6.67 1034 2 2m
1 2
38. From Einstein’s photoelectric equation,
2m
p ….( momentum p = mv)
h1 = W0 + eV1
h2 = W0 + eV2 1 h2 h
= …. p
1 W0 eV1 2m 2
2 W0 eV2 h2
=
W01 + eV21 = W02 + eV12 2m 2
W0 2 1
e= 49. de-Broglie wavelength,
1V2 V1 2 h
=
p
hc 6.6 1034 3 108
39. = = = 3.5 10–11 1
E 35 103 1.6 1019 But p = 2mE
= 35 10 –12
m E
414
1 h h 1
i.e., E 55. = =
2 mv 2mk k
2 2
E 2 1 1
4 56. =
h
h
E1 2 0.5 p 2mE
As, E2 = 4E1 h 1 h
E = 3E1 Now, = = = 0.25
2m(16E) 4 2mE 4
h % change = = 0.25
50. = ,
p = 0.75 75%
But, p =
2mE
h
h 57. =
= , p
2mE
ns
1 P2 h2 (6.61034 ) 2
K.E. = = =
E 2m 2m 2
2 9.11031 (5.5107 ) 2
1 E2 7.91 1025 8 1025 J
2
io
E1 58. Let p be initial momentum of electron,
0.4 10 10
E Given,
= p p Pm
1.0 1010 1
at
E = 0.16 keV as
1
h p
51. Using = , increase in p, decreases
2mE
Eelectron = 2
h2
and Ephoton =
hc
lic
0.5
=
0.5
1
2m 100 100
p
E photon hc 2 2m 2mc2 2 5 105 20 =
. = p
ub
E electron h 2 hc (50 103 ) 1
0.5 p
1 =
100 p P m
h
52. For electron, e and for photon, 0.995 p + 0.995 Pm = p
2mE e
P
p
hc 0.995Pm =
p 200
Ep p 200 Pm
e h Ep
et
2meV
1
53. For any charged particle, de-Broglie wavelength is, V
h
= 1 V2
Ta
2mE
2 V1
h
2 =
2 2m 2E h h
60. de Broglie wavelength, = =
h p 2meV
2 = =
2 2mE 2 For an electron,
me = 9.1 10–31 kg, e = 1.6 10–19 C
54. For photon,
6.63 10 34
E=
hc =
2 9.1 1031 1.6 1019 10000
For electron, 6.63 1034 1023
=
h h h 2 9.1 1.6
= = =
2mE hc 2mc = 1.229 10–11m
2m
12.2 10–12 m
415
=
6.63 10
34 2
h
68. =
2 9.1 1031 1.6 1019 1 1010
2
2mqV
150 volt We know, q = 2qP
m = 4 mp
12.27 12.27
62. = = 1.227 Å P mq 4m P 2q P
V 100 = 82 2
m Pq P mP qP
12.27 1.227 109
ns
63. = Å= h
V 400 69. = ….(De-Broglie formula)
9 p
= 0.061 10 m = 0.06 nm
h h h
= = = ….(i)
h p m v 4mv
io
64. de Broglie wavelength is, =
2mE [as mass of alpha is 4 times mass of
For proton, proton/neutron and velocity given is v]
h h h h
p =
at
d = = = ….(ii)
2m p E pd m d vd 2m 2v
For -particle, [as mass of deuteron is 2 times mass of
h h
proton/neutron and velocity given is 2v]
=
2m E
=
2 4m p E
....( m = 4mp)
lic From (i) and (ii),
1
=
d 1
p h 2 4m p E 4mp
= = =2:1 hc
h mp 70. For photon: E =
ub
2m p E
p
65. K.E. = 120 eV hc
p = ....(i)
V = 120 V E
12.27 12.27 For electron: E = mc2 = pc
= 1.12 Å = 1.12 1010 m
P
=
V 120 E
p=
12 c
= 112 10 m = 112 pm
h hc
e = ....(ii)
et
1 V2
71. K.E. of electrons =
p2
2 V1
2m
V1 12 10000 2 10000 h
V2 = = 2500 V here, p = ....(De-Broglie hypothesis)
2
Ta
22 2
4
2
h
1
67. db
m V K.E. = ….(i)
2m
1 Also, if 0 is cutoff wavelength, maximum K.E.
e
me V hc
of X- ray photons = ....(ii)
1 0
p
mp 9V Maximum K.E. of X- ray will be equal to that of
electrons.
λp me V
= . hc h2
λe mp 9V = 2 ....[from (i) and (ii)]
0 2 m
λp m 1 2 2 mc
= ...( me = m ; mp = M) 0 =
λe M 3 h
416
ns
1
= 2 2
2 1 2 h h h
= =
mv 2m(K.E.) 3
1 2m kT
73. 2
V
io
h
To decrease wavelength potential difference =
between anode and filament is increased. 3mkT
at
75. Power of the incident photons is, 80. =
n hc mv
P=
t 1
But P = Fc v
Fc =
n hc
lic Now, v T
t 1
n F 6.62 105 5 107 T
= 34
= 5 1022
t h 6.62 10 27
ub
T927
76. Power of the incident photons is, 927 T27
P=
E 27 = 2 927
t 27
927 =
P
But, P = Fc 2 2
E = Fct
81. de-Broglie’s formula is
= 2 107 3 108 10 109
h
= 600 109 J =
et
= 600 nJ 2m (K.E)
But kinetic energy of thermal neutrons is kBT
77. By conservation of linear momentum,
where, kB = Boltzmann constant
m
rg
2v = 2v1 + v2 ….(i)
82. We know that de-Broglie wavelength,
As collision is head on and elastic,
h
v 2 v1 =
e= =1 mv
u1 u 2
Velocity of a body falling from height H is
v = v2 – v1 ....(ii) given by
Solving equation (i) and (ii),
v = 2gH
3v2
v = 3v1 and v = h h
4 = =
1 m 2gH m 2g H
As,
p h
Here, is a constant say ‘K’.
m m 2g
v
A p2 2 2 (4 / 3)v
= =2
1
B p1 mv1 (2 / 3)v H
417
ns
or mv2 = 23.54 1019 J
λmin.= 2.1708 × 10–9 m
23.541019 λ ≥ λmin
v= = 1.61 106
9.11031
5. Stopping potential does not depend upon the
io
mv 2 mv distance of source from photocell but saturation
Now, Bev = r=
r Be 1
current
9.11031 square of distanceof source
r= 1.61 106
at
(4105 )(1.6 1019 ) 1 1
I1 and I2
or r = 0.228 m 0.23 m (0.2) 2 (0.4) 2
or Vs2 = Vs1 + h
e 2 1 =
p
hc 1 2 But p = 2mE
= Vs1 +
et
e 21 1
450 120 E
= 0.2 + 1240
120 450 i.e., E
1
rg
hc 2
.... 1240eV nm 2 2
e E 2 1 200
4
= 7.78 V E1 2 100
Ta
= 0.98 eV
= 6.2 1014 Hz 12.710 1.610
7 19
418
9. Saturation current depends on intensity. Hence Subtracting equation (i) from 3 equation (ii)
B and C will have same intensity different from we get,
that of A. Stopping potential depends on 3 hc hc
frequency. So A and B will have the same 1 = 30 0 or 0 =
2 4
frequency different from that of C.
hc
Hence option (A) is correct. But 0 = , where 0 is the threshold
0
h h h wavelength, hence 0 = 4.
10. = = =
p 2mK 2mqV Hence, option (C) is correct.
h h
P = ; =
2m p (q p )V 2m (q )V
h h
Now, P = =
ns
2m p q p V 2m q V
m p q p V = m q V
m Pq P V (1)(1)V V
V = = = volt
mq (4)(2) 8
io
12. Gain in K.E. = Loss in P.E.
p2
= qV p = 2mqV
at
2m
pp 2m p (e)V
=
p 2m (2e)V
=
mP e 1 1
lic
= .
m 2e 4 2
1
=
ub
2 2
nhc
13. Using E = , we get
n(6.6 1034 )(3108 )
107 =
P
(30001010 )
n = 1.5 1011
et
1
15. Using E = mv2 = h0 W0 we get,
rg
2
E1 = (1 0.6) = 0.4 eV
and E2 = (2.5 0.6) = 1.9 eV
v2
Ta
E1 0.4
= 12 = 0.21
E2 v2 1.9
v1
or = 0.458 0.5
v2
419
15
Doin
Structure of Atoms and Nuclei
Hints
51. E = 0 and
Classical Thinking 13.6
ns
E5 = = 0.544 eV
25
1 1
16. Wave number = = E = E E5
6000 1010
6 1 = 0 (0.54) = 0.54 eV
= 1.66 10 m
io
1
17. Refer Shortcut 2 52. T.E. = (P.E.) = (K.E.)
2
20. As n increases, energy difference between K.E. 1
=
at
adjacent energy levels decreases. P.E. 2
23. R m. Thus, if mass is reduced to half, then 53. Minimum energy required to excite from ground
Rydberg constant also becomes half. lic state
25. Energy is absorbed when atom goes from lower 1 1
13.6 2 2 10.2 eV
state to higher state. 1 2
30. As difference between the levels increases, energy 57. For 7N13, N = 13 7 = 6 and
emitted increases and hence wavelength decreases.
ub
for 6C12, N = 12 6 = 6
It means colour must change to violet.
As number of neutrons is same, they are
31. If the energy radiated in the transition be E, isotones.
then we have,
58. They have same mass number (A).
E R G E QS E R S E QR E PQ
P
For getting blue line, the energy radiated should 68. Using, R A1/3
1/3 1/3
1 R Li Li 7 7 1
be maximum E . =
et
R Fe Fe56 56
2
34. Energy increases from lower state to higher state. 72. Since nuclear density is constant,
mass volume.
0 n 2 h 2
rg
2
40. rn
r1 n2 1 1
2 76. B.E. per nucleon is maximum for Fe56.
= 12 = =
r2 n2 2 4 77. Binding energy per nucleon increases with
atomic number. The greater the binding energy
1 v1 n 2 per nucleon, the stability of the nucleus will be
42. v = 2 =
n v2 n1 1 more.
For 26Fe56, number of nucleons is 56.
43. A r2, but r n2
This is the most stable nucleus because
A n4
maximum energy is needed to pull a nucleon
1 away from it.
49. En
n2 A 0 A 4
1 2 He
78. zx z + 1Y
E3 (5) 2 25
= = A4 0 A4
E5 (3) 2
9 z 1K
0
z 1K
420
ns
RH
Critical Thinking 1
=
1. Using Shortcut 1 109678cm 1
n(n 1) 3(3 1) = 9.117 10–6 cm = 911.7 Å.
Number of lines, NE = = =3
io
2 2
1 1
2. For Lyman series, n1 = 1, n2 = Br 2 2 11 / 9 44
=
5 6
8. = =
1 1
at
1 1 1 Pf 1 1 9/4 81
=R 2 2 =R 2 =R 2 2
n1 n 2 1 4 5
1 1/
=
R
lic
Br
Pf
= Pf =
Br
81
44
1 1 1 3R 4
3. = R 2 2 = , L =
L 1 2 4 3R
1 1
R = 1.0967 107 m1 = 1.0967 105 cm1 B 2 2 3/ 4 27
ub
=
1 2
4 9. = =
L = cm L 1 1 5 / 36 5
3 109670 2 2
2 3
1 1 1 15R 5 5
4. R 2 2 L = B = 6563 = 1215.4 Å 1215 Å
P
1 4 16 27 27
16 16 10. For Balmer series,
105 cm
15R 15 1 1
= R 2 2
et
c 3 1010 B 2 n
n 2.81 1015 Hz
16 5 And for Paschen series,
10
15 1 1 1
= R 2 2
rg
B = 4
Least energetic wave number,
1 1
7R
= P 9
144
P 9
6. Given that, we get six wavelengths. =
B 4
From Shortcut 1,
9
Maximum number of spectral lines, p = 6400 = 91600 = 14400 Å
n(n 1) 4
= 6 which on solving gives n = 4
2 11. Frequency of radiation emitted
1 1 1 1 8 1 1
Using = R 1 2 we get, = Rc 7
2 = 10 3 10 2 2
4 2
n f n i 2 3
1 1 15R 5 5
= R 1 = = 3 1015 = 1015 4 1014 Hz
16 16 9 4 12
421
1 1 1 1 1 1
12. =R 2 2 =
n1 n 2 AB 2000 6000
1 n2 n2 2 1
= R 2 2 21 = =
6000 3000
n1 n 2
AB = 3000 Å
1 n12 n 22
=
R n 22 n12 1 1 1 3R
16. = R 2 2 =
36 1 n12 n 22 2 4 16
=
5R R n 22 n12 16 16
= = 105 cm
n n = 36 and n n = 5
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
3R 3
On simplifying these two equations, we get c 3 1010
n= =
n2 = 3, n1 = 2 16 5
ns
10
3
13. For longest wavelength in Lyman series,
n1 = 1, n2 = 2 9
= 1015 Hz
1 1 1 4 16
= R 2 2 L =
io
L 1 2 3R 17. For Lyman series,
For shortest wavelength n1 = 1, n2 = 1 1 1 3
1 1 1 = R 2 2 = R
max 1 2 4
at
= R 2 0 S =
S 1 R
1 1 1 R
L 4R 4 = R 2 2
=
= = min 1 1
S 3R 3
L =
4
912 = 1216 Å
lic
max
min
=
4
3
3
2 2 4 64 64 1 2 3 36
64 For second line, n = 4
2 = ....(ii)
12R 1 1 1 3R
= R 2 2 =
et
2 = 4 121.6 = 486.4 nm 20
1 = 6561 = 4860 Å
1 1 27
15. = RH 12 12 =
AC C A 2000 19. For Paschen series
Ta
1 1 1 1 1 1
and = RH 2 2 R 2 2 ; n = 4, 5, 6....
BC C B 3 n
1 For first member of Paschen series n = 4
=
6000 1 1 1 1 7R
R 2 2
1 1 1 1 3 4 1 144
= RH 2 2
AB B A 144 144
R= = 1.1 107
1 1 1 1 71 7 18800 1010
= RH 2 2 2 2
B C C A For shortest wave length n =
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R
= R H 2 2 RH 2 2 So R 2 2
C A C B 3 9
1 1 9 9
= = 8.182 107 m 8182Å
AC BC R 1.1 107
422
ns
21. RZ2 2 2 = RZ2
B 2 3 36 n(n 1) 4 3
N= = =6
2 2
1 1 1 9
RZ2 2 2 = RZ2
Br 4 5 400 27. Radius of 1st Bohr orbit is,
io
36 400 r1 = 0.053 nm = 0.053 109 m = 0.53 108 cm
B = Br =
5RZ2 9RZ2
1
B 36 9RZ2 28. L n and p
at
= 0.162 n
Br 5RZ2 400
L p 1 L p n0
22. For Brackett series,
nh
29. Angular momentum = mvr =
1
max
= R
1 1
4 2
2 =
5 25
9
16
lic
R and 2
Angular momentum n
1 1 1 R n1 1
= R 2 2 = Ratio = =
min 4 16 n2 2
ub
max 25
= 30. rn n2
min 9
2
rn n
= = (4)2 = 16
23. For Lyman series, r0 1
P
1 1 1 rn = 16 0.53 = 8.48 Å
= RZ2 2 2
1 n
31. rn n2
1 1 2
et
RZ2 1 = RZ ….(i) A r2 n4
min 4 4
For Paschen series, A2 n 3
= 2 = = 81
2 A1 n
1 1
1 1 1 7RZ
rg
RZ2 2 2 ….(ii)
m ax 3 4 144 A2 = 81 A1 = 81 A
By dividing equation (i) by equation (ii), e2 e2
max 144 144 32. vn = v1 =
RZ2 20 hn 2 0 h
Ta
min 7RZ 2 7
v1 e2
144
max = 912 18761 Å c 20 hc
7
1 v n 1
1 1 33. vn 3 1
24. = R 2 2 n v1 n 3 3
n
1 n 2
2.1 106
X=R ….(Lyman series) v3 = = 0.7 106 m/s
3
1
Z = R ….(Balmer series)
4 34. Linear speed in 1st Bohr orbit is,
1.6 1019
2
1 3 e2
Y = R 1 = R v= =
4 4 2ε 0 h 2 8.85 1012 6.63 1034
From above, X = Y + Z Z = X – Y 2.25 106 m/s
423
hc Z
2
1 43. Change in angular momentum of electron,
35. E 2 2
n Z h 6.64 1034
L5 L4 = [5 4] =
20.397 2 2 3.14
5.099cm
He 4 = 1.051034 J-s
36. P.E. 2 Total energy 13.6
44. Using, En = ,
= 2 (13.6) 27.2eV n2
13.6
2r n 2h 2 E3 = = 1.51 eV
37. T ; r = radius of nth orbit 32
v mZe 2
ze 2 13.6
v = speed of e in nth orbit 45. Energy of electron, En = eV
20 nh n2
13.6
0.544 eV =
ns
4 2 n 3 h 3 n3 eV
T 0 2 4 T 2 n2
mZ e Z
n2 = 25 n = 5
13.6 Orbital velocity of electron in orbit n = 5,
38. En Z2 . For first excited state, n = 2 and
n2 e2 e2 v
io
++ vn = = =
for Li , Z = 3 20hn 20h(5) 5
13.6
E= 9 30.6 eV B
4 46. En = where B = 16 10–18 J
at
n2
39. n = 3 (– 1.51 eV)
16 1018 16 1018
E3 E4 = 2
= = 1 10–18 J
n = 2 (– 3.4 eV)
lic (4) 16
16 10 18 16 1018
n = 1 (– 13.6 eV) E2 = = = 4 10–18 J
2
2
4
E32 = 3.4 ( 1.51) = 1.89 eV hc
|E32| 1.9 eV Let E2 – E4 = h =
ub
40. E2 hc h 3 108 h 3 108
= = =
E2 E4 (4 1) 1018 3 1018
2.3 eV
= 1026 h
E1
P
For n = 1, E1 = = 13.6 eV
= 0.56 1015 s1 = 5.6 1014 Hz 12
2r The energy of the photon emitted in the
41. T= , r n2 and transition from n = 3 to n = 1 is
v
rg
3
T2 (2n1 ) 8 A 1.66 1027
=
4
1.1 1015 A
3
42. Radius of hydrogen atom in the ground state,
r1 = 5.3 1011 m. (n1 = 1) 3
Radius of hydrogen atom in the excited state, = 2.97 1017 kg m3.
r2 = 13.25 1010 m. Since, density of nucleus is independent of mass
For a hydrogen atom, number, hence density of all nuclei is same.
r n2 49. Using R = R0 A1/3,
2 1/3
r1 n R1 A R A
1/3
= 1 = 1
r2 n 2 R2 A2 R He 4
5.3 1011 2 1/ 3
10
= n1 2 (14)1/3 =
A
13.25 10 n2 4
n 22 = 25 n2 = 5 A = 56 Z = 56 – 30 = 26
424
ns
Since atomic number of 83 Y 222 is 83, this is
54. Let the percentage of B10 atoms be x.
Percentage of B11 atom = (100 x) possible if one particle is emitted.
Using Mindbenders 1 64. Average life
io
Average atomic weight Sum of all lives of all the atom 1
10x 11(100 x) T= =
10.81 x 19 Total number of atoms
100 T = 1
at
N 10 19
B
65. Fraction of sample after n-half-lives is given by
N 11 81
B
N 1
55. The equation is O 0 n O
17 1 16 N 0 2n
Energy required = B.E. of O17 – B.E. of O16
lic Where; n = t/T
15/5
= 17 7.75 – 16 7.97 N 1
1
= 4.23 MeV N0 2 8
ub
56. Binding energy per nucleon, 1 7
Decayed fraction = 1 =
Eb 8 8
Ebn =
A 66. Fraction of sample after n-half-lives is given by
For deuteron, A = 2 N 1
P
E
1.115 MeV = b Eb = 2 1.115 MeV N 0 2n
A
Where; n = t/T
Now, Eb = mc2 t /T
Mass defect, 1
et
N = N0
2 1.115 2
m = u ….[ 1u = 931.5 MeV/c2] 30/ T
931.5 N0 1
= N0
= 0.0024 u 64 2
rg
1
t/T
Dividing equation (i) by (ii) we get
69. Using N = N0 4 8 TY
2
8 TX 8
7 1
N = 1 N0 = N0 1 TY T 2
8 8 or X
t/T
2 TX TY 1
1 1
N0 = N0 60/ T
8 2 N0 1
75. = N0
1
3
1
t /5
32 2
= t = 15 days
2 2 60
5= T = 12 days
T
dN
70. = N 76. From Mindbenders 2
dt
ns
dN T1T2 810 1620
n = N ….( = n) T = 540 years
dt T1 T2 810 1620
n 1
= th of material remains after 1080 years.
N 4
io
0.693 0.693 0.693 N 77. Remaining amount
Half-life = = = s
n 32/ 2 16 12
1 1 1
= 16 = 16 = < 1 mg
at
71. Using N = N0et, 2 2 2
N0
= N 0e T1/ 2 2 = e T1/ 2 1
2 78. M M 0e t ; Given t 2
By taking loge on both the sides,
loge 2 = T1/2 T1/2 = 0.693
lic 2
1
2
M 10e
10 M = 1.35 g
e
72. A = A0et
975 = 9750 e5
2
ub
1 N 1
79. N = N0
e5 = 10 2 N0 4
5 = loge10 = 2.303 log10 10 = 2.303 N 1 3
Probability = 1 1
0.461 N0 4 4
P
t 2 T1/ 2 = 2 40 = 80 years. = c – (a + b) = c – a – b
0.693 0.693 mv 2 1 e2
= 0.0173years 81.
T1/ 2 40 a0 40 a 02
rg
e
N 1
n
v
74. As ; where, Number of half lives, 40a 0 m
N0 2
Ta
t 2r 2r
n= 82. v= T=
T T v
For sample X, e e ev
Now, I =
1 1
8/ TX
1
4
1
8/ TX
T 2 r 2r
or
16 2 2 2 v
8 1.6 1019 2.18 106
4= ….(i) I=
TX 2 3.14 0.53 1010
For sample Y, = 1.04 10–3 A = 1.04 mA
8/ TY 8 8/ TY
1 1 1 1 83. Since electron and positron annihilate,
or
256 2 2 2 hc 6.6 1034 3 108
8 E Total (0.51 0.51) 106 1.6 1019
8= ….(ii)
TY 1.21 1012 m 0.012Å .
426
ns
4
number of possible elements = 10.2 eV
= 2 + 8 + 18 + 32 = 60. By conservation of momentum,
86. The binding energy per nucleon of the nuclei of 1 1 1
mv2 = mv12 + mv22 + 10.2
io
high mass number is small as compared to that 2 2 2
of stable nuclei. Such nuclei undergo or v12 vv1 + 10.2 = 0 ….[eliminating v2]
radioactive decay so as to attain greater value of v1 is real v2 4 10.2
B. E. / A
at
4 10.2
mv 2 or vmin =
87. = qvB mv = qBr m
r 1
= m vmin
2
K.Emin
Now, mvr =
nh
2
lic 2
1 4 10.2
nh nh = m = 20.4 eV
qBrn2 = r 2n = 2 m
2 2qB
ub
88. Let the energy in A, B and C state be EA, EB and Competitive Thinking
EC, then from the figure
C 2. The hydrogen spectrum consists of different
1 series of spectral lines and each series can have
P
3. = R 2 2
(EC EA) = (EC EB) + (EB EA) λ p n
hc hc hc
= a) For n = 5 to p = 4,
1 2 3 400
=
rg
9R
3 = 1 2
1 2 b) For n = 4 to p = 3
144
89. Mass of proton = mass of antiproton =
Ta
7R
1.67 10 27 kg 1 amu
c) For n = 3 to p = 2
Energy equivalent to 1 amu 931 MeV 36
So energy equivalent to 2 amu 2 931 MeV =
5R
1862 106 1.6 1019 3 1010 J . d) For n = 2 to p = 1
4
90. Using magnetic moment, =
3R
q
M = current area = A is minimum for n = 2 to p = 1 transition.
t
1 1 1
1 4. RZ2 2 2
M= q r2 = qr2 n
1 n 2
2 2
But orbital angular momentum, For first number of Lyman series,
nh 1 1 1 4
L = mr2 = RZ2 2 2 L =
2 L 1 2 3RZ2
427
ns
= 11. = RZ2 2
4 2
n1 n 2
6. 0.58 eV
Series limit of Balmer: n1 = 2, n2 =
0.85 eV
RZ2
1 =
io
1.51 eV 4
3.4 eV n=2 Series limit of Paschen: n1 = 3, n2 =
10.2 eV
13.6 eV n=1 RZ2
at
2 =
9
It is clear that difference of 11.1 eV is not
possible to obtain. 1st line of Balmer series: n1 = 2, n2 = 3
2 2
1 1 RZ RZ
3 = RZ2 2= = 1 2
7.
1 1
2
n 1 n
2
n 2 (n 1) 2
lic
= 2
2n 1 2
2 3 4 9
n 2
(n 1) n (n 1) 2
12. Series limit for Lyman series is,
1
For n >> 1, 3 1
n L =
ub
R
1 1 1 c
8. RZ2 2 2 L = Rc ….( = )
n
1 n
1 Series limit for Pfund series is,
2 for given n1 and n2
P
Z 25 Rc ν
p = p = = L
1 = 2 = 43 = 94 R 25 25
1 1 1 1 1 1
et
9. =R 2 2 13. = R 2 2
n
1 n 2 n
1 n 2
Lyman series : n1 = 1, n2 = 2 1 1 1 5
= R
1 1 1 22 32 36
rg
=R 2 2 …(i)
1 2 c 5
Balmer series: f = Rc
36
n1 = 2, n2 = 3
Ta
1 1 1 14. Case I:
=R 2 2 …(ii)
2 3 n = 3 to p = 2
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i), 1 1 1 1 1
= R 2 2 = R
1 1 5 p n 4 9
R
36 = 5 4 5
4 9
1 5
1 3 36 3 27 = R .…(i)
R 1 36
4 4
Case II:
1 1 1 n = 4 to p = 3
10. = RZ2 2 2
n1 n 2 1 1 1 1 1
= R 2 2 = R
For last line of Balmer: n1 = 2 and n2 = p n 9 16
1 1 1 1 7
= RZ2 2 2 = R ….(ii)
b 2 144
428
ns
Number of spectral lines = =6 13.6(3) 2
2 E3 =
(3) 2
16. Let the energies in given three orbits be E1, E2
and E3 as shown in the figure. E = E3 E1
io
1
E3 n =3 = 13.6(3)2 1
1 9
E2 n =2 13.6 9 8
at
=
2 3 9
E1 n =1 E = 108.8 eV
19. T n3 1
T1 13 1 27. K.E. = T.E = P.E.
2
T2 = 8 T
Also, Total energy of 4th state of hydrogen atom
nh
20. Angular momentum, L = is
2
13.6
4h h 3h E4 = eV = 0.85 eV
L = L4 L1 = 42
2 2 2
P.E = 1.7 eV, K.E = 0.85 eV
21. Ground state energy for hydrogen atom, 2
E1 = 13.6 eV Z
28. K.E. and
E1 n
Now, En =
n2 K.E. = (T.E.), P.E. = 2(K.E.)
13.6 This implies as K.E. increases and as K.E.
E2 = = 3.4 eV
22 increases, T.E., P.E. decreases.
429
ns
Re mμ
37. Energy required to remove one neutron
R m e 0.51 1013 ΔE = (17 7.75) – (16 7.97)
R = e =
mμ 207 = 131.75 – 127.52
io
= 4.23 MeV
≈2.56 10–13 m
As, energy E me, 38. Mass defect = m = 0.02866 u
Eμ mμ Total energy = E = mc2
at
Ee me = 0.02866 931 MeV
= 26.68 MeV
Eµ = –13.6 207
E 26.68
= –2.8 keV Energy liberated per nucleon = =
31. To balance the atomic number and mass number
lic A
= 6.67 MeV
4
on both sides, 10 X 2
40. X A Y A 4 ZXA 4
n
Z Z2
X represents neutron 1
ub
0
R Te A Te 3
X
180
73 X1 176
71 X 2 72 X 3 172
180 176
R Al A Al 72 70 X 4
1 A A–12 A–12
45. ZX Z–6(X) 0 Z–8(X)
15 125 3 4
3( 2 ) 2( 1 )
RTe = 3.6 10
Ta
27 Number of neutrons (A 12) (Z 8)
5 Number of protons Z8
RTe = 3.6 1015
3 AZ4
RTe = 6 1015m = 6 Fermi. Z8
430
MB t
ns
e 20
N 1 1 1
49. = = = M 1
N0 (1+ 7) 8 (2)3 But, A =
MB e
1 1
n=3 n 3
0.7
t = 1
io
2 (2) 20
t 20 200
n= t = 3 20 t= = yrs
T 0.7 7
at
(Half-life of X = T = 20 years)
54. Half life T1/2 = 5 min
t = 60 years Total time t = 20 min
X 1 t 20
50. Number of half lives, n = =4
Y 7
X 1 1
lic Now,
T1/ 2 5
n 4
X Y 8 23 N 1 1
3 half-lives N 0 2 2
ub
T = 3 1.4 109 years = 4.2 109 yrs. N 1
51. N = Noet N 0 16
No Disintegrated nuclei of given element will be,
Noet
20 N0 N N
P
100 1 100
ln 1 ln20 = t N0 N0
ln20
t= 6.93 1
ln2 = 1 100 = 93.75%
16
et
2.99 6.93
t= = 29.9 30 days. 55. Nuclei remaining (N) = 600 – 450 = 150
0.693 n
N 1
52. Given: A = 8 , B = , (NB)0 = (NA)0 = N0 Comparing with =
N0 2
rg
NA
For, NB = , 150 1
n
1 1
n
e
N e 8 t 600 2 4 2
N 0e t = 0 n=2
Ta
e
t = 8t – 1 i.e., nuclei would disintegrate in two half-lives
7t = 1 which in this case equals 20 minutes.
1 56. Using Mindbenders 2,
t=
7 T1T2 5103 105
T= = = 4762 yrs
Negative sign here, indicates process of T1 T2 5 103 105
disintegration,
0.693
1 57. T1/2 =
t=
7
1
Average life =
53. We know
N = N0et T1/2 = 0.693
Similarly for given masses, 10
M = M0et = = 14.43 hours
0.693
431
ns
T N correspond to 4 half lives.
59. t2 t1 = log e 1
log e 2 N2 No. of nuclei decayed of A( NA )
20 50 = N0 N
= loge
io
1
log e 2 12.5 = N0 1
20 24
= log e 4 = 40 minutes
Similarly for element B, TB = 40 min. Hence, 80
log e 2
at
minutes correspond to 2 half lives.
T N No. of nuclei decayed of B ( NB )
60. t= log e 0
log e 2 N lic = N0 N
T N0 1
t1 = log e = N0 1
log e 2
N1 22
Taking ratio,
T N0
t2 = log e 15
log e 2
ub
N 2 N0
NA 16 5
T N1 NB 3 4
t2 t1 = log e N0
log e 2 N 2 4
For 40% decay, N1 = 60
P
t / T1/ 2
m 1
For 85% decay, N2 = 15 63.
m0 2
30 60
t2 t1 = log e Given: T1/2 = 12.5 years, t = 50 years
log e 2 15
et
50/12.5 4
m 1 1 1
30 =
= log e 4 m0 2 2 16
log e 2
64
= 30 2 = 60 min m= = 4 mg
rg
16
61. We know for radioactive decay, 64. Half life T = 10 days, t = 5 days
t N t 5 1
N = N0e (or) ln 0 = t n=
Ta
N T 10 2
For 20% decay N 1000X 1000X
1 N N = n0 1/ 2 = = 0.707 1000X
t= ln 0 2 2 2
N
= 707X
20 100 0.693
t= ln …. 65. Given:
0.693 20 T
20
T1/2 = 2.2 109 s and rate of disintegration,
t= ln (5) ….(i) 0.693 0.693
0.693 R = N = N ....
For 80% decay T1/ 2 T1/ 2
1 N 10 0.693
t = ln 0 10 = N
N 2.2 109
20 100 2.2 109 1010
t = ln N = = 3.17 1019
0.693 80 0.693
432
ns
= 0.5 loge 2
2.303 100
dN and t 2 log 32min
67. = –N 0.03465 33
dt
Hence time difference between points of time
Where, negative sign indicates that nuclei
io
disintegrate = t1 – t2 = 32 – 11.6
dN = 20.4 min 20 min.
Given: = –55.3 1011
dt
at
ln2
55.3 1011 = (7.9 10–10) N 73. Half-life = 6 min. =
N = 7 1021 ln2
l=
68. The number of nuclei decayed in 2 days is,
N2 = N0e–2/
lic 6
0.692
l=
Similarly, in 3 days, the number of nuclei 6
decayed will be,
at t = 0, 1024 particles per minute
N3 = N0e–3/
ub
t1/ 2 3 After 42 minute, 7 half-life is complete
where = ....(i) 1024
ln2 ln2 no. of particles =
Fractional Decay on third day 27
N 0e2/ N 0e 3/ No. of particle = 8
P
N 2 N3
= =
N0 N0 74. Rate disintegration, R = N0et
2 l n 2
0.693
= e 3
el n 2 ....[using (i)] =
et
2
T
= 2 3 21 = 0.63 – 0.5 = 0.13 0.693
R= N0 e0.693 t/T
T
1
69. By using N N 0e t and average life time t 0.693 0.693
rg
N0 e
4
N 1 e 1 R1 : R2 = e3(0.693) = 0.25 = 1 : 4
Disintegrated fraction 1 1 2
N0 e e
75. Let X have atomic number Z and mass number
N 01 N 02 A
70. N1 = , N2
(2) t / 20 (2) t /10 Z X Z 2 Y + 2 He
A A 4 4
N1 = N2 ….[Given]
t But A4
Z 2 Y A
Z Z + 2e i.e.,
40 160 2
2 t / 20 2 10 A4
Y A
(2) t / 20
(2) t /10
Z2 Z Z 1
0
e + 10 e
t t
2
t t
2
A = A 4 and Z Z
20 10 20 10 Since X and Z has same atomic number and
t different mass numbers, they are isotopes of
= 2 t = 40 s
20 each other.
433
ns
= 2 (4 7.06) (7 5.60)
= 56.48 39.2 13.6 4
10.2 = 13.6 –
n
2
17.3 MeV
n2 = 16
io
hc
78. E = n = 4
possible transition is n = 2 → n = 4
From energy level diagram,
For He+ ions in state n = 1,
at
hc hc
1 = = 13.6 4
[ E ( 2E)] E 10.2 = 13.6 × 4 –
n
2
hc hc
2 = (n)2 = 1.23
4E E
E 3 3
lic As n does not have integral value, there is no
possible transition from n = 1 of He+ ions.
1 1
2 3 82. E = E1 – E2
ub
13.6 13.6
1 1 1 E = 2
79. = R 2 2 1 2
n p 3
E = 13.6 = 10.2 eV
In this case, n = 1 and p = 4 4
P
c 15 h = 0 + eV0
E = h = h = hcR ….(i)
16 10.2 eV = 4.2 eV + eV0
According to Einstein mass-energy relation, eV0 = 6 eV
E = mc2
rg
….(ii)
83. For least energetic photon emitted in Lyman
From equations (i) and (ii),
series, E = E2 E1 = 10.2 eV
15
mc2 = hcR hc 6.63 1034 3 108
16 =
Ta
ns
mv 1 nh
87. Using r = and mv2 = eV0 mvrn =
qB 2 2
2meV0 nh
r = =
1 2m
V0 2rn =
eB B e mv
io
h
B2 r 2e But, de-Broglie wavelength =
V0 = = 0.8 eV mv
2m
2rn = n
For transition between 3 to 2,
at
Circumferenceof
1 1 13.6 5 No. of waves theorbit
E = 13.6 = = 1.88 eV contained =
4 9
36 wavelength
in the orbit
Work function = 1.88 eV 0.8 eV
= 1.08 eV
lic =
2rn
=n=2
1.1 eV
ub
Hints to Evaluation Test
A1 2 16
4
(3 108 ) 2
A0 1 1 m = 0.08 g
Since 0.90 milligram (= 0.90 103 g) mass is
2. K.E. of an electron revolving in nth orbit is,
et
Energy obtained per hour 4. Lyman series belongs to the ultraviolet region.
= 200 megawatt 1 hour
= (200 106 watt) (3600 s) 5. K.E. =
13.6
eV, P.E. =
2(13.6)
eV
= 72 1010 J n2 n2
Here only 10% of output is utilized. In order For Hydrogen, Z = 1
to obtain 72 1010 J of useful energy, the K.E = K.Ef K.Ei
output energy from the power house 1 1
(72 1010 ) 100 K.E. = 13.6 2 2
= (2) (1)
10
= – 10.2 eV (decrease)
= 72 1011 J
Let this energy be obtained from a mass-loss 1 1
P.E. = –2(13.6) 2 2
of m kg. Then (2) (1)
(m)c2 = 72 1011 = 20.4 eV (increase)
435
ns
N2 e = 2.2 MeV
2
N1 1 1
2 B.E. of two 1H = 2 2.2 = 4.4 MeV
2 ….[Given] B.E. of 2He4 nucleus = 4 7.1 = 28.4 MeV
N2 e e
Energy released when two 1H2 fuse to form
io
1 1
4
2He = 28.4 – 4.4 = 24 MeV
e 2 e 4 t
2 1 10. For Balmer series,
2 = 4t t=
at
4 2 1 1 1
RZ2 2 2
2 n
7. For Lyman series, nf = 1 and ni = 2 2
and Z = 2(He) 1 1 1 5RZ
RZ2 2 2 ....(i)
1
E = 13.6 Z2
1
lic
1
2 3
1
36
1 3RZ2
n2 n 2 RZ2 2 2 ....(ii)
i f
2 4 16
3
= –13.6 (2)2 = 13.6 3 Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i),
ub
4 3RZ2 36 27
Total available energy = 3 13.6 Joule
16 5RZ2 20
Ionization energy of Hydrogen = 13.6 eV
Now energy available to an electron after the N 1
t/T
P
1
mev2 = 2 13.6 eV 67 1
1 t /10
2
….(i)
2 2 13.6 1.6 1019 100 2
v2 = N 33
rg
v
f= n Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i) we get,
2rn t 2 t1
1 t 2 t1 /10
33 1
2.2 106 Z 10 1 1
vn = m/s
n 67 2 2
2
2.2 106 (1) t 2 t1
= = 1 or t2 – t1 = 10 min
2 10
= 1.1 106 ms–1 2r 2r
Now radius, 12. v= T=
T v
n2 1
rn = 0.53 10–10 = 4 0.53 10–10 m But r n2 and v
Z n
….[ n = 2] r n2
T n3
= 2.12 10–10 m v (1 / n)
436
ns
2
1 nh
(10.2)(1.6 10–19 J) = (1.0078)(1.66 10–27)u2 v= ….(i)
4 2mr
4 1
u = 6.25 10 ms The time taken for completing an orbit
2r 2r(2mr)
io
2r 2r T=
14. v= T= v nh
T v
e e ev 42 mr 2
Now, I = Or T = ….(ii)
at
T 2r 2r nh
Now, r = r0n2 ….[ r n2]
v
42 mr02 n 4 42 mr02 n 3
15. Sum of masses of deutron and lithium nuclei T=
before disintegration
= 2.0147 + 6.0169
lic nh h
106
Number of orbits completed in 106 s =
= 8.0316 amu T
Mass of particles 106 h
=
ub
= 2 4.0039 42 mr02 n 3
= 8.0078 amu 106 (6.63 1034 )
Difference of mass =
4(3.14)2 (9.1 1031 )(5.3 1011 )2 (2)3
= 8.0316 – 8.0078
= 8.22 108
P
= 0.0238 amu
Mass converted into energy 19. To ionize the H atom in ground state minimum
= 0.0238 931.3 MeV K.E. of photoelectron needed = 13.6 eV.
Energy given to each particle 0 = 1.9 eV
et
0.0238 931.3
= Minimum energy (or maximum wavelength)
2 incident = 13.6 + 1.9 16 eV
= 11.08 MeV 6.6 1034 3 108
rg
max =
0.693 0.693 16 1.6 1019
16. For C14, =
T1/ 2 5730 = 77.3 nm 77 nm
–4 –1
= 1.21 10 yr since A = 0.144 Bq and 20. E = mc2 = 1.5 (3 108)2 = 13.5 1016 J
Ta
A0 = 0.28 Bq
1 A0
Using, A = A0et or t = ln
A
1 0.28
t= ln
1.21 104 0.144
5500 years
17.
h3
h2 h1
437
16 Semiconductor Devices
Hints
P 240 103
Classical Thinking 6. I= = = 48 mA
V 5
ns
3. The output of a diode rectifier contains some VS VZ 30 10
AC component and hence it is a pulsating wave. 7. IS = = = 13.33 mA
RS 1.5 103
16. In lightly doped diodes, the necessary voltage is VO 10
IL = = = 5 mA
higher and avalanche breakdown is then the RL 2 103
io
chief process involved. IZ = IS – IL = 13.33 – 5 = 8.33 mA
19. Zener diode regulates above zener breakdown 8. Voltage across RL = 5 V
voltage.
at
VZ 5V
41. Current through load resistance, I= = 3 = 5 mA
RL 10
V 5
IL = L = = 0.01 A E Vz 3
RL 500
53.
lic
The arrow head in the transistor symbol always
9. I=
Rs
=
100
= 0.03 A
VZ 6
shows the direction of hole flow in the emitter IL = = = 0.006 A
region. RL 1000
ub
IZ = I IL = 0.03 0.006 = 0.024 A
56. When n-p-n transistor is used as an amplifier,
majority charge carrier electrons of n-type PZ = VzIz = 6 0.024 = 0.144 W
emitter move from emitter to base and then base 10. I(mA)
to collector. a
P
57. IE = IB + IC IC = IE – IB
Vz
71. The Boolean expression for ‘NOR’ gate is V(V)
d c b
Y = AB
et
e
If A = B = 0(Low), Y = 0 0 0 = 1 (High)
I(A)
72. If inputs are A and B, then output for NAND
When the reverse bias is greater than the Vz, it is
rg
gate is Y = A B
breakdown condition. In breakdown region,
If A = B = 1, Y = 1 1 = 1 = 0
(Vi > Vz) for a wide range of load; (RL), the
voltage across RL remains constant though the
Ta
ns
and base current. conducts.
20. Vb = IbRb 41. (i) 1 0 1 1
9 1
Rb = = 257 k 0
35×106
io
1
0 1
VBE 0.04 (ii) 0
21. ri = = = 1000 1
I B 40 106
1 0
at
22. Emitter-base junction is always forward-biased (iii) 1
0
and collector-base junction is reverse biased. 1
I C 3.96 A
= = 0.99 A
IE 4 Y AB
ub
B
24. In CE amplifier current gain, B
IC
=
IB A B A B AB AB A+B
IC = IB = 80 250 A 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
P
0.96 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
25. = = = 24 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0.96
1 1 0 0 0 1 1
0.8
et
26. = 0.8 = =4
(1 0.8) From above truth table,
I A B = A + B = A + B
= C IC = IB = 4 6 = 24 mA.
IB
rg
ns
collector current increases.
Potential difference across 200 Ω resistor, As, VCE = VCC ICRL, increase in collector
V200Ω = 9 – 5.6 = 3.4 V current causes decrease in collector voltage. This,
current across 200 Ω resistor, as collector is connected to positive terminal of
3.4
io
I200Ω = A = 17 mA VCC battery, makes collector less positive,
200 i.e., negative with respect to initial value.
Current through zener diode, Thus, during positive half cycle, unlike input
Iz = 17 – 7 = 10 mA. signal voltage, output signal voltage at collector
at
varies through a negative half cycle.
6. Current through the load resistance,
VZ 10 Similarly, it can be seen that, during negative
IL = = = 5 mA half cycle, unlike input signal voltage, output
2 103
Now,
RL
lic signal voltage at collector varies through a
positive half cycle.
IZ = Is IL = 5IL This shows, in a CE amplifier, input and output
IS = 6IL = 30 mA voltages are in opposite (180) phase.
ub
VS VZ 16 10
RS = = = 200
IS 30 103 Alternate method:
For a CE amplifier,
7. 5.6 V
100 input signal voltage Vi = IB RB
P
= 44 mA VCE,
10. The energy gap values for different colours are VCE = 0 – ICRL
different. [Since change in base current IB changes
Ta
(Eg)red < (Eg)yellow < (Eg)green < (Eg)blue. collector current, but not VCC]
Hence, their knee voltages are different VCE = (ac IB) RL
accordingly. Output voltage Vo = VCE
11. Base is thinnest layer in a transistor and has the Voltage gain of CE amplifier,
width of about 3-5 m. Thus, its thickness is of Vo I R R
the order of a micro meter. AV = = ac B L = ac L
Vin I B R B RB
12. npn
E Negative sign indicates that output voltage is out
C
of phase (180) with respect to input voltage.
440
ns
20. dc = = = 69 Current gain = =
IC
= 25
1 dc 1 (69 / 70) IB
21. IE = IB + IC But, IE = IC + IB
IE IB IE I I I
1 = C B = C + 1 = 25 + 1 = 26
io
IC IC IB IB IB
1 1 1 20
1 1 29. Here,
19 19
at
Collector current, IC = 25 mA
19
= 0.95 Base current, IB = 1 mA
20 As IE = IB + IC = (1 + 25) mA = 26 mA
IC IC 25
22. =
IE
= 0.95 ….[Given]
lic As =
IE 26
IC = 0.95 IE
30. Vi = IB RB
Now, IE = IC + IB 0.05 IE = IB
20
I 0.2 mA IB = = 40 10–6 A = 40 A
ub
IE = B = = 4 mA 500 103
0.05 0.05
VC = IC RC
23. = 45 20
Ic IC = = 5 10–3 A = 5 mA
= 45 4 103
P
Ib
IC 5 103
V = IcR = 125
IB 40 106
5 = Ic 1 103
Ic = 5 10–3 A
et
IC
31. = = 60 IC = 60 IB
I 5 103 IB
Ib = c = 0.111 10–3 A = 111 A
45 45 But IE = IB + IC IB = IE IC
rg
VBE 0.04
I C ri =
= IB 20 106
I B
ri = 2 103 = 2 k
IE = IC + IB
the A.C current gain is
IB = IE IC = 0.50 0.49 = 0.01 mA
IC 2mA 2 10 3
0.49 = = = = 100
= = 49 I B 20 A 20 106
0.01
IC 33. Given
25. Current gain for common emitter is, =
IB 0.5 = IC R
95% of I E 0.5
= IC =
5% of I E 800
95 IC = 0.625 mA
= = 19
5 IC + IB = IE
441
ns
VCE = 7.5 V IC =
VL
= 1 mA = 10–3 A
RL
VCE 2
34. IC = = 0.5 10–3 A = 0.5 mA ri = 192
R C 4 103
IC
io
I Current amplification = = = 0.96
= C IB
IB
103 1
3 IB =
IC 0.5 10
at
IB = 10–5 A = 10 A 0.96 960
50 V V 0.8
Also, AV = L L 960 = 4
Vin I B ri 192
35. Given,
Rin = RB = 1 k
lic AP =
I C2 R L
2
=
10 3 2
2
800
= 3.84
Rout = RC = 2 k I B ri 1
Vout = 4 V 192
960
= 100
ub
41. Reversible operation is carried out by inverter
We know,
gate. E.g., NOT gate. For Option (B), for input 1
AV = resistance gain output is 0 and for input 0 output is 1. Thus the
RC 2 k gate acts as NOT gate.
AV = = 100 = 200
RB 1k
P
= 200
Vin
A B Y
4
= 200 0 0 0
Vin
rg
0 1 0
4
Vin = = 20 mV 1 0 0
200 1 1 1
Ta
442
51. B
A A.B
B
ns
B Y = A B C
From figure,
C
Output Y = A B = A B = A + B
io
58.
A B (AB) C Y= A B C
A AB
0 0 0 0 1 A
1 1 1 1 0 B A B A B
at
B
52. A
A B C A+B Y = (A+B)C
1 0 1 1 1 B A B
0 1 0 1
lic
0
1 0 0 1 0 59. Y = AB A Y1 A
1 1 0 1 0
= AB
ub
53. Y Y1 Y2
=AB Y2 B
B
Y2
Shorted NAND Shorted NOR 60. From time graph it is clear that output remains
P
Both shorted NAND and NOR gates act as a high when any of the input is high. This is
NOT gate. represented by OR gate.
54. 61. These gates are called digital building blocks
et
A
Y = A B because by using various combinations of these
B
A B A B = A + B
gates (either NAND or NOR) we can compile all
other gates (like OR, AND, NOT, XOR).
rg
63. A B C A B C
Thus, given network is equivalent to NOR gate.
55. 64. 0
P(0)
A X(0)
Q(1)
Ta
A
A B = AB Z(0)
Y R(0) 0 1
Y(1)
S(1)
B
B
56.
65.
y = AB CD
A Y1 A A
A B
B Y B B
Y2 C C
y = AB CD
Y1 = AB, Y2 = A B D
C D
D
Y = Y1 Y2
443
ns
For Option (D) 1 1 0
y= 00 11 =0+1=1 This corresponds to NAND gate.
io
Hence answer is option (D).
70. For given circuit, LED will glow until the current
66. To get the output Y = 1 from the AND gate, through both A and B is zero.
both its inputs must be one. For this C = 1, and
at
Hence, for the condition in which either or both
for the OR gate, either A or B or both must A and B have high value (i.e., 1) the majority
be = 1. current flows through A and/or B and LED does
not glow.
67.
A D
lic We can write the truth table as,
C Y A B Y
ub
0 0 1
B E 0 1 0
1 0 0
A B C D = AC E = CB Y 1 1 0
P
0 0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 This corresponds to NOR gate.
et
1 0 1 0 1 1 V 3
1 1 0 1 1 0 72. E=
d 300 1010
68. V
= 108
rg
A AB m
B
Y = AB A B V
= 106
cm
Ta
444
ns
Changein collector current IC
2. =
Changein emitter current IE
0.94 IC = I E = 0.96 8 7.7 mA.
= = = 15.67
io
1 1 0.94 The base current,
I B I E IC = 8 7.7 = 0.3 mA
IC = (IB) = 15.67 0.5 = 7.83 mA
0.96
at
EV 83 1 11. A.C. current gain, 24.
3. I= = = A 1 1 0.96
R 60 12
Collector current,
V 3 1 Voltage drop across collector resistor
IL = Z = = A IC
RL 120 40
lic Load resistance
1 1 7 4V
IZ = I IL = = A = 8 103 A
12 40 120 500
IC
ub
4. The base in a transistor is made thin because Now,
IB
most of the holes coming from the emitter are
able to diffuse through the base region to the IC 8 103 A
Base current, IB = 0.33 mA.
collector retion. Hence, the assertion is true 24
but reason is false.
P
hc
12. E
IC R C 2 10 4 10
3 3
5. Voltage gain =
IB R B 10 106 400
hc
et
E
= 2000 6.63 1034 3 108
=
6. When A is V(0) or B is V(0) or both are 0, 0.74 1.6 1019
= 16.798 107
rg
8. P A and Q = B
Now Y = 1 both P and Q are 0
P = 0 A = 1 amd Q = 0 B = 1
445
MHT-CET 2020
14th October 2020
Hints
2 Given: MP = 3Me, RP = 3Re 10. Relation between kinetic energy (E) and angular
2GM e momentum (L):
(ve) =
ns
Re L2
E=
2mr 2
2GM P
vP = L2 = 2mEr2
RP
L = (2MEr2)1/2
io
vP MP × R e 3M e × R e
= = =1 ML2
ve R P× Me 3R e × M e 11. I=
3
vp = ve
at
MR 2
4 I1 =
an w = x, wng = y, gna = z 2
nw n n 2
= x, g = y, a = z
=
M L
…( L = 2R)
na nw ng
nw ng na
lic 2 2π
xyz = =1 ML2
na n w ng =
8π2
I ML2 8π 2
ub
5
1 = ×
λ I1 3 ML2
When light enters glass from vacuum, the
I 8π 2
=
refractive index () increases, hence wavelength I1 3
() decreases.
P
m1v12
7. I1 = M1R12 λL1R12 = (2R)R2 12. F1 =
r1
I2 = M 2 R 22 λL 2 R 22 = (2nR)(nR)2 m 2 v 22
et
F2 =
I1 1 r22
= 3
I2 n But F1 = F2 ....(Given)
1 1 mv 2
mv 2
= 2
rg
1 1 2
8 n3 r1 r2
n=2
m1 nv 2 3m v1
2 2
=
ML2 r1 r1/3
8. I1 = MK12
Ta
12 ….(Given: m2 = 3m = 3m1,
ML2 r1
I2 = MK12 v1 = nv2, r2 = )
3 3
K12 3
n2 = 3 3
K 22 12 n=3
K 12 1
13. Initial volume = Final volume
K 22 4
4 4
K1 1 1000 πr 3 πR 3
3 3
K2 2
10r = R ….(i)
2π 2×π Initial surface energy (E1) = 1000(4r2)T ….(ii)
9. ω= = 0.1 (in degrees per second)
T 60 60 Final surface energy (E2) = 4R2T ….(iii)
Dividing equation (ii) and (iii)
446
MHTCET - 14 Oct.2020
E2 4πR 2T R2 ΔW 1
= = 17. 1
E1 1000 4πr 2T 1000 r 2 ΔQ γ
1 7
10r
2
=1 …. γ diatomic
= ….[From (i)] 7 5
1000 r 2
5
100 r 2 1
= ΔW 2
1000 r 2 10 ….(i)
ΔQ 7
ns
ΔQ 7
Volume rate of fluid flowat hole B, ΔU 5
….(ii)
2 ΔQ 7
VB = ABvB = R 8gh
Since VA = VB From equations (i), (ii) and (iii)
io
Q : U : W = 7 : 5 : 2
L2 2gh πR 2 8gh
L2 = 2R2 1
18. n
at
L = 2π .R l
n12l1 n 22l2
4T
15. P1 = l1 n 22 4 16
2
r1
P2 =
4T
lic l2 n12 3 9
4 3 YA
πr1 3
V1 r 1 g YA
Now, = 3 = 1 n=
V2 4 3 r2 2π mgL
πr2
3
et
1 YA
1
3 =
= ….[From (i)] 2π mL
2 1
1 YA 2
= 1 =
rg
8 2π mL
M
= 11
3RT2
C2 = Time period, T =
2π
M
ω
C2 T2 2π 2 22 4
= = = =
C1 T1 11 11 7 7
C2 327 273 m v 0
=
21. F=
C1 27 273 t
C2
=
600 Ft = mv ….(i)
C1 300 1
But K.E. = mv2
C2 2
= 2
1 mv
2
C1 1 F2 t 2 F2 t 2
= = × =
2 m 2 m 2m
447
P T Dλ
22. Frequency of vibration of string, n = 26. Fringe width, air =
2l m d
Case I: 1.33 6300 1010
air =
Number of loops (P1) = Number of antinodes 1 103
=5 = 8.379 104 m
5 T1 β air 8.379 104
n1 = water = = 6.3 104 m
2l m μ water 1.33
5 qg
n1 = ….(i) 27. Imax = K(a1 + a2)2
2l m
But I1 = Ka12
Case II:
Number of loop (P2) = Number of antinodes = 3 I2 = Ka 22
2
3 T2 I1 I2
ns
2
n2 = Imax = K + = I1 I 2
2l m K K
3 Mg
n2 = ….(ii) 1
2l m 28. U= CV2
2
io
Dividing equation (i) and (ii),
1ε A
n1 5 9 = 0 (Ed)2
2 d
n2 3 M
1
at
Since n1 = n2 = 0 E2Ad
9 M = 25 9 2
M = 25 kg lic 29. C3 = 3C C2 = 2C C1 = C
2 =3 Ceq 3C 2C C 6
πr12ρ 2l2
2l1 πr22ρ
6C
l1 2 r2 Ceq =
11
l2 3 r1
et
l2 3 6
Charge on C2 11 CV 6 1 3
25. Fundamental frequency of an open pipe, = = × =
Charge on C4 4 CV 11 4 22
Ta
v
n= V
2L 30. When 200 is connected in series, i =
v 200 + G
L=
2n When 2000 is connected in series,
v v 3V
L1 = , L2 = i=
2n1 2n 2 2000+ G
When joined in series, L = L1 + L2 V 3V
=
v v v 200 + G 2000+ G
= +
2n 2n1 2n 2 2000 + G = 600 + 3G
1 1
1 2G = 1400
n n1 n 2 G = 700
n1n 2
n=
n1 n 2
448
MHTCET - 14 Oct.2020
E1 l1 l2 64 32 96 3 2m E W0
31. = = ….[From (i)]
E 2 l1 l2 64 32 32 1 eB
32. 10V h
39. p =
2m p E p
I 1 h
e =
2m e E e
200V 38
λp me
= ….(Ep = Ev)
Applying KVL in loop 1, λe mp
10 38I + 200 = 0 1
λp m 2
38 I = 190 = e
λ e m p
ns
I = 5A
35. Magnetic moment, e2
M = IA 41. K.E. =
8πε 0 r
e q e
A
io
= … I = = e 2
T T T P.E. =
4πε 0 r
1
=eA … ν = K.E. 1
T =
at
P.E. 2
M
New magnetic moment = 2M 42. Truth table of AND gate
Given: Mass = 2 103 kg,
36.
Magnetic moment = 8 107 A/m2
lic A
0
B
0
Y = AB
0
density = 4 103 kg/m3 0 1 0
Magnetic moment 1 0 0
Magnetization =
ub
Volume 1 1 1
Magnetic moment
=
mass/density FL
43. Y=
7
8 10 4 10 3 Al
=
P
2 103 FL
l=
= 16 101 AY
= 1.6 FL M M
l= …. ρ = =
et
37. M V AL
i Y
ρL
R
1
l
rg
M
r
l1 M 2
l2 M1
l1 4
Ta
Mutual inductance,
l2 3
πμ 0 N1N2r 2
M=
2R 44. Unit of ‘R’ =
r 2
Unit of ‘L’ = s
M
R Unit of L s
=s
Unit of R
38. Using Einstein’s photo electric equation,
L
K.Emax = E W0 ….(i) Dimension of = [L0M0T1]
K.E of electron is given by, R
e 2 B2 r 2
ˆi 2jˆ +2kˆ 2iˆ ˆj kˆ A ˆj
K.Emax = 45.
2m
2m K.E max A ˆj ˆi + 2jˆ 2kˆ + 2iˆ ˆj + kˆ
r=
e2B2
449
|A| = 12 22 12 6
ΔV
46. Strain =
V
stress
Bulk modulus, K =
strain
PV
K=
V
ΔV P
=
V K
ΔV Δρ
But
ns
V ρ + Δρ
Δρ P
=
ρ + Δρ K
K = P + P
io
Pρ
=
K P
at
2
l
47. P
λ
For linear antenna,
P 2
lic
48. According to dimensional analysis,
B
Dimension of = Dimension of
λ2
ub
Dimension of B
= Dimension of 2 = [L2M0T0]
….( Since is dimensionless)
Dimension of area = [L2M0T0]
P
R
Here Resultant = , P = R, Q = R
2
R
= R 2 + R 2 + 2R 2cosθ
2
rg
P2
= 2R2 + 2R2 cos
4
R2
2R2 cos = 2R2
Ta
4
7R 2
2R2 cos =
4
7
cos =
8
1 7
= cos
8
450